RECORD: Scoresby, William. 1820. An account of the Arctic regions, with a history and description of the northern whale-fishery. 2 vols. Edinburgh: Archibald Constable and Hurst, Robinson and Co.

REVISION HISTORY: Transcribed (single key) by AEL Data. RN1

NOTE: This work formed part of the Beagle library. The Beagle Library project has been generously supported by a Singapore Ministry of Education Academic Research Fund Tier 1 grant and Charles Darwin University and the Charles Darwin University Foundation, Northern Territory, Australia.


[frontispiece]

REPRESENTATION OF THE SHIP ESK or WHITBY, DAMAGED BY ICE AND ALMOST FULL OF WATER.

DURING AN ATTEMPT TO INVERT HER POSITION AND BRING THE KEEL TO THE SURFACE OF THE SEA FOR REPAIRING THE DAMAGE.

Edinburgh Published by. A. Constable & Co. 1820.

[page iii]

AN

ACCOUNT

OF THE

ARCTIC REGIONS,

WITH A

HISTORY AND DESCRIPTION

OF THE

NORTHERN WHALE-FISHERY.

BY

W. SCORESBY Jun. F.R.S.E.

ILLUSTRATED BY TWENTY-FOUR ENGRAVINGS.

IN TWO VOLUMES.

VOL. I.

EDINBURGH:

PRINTED FOR ARCHIBALD CONSTABLE AND CO. EDINBURGH:
AND HURST, RORINSON AND CO. CHEAPSIDE, LONDON.

1820.

[page iv]

P. Neill, Printer.

[page v]

TO

ROBERT JAMESON, ESQ.

PROFESSOR OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH,
PRESIDENT OF THE WERNERIAN SOCIETY,
&C. &C. &C.

AT WHOSE SUGGESTION THIS WORK WAS UNDERTAKEN,
AND TO WHOSE EARLY AND UNIFORM FRIENDSHIP THE AUTHOR
IS DEEPLY INDEBTED,

THESE VOLUMES

ARE RESPECTFULLY

INSCRIBED.

[page vi]

[page vii]

PREFACE.

THOUGH the Natural History of the Countries within the Arctic Circle, and the nature and practice of the Whale-Fishery, possess peculiar, and I may add almost universal, interest; yet it is remarkable that no original work, published in Britain, excepting a single Tract by Henry Elking, appears to have been devoted entirely to either subject. In this respect, notwithstanding our important and extensive annual adventures to the Seas of Greenland and Davis' Strait, we have been anticipated and our supineness tacitly reproved by several works that have appeared in other countries. Among foreign authors who have treated of the Regions of the North, or of the

[page] viii

Whale-Fishery, may be mentioned, La Martiniere, Pierre de Mezange, Boisgelin and Fortia, though these are writers, it should be observed, who cannot be altogether followed;—M. La Peyronie, and Bernard de Reste, who have given translations in French, not altogether accurate however, of works of some value;—and Torfæus, Otho Fabricius, Olafsen, Olaving, Egedé, Crantz, Zorgdrager, Eggers, Moriniere, and a few others, who have produced works of real merit.

The Accounts of Greenland by the faithful and enterprising Moravian Missionaries Hans Egedé and David Crantz, whose zeal and philanthropy carried them into one of the most uncomfortable and inhospitable regions of the globe, but particularly the latter, are works of peculiar fidelity and value; and the account of the Whale-Fishery given by Zorgdrager, though written considerably above a century ago, is, perhaps, on the whole, the best that has appeared in any language.

The works of Egedé and Crantz have been translated into English, and, with the article of Sir Charles Giesecké, in Dr Brewster's Encyclopædia, and some others, included in works

[page] ix

on miscellaneous literature or science, form the principal sources of information on the Natural History of Greenland, published in the English language. The tract by Henry Elking, already alluded to, entitled "A View of the Greenland Trade and Whale-Fishery, with the National and Private Advantages thereof," is, I believe, our only original work on this interesting subject.

A considerable quantity of miscellaneous information, however, relating to Aretic Countries and to the Whale-Fishery, is to be found interspersed through the Collections of Voyages, &c. by Hakluyt, Purchas, Churchill, Harris, Pickersgill, Goldson, Forster, Müller, Coxc, Pinkerton, Kcrr, Clarke, Barrow, Burney, &c.; in the translations of the Voyages or Narratives of Barentz, Martens, M. Le Roy, &c.; and in the original Voyages of Ellis, James, Fox, Ross, and others, into Baffin's or Hudson's Bay; of Cook into Behring's Strait; and of Phipps towards the North Pole.

The work now submitted to the Public is in a great measure original, being chiefly derived from researches carried on during seventeen voyages to

[page] x

the Spitzbergen or Greenland Whale-Fishery. It consists of two distinct parts, each occupying a volume. The first relates to the progress of Discovery in the Arctic Regions, and the Natural History of Spitzbergen and the Greenland Sea; the second is devoted to the Whale-Fishery as conducted in the Seas of Greenland and Davis' Strait.

Numerous authorities have been consulted in preparing these sheets for publication, and in all cases, as far as I am aware, a proper reference has been made to the works from which any information has been derived. For a small but interesting Mémoire by M. S. B. J. Noel, Sur l'Antiquité de la pêche de la Baleine, from which I have drawn some valuable historical information, I was indebted to the kindness of M. Noel de la Moriniere, author of an extensive work on Ancient and Modern Fisheries, now in the course of publication in France. Access to some valuable works which I had not in my own possession, and different acts of kindness or assistance were afforded me by the Right Honourable Sir Joseph Banks, Professor Jameson, P. Neill, Esq. Dr Traill, and my Father. By means of some va-

[page] xi

luable instruments, &c. furnished me by Sir Joseph Banks, whose friendly suggestions and encouragement I am happy to acknowledge, and whose kindness and liberality I shall ever remember with gratitude, I was enabled to make some experiments on sub-marine temperature, the result of which proved novel and interesting. These, with some facilities kindly given me by William Swainson, Esq. of Liverpool, the Reverend George Young, and Mr Thomas Parkin of Whitby, and occasional obligations from other friends, noticed in different parts of the work, constitute, I believe, the amount of the assistance which I have received in preparing the materials which occupy the following pages.

[page break]

[page] xiii

CONTENTS

OF

VOLUME FIRST.

ACCOUNT OF THE ARCTIC REGIONS,

&c. &c.

Page
CHAP. I.—REMARKS on the celebrated Question, of the existence of a Sea-communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, by the North; with an Account of the Progress of Discovery in the Northern Regions, 1
SECT. 1. General Remarks, indicating the existence ofa Sea-communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, by the North, ib.
2. Remarks on the supposed Communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, by the North-east, 12
3. Remarks on the supposed Communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, bythe North-west; with hints for conducting Discoveries in the Polar Regions, 16

[page] xiv

SECT. 4. Remarks on the opinion of a Sea-communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, by the North Pole, 40
5. Account of the Progress of Discovery in the North, 61
CHAP. II.—Descriptive Account of some of the Polar Countries, 92
SECT. 1. Account of Spitzbergen, and the Islands immediately adjacent, ib.
a. Spitzbergen, ib.
b. Moffen Island, 149
c. Low Island, 150
d. Hope Island, 151
e. Cherie Island, 152
2. Account of Jan Mayen Island, 154
CHAP. III.—Hydrographical Survey of the Greenland Sea, 170
SECT. 1. Situation and Extent, —Colour and degree of Transparency, —Quality, Specific Gravity, and Saltness of the Greenland Sea, ib.
2. Temperature, Depth, and Pressure of the Greenland Sea; with a Description of an Apparatus for bringing up Water from great depths; and an Account of Experiments made with it, 184
3. Remarks on the Currents of the Arctic Sea; with Observations respecting Waves, 203

[page] xv

CHAP. IV.—An Account of the Greenland or Polar Ice, 225
SECT. 1. A Description of the various kinds or denominations of Ice, ib.
2. On the Formation of Ice on the Sea, 238
3. Description of Ice-Fields, and Remarks on their Formation and tremendous Concussions, 241
4. Description of Ice-bergs, and Remarks on their Formation, 250
5. On the Situation or general Outline of the Polar Ice, 262
6. Changes which take place, with the Advance of the Season, in the situation of the Ice, in the Seas of Greenland and Davis' Strait, 270
7. Situation of the Ice in the Region visited by the Greenland Ships, with Observations on the Alterations which have occurred, during a series of Sixteen Years, 276
8. Remarks on the Properties, peculiar Movements, and Drifting of the Ice, 284
9. Effects of the Ice on the Atmosphere, and of the Ice and Sea on each other, 296
10. Remarks on the closest Approximations towards the Poles hitherto accomplished, under different Meridians, 306
11. Abstract of the preceding Observations on the Formation, Properties and Situation of the Polar Ice,. 318

[page] xvi

CHAP. V.—Observations on the Atmospherology of the Arctic Regions; particularly relating to Spitzbergen and the adjacent Greenland Sea, 323
SECT. 1. Remarks on the Climate of the Arctic Regions, and the effects of Cold, ib.
2. General Remarks on Meteorology, with an Investigation of the Mean Monthly, and Annual Temperature of the North Polar Regions, including some inferences on the constant tendency to Equalization of Temperature in the Atmosphere, 345
3. Remarks on the Pressure of the Atmosphere, with Observations on the Use of the Barometer in predicting the Weather. 370
4. Appearance, Colour, Transparency, Density, degree of Dryness, and state as to Electricity, of the Atmosphere, 377
5. Atmospheric Phenomena, dependent on Reflection and Refraction, 383
6. Observations on the Winds of the Polar Regions, with some Notices respecting Meteors not aqueous, 395
7. Aqueous Meteors, including Observations on Clouds, Rain, Hail, Snow, Frost-rime, Hoar-frost, and Fog, 419
CHAP. VI.—A Sketch of the Zoology of the Arctic Regions, 446
SECT. 1. A Description of Animals of the Cetaceous Kind, frequenting the Greenland Sea, 449
Balæna Mysticetus, or Common Whale, ib.
Balænoptera Gibbar, or Physalis, 478

[page] xvii

Balænoptera Rorqual, 482
——— Jubartes, 484
——— acuto-rostrata, 485
Monodon Monoceros, 486
Delphinus Deductor, 496
Delphinapterus Beluga, 500
SECT. 2. Some Account of the Quadrupeds inhabiting Spitzbergen, and the Icy Seas adjacent, 502
Trichecus Rosmarus, or Sea-horse, ib.
Phocæ, or Seals, 508
Canis Lagopus, or Arctic Fox, 517
Ursus, maritimus, or Polar Bear, ib.
Cervus Tarandus, or Rein-Deer, 526
3. Remarks on the Birds frequenting the Sea and Coast of Spitzbergen, 527
Anas Bernicla, ib.
—— mollissima, ib.
—— arctica, ib.
Alca Alle, 528
Procellaria Glacialis, ib.
Colymbus Grylle, 532
———Troile, ib.
———glacialis, 533
Sterna hirundo, ib.
Larus Rissa, 534
——parasiticus, ib.
——crepidatus, ib.
——eburneus, 535
——glaucus, ib.
Tringa hypoleucos, 537
Emberiza nivalis, ib.
Fringilla Linaria, ib.

b

[page] xviii

SECT. 4. A brief Account of Amphibia, Animalcules, &c. inhabiting the Spitzbergen Sea, 538
Class AMPHIBIA.
Squalus Borealis, ib.
Cyclopterus Liparis, 540
Class PISCES.
Gadus carbonarius, ib.
Mullus barbatus? 541
Class ARTICULATA.
Gammarus Arcticus, ib.
Cancer Pulex, 542
——— Boreas, ib.
——— Ampulla, ib.
——— Nugax, ib.
Larunda Ceti, 543
Class VERMES.
Ascaris, Echinorhynchus, Tænia, &c. ib.
Ascidia gelatinosa & rustica, ib.
Lernæa branchialis, ib.
Clio helicina, ib.
Clio Borealis, 544
Sepiæ, ib.
Medusæ, Animalcula, &c ib.

[page] xix

APPENDIX.

Page
No. I—Meteorological Tables, (1)
II.—Meteorological Results, - Fronting (48)
A. General Abstract of the foregoing Register, (ib.)
B. Table for determining the Mean Annual Temperature of latitude 78° N., and of the North Pole, (49)
C. Table for ascertaining the Mean Temperature of the month of April, lat. 78°. N. (50)
D. Table for ascertaining the Mean Temperature of the month of July, lat, 78°. N. (ib.)
E. Abstract of Thermometrical Observations made at the Apartments of the Royal Society, London, (51)
F. Abstract of Fifty Years Observations on the Temperature of Stockholm, (52)
G. Formulæ for Calculating the Mean Temperature of unobserved months, (53)
III. a.—Chronological enumeration of Voyages undertaken by the different Nations of the World, in search of a Northern Communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans; including such other Voyages as have been conducive to the advancement of Discovery in the North, (54)
b.—Notice respecting the Effect of the Sun's Rays, and the Decrease of Temperature onascending in the Atmosphere, (72)
IV.—Table of Latitudes and Longitudes of Capes, Bays, &c in Spitzbergen and Jan Mayen, derived chiefly from original Surveys, (73)

[page] xx

No. V.—Catalogue of Plants found in Spitzbergen, (75)
VI.—Notice respecting the Minerals of Spitzbergen, (76)
VII.—State of the Wind and Weather, from August to May, in the Island of Jan Mayen, as collected from the Journal of Seven Dutch Sailors, who wintered there in the year 1633—4, (78)
VIII.—Experiments for determining the Specific Gravity of Ice, (81)

[page 1]

ACCOUNT

OF THE

ARCTIC REGIONS,

&c.

CHAPTER I.

REMARKS ON THE CELEBRATED QUESTION OF THE EXISTENCE OF A SEA COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE ATLANTIC AND PACIFIC OCEANS, BY THE NORTH; WITH AN ACCOUNT OF THE PROGRESS OF DISCOVERY IN THE NORTHERN REGIONS.

SECT. I.

General Remarks indicating the Existence of a Sea Communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, by the North.

PERHAPS there is no question connected with geographical science, which has been so long in agitation, without being resolved, and so often revived with the most sanguine expectations of success, and then abandoned as hopeless,—as the

VOL. I. A

[page] 2

question of the existence of a navigable communication between the European and the Chinese seas, by the north. The first attempts to reach China by sea, were made by steering along the coast of Africa towards the south, and the next by proceeding from the European shore in a westerly direction. The former, which first proved successful, was accomplished by Vasquez de Gama, a Portugueze, in the year 1497-8; and the latter was undertaken by the renowned navigator Columbus, in 1492. The notion of steering to India by the north-west, as the shortest way, was suggested about the middle, or latter end of the fifteenth century, by John Vaz Costa Cortereal, who performed a voyage to Newfoundland, about the year 1463-4*; or, according to a more general opinion, by John Cabot, the father of the celebrated Sebastian Cabot, who attempted the navigation in 1497, and perhaps also in 1494-5†. The idea of a passage to India, by the North Pole, was suggested by Robert Thorne, merchant, of Bristol‡, as early as the year 1527; and the opinion of a passage by the northeast, was proposed soon afterwards.

The universal interest which has been attached to this question of a sea communication between

* Barrow's "Chronological History of Voyages into the Arctic Regions," p. 37.

† HARRIS'S Voyages, vol. ii. p. l91.

‡ Phipps' Voyage towards the North Pole, p 1.

[page] 3

the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, by the North, ever since it was first suggested about 330 or 350 years ago, is fully proved by the facts,—that the speculation has never but once been abandoned by the nations of Europe, for more than twenty-five years together,—and that there have been only three or four intervals of more than fifteen years, in which no expedition was sent out in search of one or other of the supposed passages, from the year 1500, down to the present time. And it is not a little surprising, that, after nearly a hundred different voyages have been undertaken, with the view of discovering the desired communication with the Indian Seas, all of which have failed, Britain should again revive and attempt the solution of this interesting problem.

It has been advanced as a maxim, that what we wish to be true, we readily believe;—a maxim which, however doubtful in general, has met with a full illustration in the northern voyages of discovery. A single trial is often sufficient for satisfying us as to the truth of a disputed point; but, in this instance, though nearly an hundred trials have been made, the problem is still considered as unresolved.

Several facts may be brought forward, on which arguments of no mean force may be founded, in support of the opinion of the existence of a sea communication by the north, between Europe and

A 2

[page] 4

China. Among these arguments, I shall only mention the nature of the currents and tides,—the fact of an amazing body of ice being yearly dissolved in the Greenland sea, above what is there generated,—the common occurrence of drift wood, and some of it worm-eaten, in most parts of the Polar seas,— the nature of the northern termination of the continents of Europe and Asia, as well as that of America, as far as yet ascertained, —and the facts of whales having passed from the Greenland sea to the Sea of Tartary, and from remote regions in the north, to the sea of Greenland; all of which circumstances I conceive to be in favour of the existence of such a communication.

1. The prevailing current in the Spitzbergen sea, flows, we are well assured, during nine months of the year, if not all the year round, from the north-east towards the south-west. The velocity of this current may be from 5 to 20 miles per day, varying in different situations, but is most considerable near the coast of Old Greenland*. The current, on the other hand, in the middle of Behring's Strait, as observed by Lieutenant Kotzebue, sets strongly to the north-east, with a velocity, as he thought, of two miles and a half an hour, which is greater,

* As the proofs of this current will be brought forward under the division of the Hydrography of the Polar Seas, it is needless in this place to enter into particulars.

[page] 5

however, by one-half, than the rate observed by Captain Cook*.

2. By the action of the south-westerly current, a vast quantity of ice is annually brought from the north and east, and conducted along the east shore of Old Greenland, as far as Cape Farewell, where such masses as still remain undissolved, are soon destroyed by the influence of the solar heat, and the force of the sea, to which they then become exposed from almost every quarter. This ice being entirely free from salt, and very compact, appears originally to have consisted of field ice, a kind which perhaps requires the action of frost for many years to bring it to the thickness which it assumes. The quantity of heavy ice, in surface, which is thus annually dissolved, may, at a rough calculation, be stated at about 20,000 square leagues, while the quantity annually generated in the regions accessible to the whalefishers, is probably not more than one-fourth of that area. As such, the ice, which is so inexhaustible, must require an immense surface of sea for its generation, perhaps the whole or greater part of the so-called "polar basin," the supply required for replacing what is dissolved in Behring's Strait, where the current sets towards the north, being probably of small moment. The current, in opposite parts of the northern hemisphere, being

* Barrow's Voyages into the Arctic Regions, p. 358.

[page] 6

thus found to follow the same line of direction, indicates a communication between the two, across the Poles; and the inexhaustible supply of ice, affording about 15,000 square leagues to be annually dissolved, above the quantity generated in the known parts of the Spitzbergen seas, supports the same conclusion.

3. The origin of the considerable quantity of drift wood, found in almost every part of the Greenland sea, is traced to some country beyond the Pole, and may be brought forward in aid of the opinion of the existence of a sea communication between the Atlantic and Pacific; which argument receives additional strength from the circumstance of some of the drift-wood being worm-eaten. This last fact, I first observed on the shores of the Island of Jan Mayen, where I landed in August 1817, and confirmed it by more particular observation, when at Spitzbergen the year following. Having no axe with me when I observed the worm-eaten wood, and having no means of bringing it away, I could not ascertain whether the holes observed in the timber, were the work of a Ptinus or a Pholas. In either case, however, as it is not known that these animals ever pierce wood in the arctic countries, it is presumed that the worm-eaten drift-wood is derived from a trans-polar region.

Numerous facts of this nature might be adduced, all of which support the same conclusion. In the

[page] 7

Danish settlement at Disco, is a mahogany table made out of a plank which was drifted thither by the current, and is now in the possession of the governor. A tree of logwood was also picked up not far from the same place. Another log of mahogany was picked up at sea by Admiral Lowenorn, in 1786, when on his voyage attempting the re-discovery of Old Greenland. This piece of wood, which was so large that they were obliged to saw it in two before they could get it on board, they found within sight of the coast of Greenland, in latitude 65° 11′, longitude 35° 8′ west of Paris. It was much perforated by worms, which circumstance the Admiral conceived might assist in giving it suffi cient buoyancy to swim in the water*.

These logs of wood, the produce of the Isthmus which connects North and South America, could only reach the places where they were severally found, by floating up the west coast of America, towards the north, through Behring's Strait, and so along the northern face of Asia or America, or across the Northern Pole. Had they come by the way of the Gulf of Mexico, they might have floated to the banks of Newfoundland, by the action of the Gulf Stream, and been carried from thence to any part of the western shore of Europe; but they could not possibly have passed northward from Newfound-

* Quarterly Review, No. 36. p. 445.

[page] 8

land into Davis' Straits, or to the east coast of Greenland, in direct opposition to a current which perpetually flows towards the south-west*.

4. The northern faces of the continents of Europe and Asia, as well as of that of America, so far as yet known, are such, as renders it difficult, even to imagine such a position for the unascertained regions, as to cut off the communication between the frozen sea, near the meridian of London, and that in the opposite part of the northern hemisphere, near Behring's Strait.

5. And, another argument which goes still farther to support the opinion of the existence of the communication in question, is the fact of whales which have been harpooned in the Greenland seas, having been found in the Pacific Ocean; and whales with stone lances sticking in their fat, (a kind of weapon used by no nation now known,) having been caught both in the sea of SpitZbergen, and in Davis' Strait. The following are some of the authorities for this fact, which, of all other arguments yet offered in favour of a trans-polar passage, seems to me to be the most satisfactory.

A Dutch East India captain, of the name of Jacob Cool, of Sardam, who had been several times at Greenland, and was of course well acquainted with the nature of the apparatus used in the whale-

* Quarterly Review, No. 36. p. 445.

[page] 9

fishery, was informed by the Fischal Zeeman of India, that in the sea of Tartary there was a whale taken, in the back of which was sticking a Dutch harpoon, marked with the letters W. B. This curious circumstance was communicated to Peter Jansz Vischer, probably a Greenland whaler, who discovered that the harpoon in question had belonged to William Bastiaanz, Admiral of the Dutch Greenland fleet, and had been struck into the whale in the Spitzbergen sea*.

Muller refers to a similar circumstance when recording the first discovery by sea, of the peninsula of Kamtchatka by the Russians, in the year 1716. The crew of the discovery vessel having wintered on the western coast of Kamtchatka, he informs us, that during their stay there, "the sea cast upon the shore a whale that had in its body a harpoon of European workmanship, marked with Roman letters†." Another account of the same nature, given by Hendrick Hamel, in his "Unfortunate Voyage of the yacht Sparwer, in the year 1653," and published in the "Recueil des Voyages," corroborates the testimony of Muller. Hamel, in his narrative of the loss of this vessel on the Island of Quelpaert, observes, that "in the sea to the north-east

* Beschryving der Walvisvangst, vol. ii. p. 38.

† MULLER's Voyages from Asia to America; Jeffrey's Translation, p. 42.

[page] 10

of Korea, they take every year a great number of whales, in some of which are found harpoons (or striking-irons) of the French and Dutch, who practise the whale-fishery at the extremities of Europe; whence we infer (he continues) that there is surely a passage between Korea and Japan, which communicates to the Strait of Waigatz*," separating Nova Zembla from the Continent of Europe.

Other circumstances can be adduced to the same effect. The master of the Volunteer whaler of Whitby, when near the coast of Spitzbergen, July 19. 1813, shewed me part of a lance which had been taken out of the fat of a whale killed by his crew a few weeks before. It was formed of a hard grey stone, of a flinty appearance, about three inches long, two broad, and two-tenths thick. Two holes were pierced in one end of it, by which, it appeared the stock or handle had been secured. It was completely embedded in the blubber, and the wound was quite healed. A small white scar on the skin of the whale, alone marked the place where the lance had entered. In the year 1812, the crew of a Hull fisher (the Aurora) met with a whale in the same region having a harpoon made of bone, sticking in its back; and a few years ago a lance of stone, somewhat like the one above mentioned, fixed to a piece of bone, forming a socket for the stock, was like-

* Quarterly Review, No. xxxv, p. 217.

[page] 11

wise found in a whale by the people of another Greenlandman of Hull: this stone-lance is now deposited in the interesting collection of natural rarities belonging to Mr Hornsea of Scarbrough*. To these facts we might add many of a similar kind, together with others of whales struck in Davis' Straits having been killed near Spitzbergen, and vice versa; but the above will be sufficient for affording a strong confirmation of the opinion, that a sea communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans by the North, does exist. For, with regard to the stone-lances and bone-harpoons found in the bodies of whales, it may be remarked, that as the Esquimaux of Davis' Straits and Hudson's Bay, have now, from their long intercourse with Europeans, become well supplied with weapons calculated for the capture of the whale made of iron, these instruments of stone and bone, so much inferior, must have been used by some other persons who have not yet had intercourse with the civilized world; but as they are precisely the kind of weapons which were in common use among the Esquimaux a century ago, it is probable that the instruments alluded to were struck by some tribe of the same nation, inhabiting the shores of the frozen ocean, on the northern face of the American Continent, yet unexplored. If so, these facts go

* Plate II. fig. 1. is a representation of this instrument.

[page] 12

far towards establishing the existence of a communication between the Spitzbergen sea and the Pacific Ocean.

SECT. II.

Remarks on the supposed Communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, by the NorthEast.

THE Russians, it appears, have at intervals discovered all the navigation between Archangel and the Strait of Behring, excepting a portion of about 200 miles, occupied by the eastern part of a noss or promontory lying between the rivers Khatanga and Piacina. The northern extremity of this noss, called Cape Ceverovostochnoi, appears to have been doubled by Lieutenant Prontschitscheff, in the year 1735 so that ice, and perhaps some small islands, seem in this place to form the great obstruction to the navigation. As far as can be well substantiated, the portion of the route between Archangel and Kamtchatka, which has been hitherto accomplished, was performed in the following manner.

Lieutenant Morovieff accomplished the navigation from Archangel towards the river Obe, as far as the latitude 72° 30′ on the west coast of the pe-

[page] 13

ninsula separating the Gulfs of Kama and Obe, in the years 1734–5. This navigation was continued in 1738 by Lieutenants Malgyin and Skurakoff, who doubled Cape Jalmal on this promontory, and sailed into the Gulf of Obe. Lieutenants Offzin and Iwan Koskeleff, the same year performed the route from the Obe to the Eniesi or Jenisei. And the pilot, Feodor Menin, sailed in the same summer from the Eniesi towards the Lena. He reached the latitude of 73° 15′, and when he came to the mouth of the Piacina, his progress was stopped by the ice; and finding the passage completely blocked up, he returned to the Eniesi. Thus the navigation from Archangel to the Piacina, a distance of 47 degrees of longitude towards the east, was completed. Lieutenant Prontschitscheff sailed in 1735 from Yakutsk down the Lena, then to the westward to the Olonee, where, owing to numerous interruptions from the ice, he found it necessary to winter. In the month of August of the following year, he passed the rivers Anabara and Khatanga, then penetrated the ice as far as latitude 77° 25′, and coasted along the western side of the most northerly promontory of the Samoieds' country towards the Piacina, alittle beyond the Bay of Taimourska, where he was stopped by an impenetrable barrier of ice*.

* COXE'S "Account of the Russian Discoveries between Asia and America," p. 308.—According to Muller, Prontschitscheff did not quite reach the Bay of Taimourska.

[page] 14

From near Taimourska, therefore, to near the Piacina, was not accomplished*. In the same summer, Lieutenant Lassenius sailed from the Lena eastward towards Kamtchatka, and wintered in the river Charaulack, lying between the Lena and the Jana, where, of 52 persons composing his crew, 46 died of the scurvy. Lieutenant Dmitri Laptieff, after an attempt which failed in 1736, was again sent from the Lena in 1739 towards the east. He wintered in the Indighirsa, where he lost his vessel, but prosecuted his voyage in another, the following spring, as far as the river Kovima, from whence he crossed the Isthmus of the Tchuktchi country to the river Anadir, communicating with the sea of Kamtchatka†. The navigation round the great promontory of the Tchuktchi, constituting the north-eastern termination of Asia, was accomplished by one of three vessels which sailed from the Kovima, in order to penetrate into the Eastern Ocean, on the 20th of June 1648. This expedition, indeed, is said to have originally consisted of seven kotches, four of which were never heard of after they sailed. One of the other three, which proceeded for some time in company, was wrecked

* Muller mentions, that in 1738 Lieutenant Chariton Laptieff was sent from Petersburgh, to take up the task assigned to Prontschitscheff, and to go through with it by sea or land; but it appears he also failed.—Translation, p. 19.

† Muller's Voyages,—Translation, p. 19, 20.

[page] 15

on the great promontory: the two remaining vessels were soon afterwards separated, and one of them, commanded by Simon Deshneff, a chief of the Cossacks, after being driven about by tempestuous winds until the month of October, was wrecked near the Olutora, lying on the east side of Kamtchatka, in the 60th degree of latitude, and the crew consisting of 25 persons, afterwards reached the Anadir*.

This brief account clearly proves, that if a sea communication between the Atlantic and Pacific by the north-east, really exists, it could never be practicable in one year. As, indeed, the Russians were five or six years in performing so much of the navigation as has been described, though they employed a number of different vessels in the undertaking, it is probable that the voyage could never be performed in one vessel, unless by mere accident, in less than eight or ten years. It is therefore clear, that the discovery of a "North-East Passage," could never be of any advantage to our commerce with China or India.

Though, however, the voyages undertaken in search of a north-east passage by the different nations of Europe, have amounted to about twelve, besides numerous partial attempts by the Russians, and though all of them have failed in their principal intention, yet they have not been wholly lost

* COXE'S Russion Discoveries, p. 313,–320.

[page] 16

to us; the Spitzbergen whale and seal fisheries, so valuable to the country, with the trade to Archangel, having arisen out of them.

SECT. III.

Remarks on the supposed Communication between the Atlantic and the Pacific Oceans, by the North-West; with Hints for conducting Discoveries in the Polar Regions.

The voyages of Davis in the years 1585, 6 and 7, of Hudson in 1610, and of Baffin in 1616, were the source of the greatest part of the discoveries which have been made in the countries situated to the northward and westward of the south point of Greenland. To these regions, consisting of what have been called Bays and Straits, the names of these celebrated navigators have been applied. All the voyages, indeed, since undertaken for discovery in the same quarter, amounting to nearly thirty, have done little more than confirm the researches of these three individuals, and show how little there was to be found, instead of discovering any thing of moment.

Though the secret design of some of these voyages, was the hope of finding gold or other treasures, or of making an advantageous traffic with the natives of any new country which might be found; yet the ostensible object of almost the whole, was

[page] 17

the discovery of a shorter passage to India than that by the Cape of Good Hope, by the north-west. But, notwithstanding the number of expeditions which have been fitted out, the existence of a "north-west passage," is not yet either proved or refuted; and though much has been done towards the decision of this question, yet so long as any corner of Hudson's Bay or Baffin's Bay remains unexplored, the question must rest in uncertainty.

A great number of papers, and some volumes, have been written at different periods, to prove the existence of a north-west passage, some of which certainly possess very considerable merit*. The arguments on this subject, given by Henry Ellis, in his account of "A voyage to Hudson's Bay," are, I think, as satisfactory as any I have yet met with. He infers, that such a passage, extending from the northern part of Hudson's Bay, does exist, from the following considerations: From the want of trees on the west side of Hudson's Bay, beyond a certain latitude, —from the appearance of a certain ridge of mountains lying near the same coast, and extending in a direction parallel to it, —from the direct testimony of the Indians, which tends to prove, that

VOL. I. B

* Besides the papers published by Purchas, Hackluyt, Churchill, and those included in the published voyages of the navigators who have embarked in the discovery, we have works by Pickersgill, Goldson, and others, written exclusively on the subject.

[page] 18

they have seen the sea beyond the mountains, and have observed vessels navigating therein; and, most particularly, from the nature and peculiarities observed in the tides. This latter argument is by far the most conclusive, and as such will alone be considered here. Ellis sets out with the general principles, that in inland seas, having but small outlets, there is little or no tide; that in such places, what tide there is rises highest in the inlet, where the sea is narrowest, and becomes less and less considerable, in proportion as the sea expands within; that the highest tides in such situations, are occasioned by winds blowing into the inland sea, in the direction of its strait communicating with the main ocean, or in the direction of the course of the tide on the exterior coast; and that the time of high-water is soonest at places near the entrance of the inland sea, and progressively later in other situations, according to their distance from the strait through which the tide flows. These facts, in the very small degree in which they arc observed, he derives from observations on the winds and tides in the Baltic, Mediterranean, and other inland seas. From the application of these principles, Ellis proceeds to shew, that every circumstance with regard to the tides in Hudson's Bay, is different from what would take place in an inland sea; and then concludes, that Hudson's Bay is not such a sea, but has some opening

[page] 19

which communicates with the frozen ocean on the north-west. Just within the entrance of Hudson's Strait, at Cary-Swan's-Nest, the tide was found by Captain Fox to rise but six feet; whereas, on the west side of the bay, where, from the great expansion of the waters, the tide, according to theory, ought to have been scarcely perceptible, it rises in different places ten, thirteen and seventeen feet. The flood-tide on the west side of Hudson's Bay flows towards the south; and the time of high-water is soonest the farthest towards the north; both of which circumstances, supposing Hudson's Bay to be an inland sea, with only one entrance from the east, should, Ellis conceives, according to the doctrines of tides, have been just the contrary. And, lastly, the highest tides on both sides of Hudson's Bay, are produced by north and north-west winds; whereas, were it an inland sea, it is clear, that east or south-east winds, blowing directly through the strait, or in the direction of the flood-tide without, would produce the highest tides. Hence he concludes, that the tide of flood flows into Hudson's Bay, through some other entrance than that called Hudson's Strait; not from Baffin's Bay either, because the tide is there inconsiderable; but from the north-west, or from the icy sea*, by which conclu-

B 2

* It is not at all reasonable to suppose, that the considerable tides observed in Hudson's Bay should be occasioned by the flood flowing through some strait communicating with Baffin's Bay, where the tide is so much less, unless this bay be connected with the Frozen Ocean; as the tides, in penetrating an extensive sea, and pursuing a long circular course, must evidently be diminished, rather than increased.

[page] 20

sion all the difficulties with regard to the tides are easily solved. How far Ellis may be correct, will, perhaps, be soon determined.

Other arguments which have been offered in favour of the separation of Greenland from America, are deduced from the existence of a current setting from the north, —from the circumstance of ice-bergs and drift wood being brought down by the current, —from whales wounded in the Spitzbergen seas having been caught in Davis' Strait, —from the position of the land, as represented on skins by the native American Indians, and from the occurrence of certain plants in Greenland, which are natives of Europe, but have never been found on any part of the American continent*.

As, however, it would take up too much of this work to enlarge on, or even to enumerate all the arguments founded on the nature of the tides, currents, ice, winds, country, &c. which have been brought forward to prove the existence of a northwest passage, I shall proceed to make a few general remarks on the probable advantages of such a discov-

* Quarterly Review, N0 xxxvi. p. 489

[page] 21

ery, and to offer a few hints for conducting discoveries in these frozen regions.

I conceive the opinion to be quite incorrect, that if a passage were discovered, it would, probably, be open above half the year; for, supposing there really be a sea communication, near the parallel of 70°, between the southern part of Baffin's Bay, or the northern part of Hudson's Bay and Behring's Strait, it would not only, I believe, (judging from the known situations occupied by the ice, and the known coldness of these regions,) not be open above half the year, but, I imagine, it would be at intervals only of years that it would be open at all; and then, perhaps, for not longer than eight or ten weeks in a season. Hence, as affording a navigation to the Pacific Ocean, the discovery of a north-west passage could be of no service; for no one would have encouragement to attempt a passage, if the chance of succeeding were so small, for the sake only of the possibility of gaining a few months in an India voyage, when it could always be accomplished in the old way with so much more certainty. Nevertheless, the expectation of improving our geographical knowledge, and the possibility of discovering something which might lead to an extension of our commerce, as well as the prospect of discovering more of the nature of several physical phenomena, which are more observable in high latitudes than in any other part of the globe, and of extending our knowledge in the several

[page] 22

branches of natural history, relating to polar countries; these, together with the popular feeling of curiosity, peculiarly attached to every thing connected with those remote and dangerous regions, are of themselves sufficient to render the examination of those interesting countries, an object worthy of the attention of a great nation.

The advantages that have already arisen to Britain, from the voyages hitherto undertaken in search of a north-west passage, are the establishment of the Davis' Straits whale-fishery, and of the trade of the Hudson's Bay Company; so that the expence incurred, though it has certainly been great and often fruitless, has not altogether been lost to the nation.

The adventurous spirit manifested by our early navigators, in performing such hazardous voyages in small barks, in which we should be scrupulous of trusting ourselves across the German Ocean, is calculated to strike us with surprise and admiration; while the correctness of the investigations resulting from their laborious exertions, notwithstanding the many disadvantages under which they were conducted, gives us a high opinion of their perseverance and talents. These two remarks are easily illustrated. The famous voyage of Baffin, in which the bay bearing his name was discovered, was performed in a vessel of only 55 tons burden; that of Hudson, in which, also, the bay called by his name was first

[page] 23

navigated, in the very same vessel; and the voyages of Davis, chiefly in vessels of 50, 35, and 10 tons burden. The recent voyage of Captain Ross into Baffin's Bay, has done a degree of credit to the memory of Baffin, by substantiating his accuracy and faithfulness which were begun to be disputed, and by showing them to be greater in extent than his most sanguine advocates could have expected.

Another observation which must be made by every reader of the voyages of our old navigators, and which must be particularly gratifying to those who consider religion as the chief business of this life, is the strain of piety and dependence on Divine Providence, which runs through almost every narrative. Their honest and laudable acknowledgments of a particular interference of the Almighty, in working out deliverance for them in times of difficulty and danger; and their frequent declarations, expressive of their reliance upon Providence, for assistance and protection in their adventurous undertakings, are worthy of our imitation. Thus, while our modern voyagers are much in the habit of attributing their most remarkable deliverances to "luck," "chance" and "fortune," those of old evidenced certainly a more Christian-like feeling under such circumstances, by referring their deliverances to that Great Being from whom alone every good thing must be derived. They only who have a similar dependence on Providence, and who have been occasionally in try-

[page] 24

ing situations, can duly appreciate the confidence and comfort which this belief is calculated to afford under the most appalling circumstances.

The class of vessels best adapted for discovery in the Polar Seas, seems to be that of 100 to 200 tons burden. All the great discoveries which have been made in the neighbourhood of Greenland, have been effected, it may be observed, in a description of vessels still smaller; which kind of ships, in some respects, possesses a material advantage over that of larger dimensions. They are stronger, more easily managed, in less danger of being stove or crushed by ice, and are less expensive. Eut of these advantages of a small vessel, the most important is its greater comparative strength; as ships become weaker, it can easily be shown, as they increase in magnitude. A small sloop, carelessly and unscientifically built, can lie aground with a full lading of heavy goods on board, on a very uneven surface, and yet sustain little or no injury; nay, loaded sloops, which have been driven on shore upon a sandy beach, in a storm, accompanied with a heavy sea, have sometimes been launched or floated off without having sustained any material damage; whereas a frigate or a line-of-battle ship, though built of the strongest materials, and in the most scientific manner, if laid aground in the very best situation, and under the most favourable circumstances, is of-

[page] 25

ten ruined. The fact is, that the materials of which the largest vessels are built, are only of the same strength as those used in the construction of the smallest, while the timbers and planks in a line-of-battle ship, when compared with those of a small vessel, are by no means of a thickness proportionate to its tonnage. Hence a large vessel, however firmly built, can never possess the same comparative strength as a small one. Besides, the momentum of a large heavy vessel striking a rock, a mass of ice, or other similar body with a given velocity, is so much greater than that of a small ship, that the difference of the shock is vastly greater than the difference of the strength of the two. Thus, we will suppose, the weight of two vessels with their ballast and stores, one of 400 tons and another of 100 tons burden, to be proportionate to their tonnage, and that they both strike an immoveable mass of ice with the same velocity, say, six miles per hour. Then the momentum of the former will be represented by the number 24, and of the latter by 6, or as four to one, being in the same relation as their tonnage. But the comparative difference of strength of the two, we know, will probably be not greater than as two to one; consequently, the capability of the smaller vessel for resisting the concussion, will be twice as great as that of the larger; or, in other words, the vessel of 100 tons burden, would bear a blow impinged with a velocity of eight miles per hour, as well as the larger

[page] 26

one would bear a stroke given under half that velocity. With regard to pressure between two sheets of ice, it is clear, that a large vessel would have an advantage over a small one, were it not that a small vessel, if of a proper construction, often rises, when squeezed, several feet above her usual floating-mark, while a large heavy ship, under the same circumstances, remains nearly fixed, and is, consequently, much more compressed.

In the perilous and remarkably disastrous voyage performed by Captain James, in the years 1631 and 1632, when he wintered in Hudson's Bay, the smallness of his vessel affording an extraordinary degree of strength, compared with a larger vessel, was the means of saving himself and his crew under a variety of dangers. This vessel, of only 70 tons burden, endured six or seven such beatings against rocks and ice, as would doubtless have occasioned the destruction of almost any vessel of such a size as was lately employed for discovery in the Polar regions*. Captain James's little vessel, besides enduring its full share of heavy storms and high seas, both under sail in the main ocean, and at anchor in shallow water; besides beating and driving about among ice for twenty days together, and lying all winter, full of water, on an uneven and

* The four vessels equipped for discovery in the year 1818, were from 250 to 380 tons burden.

[page] 27

stony beach, —was two or three times exposed to a dreadful beating from ice, agitated by a heavy sea, and was four times on shore upon rocks, during strong winds or considerable swells, in one of which instances, she was left by the tide hanging on the point of a sharp rock, so that the greatest apprehension was excited that she would upset; yet, after passing through all this uncommon series of dangers, the little bark took home its crew in safety*.

Hence, it is evident, that a vessel intended for discovery in the Polar Seas, should be just large enough for conveying the requisite stores and provisions, and for affording comfortable accommodation to the navigators, but no larger. Perhaps a vessel of about 150 tons burden, would be fully sufficient to answer every purpose.

The numerous disasters to which Captain James was exposed, are to be attributed to his total ignorance of the nature of the ice, and of the countries which he explored; and to his having refused, on his outset, to take along with him any persons, who, in these respects, were better informed than himself. But he soon had occasion to regret his want of practical knowledge of these peculiar regions, his deficiency in which led him into numerous difficulties. His

* Captain James's voyage is included in Churchill's "Collection of Voyages;" in Clarke's "Naufragia," &c The original edition was published by the command of King Charles I. in 1633.

[page] 28

first mistake, was to get entangled among the ice lying about Cape Farewell, where he had nearly lost his vessel; and his subsequent errors were also productive of many distresses. It is strange, that any one should have imagined, that unacquaintance with the country intended to he explored, could be of advantage to the voyager. The navigation of the Polar seas, which is peculiar, requires in a particular manner, an extensive knowledge of the nature, properties, and usual motions of the ice; and it can only be performed to the best advantage, by those who have had long experience in working a ship in icy situations. It may be remarked, in support of this assertion, that all the great discoveries to the north and west of Greenland, have been made by persons well acquainted with the navigation of the arctic seas. Baffin, when he discovered the bay bearing his name, and boldly traversed it with only one small bark, had been employed on three several voyages of discovery before, as well as on one or more voyages to the Spitzbergen whale-fishery. Davis and Hudson also had each had experience in the navigation of these seas, before they made discoveries of any consequence; Hudson, we know, having been three voyages on discovery, and Davis two, before they found the straits and bay which are still called by their names*.

* Want of experience in the navigation of icy seas, is the only objection to Officers of the Royal Navy having the direction of expeditions intended for discovery in the arctic regions. No one has a higher opinion of the nautical skill and bravery of our naval commanders than I have, (having myself served some time in the Navy, and witnessed their talents,) —yet I cannot yield the palm to them for that description of talent requisite for performing to the best advantage the navigation among ice. No officer, I believe, would expect to equal the river pilots, or the masters of the Gravesend boats, in working their little vessels up or down the Thames; —for no judgment, however profound, —no talent, however acute, could supersede the necessity of practice for performing this navigation with the beauty and correctness with which it is accomplished by these practised pilots and boatmen.

[page] 29

It might be a material assistance to those employed in completing the examination of Baffin's Bay, as well as productive of some interesting information in meteorological phenomena, were a vessel or two to remain in the northern part of this bay during the winter. Vessels having to penetrate the ice from the main sea in the usual way, cannot probably obtain a passage into the Bay before the middle or end of the month of July, when the season is so far advanced, that if the navigators intend to return, they can only calculate upon an interval of six or eight weeks, before it will be prudent for them to make their escape out of the Bay. But by wintering in the northern part of the Bay, there is little doubt but that the vessel would be released by the ice as early as May or June, and thus be afforded about double the time for research that could be obtained by wintering out of the Bay; at

[page] 30

least, such we know would be the case in other similar parts of the Polar countries. In Hudson's Bay, for instance, the ice clears away from the northern shore long before the southern part is at all accessible*; and at Spitzbergen, though the sea should be so encumbered with ice as to prevent our approaching its coasts beyond the 76th degree of latitude until the end of May or beginning of June, yet near the western and northern parts of the shore, there is usually a navigable sea much earlier. There would not, I imagine, be any very great danger in making this experiment, provided a sufficient quantity of fresh provisions for the prevention of the scurvy among the crew were taken out†, and certain precautions for the preservation of the ships adopted. An ingenious apparatus now in use at Leith, invented by Mr Thomas Morton, shipbuilder, and for which he has recently taken out a patent, might, I think, be made use of to advantage by any vessel proceeding to distant regions on discovery. A trifling damage sustained by a ship employed in such a voyage, is often sufficient for putting a stop to any further research; but the use

* See Ellis's Voyage to Hudson's Bay, p. 321.

† Fresh provisions certainly form one of the best preventives of the scurvy, and may be taken out in any quantity to the polar countries, Without any preparation whatever; the action of the cold to which they soon become exposed, preventing putrefaction.

[page] 31

of Mr Morton's apparatus would afford the means of repairing every ordinary damage in almost any country. The contrivance consists of a simple frame of wood, adapted for supporting a vessel in an upright position, traversing on a kind of rail-way, fixed on an inclined plane at the margin of a river or the sea, and extending from above the reach of the tide down to the low-water mark. This frame being launched into the sea, as far as the lower end of the rail-way, receives the vessel upon it at highwater, when, by the use of blocks or chocks of wood placed on the sides of the frame, moveable by means of ropes towards the centre, the vessel is supported in an upright position, and then, by the application of a mechanical purchase, consisting of a combination of wheels and axles, constituting a powerful winch, the frame and the contained vessel are drawn up together on dry land. With this apparatus, a vessel of 200 to 300 tons burden, might be taken, by 12 or 18 men, entirely beyond the reach of the tide in the course of about an hour*. The advantage of such an apparatus in a vessel bound to the

* The intention of Mr Morton's invention is to supersede the necessity of dry docks, over which it possesses several advantages. An apparatus calculated for taking up a vessel of 300 tons burden, can be built for the sum of 500l. or 600l; and, when once fixed, vessels can be taken up for an expence of 25s. to 30s.; whereas the common charge for putting a ship into a graving-dock, is, in some places, as high as 10l.

[page] 32

Polar regions on discovery, might be very great, provided, in the place where there should prove a necessity for using it, the rise of tide should be sufficient for admitting its application, and the beach should be of a sloping nature. It could be prepared in short pieces, so as to be fitted together with screws; and though intended for sustaining the weight of a ship, would be by no means very cumbrous. Indeed, any vessel of 200 tons burden or upward, might easily carry it out in her hold, without materially, if at all, interfering with the room requisite for her stores. Thus a vessel having occasion to winter in Baffin's Bay or Davis' Strait, would require only the adjustment of the frame and ways, which three or four skilful mechanics might effect in a few days, before she could be hauled up on dry land, quite beyond the reach of either ice or tides, where she would constitute as comfortable a dwelling as could be expected in such a country. The apparatus could even be applied where there was not a fall of tide equal to the depth of water drawn by the vessel, by the use of a small cofferdam, sufficient only to stop out the tide at lowwater, until the rail-way should be adjusted so far down that at high-water the vessel could float upon the frame while resting on the rail-way. Then the force of the ship's company would be amply sufficient for drawing the vessel up on land.

In seas perpetually encumbered with ice, and probably crowded with islands, if not divided by

[page] 33

necks of land, the chance of great discoveries and of extensive navigations toward the north-west, even under the best arrangements, and under the boldest seamen, is but small. The most certain method of ascertaining the existence of a communication between the Atlantic and Pacific, along the northern face of America, would doubtless be by journeys on land. Men there are, who, being long used to travel upon snow in the service of the Hudson's Bay Company, would readily undertake the journey from the interior lakes of North America to the Frozen Ocean, or, in case of a continuity of land being found, to the very Pole itself; of whose success we should certainly have a reasonable ground of hope. The practicability of this mode of making discoveries has been fully proved by the journeys of Mackenzie and Hearne; and the possibility of performing very long journeys on snow, can be attested, from personal experience, by any persons who have wintered a few times in Hudson's Bay. The mode of travelling in these northern countries, is peculiar. A long journey can best be performed when the ground is covered with snow. In this case, each traveller is provided with a pair of snowshoes, and a sledge of eight to twelve feet in length, and one foot in breadth, on which, all the apparatus and provisions requisite for the journey, are drawn by hand. Sometimes dogs are used to assist in drawing the sledges; but as the travellers are

VOL. I. C

[page] 34

apt to fall short of provision for them, they cannot place absolute dependance on their continued help. Without the use of dogs, a strong experienced traveller can perform, on an average, about twenty miles a-day, dragging after him 100 to 150 pounds weight of articles upon his sledge. When the surface of the snow is frozen and firm, he can occasionally accomplish forty miles in a day, but this requires an effort too laborious to be continued for many days together. The best opportunity for passing these almost desert countries, is when the ground is covered with snow; the best time of the year, perhaps in the spring months; and the most favourable hour, from one or two in the morning until sun-rise. After sun-rise, the surface of the snow is apt to become soft, on which the further progress of the traveller is suspended; he then rests until the evening, or until the following morning, when the snow having become encrusted with ice, he advances with ease and celerity. If he finds himself much pinched with cold when he rests, he sets out and walks until the proper heat of his body is restored, then refreshing himself with a little nourishment, composes himself to sleep. He must bivouac on the snow. Here, without shelter from hut or tent, he rests, if not as comfortably, at least as contentedly, as those accustomed to more refinement can, in their well-arranged couches. He usually hollows out a place in the snow to sleep in, and

[page] 35

on the windward side places his sledges on their edges for a defence against the wind; then laying down a few twigs of bushes or trees, when he can meet with them, in place of a bed, he wraps himself in his blanket, covers himself with his upper garments, which he makes a practice of throwing off when he rests, and enjoys his repose. The principal articles provided by the experienced traveller for his subsistence, consist of tea, oatmeal, bacon, bread, and sometimes a few fish or fowls, but no spirits; and whenever he finds it necessary to use artificial stimuli for accelerating the circulation of the blood, and promoting the heat of the system, instead of resorting to spiritous liquors, knowing them to be injurious, he drinks freely of warm tea, which the plentifulness of wood for fire in the interior of North America, generally affords him a ready opportunity of preparing. His relish, with his tea, consists of a bit of broiled bacon, and perhaps a little oatmeal porridge; which articles, when other supplies of fowl, fish or quadruped, foil, being effectual for his nourishment, he lives on with contentment. With these measures and resources, travelling usually in the night or morning, and bivouacking on the snow; subsisting, when necessary, on the scanty provision taken out with him, but always depending on occasional supplies of birds, fishes and quadrupeds, which seldom wholly desert these countries; and

C 2

[page] 36

directing his route by the compass, with the assistance generally of Indian guides, he performs journeys of 1000 or 1500 miles in the course of two or three months. The ptarmigans or willow-partridges, which are generally plentiful in winter near Hudson's Bay; the musk-oxen, the wild buffaloes, the rein-deer, and the hares, which are found in certain situations throughout the northern parts of America, even to the Frozen Ocean, together with the quantity of fishes which occur in almost every river and lake, afford a tolerably regular supply of provisions*.

* The willow-partridges are caught in a very simple way. They are attracted by an artificial surface of gravel spread on a hillock of snow, on sight of which, these birds requiring this article for assisting digestion in the winter time, when they feed on the tops of the willows, descend in large flocks upon it with precipitation: A net extended by poles is erected near the edge of the surface of gravel, and a string connected with the props by which it is supported, is held by a person on watch in any neighbouring cover, who, on observing a sufficient number of birds on the gravel, pulls away the supports of the net, so that it falls upon them, and often entangles above fifty at a haul. In this way 200 or 300 birds have frequently been taken in a winter's morning. Hares are commonly taken with snares, sometimes to the amount of forty or fifty in a night; —the oxen, buffaloes and deer are hunted or shot; —and fishes are caught with nets extended beneath a surface of ice in a lake or across a river, or taken by a baited hook introduced into a small hole made in the ice which, to be effectual, is kept in continual motion.

[page] 37

The plan of performing a journey in this way, for discovering the northern termination of the American Continent, and for tracing it round to its junction with the coasts of the same country washed by the Atlantic, might be in some measure as follows. The party intended for this expedition, which should consist of as few individuals as possible, ought, perhaps, in the course of one summer, to make their way to one of the interior settlements of the Hudson's Bay Company, or of the Canadian traders, such as Slave Fort, on the Great Slave Lake, situated in the 62d degree of latitude, or Fort Chepewyan, near the Athapescow Lake, in latitude 58° 40′, from whence Sir Alexander Mackenzie embarked on his voyage to the Frozen Ocean; and there abide during the first winter. Supposing the travellers to winter at Slave Fort, they might calculate on being within the distance of 200 leagues, or thirty or forty days journey, moderate travelling, of the Frozen Ocean*. In the month of March

* Mackenzie performed his voyage from the western angle of the Great Slave Lake to the island in latitude 69° l4′, which formed the termination of his navigation towards the north, in fourteen days. Here, if not actually in the frozen ocean, he was evidently very near it, and in a sea communicating with it, of which we have full proof, from his having observed traces of Esquimaux, fragments of whalebone, boats covered with skins, and most particularly from the circumstance of his having seen several white-whales, (Balæna albicans,) animals which, though common in the rivers of Hudson's Bay, are never seen far from the sea.

[page] 38

or April, the party consisting of two or three Europeans, one or two Esquimaux interpreters, and two or more Indian guides, provided with every thing requisite for the undertaking, might set out towards the north. The bad effects to he apprehended from the enmity known to exist between the Indian and Esquimaux, would probably be prevented, by having persons of each nation along with them; indeed, that enmity, which was a few years ago so implacable, and of which such a horrid instance was witnessed by Hearne in the year 1771, is now, happily, considerably assuaged*.

On the arrival of the travellers among the Esquimaux, their Indian guides, from fear of this nation, would probably desert them, but the presence of their Esquimaux interpreters would secure them a good reception. When once they should meet with these people, they would have a strong evidence of their being near the sea, as it is well

* Between the Indians and the Esquimaux a mortal enmity used to exist. An Indian who was unfortunate in losing his friends, or in suffering any other particular calamity, was in the habit of superstitiously attributing it to the agencies or witcheries of the Esquimaux: to revenge himself, therefore, and to soften the anger of his tutelar deity, he thought it necessary to engage in an "Esquimaux hunt," and thus glut his vile passion for bloodshed, by destroying a certain number of these unoffending people. This horrid practice, however, is now, from the advance of civilization, rapidly sinking into disuse.

[page] 39

known the Esquimaux never retire far from the coast. This is a strong confirmation that the waters seen both by Hearne and Mackenzie, were arms of the sea. On their arrival at the coast, it would be necessary to associate with the Esquimaux, to submit in some measure to their mode of living; and to effect any considerable discovery, it might be requisite to spend a winter or two among them; in which case they might trace the line of the Frozen Ocean to such a length, that the place where it joins the western coasts of Baffin's Bay, or Hudson's Bay, or the eastern side of Greenland, would be determined. Or, if it should be objectionable wintering among the Esquimaux, several expeditions might be sent out at the same time from different stations, and on different meridians. One, for instance, might start from the north-western part of Hudson's Bay, and proceed to the north-west, and another from the same place towards the north; a third might start from the Slave Lake towards the north-east; and a fourth from the same station towards the north or north-west; the expence of all which would probably be less than that of one expedition by sea. We have several proofs of the practicability of this plan; —from the journeys which the settlers at Hudson's Bay and the North American Indians frequently make; from the voyage of Mackenzie, and the journeys of Hearne; and from the willingness

[page] 40

of persons well acquainted with the nature and dangers of the enterprise, to undertake it*.

SECT. IV.

Remarks on the Opinion of a Sea Communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, by the North Pole.

THE scheme suggested by Robert Thorne of Bristol, of finding a passage to India across the North Pole, about the year 1527, appears to have been immediately attempted, by an expedition con-

* I have conversed with some persons who have performed journeys of above 1000 miles, over a surface of snow, during the winter, in the way above described, and who would not be unwilling to undertake an expedition for making discoveries in the Frozen Ocean.
Since this sheet was sent to press, I have learned with satisfaction, from authority which is unquestionable, that Government, in concert with the Hudson's Bay Company, have taken measures for the immediate investigation of the coast of the Frozen Ocean, from the mouth of the Copper Mine River, eastward to Hudson's Bay, or Baffin's Bay, or other coast, with which it may, on examination, be found to be connected. Lieutenant Franklin, it is said, accompanied by persons experienced in the modes of travelling in that country, is to be employed on this interesting service. From this officer's known zeal and activity, and from the promising character of this mode of making discoveries, the most satisfactory results are to be anticipated; for, whatever progress may be made in tracing the shores of the Frozen Ocean to the eastward, will be a certain step towards the completion of the discoveries which have excited such uncommon interest.

[page] 41

sisting of two ships, sent out by order of Henry VIII. One of the ships, we are informed, was lost: of the nature of the success of the other, we have but a very unsatisfactory account*.

After this voyage, Barentz, Heemskerke and Ryp, attempted the trans-polar navigation in 1596; Hudson in 1607; Jonas Poole in 1610 and 1611; Baffin and Fotherby in 1614; Fotherby in 1615; Phipps in 1773, and Buchan and Franklin in 1818.

The highest latitude attained by any of these navigators, did not, it would appear, exceed 81°. Hudson's highest latitude by observation, was 80° 23′. Poole's greatest latitude attained, was 79° 50′ on his first voyage, and about 80° on his second. Baffin and Fotherby reached about 80° 16′. Captain Phipps 80° 48′, and Captain Buchan about 80° 20′. My Father, in the ship Resolution of Whitby, in the year 1806, with whom I then served as chief-mate. sailed to a much higher latitude than any of these voyagers already enumerated. Our latitude, on three occasions, in the month of May, as derived

* Hackluyt's Voyages, vol. iii. p. 129. One of the ships employed in this service was called the Dominus Vobiscum; but as to the names of the voyagers we have no account. From the bare information Hacklnyt was able to collect, it would appear that the endeavours of the commanders had been directed more towards the north-west than towards the North Pole, though the latter appears evidently to have been the original design of the voyage.

[page] 42

from observations taken with a sextant by myself and my father, was 80° 50′28″, 81° 1′ 53″, and 81° 12′ 42″; after which, we sailed so far to the northward, as made it about 81° 30′; which is one of the closest approximations to the Pole which I conceive has been well authenticated. The Honourable Daines Barrington, it is true, informs us, in his discussion on "the probability of reaching the North Pole," of several vessels having sailed much farther towards the north. In his first two papers, of "instances of navigators who have reached high northern latitudes," he produces four examples of vessels having sailed to latitude 81 ½°; seven to 82° or upward; three to 83° or more; six vessels in company to 86°; three examples to 88°; two ships in company to 89°, and one to 89½°*, besides several others brought forward in his later papers. But with regard to these examples, I may observe, that all the instances of navigations having been performed beyond the 84th degree, are given from very loose authority, such as the vague reports of the Dutch whale-fishers; and in no case, I believe, from the direct communications of the voyagers themselves. As such, I conceive, there is no reliance whatever to be placed upon these extraordinary instances. It may not, however, be so easy to get rid of the accounts of ships having sailed as far as 82° or 83°, the instances being so very numerous, and some of them so

* Miscellanies," p. 1,–40.

[page] 43

very particular; but still, there is room for some remarks on them. It may be observed, that though the latitudes in some of the cases noted by Bar-rington, are said to have been derived from celestial observations, yet it appears, that they all, or nearly so, were given from memory, by the persons who themselves performed the voyages, or by others who had had intercourse with them. But with regard to those accounts, communicated by the voyagers who had themselves made the observations, we find, that above half of them were from oral testimony only, at the distance of eighteen to thirty years, from the time when the several navigations were performed.

Hence, the faithfulness of their memories, after a lapse of so many years, may reasonably be questioned. One of the most modern instances, indeed, may be objected to, on very good grounds. Captain Clarke is said to have sailed to 81½°, and Captain Bateson to 82° 15′, in the year 1773*. Now, this was the year in which Captain Phipps proceeded on discovery towards the North Pole, who, notwithstanding he made apparently every exertion, and exposed his ships in no common degree; though he repeatedly traced the face of the northern ice from the longitude of 2° E., where the ice began to trend to the southward, to 20° E., where he was so dangerously involved, was never able to proceed beyond

* BARRINGTON'S "Miscellanies," p. 38 and 41.

[page] 44

80° 48′ N., and even that length only once in the season. Is it reasonable, therefore, to suppose, that whale-fishers, sailing in clear water, without any particular object to induce them to proceed far towards the north, should exceed the length to which Captain Phipps attained in the same year, and within a few days of the same time, by eighty-seven miles towards the north? I imagine, on the contrary, that both Captain Clarke and Captain Bateson had been mistaken in their latitude, and had not been so far as Captain Phipps, or at least not farther. But I by no means wish to infer, that all the cases brought forward in Barrington's Miscellanies are equally objectionable, or that no voyager has ever sailed beyond the latitude of 81° or 82°; though I feel persuaded, that, among the numerous instances produced to prove this point, few of them can be relied on. The prevailing desire, indeed, to communicate extraordinary circumstances, has a tendency, in some measure, to bias the judgment of the most candid person, and has, no doubt, occasioned very many exaggerated statements; for all navigators who have proceeded to a very great extent into any unknown region, especially where they have little opportunity of determining their real situation, naturally give the farthest point in their opinion, when they are in doubt, rather than the nearest. Even so late as the year 1817, we have a striking illustration of this fact. The Larkins of

[page] 45

Leith, which succeeded in the whale-fishery in Baffin's Bay, at an unusual season, and in an unusual latitude, was reported, on her arrival in Britain, even, I believe, by the master himself, to have been as high as 80° in Baffin's Bay; but on minute inquiry being made, as to the authority on which the Captain founded the belief of his having been to so high a latitude, and so far beyond what was supposed to have constituted the limits of the Bay, he could only declare with full confidence, that he had been to about 77°*. Now, had this circumstance passed over unnoticed for fifteen or twenty years, as was the case with the greater number of the instances quoted by Barrington, the master of the Larkins himself, though without the least design to deceive, would, in all probability, have stated it as a fact, and would have believed his own statement to have been correct, that he had actually proceeded as far as the latitude of 80°. Many other illustrations might be brought forward, of the tendency to add to any thing extraordinary, rather than to detract; so that persons relating the same circumstance occasionally through a series of years, and thus preserving the recollection of the story as they last communicated it, though they might have long forgotten the original event, have, by the most trifling, and at the time apparently unimportant additions,

* Quarterly Review, No. xxxv. p. 212.

[page] 46

been carried at last to the extravagant lengths. And that they themselves believe to be true what they communicate, can be shown, from the circumstance of their not scrupling to tell the story in the presence of presons, who, they well knew, were jointly with themselves, observers of the original fact. Such cases I have often met with: and such have probably been noticed by almost every person who has attended to things of this nature. Hence, the uncertainty of oral testimony.

However dubious we may be of receiving the accounts brought forward by the Honourable Daines Rarrington, to prove the occasional accessibility of the Sed or 54th paralled of north lantitude, to enterprising voyagers, of this. I conceive, we may be assured, that the opinion of an open sea round the Pole, is altogether chimerical. We must allow, indeed, that when the stmosphere is free from thud, the indurence of the sun, notwithstanding its of Equinty, is, on the surface of the earth or sea, should the time of the summer solstice, greater to the Pole, by nearly one-fourth, than at the equator*. Hence it is urged, that this extraordinary power of the sun, destroys all the ice generated in the winter season, and renders the temperature of the Pole, warmed and more congeneal to feeling, than it is in some places lying nearer the equa-

* Edinburgh N. III p. 11

[page] 47

tor. Now, if it be admitted, that the influence of the sun at the time of the summer solstice be nearly one-fourth greater at the Pole than it is at the equator, it must he allowed, from the same principle, that this influence in the parallel of 78°, where it is only ahout one forty-fifth part less than what it is at the Pole*, must also be considerably greater than at the equator; and, therefore, that whatever effects are produced by the sun's peculiar action at the Pole, the same, in a proportionate degree, must be felt at the parallel of 78°. We shall endeavour to ascertain, whether the presence of the sun during several months together in the Spitzbergen sea, produces any thing like the effect presumed by the advocates of an open sea at the Pole.

From various meteorological calculations, founded on a careful investigation of the laws of tempera-

* As the solar influence is proportions, to the sines of the sun's altitude, the power of the sun at the Pole, is to its power at the same time in any other latitude where it does not set, as the sine of the sun's altitude at the Pole, is to half the sum of the sines of the sun's greatest and least altitude during the day in the other latitude referred to, nearly. Thus the solar influence at the Pole at the solstice, on a given horizontal surface, represented by the number 1, is equivalent to the sine of 23½ the sun's altitude (the multiplier in this case being 1. and divided or radius being also 1) or 3988. And in the latitude of 78′, the sine of 35½, the sun's greatest altitude or 5807, added to the sine or 11½ the sun's least altitude or 1994, and the amount divided by 2, gives 3900, for the solar induence at the solstice in latitude 78°; which is less by about 1/45 th part, than the solar influence at the Pole, but greater than it is at the Equator.

[page] 48

ture, it has been deduced by Professor Kirwan, that the means of temperature of the months of May, June and July, in latitude 78°, are respectively as high as 37°, 51°.5, 50°.5, and the mean of the year 33°.2 or, according to other meteorologists 34°.2, notwithstanding no allowance appears to have been made for the supposed extraordinary power of the sun when continually above the horizon. But from calculations founded on twelve years observations on the temperature of the icy regions, I have determined the mean temperature of the month of May, latitude 78°, to be 22°.5, of June 31°.4, of July 37°; and of the whole year 17°, being below the temperatures calculated, by 14°.5 in May, 20°.1 in June, 13°.5 in July, and 16° or 17° in the mean annual temperature*. Hence, so far from the actual influence of the sun, though acknowledged at a certain season to be greater at the Pole than at the Equator, being above what it is calculated to be by the ordinary formulæ for temperature, it is found in latitude 78° to be greatly below it,—how then can the temperature of the Pole be expected to be so very different? From the remarks in the ensuing pages it will be shown, that ice is annually formed during nine months of the year in the Spitzbergen sea; and that neither calm weather, nor the proximity

* Appendix No. I, contains the whole series of Meteorological Tables for the year 1807 to 1818 inclusive; from whence these results, as included in No. II., are derived.

[page] 49

of land, is essential for its formation. Can it then be supposed, that at the Pole, where the mean annual temperature is probably as low as 10°*, that the sea is not full of ice? And as the quantity of ice dissolved every summer near Spitzbergen, by the action of the sun only, is very small when compared with the quantity that is there generated,— can it be imagined, that the whole quantity generated at the Pole during the year should be dissolved by the power of the sun in the course of two or three summer month? Were the mean temperature of the Pole, indeed, above the freezing point of sea-water, that is, as high as 31° or 32°, as it is usually estimated, and the mean heat of latitude 78° as high as 33° or 34°, then the circumpolar seas would have a chance of being free from ice; but while the temperature of the former can be shown to be about 18°, and the latter 11° below the freezing temperature of the sea, we can have no reasonable ground, I conceive, for doubting the continual presence of ice in all the regions immediately surrounding the Pole†.

VOL. I. D

* See Appendix, No. II.

† Should there be land near the Pole, portions of open water, or perhaps even considerable seas, might be produced by the action of the current sweeping away the ice from one side of it almost as fast as it could be formed; and vacancies in such a case might also be produced on the leeward side of the land during any powerful and continued winds; but the existence of land only, I imagine, can encourage an expectation of any of the sea northward of Spitzbergen being annually free from ice.

[page] 50

Though the extent to which our early navigators attained in their attempts to reach the Pole, may be a little doubtful, yet the limit to which the Polar Seas are now navigable towards the north, will have a fair chance of being determined, in consequence of the alteration which has been made in the act of Parliament offering a reward of 5000l. to the person who shall first sail beyond the 89th degree of north latitude. This premium was first offered by act 16th Geo. III. c. 6.; but though it has now been in force 43 years, it has never produced any discovery, nor even, perhaps, a single attempt. The reason is obvious. No one employed in the whale-fishery, who had the opportunity, would hazard his life, his property, and the success of his voyage, in seeking after a reward which he had every reason to believe was quite beyond his reach; especially as he well knew, that although he should sail to within a few miles of the extent, which would entitle him to the premium, and there be interrupted by some insurmountable obstacle, yet he could have no claim on the reward. Hence, while he considered the prize as beyond his reach, the adventurous voyager had no stimulus to lead him forward;

[page] 51

whereas, had a proportionate reward been offered for a proportionate success, he would have had every encouragement to make the attempt. In the session of 1818, this subject was brought before Parliament, and the law respecting rewards for discoveries in the Polar Seas, &c. underwent revision, and was modified and improved by the passing of a new act. After the nomination of "commissioners for discovering the longitude at sea," and for "judging all proposals, experiments and improvements relating to the same, and for rewarding persons making useful discoveries and improvements in or connected with navigation,"— this act offers encouragements for the discovery of the longitude, and other useful inventions tending towards the improvement of navigation, and then gives the regulations and conditions on which rewards may be claimed for finding a northern passage into the Pacific, and for approaching within a degree of the North Pole, or for accomplishing certain proportions of the said passage, or approach. The act still offers a reward of 20,000l. to the owners of such ship or ships, if belonging to subjects, or to the commanders, officers, seamen and marines, of such ships, if belonging to his Majesty, which shall first find out and sail through any passage between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, in any direction or parallel of the Northern Hemisphere*. And a reward of 5000l.

* Act 58th Geo. III. c. 20. § 10.

D 2

[page] 52

to the owner of any merchant vessel, or to the commander, &c. of any King's ship, which shall first approach within one degreeof the Northern Pole, (§11). It then provides for the reward of certain partially successful attempts, permitting commissioners, by memorial, to "propose to his Majesty in Council to direct proportionate rewards to be paid to such persons who shall first have accomplished certain proportions of the said passage or approach," and then directs, that if his Majesty shall sanction the said proposal, "the same shall be published in the London Gazette; and any person accomplishing such passages, or the specified proportions of them, shall be entitled, on the award of the commissioners, to receive such total or proportionate sums as may have been offered*," (§ 12.)

Since the passing of this act, the commissioners appointed by Parliament have arranged two scales of premiums for discoveries towards the North Pole, and north-west, which have received the sanction of his Royal Highness the Prince Regent, and

* By the next section commissioners are authorised to take such measures as shall satisfy themselves of the correctness of such claims for rewards, on the subject of discovery, as shall be made upon them; and being fully satisfied with the examination and proof offered, they are authorised to pay the said rewards, or such proportion of them as the claimant may under this act, or such order in Council, be entitled. to receive.—Act 58th Geo. III. c. 20. § 13.

[page] 53

have been published in the London Gazette accordingly*. They are to the following effect:

"1. To the first ship belonging to any of his Majesty's subjects, or to his Majesty, that shall proceed to the longitude of 110° west, or the mouth of Hearne's or Coppermine River, by sailing within the Arctic circle, 5000l.; to 130° west, or the Whale Island of Mackenzie, 10,000l.; to 150° west, by sailing westward, within the Arctic circle, 15,000l.; to the Pacific Ocean, by a north-west passage, as before allotted, the full reward of 20,000l.

2. To the first ship, as aforesaid, that shall sail to 83° of north latitude, 1000l.; to 85°, 2000l.; to 87°, 3000l.; to 88°, 4000l.; and to 89°, as before allotted, the full reward of 5000l."

As this scale for discoveries towards the North Pole, commences with a latitude which there may be at least a hope of attaining, there will be no doubt of attempts being made to penetrate to the farthest navigable point, and of that extreme accessible point being soon ascertained.

* The memorial of the commissioners, presented to the Prince Regent, includes the remark, "That the progress of discovery has (it appears) already advanced on the eastern coast of America, and within the Arctic circle, as far as 90° west longitude, or thereabouts, from Greenwich;" but that "northwards it has not yet arrived, according to any well authenticated accounts, so far as 8l° of north latitude." — (London Gazette, 23d March 1819). This corresponds with what has been advanced in the foregoing pages, respecting the instances of high navigations, given in Barrington's Miscellanies.

[page] 54

If the masses of ice which usually prevent the advance of navigators beyond the 82d degree of north latitude, be extended in a continued series to the Pole, (of which, unless there be land in the way, I have no doubt),—the expectation of reaching the Pole by sea, must be altogether chimerical. But though the access by sea be effectually intercepted, I yet imagine, notwithstanding the objections which have been urged against the scheme, that it would by no means be impossible to reach the Pole by travelling across the ice from Spitzbergen. This project having been given at some length in the Memoirs of the Wernerian Society*, it may be unnecessary here to repeat the arguments in favour of its practicability. Yet it might not be well to dismiss the subject without a few brief remarks. As the journey would not exceed 1200 miles, (600 miles each way), it might be performed on sledges drawn by dogs or rein-deer, or even on foot†. Foot-travellers would require to draw the apparatus and provisions necessary for the undertaking, on sledges by hand; and in this way, with good despatch, the journey would occupy at least two months; but with the assistance of dogs, it might

* Vol. ii. p. 328.

† When the paper on the Polar Ice, in which this project is included, was presented to the Wernerian Society, I was not aware of the extensive journeys, occasionally performed on snow without the assistance of any quadruped, which have recently come to my knowledge.

[page] 55

probably be accomplished in a little less time. With favourable winds, great advantage might be derived from sails set upon the sledges; which sails, when the travellers were at rest, would serve for the erection of tents. Small vacancies in the ice would not prevent the journey, as the sledges could be adapted so as to answer the purpose of boats; nor would the usual unevenness of the ice, or the depth or softness of the snow, be an insurmountable difficulty, as journeys of near equal length, and under similar inconveniencies, have been accomplished.

The Russian adventurers who occasionally proceed from Archangel and neighbouring places to Spitzbergen, and spend the winter in this dreary country, for the purpose of taking sea-horses, seals, and other animals frequenting the coast, have been supposed, from their uncommon opportunities for observation, capable of giving an opinion of much weight, on the practicability of the journey to the Pole. As such, Colonel Beaufoy (who it seems entertained the same opinion as myself, that the only access to the Pole was by a journey over the ice) proposed to them several judicious queries on this subject, with others on the nature of the climate at Spitzbergen in winter, their replies to which were altogether discouraging*. But these men, it may be observed,

* These queries, with their answers, which are uncommonly interesting, first appeared in Dr Thomson's Annals of Philosophy, vol. ix. p. 381.; and were afterwards (in 1818) reprinted in a small volume, including Barrington's Polar Tracts.

[page] 56

who know little or nothing of the nature of field-ice, must he less adequate judges of the practicability of the scheme than any of the whale-fishers; as it is in expectation that field-ice would be met with throughout, that renders the project feasible. On the kind of ice, indeed, which occurs generally on the coast of Spitzbergen, in small irregular masses, constituting what is called drift-ice, heaped one piece upon another to a considerable height, intermixed with fragments of ice-bergs, and forming as rough a surface as can well be imagined, the journey would doubtless be impracticable; but on field-ice, found commonly within a few leagues of the sea in high latitudes, in sheets of many miles in diameter, and frequently of very even surface, the difficulties of travelling would be very inferior*.

* Few of the Russian fishers, it is probable, who only frequent the coast, ever saw any field ice. In the answers to queries 19. and 25. of Colonel Beaufoy, we find the ice represented as mountainous; as appearing "monstrously large and lofty;" and as running flake upon flake to a great height, so as to make the passage on foot very difficult. Now, this kind of ice is peculiar to the coast, and is totally different from field ice. Indeed its roughness is chiefly occasioned by the resistance of the coast, when the ice is forcibly driven against it by the power of strong winds. And the large openings of water observed, also result from the same cause; for whenever the wind blows for a length of time from the shore, the ice, being afloat, is generally drifted away. But such effects do not take place at a distance from land. I have myself, indeed, been many times so closely fixed among ice, that not the smallest opening could be observed from the mast head, in any direction.

[page] 57

Were, however, the opinion ever so general, that the journey could not be accomplished, I should still conceive, that one established fact of a journey having been performed in a similar region on similar ice, and under similar disadvantages, would be a sufficient answer. But several accounts can be brought forward to establish the fact of similar journeys, and some of them equally difficult, having been accomplished. I shall mention a few instances.

Ellis informs us, in his "Voyage to Hudson's Bay*," that the North American Indians, who trade with the factories of the Hudson's Bay Company, frequently "travel 200 or 300 miles in the depth of winter, through a wide open country, without meeting with any house to receive them, or carrying any tent to protect them." And that on such journeys, when benighted on any open plain, they are forced to lie down without fire, under shelter only of the snow. He also mentions, that a man can conveniently draw a load of above an hundred weight upon a sledge, a distance of fifteen or sixteen miles, in a winter's day†.

More recent travellers and voyagers inform us, that the Indians frequently perform much longer journeys in winter; and it is an established fact, that many persons in the service of the Hudson's Bay

* Page 195.

† Id. p. 163.

[page] 58

Company, who reside at their settlements, have travelled 1000 or 1500 miles through snow on foot, in the course of a winter.

Muller makes mention of the Tchuktchi nation, being in the habit of travelling on the ice of the sea, in sledges drawn by rein-deer*. The same author, speaking of the power of the dogs of the Kamtchadales in drawing great burdens, illustrates the fact by stating, that in the year 1718, the governor, Knees Mischewski, ordered a whole pipe of brandy to be brought from the convent of Ketskoe to the city of Beresowa, which was accomplished by sixteen dogs†.

After the lamentable death of the illustrious navigator Captain Cook, the Resolution and Discovery, on their second advance into the Polar Sea, put into the bay of Avatscha in Kamtchatka, for obtaining a supply of naval stores and provisions. No supplies, however, being to be had at the neighbouring town of St Peter and St Paul, a despatch was sent off in a sledge drawn by dogs to Bolsherietzkoi, a distance of 135 English miles, an answer to which was returned on the fourth day; so that a journey of 270 miles upon snow, was performed in little more than three days and a-half‡.

* "Voyages from Asia to America," Transl. p. vii.

† Id. p. xi.

‡ COOK'S Third Voyage, Journal, 3d of May 1779.

[page] 59

But this speed, though so considerable, was by no means equal to what the Kamtchatka dogs are capable of performing; the governor of Kamtchatka, Major Behm, (who so liberally and so disinterestedly supplied the wants of our voyagers,) having assured the officers belonging to these discovery ships, that the journey from St Peter and St Paul to Bolsherietzkoi and back, was usually performed in two days and a-half; and that he had once received an express from the bay of Avatscha, which is the harbour of St Peter and St Paul, in twenty-three hours*.

But the argument which goes farthest towards proving the practicability of travelling over ice, is the fact, of a Cossack having actually performed a journey of about 800 miles, in a sledge drawn by dogs, across a surface of ice lying to the northward of the Russian dominions. This remarkable exploit, as related by Muller, is to the following effect.

Alexei Markoff, a Cossack, was sent from Yakutsk, to explore the frozen ocean, in the summer of the year 1714, by order of the Russian government; but finding the sea so crowded with ice, that he was unable to make any progress in discovery, he formed the design of travelling in sledges, during the winter or spring of the year, over the ice, which might then be expected to be firm and

* Idem, Journal, 3d May 1779.

[page] 60

compact. Accordingly, he prepared several of the country sledges drawn by dogs; and, accompanied by eight persons, he set out on the 10th of March*, from the mouth of the Jana, in latitude 70° 30′, and longitude about 138° E. He proceeded for seven days northward, as fast as his dogs could draw, which, under favourable circumstances, is 80 or 100 versts a-day†, until his progress was impeded about the 78th degree of latitude, by ice elevated into prodigious mountains. This prevented his further advance; at the same time, falling short of provisions for his dogs, his return was effected with difficulty: several of his dogs died for want, and were given to the rest for their support. On the 3d of April he arrived at Ust-Janskoe Simowie, the place from whence he started, after an absence of twenty-four days‡, during which time, he appears to have travelled about 800 miles §.

Hence, I conceive, that Markoff must have met with every inconvenience which could be anticipated, in a journey from Spitzbergen to the Pole, or

* March the 15th, according to Forster, in his "Observations made during a voyage round the World," p. 82.

† The verst, being about 5½ furlongs, (3500 English feet,) the average progress of 90 versts per day, is equal to about 62 miles, amounting to 434 miles in 7 days.

‡ According to Forster, 19 days.

§ Muller's Voyages, &c. Transl. p. 18.

[page] 61

to the nearest land in the direction of the Pole. And as this account, derived by Muller from the archives of Yakutsk, shows us that Markoff's journey, which was nearly equal in extent to the projected journey to the Pole, was accomplished with safety to the travellers, there appears no very great reason why a person equally adventurous as Markoff and better provided, might not, in a similar manner, reach the Pole.

SECT. V.

Account of the Progress of Discovery in the North.

Some brief remarks have already been made, in the foregoing pages, relative to the discovery of several of the polar countries, since the period when a northern passage to China and India became a popular speculation; but for tracing the progress of discovery in the north with any degree of fulness, it will be necessary to go back to a period of many centuries, before the passage to India in this way was, perhaps, ever thought of.

The first considerable discovery which appears to have been made in or near the Arctic Circle, was the result of accident; one of the numerous Scandinavian depredators, who, in the ninth century,

[page] 62

cruised the northern seas in search of plunder, having heen driven by a long continued storm from the eastward, upon the coast of Iceland, in the year 861. This island, from the quantity of snow seen on the mountains, was by its discoverer NADDODD, at first called Schnee or Snowland It was visited by a Swede of the name of Gardar Suaffarson, three years after its discovery, who wintered there; and afterwards by another Swede called Flocke, who, for assisting him in the navigation to this remote country, the compass being then unknown, is said to have carried out ravens along with him, by the flight of which, when set at liberty, he directed his course, and was led to the required country. This island, which had been denominated Iceland by Flocke, was again visited in the year 874 by Ingolf and Lief, two Norwegians, to whom the country presented so many natural advantages, that they, with a few followers, were induced to settle there about four years afterwards. In the course of a few years, they were joined by a number of Norwegian families, who resorted thither from political oppression; so that they soon constituted a considerable colony.

The coast of Norway, to the entrance of the White Sea, was examined about this period by a person of the name of OHTHERE, a norwegian, who himself gave an account of his voyage to Alfred the Great, by whom it has been handed down

[page] 63

to us along with his translation of the Ormesta of Orosius.

About the middle, or towards the end of the tenth century, an extensive country to the westward of Iceland was discovered, by one of the colonists of the name of GUNBIORN*, which country was visited in the year 982, by one ERIC RAUDA, a person who had fled from Norway to Iceland, to avoid the punishment due to the crime of murder, with various other misdemeanours, of which he had been guilty. Rauda wintered in the southern part of the country; and after spending part of three years in exploring it, returned to Iceland. For the purpose of encouraging persons to become settlers in the newly discovered country, he denominated it Greenland, and gave a most exaggerated account of its products and appearance. In consequence of his representations, a fleet of twentyfive sail was shortly afterwards equipped, which, laden with people of both sexes, and the requisite stores and cattle for forming a settlement, put off for Greenland; but only about one-half of the fleet arrived safe at their destination. These people were soon joined by others, both from Iceland and Norway; so that, in a few years, they also became a respectable colony.

* Forster's "Voyages and Discoveries made in the North," p. 79.

[page] 64

A regular trade being now established between Norway, Greenland and Iceland, one of the Iceland colonists, BIORN by name, about the year 1001, while following his father to Greenland, from whom he had been separated while on a trading voyage in another ship, was accidentally driven by a storm considerably to the south-west of Greenland, where he discovered a new country covered with wood. This discovery being made known on his return to Iceland, Lief, the son of Eric Rauda, fitted out a vessel, and with Biorn as a pilot and a crew of thirty-five men, revisited the country just discovered. Here he traversed a considerable extent of coast, and sailed up a river to a lake from which it took its rise, where he wintered. In this country, called by the discoverers Winland or Vinland, from the circumstance of grapes having been found in it, the day was eight hours long in winter; from whence it appears, that they must have been somewhere on the coast of North America, or contiguous islands, near the parallel of 50°, probably on the shore of Newfoundland. Lief returned to Greenland the following spring. His brother Thorwald afterwards proceeded to Winland, where he pursued the discovery of the adjacent countries during two years, without seeing any inhabitants; but, in the third year, he met with three boats upon the coast, covered with leather, containing three Indians each, which he seized, and

[page] 65

wantonly and barbarously murdered the whole of the men in them, excepting one who made his escape. An attack was made a little while after by the injured natives upon Thorwald's vessel; and, though the assailers were repulsed, Thorwald met with a just retribution for his cruelty, by the wound of an arrow, which occasioned his death. These savages, on account of their low stature, were called Skrœllingers, signifying dwarfs. They were probably the same race of people as are at present known by the appellation of Esquimaux. Other adventurers then visited Winland, and succeeded in establishing a good understanding with the natives, and in carrying on among them an advantageous traffic for furs and other produce of the country. Thorfin, one of these adventurers, attempted to establish a colony in Winland, and allowed the people with him a free traffic with the natives in any articles excepting weapons of war, the bartering of which he expressly forbid. One of the natives, however, contrived to steal from the Icelanders a battle-axe, trial of which he presently made on one of his companions, and killed him on the spot. The dangerous weapon was immediately seized by another of his countrymen, and thrown into the sea*.

VOL. I. E

* Forster's Voyages, p. 85.

[page] 66

The Christian Religion was introduced into Iceland and Greenland about the year 1000, and within a hundred years afterwards generally diffused. Above sixteen churches were then built, and two convents. These buildings, as well as the habitations of the colonists, were erected near the southern point of Greenland. They had two settlements, the most western of which increased up to four parishes, containing one hundred farms or villages; and the most eastern to twelve parishes, one hundred and ninety villages, one bishop's see, and two convents*. The intercourse between Greenland and the rest of the world, was intercepted about the year 1406, when the seventeenth bishop attempted to reach his see, but was prevented by ice. Since the beginning of the fifteenth century, these unfortunate colonists have been, of necessity, left to themselves, and, not having been heard of, are supposed to have perished; but whether they were destroyed by their enemies the Esquimaux, who inhabit the same country, or perished for want of their usual supplies, or were carried off by a destructive pestilence, as some have imagined, is still matter of doubt. It is not indeed known that none of them yet remain, though, from the circumstance of several of the ruins of their convents having been seen by the zealous missionary Hans Egede, in the year 1723, it is clear, that the west-

* BARROW'S Voyages, p. 12.

[page] 67

ern colony is not now in existence; but as to the eastern colony, Egede was of opinion, that there was a probability of some of the people being yet alive*.

Various attempts have been made by order of the Danish Government, for the recovery of this country, and for ascertaining the fate of the unfortunate colonists, but most of them were spiritless, and all of them failed in their object.

Richard Hackluyt, in his "Voyages, Navigations, Traffiques, and Discoveries of the English Nation," gives a quotation from the History of Wales, by Dr David Powel, stating the discovery of America or the West Indies by Madoc, the son of OWEN GUYNETH, prince of North Wales, in the year 1170. Madoc left his country, it is said, in consequence of family contention, and proceeded in search of adventures by sea towards the west. Leaving Iceland far to the north, he arrived at length at "a land unknown, where he saw many strange things." Here he left most of his companions. and returned home for more people "to inhabit this fair and large country", and then went out again with ten sail of ships†.

E 2

* One of the Iceland bishops, who was driven very near the coast of Greenland, while on a voyage to Norway, about the middle of the sixteenth century, is said to have seen the inhabitants driving their cattle in the fields.— Thormoder Tor-fager.

† Hackluyt's Voyages, &c. vol. iii. p. 1.

[page] 68

Near the close of the fourteenth century, NICHOLAS and ANTONIO ZENO, two Italians, made voyages of discovery in the north and west, from the islands of Shetland or Faroe, as is generally believed. Nicholas, it appears, visited Greenland, and Antonio, according to Forster, sailed to a country supposed to have been that of ancient Winland, and afterwards visited Greenland and Iceland.

After this period, a new stimulus was offered to the enterprising trader, which was the well-founded hope then entertained, of performing the passage from Europe to India by sea, from whence immense riches were expected to be derived.

The celebrated navigator COLUMBUS, conceiving India, to be much more extensive than it really is, calculated, from the known spherical form of the earth, that he should soon reach it by sailing to the westward, and was very anxious to make the attempt. After a number of disappointments and much tedious delay, he was employed, for the purpose of putting his project into execution, by the Queen of Spain. He sailed from Palos in August 1492; and the result of his voyage was the discovery of the West Indies, the islands of which were so named, from the supposition that they lay contiguous to the coast of India. Soon after Columbus's voyages, the Portugueze navigator, Vasquez de Gama, succeeded in reaching India by sailing round the Cape of Good Hope; but before this successful

[page] 69

attempt, another expedition by the same nation, it appears, tried the passage by the west, on a parallel far to the northward of that pursued by Columbus, This was undertaken by JOHN VAZ COSTA CORTEREAL, about the year 1463 or 1464, in which voyage the land of Newfoundland appears to have been seen*.

After Cortereal, SEBASTIAN CABOT, a Venetian, resident in England, seems to have been the next to attempt the voyage to India by the north-west, in the year 1497, on which occasion he coasted the American shore from the parallel of 67½12° down to that of 38°; though it is supposed his father, JOHN CABOT, made a voyage to Newfoundland, or Prima Vista, as he called it, in 1494, and discovered the island of St John, which he so named, because it was first seen on St John's day†. Sebastian Cabot having, after this time, been several years employed in the service of the King of Spain, returned to England in 1548, when he was placed at the head of the Society of Merchant Adventurers, afterwards called the Muscovy or Russia Company; and was subsequently endowed by Edward VI. with a pension of 166l. 13s. 4d. a-year, for good and acceptable services done and to be done by him.

GASPAR CORTEREAL, son of the voyager John Vaz Costa Cortereal above mentioned, sailed from

* Barrow's Voyages, p. 37.

† HARRIS'S Voyages, vol. ii. p. 190.

[page] 70

Lisbon in the year 1500. on a voyage of discovery towards the north-west, in search of a passage that way to the Spice Islands. He first saw the promontory of Greenland, then discovered the coast of Labrador; and after proceeding as far towards the north as the mountains of ice with which he met would admit, he coasted towards the south, and discovered the River St Lawrence, together with several islands contiguous to the North American coast. The following year the same navigator, with two vessels, undertook a second voyage. when he again saw Terra Verde (Greenland); but being separated from his companion in a storm, it is apprehended his vessel was wrecked among the ice of Cape Farewell, as his consort, returned to Lisbon without him, and he was never heard of afterwards. Search for the unfortunate Cortereal was immediately commenced by his brother, MICHAEL CORTEREAL, grand doorkeeper of the king Don Manuel, who sailed from Lisbon with three vessels on the 10th of May 1502. But the result of this voyage was as disastrous as the former; for, on the vessels separating, with the view of making a more effectual search for the lost navigator, Michael shared a similar fate as his brother, and perished. A third brother was anxious to renew the search, but the King determinately refused permission for him to embark personally in the undertaking. lest he should also be lost, but

[page] 71

readily permitted other individuals to pursue the humane design, though without effect*.

An unimportant voyage was undertaken by one Aubert or Hubert, a Frenchman, in the year 1508, wherein he visited Newfoundland; and another in 1524 by Estevan Gomez, a Spaniard or Portugueze, of the result of which little or nothing is known. An English voyage was attempted three years afterwards towards the North Pole, one of the vessels employed in which was called the Dominus Vobiscum; but the proceedings in this first expedition undertaken entirely by the English, for sailing in a northerly direction to India, are little known.

A few more unimportant voyages undertaken by the French, Spanish, and English, bring us down to the period when the spirit for adventure among our countrymen burst forth, under the auspices of Edward VI., and under the judicious assistance and suggestions of Sebastian Cabot, with a degree of brilliancy scarcely before known. The first voyage undertaken for discovery towards the north-east, was commenced by Sir Hugh WILLOUGHBY, in the year 1553, at the charge of "The Company of Merchant Adventurers." This expedition, consisting of three ships, with a pinnace and a boat belonging to each, left Ratcliffe, and dropped down to Deptford.

* Barrow's Voyages, p. 46.

[page] 72

on the 20th of May. The following day it passed Greenwich with great display, in view of the Court, who were then there, and amid the warmest acclamations of a great number of people of all ranks, who had assembled to witness its sailing. One of the ships, the Edward Bonaventure, commanded by Richard Chancellor, pilot-major of the fleet, was separated from the rest of the little squadron, in a storm, on the 3d of August, when they were near the northern termination of Lapland, called, by Stephen Burrough, who accompanied Chancellor, the North Cape; on which Sir Hugh Willoughby, in the Bona Esperanza, accompanied by the Bona Confidentia, proceeded in search of Wardhuus, the place appointed for a rendezvous; but, missing it, stretched to the eastward, until the 14th of August, when he discovered an unknown coast, lying in latitude 72°. On this coast, now called Nova Zembla*, he was unable to land, from the shoalness of

* As Sir Hugh Willoughby was l60 leagues, by estimation, E. by N. from Seynam, an island on the east coast of Norway, in latitude 70°, when he discovered land; and the distance to Nova Zembla, according to Arrowsmith, is not more than 220 leagues, I have no doubt but the coast seen by him was Nova Zembla. Besides, from the length of time he was in getting to the westward, to his wintering harbour, it is evident he was much farther to the eastward than he imagined. Indeed the courses and distances given in his journal, imperfect as they are, give sufficient westing for the distance between Nova Zembla and Lapland. And had he been mistaken in his latitude, and had the land seen been any of the islands lying near the northern part of Russia, it is evident he could not have steered 70 leagues to the S. S. E., as he afterwards did.

[page] 73

the water. After beating three days to the northward, and probably making very little progress, he bore np with the wind at north-east, and ran about 70 leagues towards the south-south-east, when, falling into 7 fathoms water, without seeing land, he hauled by the wind to north-westward. From that time, 21st August, until the 14th September, he coasted to the westward, seeing the Russian shore occasionally; and, on the 18th, took up his winter quarters at the mouth of the river Arzina, a harbour in the 70th degree of latitude, on the northeastern face of Lapland. Here, owing to the severity of the cold, and the want of proper food, himself and two ships' companies, consisting of 70 persons, exhausted by the combined effects of cold, hunger, and disease, perished in the ensuing spring. In the mean time, Chancellor, with the Edward Bonaventure, was more fortunate. He proceeded to Wardhuus, the place of rendezvous, from whence, after waiting seven days, he sailed a short distance to the northward, and then changing his course, fell in with the Russian territory, on the east side of the White Sea. In one of the Russian harbours, in this region, the ship remained throughout the winter. Chancellor, during their stay, travelled to Moscow, where he was handsomely enter-

[page] 74

tained by Juan Vasilovich, Czar of Moscow, and received permission of a free trade. He returned to England in 1554, and the following summer was sent out again accompanied by Richard Gray and George Killingworth*, "factors," for establishing a regular trade with Russia by the way of the White Sea, which was accomplished under various privileges.

STEPHEN BURROUGH also, was sent out in a small vessel the following year (1556), for making discoveries to the eastward. He visited Nova Zembla, and discovered the Island of Weigats, near which, in fruitless endeavours to get to the eastward, he spent above three weeks, and then, proceeding to the westward, he wintered at Colmagro; and, after making some search for the Bona Esperanza, and Bona Confidentia, returned to England in 1557.

After the complete establishment of the Russian trade, and the discovery of all the northern face of Russia, from the White Sea to the eastward of the Weigats, the chance of further discovery in that direction appeared so little, that a passage to Cathay or India, by the north-west, again became a popular speculation. MARTIN FROBISHER, who was one of the most sanguine advocates of the practicability of this

* This Killingworth was remarkable for the length and beauty of his beard. It was of a yellowish colour, thick and broad, measuring 5 feet 2 inches in length.

[page] 75

scheme, after having for above fifteen years endeavoured in vain to accomplish an expedition, was at length, through the assistance of Dudley, Earl of Warwick, and a few friends, enabled to effect the equipment of two small barks of 35 and 30 tons, and a pinnace of 10 tons, with which he proceeded on discovery, on the 8th of June 1576. In this voyage he discovered a strait, in latitude 63° 8′, afterwards named Frobishcr's Strait; but its situation being long supposed to be on Greenland, instead of on the Labrador side, the name of Lumley's Inlet was applied to the same place.

Omitting the two subsequent voyages of Frobisher, which were chiefly undertaken in search of treasure, and others in which nothing was discovered, we come to the commencement of a period of about thirty years, when all or the greater part of the discoveries which have been made towards the north-west, and north, were accomplished. The first important voyage was performed by JOHN DAVIS, who, with two vessels, the Sunshine of 50 tons, and the Moonshine of 35 tons, sailed from Dartmouth in search of a north-west passage, on the 7th of June 1585. They fell in with ice on the east side of Greenland, on the 19th of July; and the following day got sight of a rocky mountainous land, appearing as if above the clouds, in form of a sugar loaf, to which Davis gave the name of the Land of Desolation. After doubling Cape

[page] 76

Farewell, they stood to the north-westward; and in four days saw land to the eastward, in latitude 64° 15′, being the west side of Greenland. It consisted of islands, some of them inhabited, and contained many harbours, in one of which they anchored. They afterwards stretched across an open sea to the north-westward, and again discovered land in latitude 66° 40′, on the 6th of August, and anchored under a mount which they named Mount Raleigh. To different parts of this coast, since denominated Cumberland Island, they applied names. The foreland to the northward of them, they called Dier's Cape; that to the southward Cape Walsingham; and a great bay between the two capes they named Exeter Sound; and their anchorage they called Totness Road. On the 11th of August, having returned a little to the southward, they sailed to the westward, in a strait 20 or 30 leagues in width, and free from ice, which has since been denominated Cumberland Strait. The cape which they rounded to enter this strait, they called the Cape of God's Mercy, as being the place of their first entrance for discovery. On proceeding 60 leagues to the westward, they fell in with a cluster of islands in the midst of the passage, which, with the commencement of fog and unfavourable weather, put an end to their discovery. After remaining six days in expectation of a change of weather, they sailed homeward, and arrived safe at Dartmouth on the 30th September. They met

[page] 77

with a multitude of natives in the course of the voyage, whom they found a very tractable people, and liberal in their mode of trafficking.

The discovery by Davis of a nation with whom it seemed practicable to enter into an advantageous traffic, with the great expectations, excited by the open navigation of the strait into which he sailed, of a communication with the Pacific Ocean, occasioned Davis with his two barks, to which were added a trading vessel of 120 tons, and a pinnace of 10 tons, to be again dispatched the following year. They left Dartmouth on the 7th May. After making the land near Cape Farewell, they proceeded along the west coast of Greenland, where the natives came off to their ships in 40, 50, or even 100 canoes at a time, bringing with them skins, fish, fowls, and other produce of the country. Davis having, on his passage across the Atlantic, sent two of his vessels to the eastward of Greenland, with orders to seek a passage to the northward between Greenland and Iceland, as far as latitude 80°, was now deserted by his only remaining companion, and proceeded alone on his discovery, in the Moonshine of 35 tons. From the coast of Greenland, in 66° 33′, which he discovered, he sailed westward 50 leagues until he fell in with land again in latitude 66° 19′; he cruised about this coast for some time, and then stretched to the southward, examining inlets in the Labrador shore as he went, until the 11th September. when he left the

[page] 78

coast about the latitude of 54°, and arrived in England in October. The North Star of 10 tons burden, one of the vessels sent to the eastward of Greenland, parted from her consort in a storm on the 3d of September, and was never afterwards heard of. Though this voyage was productive of no discovery of any consequence, yet Davis was sent out again the next year (1587) with three vessels. They proceeded as before along the west coast of Greenland, but to a greater extent, having had an observation in latitude 72° 12′. This land, lying on the east side of the strait now called Davis' Strait, they named the London Coast. From hence, the wind shifting to the northward, they stretched across the strait to the westward, got entangled among ice, and made their way through it to the southward. After again sailing up Cumberland Strait as far as before, they went across the mouth of the strait discovered by Frobisher, which they named Lumley's Inlet, and passed a headland called by them Warwick's Foreland; then crossing a large gulf forming the entrance of the strait afterwards sailed through by Hudson, they came to the southermost cape of the gulf lying in latitude 61° 10′, to which they applied the name of Cape Chidley. Soon afterwards they returned to England.

A passage to India and China by the north-east, presenting many apparent advantages, the Dutch,

[page] 79

as soon as relieved from the yoke of Spain, embarked in the enterprize of discovering it. Four ships were equipped for this purpose in the year 1594, part of which, under the command of CORNELIS CORNELISON, passed the strait of Weigatz, and proceeded about 40 leagues to the eastward, when, finding the sea clear, and every prospect of a passage, instead of pursuing the discovery, they turned back to communicate the news of the happy probability! Another part of the expedition under the direction of WILLIAM BARENTZ, examined at the same time the western side of Nova Zembla, giving names to several remarkable parts of the coast from latitude 77° 25′ down to 71°.

After another expedition of seven ships, expensively prepared, had been sent out in the same direction, and altogether failed, two ships under the command of Jacob Van Heemskerke and Cornelis Ryp, with WILLIAM BARENTZ as chief pilot, were sent out from Amsterdam on the 10th May 1596, for discovering a north-east passage. On an island that they discovered in latitude 74° 35′, they killed an immense bear, from which circumstance the place was called Bear Island. From hence, at the suggestion of Cornelis Ryp, they proceeded to the northward, with the hope of getting round the ice with which the coast of Nova Zembla is encumbered, and thus discovered land when in latitude 80° 10′, on the 17th of June, which they

[page] 80

named Spitzbergen, or Sharp Mountains. They examined the coast hastily, as far to the southward as latitude 76° 50′, and then saw no more land until they approached Bear Island, (afterwards called Cherry Island,) on the 1st of July. Being doubtful of the situation of the newly discovered region, with regard to the continent of Europe, or any other known land, the two ships pursued different courses, that the navigators might satisfy themselves of its true position; and Cornells, sailing back again from Bear Island, direct north, arrived at a place on the west coast of Spitzbergen, which they had before denominated the Bay of Birds*.

Barentz, in the mean time, proceeded to the eastward, with the hope of accomplishing the main object of his voyage, and reached the coast of Nova Zembla on the 17th of July. Then persevering to the northward and eastward, with the expectation of getting round Nova Zembla, they got entangled among the ice on the coast, and were brought to the dreadful necessity of wintering in this desolate and frozen country. To attempt any description of their proceedings, their observations, or their afflictions during this severe trial, would, within the limit of a few lines, to which it is my wish to confine my remarks in this place, but spoil a most interesting and affecting narrative. "The journal

* DE BRYE, Indiæ Orientalis pars undecima, tom. iii. p. 48.– 51.

[page] 81

of the proceedings of these poor people, as Mr Barrow beautifully observes, "during their cold, comfortless, dark and dreadful winter, is intensely and painfully interesting. No murmuring escapes them in their most hopeless and afflicted situation; but such a spirit of true piety, and a tone of such mild and subdued resignation to Divine Providence, breathe through the whole narrative, that it is impossible to peruse the simple talc of their sufferings, and contemplate their forlorn situation, without the deepest emotion*."

Part of the sufferers made their escape in two open boats from this dismal country in the following summer; and, after a perilous and painful voyage of above 1100 miles, arrived in safety at Cola; but Barentz, with some others, was overcome by the severity of the climate, and the extraordinary exertions which he was obliged to make, and died.

GEORGE WEYMOUTH, who was sent out by the Muscovy and Turkey Companies, with two vessels, in the year 1602, found an inlet in the land to the northward of the Labrador coast, in latitude 61° 40′, into which he said he sailed W. by S. a hundred leagues. If so, he must have been in the channel now called Hudson's Strait, and of course was the discoverer of it.

VOL. I. F

* "Chronological History of Voyages into the Arctic Regions," p. 151.

[page] 82

Three voyages towards the north-west by JAMES HALL, and one by JOHN KNIGHT, were performed after that of Weymouth, but the next discovery worth mentioning was made by HENRY HUDSON, who, in 1607, in a voyage towards the North Pole, traced the cast coast of Greenland, from a little to the northward of Iceland, as high as latitude 73°, which extreme point of his navigation this way he called Hold with Hope. He then proceeded more to the eastward, made the coast of Spitzbergen, sailed as high as latitude 81°, and explored a bay between the north end of Charles' Island and the Main, and returned home in safety. This navigation was performed in a very small vessel, with a crew only of ten men and a boy.

In the year 1608, Hudson was employed in search of a north-east passage; the year afterwards, in a northern and western voyage in the Dutch service, the design of which is not well understood; and in the season of 1610, this enterprising navigator embarked on a voyage of discovery from England, towards the north-west, in a vessel of fifty-five tons burden. On this occasion, which terminated fatally to himself, he passed the Strait, the mouth of which was first observed by Davis, and said to have been entered by Weymouth, then discovered the bay which bears his name, hauled his ship on shore in a convenient situation, and wintered there. The ship being victualled only for six months, they fell

[page] 83

short of provisions; and soon after the vessel was got afloat in the summer of 1611, the crew mutinied, barbarously forced their Captain, his son, and seven of the crew, mostly invalids, into a boat, with a most scanty supply of the necessaries of life, and abandoned them to a miserable fate. The chief of the mutineers, one Green, who had received the most distinguished favours from Hudson, being preserved by him from ruin, taken into his own house, and afterwards allowed to accompany him on his voyage, met with a speedy requital for his base ingratitude. He landed with some of his companions near the western extremity of Hudson's Strait, where he met with some savages, who, though at first they appeared on friendly terms, unexpectedly attacked his party, killed the base ingrate, and mortally wounded three others. Another person, said to be also among the chiefs in the mutiny, died of want on the passage homeward.

SIR THOMAS BUTTON, with two ships, proceeded towards the north-west in the year 1612, on the same track as the unfortunate Hudson pursued. He first stretched across to the western shore of Hudson's Bay, examined a part of the coast, and then took up his winter quarters in a creek on the north side of a river which he discovered, and named Nelson's River. As soon as the ice cleared away, he examined the western side of the bay, as high along Southampton Island as latitude 65°, gave names

F 2

[page] 84

to several headlands and islands, and returned to England in the autumn of 1613.

In the year 1615, ROBERT BYLOT, accompanied by the celebrated William Baffin as mate and companion, with one small vessel, visited the same quarter, and examined the eastern side of Southampton Island, as high as latitude 65° 26′. After spending three months in the frozen sea, without making any considerable discovery, they returned to England. The next year, (1616), Bylot, accompanied by WILLIAM BAFFIN as Pilot, proceeded to the examination of the sea lying north and west of Davis' Strait. They had but one vessel, the Discovery, of fifty-five tons burden, which had before been employed in four similar voyages, under Hudson in 1610, Button in 1612, Gibbon in 1614, and Bylot in the preceding year. In this little vessel, with seventeen persons on board, Baffin traced the west coast of Greenland up Davis' Strait, as high as the extremity of the extensive sea in the 78th degree of latitude, now named after him, as the discoverer; proceeded round by the western part of the bay as near the shore as the ice would permit, and down to the latitude of 65° 40′; having seen land, probably, all the way, excepting in the openings of some of the sounds, and in the interval between the latitudes of 70° 30′ and 68°, where he fell in with a large body of ice, and was under the necessity of taking a circuit to the east-ward.

[page] 85

This voyage of Baffin's being one of the most remarkable and important navigations ever accomplished in the same quarter of the globe, is worthy a more particular description. I shall, therefore, give an abstract of Baffin's narrative, as published by Purchas*.

They sailed from Gravesend on the 26th of March 1616; but owing to bad weather and contrary winds, did not clear the Channel until the 20th of April. After a good passage across the Atlantic, they proceeded without interruption, excepting from contrary winds, up Davis' Strait to latitude 70° 20′, where they anchored in a "fair sound" near Davis's London Coast. Here the tides rising only eight or nine feet, and keeping no certain course, Baffin was discouraged in the hope of a passage.

After remaining two days at this place, from whence all the inhabitants had fled, they weighed and plyed to the northward. On the 26th of May they fell in with a dead whale, and made the ship fast, to secure it: after having obtained 160 fins or blades of whalebone from it, a storm ensued, and it broke away from them.

May 30th, they reached Hope Sanderson, the northernmost land visited by Davis, lying between the parallels of 72° and 73°; and on the same evening fell in with ice, which they immediately entered, and pass-

* Pilgrimes, vol. iii. p. 814.

[page] 86

ed through the following day. The wind then blowing very hard at N. N. E., they put in among some islands, in latitude 72° 45′, from which the inhabitants fled on their approach, leaving only a few women behind, who hid themselves among the rocks. From this circumstance, the group was called Women's Islands. The wind being moderate, though still contrary, they sailed on the 4th and plyed to the northward, in a channel seven or eight leagues wide, between the ice and the land. Being much pestered with ice on the 9th, they anchored near three small islands, lying eight miles from the main, in latitude 74° 4′. The flood-tide here was very weak, but the ebb ran with a considerable stream, which Baffin attributed to the melting of the snow on the land. From hence they attempted to get to the northward and north-westward; but finding the ice impervious, though in a rapid state of dissolution, they put in among some islands in latitude 73° 45′, until there should be more room. Here they were visited by the natives to the amount of forty-two persons, who bartered skins and pieces of the tusks of sea-horses, and what are usually called unicorn's-horns, for beads, iron, and such like; from which the anchorage was named Horn Sound.

On the 18th they put to sea, and found the ice astonishingly dispersed, having stood to the westward nearly twenty leagues, and to the northward, as far as latitude 74° 30′, before they met with any

[page] 87

interruption. Afterwards, however, they experienced considerable inconvenience from ice, being occasionally beset, (yet never passing a day without making some progress,) until the 1st of July, when, in latitude 75° 40′, they got into an open sea. Here they stood twenty leagues off shore, before they fell in with ice, and the hope of a passage was again revived; but, on trying the tide on their return to the coast, this hope was again depressed.

The wind, on the 2d of July, veered to the southeast, and blew hard; and though the weather was thick, they were bold enough to run along the land to the northward. On the morning of the 3d, they passed a headland, in latitude 76° 35′, which they called Sir Dudley Diggs' Cape; and twelve leagues beyond it, they opened a bay, having an island in the midst, under which they anchored; but, in two hours time, the wind still blowing very hard, the ship drove, with two anchors down, and obliged them to set sail.' This bay, which Baffin reckons a fit place for killing whales, he named Wostenholme Sound.

On the 4th, the storm veered to W. by S., and was so furious that it blew away their fore-sail, and obliged them to lie adrift. Finding themselves embayed when the weather cleared a little, they set sail, and stretched across to the south-eastward, into a little cove, where they attempted "to bring up;" but the squalls from the hills being violent,

[page] 88

they lost both anchor and cable. The wind soon after abated, and they stood forth. This bay, lying in latitude 77° 30′, abounded with whales, and was, in consequence, named Whale Sound. Another large opening to the northward of this, extending beyond the latitude of 78°, they called Sir Thomas Smith's Sound; an island between these two bays was named Hackluyt's Isle; and a group lying twelve or thirteen leagues from the shore, they called Carey's Islands. They now stood a considerable distance to the westward, and were becalmed on the 10th near the land, beside another opening, which they named Alderman Jones' Sound. Near this place a boat was sent on shore. The land was now found trending to the southward, and began to show like a bay. Steering then along shore, they opened another large sound, in latitude 74° 20′, on the 12th of July, to which they gave the name of Sir James Lancaster's Sound. From this opening a ledge of ice was connected with the shore, along which they eoasted till the 14th, "by which time," says Baffin, "we were in the latitude of 71° 16′, and plainly perceived the land to the southward of 70° 30′; then we having so much ice round about us, were forced to stand more eastward, supposing to have been soon clear, and to have kept on the off side of the ice, until we had come into 70°, then to have stood in again." But in this they were disappointed; for they had

[page] 89

to run above sixty leagues to the eastward, before they got clear of the ice, and were many times so hampered that they could get no way. They were unable to approach the shore again until the 24th of July, when they were in latitude about 68°; and then, though they saw the land, they could not get nearer than eight or nine leagues. From this situation the ice led them into the latitude of 65° 40′, where, being hopeless of a passage, considering themselves in the indraft of Cumberland Islands, and the season being too far spent to return to the head of the bay to seek for whalebone, they stood across to the coast of Greenland, and put into Cockin Sound, in latitude 65° 45′, to refresh the crew, several of whom were sickly. Here, by the use of scurvy-grass, which they found in great abundance, and other suitable regimen, they were restored to health in a few days. This sound, described by Baffin as a very good harbour, they left on the 6th of August, and anchored all well (excepting one man, who died in Davis' Strait,) on the 30th of the same month in Dover Road.

Such was the extensive nature of the discoveries made on this occasion, and such the remarkable position given to the land, that, combined with the meagerness of all published accounts of the voyage, and the suppression of the chart and tables to which Baffin refers, occasioned a considerable doubt

[page] 90

both as to the truth of the narrative and the extent of the navigation. Thelate voyage, however, by Captain Ross and Lieutenant Parry, how much soever the public may feel disappointed as to the general issue, affords a pleasing confirmation of the faithfulness and accuracy of Baffin; and when we observe the brief and unostentatious manner in which he narrates the transactions of this important voyage, we cannot withhold our warmest admiration.

After the voyage of Baffin, it would be tedious even to enumerate the various expeditions which have been sent out on discovery into the Arctic seas, all of which have failed in their principal object. I shall therefore close this brief and imperfect sketch of the progress of northern discovery, with observing, that, whatever has been added to the discoveries of Willoughby, Davis, Hudson and Baffin, among English voyagers, and to the discoveries of Barentz, Heemskerke, and Ryp, among the Dutch, consists only in the explorations by the Russians and the Dutch of the northern shores of the Continent of Europe and Asia, and in the researches by the British about the shores of Spitzbergen, and in the bays of Hudson and Baffin. A tabular enumeration of all the voyages undertaken in search of a northern communication between the Atlantic and Pacific, with a brief view

[page] 91

of the result of each expedition, which is included in the Appendix to this volume, No. III., will afford all the information requisite to be given in this work, with regard to those voyages that I have passed over without notice,

[page] 92

CHAPTER II.

DESCRIPTIVE ACCOUNT OF SOME OF THE POLAR COUNTRIES*.

SECT. I.

Account of Spitzbergen and the Islands immediately adjacent,

SPITZBERGEN extends farthest towards the north of any country yet discovered. It is surrounded, hy the Arctic Ocean or Greenland Sea; and though

* When I first formed the design of presenting to the public the result of my observations, made in the course of repeated visits to the coast of Spitzbergen, and neighbouring regions, it was my intention to give a general description of all the countries lying within the Arctic Zone; but the excellent works of Sir George Mackenzie, and of the Reverend Ebenezer Henderson, on Iceland, which have recently appeared, and the voyages of our navigators into Baffin's Bay, and the work of Professor Giesecké on Greenland, which have been announced, render it unnecessary for me to give any account of these countries. I now, therefore, abridge my original plan, by excluding the intended description of Iceland and West Greenland, and confine my remarks to those regions, of which, from personal observation in general, I am better able to give an original description.

[page] 93

the occasional resort of persons, drawn thither for purposes of hunting and fishing, does not appear to have ever been inhabited. It lies between the latitudes 76° 30′ and 80° 7′ N., and between the longitudes of 9° and perhaps 22° E.; but some of the neighbouring islands extend at least as far north as 80° 40′, and still farther towards the east than the mainland of Spitzbergen. The western part of this country was discovered by BARENTZ, Heemskerke and Ryp, in two vessels fitted out of Amsterdam, on the 19th of June 1596, who, from the numerous peaks and acute mountains observed on the coast, gave it the appropriate name of Spitzbergen, signifying sharp mountains. It was afterwards named Newland, or King James' Newland, and then Greenland, being supposed to be a continuation towards the east of the country so called by the Icelanders. It was rediscovered by Henry Hudson, an English navigator, in 1607, and four years afterwards became the resort of the English, for the purpose of taking whales, since which period, its shores have annually been visited by one or other of the nations of Europe, with the same object, to the present time. And though the soil of the whole of this remote country does not produce vegetables suitable or sufficient for the nourishment of a single human being, yet its coasts and adjacent seas have afforded riches and independence to thousands.

[page] 94

This country exhibits many interesting views, with numerous examples of the sublime. Its stupendous hills rising by steep acclivities from the very margin of the ocean to an immense height; its surface, contrasting the native protruding dark-coloured rocks, with the burden of purest snow and magnificent ices, altogether constitute an extraordinary and beautiful picture.

The whole of the western coast is mountainous and picturesque; and though it is shone upon by a four months' sun every year, its snowy covering is never wholly dissolved, nor are its icy monuments of the dominion of frost ever removed The valleys opening towards the coast, and terminating in the back ground with a transverse chain of mountains, are chiefly filled with everlasting ice. The inland valleys, at all seasons, present a smooth and continued bed of snow, in some places divided by considerable rivulets, but in others exhibiting a pure unbroken surface for many leagues in extent. Along the west coast, the mountains take their rise from within a league of the sea, and some from its very edge. Few tracts of table-land of more than a league in breadth are to be seen, and in many places the blunt termination of mountain-ridges project beyond the regular line of the coast, and overhang the waters of the ocean. The southern part of Spitzbergen consists of groups of insulated mountains, little disposed in chains, or in any determinate order, having conical, pyramidal, or ridged

[page] 95

summits, sometimes round-backed, frequently terminating in points, and occasionally in acute peaks, not unlike spires. An arm of a short mountain-chain, however, forms the southern Cape or Point-look-out; but a low flat, in the form of a fish's tail, of about forty square miles in surface, constitutes the termination of the coast. Other promontories lying nearly north and south, are of a similar nature. The middle of Charles' Island is occupied by a mountain-chain of about thirty miles in length, rising on the west side from the sea, and on the east from a small stripe of table-land, only a few feet above the level of the ocean. In some parts of the coast, indeed, the table-land, from which the mountains take their rise, is even below the level of the high water mark, and is only prevented from being covered, by a natural sea-bank of shingle, thrown up in many places to the height of ten or fifteen feet.

To the northward of Charles' Island, the mountains are more disposed in chains than they are to the southward. The principal ridge lies nearly north and south; and the principal valley extends from the head of Cross Bay to the northern face of the country, a distance of 40 or 50 miles. An inferior chain of hills, two or three leagues from the coast, runs parallel with the shore, from which lateral ridges project into the sea, and terminate in mural precipices. Between these lateral

[page] 96

ridges, some of the most remarkable icebergs on the coast occur. Along the northern shore of Spitz-bergen, and towards the north-east, the land is neither so elevated, nor are the hills so sharp-pointed, as on the western coast. Indeed, some of the islands, and considerable tracts of the main, consist of comparatively low land. With regard to the land about Red Hill, it has been observed, that there is more natural earth and clay, though with even less vegetation, than on almost any other part of the coast which has been visited. The most remarkable mountains I have seen, are situated near Horn Sound, on Charles' Island, and near King's Bay. Horn Mount, or Hedge-hog Mount, so called from an appearance of spines on the top when seen in some positions, takes its rise from a small tract of alpine land, on the southern side of Horn Sound. It has different summits, chiefly in the form of spires, one of which is remarkably acute and elevated. I had an opportunity of determining its height in the year 1815. From one set of observations, its altitude came out 1457 yards, and from another 1473, the mean of which is 1465 yards, or 4395 feet*. Another peak, a few miles farther to the northward, appeared to be 3306 feet high.

* See a representation of this Mountain in Plate 3.

[page] 97

On Charles'. Island is a curious peak, which juts into the sea. It is crooked, perfectly naked, being equally destitute of snow and verdure, and, from its black appearance or pointed figure, has been denqminated the Devil's Thumb. Its height may be about 1500 or 2000 feet. The Middle-Hook of the Foreland, as the central part of the chain of mountains in Charles' Island is called, is a very interesting part of the coast. These mountains, which arc, perhaps, the highest land adjoining the sea which is to be met with, take their rise at the water's edge, and by a continued ascent of an angle at first of about 30°, and increasing to 45° or more, each comes to a point, with the elevation of about six-sevenths of an English mile. This portion of the chain exhibits five distinct summits, the elevation of the highest of which, as determined by Captain Phipps, is 4500 feet, and of the lowest, by estimation, above 4000 feet. Some of these summits are, to appearance, within half a league, horizontal distance, of the margin of the sea. The points formed by the top of two or three of them, are so fine, that the imagination is at a loss to conceive of a place, on which an adventurer, attempting the hazardous exploit of climbing one of the summits, might rest*. Were such an undertaking practicable, it is evident it could not be effected without imminent danger.

VOL. I. G

* See Plate 3. fig.3.

[page] 98

Besides extraordinary courage and strength requisite in the adventurer, such an attempt would need the utmost powers of exertion, as well as the most irresistible perseverance. Frederick Martens, in his excellent account of a "Voyage to Spitzbergen," undertaken in the year 1671, describes some of the cliffs as consisting of but one stone from the bottom to the top, or as appearing like an old decayed wall, and as smelling very sweet, where covered with lichens, In Magdalene Bay, the rocks he describes as lying in a semicircular form, having at each extremity two high mountains, with natural excavations, "after the fashion of a breast-work," and at their summits, points and cracks like battlements.

Some of the mountains of Spitzbergen are well proportioned four-sided pyramids, rising out of a base of a mile or a mile and a half, to a league square; others form angular chains, resembling the roof of a house, which recede from the shore in parallel ridges, until they dwindle into obscurity in the distant perspective. Some exhibit the exact resemblance of art, but in a style of grandeur exceeding the famed pyramids of the East, or even the more wonderful Tower of Babel, the presumptive design and arrogant continuation of which, was checked by the miraculous confusion of tongues. An instance of such a regular and magnificent work of Nature, is seen near the head of King's Bay, consisting of three piles of rocks, of a regular form, known by

[page] 99

the name of the Three Crowns. They rest on the top of the ordinary mountains, each commencing with a square table or horizontal stratum of rock, on the top of which is another of similar form and height, but of a smaller area; this is continued by a third, a fourth, and so on, each succeeding stratum being less than the next below it, until it forms a pyramid of steps, almost as regular, to appearance, as if worked by art. I do not know that the Three Crowns have ever been visited, or what may be their actual form; but the appearance I have attempted to describe, is that which they exhibit at the distance of from five to ten leagues. In Plate 3. is a representation of these interesting objects, seen at the distance of at least thirty miles.

Many of the mountains of Spitzbergen are inaccessible. The steepness of the ascent, and the looseness of the rocks, with the numerous lodgments of ice in the clefts or sides of the cliffs, constitute, in many places, insurmountable obstacles. Some hills, indeed, may be climbed with tolerable safety, but generally the attempt is hazardous. Martens notices the necessity of marking every step with chalk, as the adventurer climbs the rugged mountain, otherwise he will not know how to get down. In advancing, he observes, it seems easy enough to be done, but in descending, it is found so difficult and

G 2

[page] 100

dangerous, that many have fallen and lost their lives in the attempt*.

When Barentz and Heemskerke discovered Cherry Island, on their advance towards the north, when they also discovered Spitzbergen, some daring fellows among their sailors, who had been collecting birds' eggs, climbed a high steep mountain, resembling those of Spitzbergen, where they unexpectedly found themselves in a most perilous situation; for, on turning to descend, the way by which they had advanced presented a dismal assemblage of pointed rocks, perpendicular precipices, and yawning chasms. The view of the danger of the descent struck them with terror. No relief, however, could be afforded them, and they were obliged to make the attempt. They soon lost the track by which they had reached the summit, and were bewildered I among the rocks. At length, after a most anxious and painful exercise, in which they found it necessary to slide down the rocks, while lying flat on their bodies, they reached the foot of the cliff in safety. Earentz, who had observed their conduct from the shore, gave them a sharp reproof for their rash temerity †.

* Martens' Voyage, originally printed in the Dutch language, has been translated into English, and published in "An Account of several late Voyages and Discoveries to the South and North." London, 1694, Svo.

† Beschryving, &c. vol. iii.

[page] 101

A merchant of Holland, of the name of Kiin, who accompanied the first Dutch ship which sailed to the Spitzbergen whale-fishery, in the year 1612, undertook the dangerous achievement of climbing one of the principal mountains on Charles' Island. He made some progress in the bold attempt, but slipping his foot, he fell down the steep acclivity and broke his neck.

One of the most interesting appearances to be found in Spitzbergen, is the Iceberg. This term, written Ysberg by the Dutch, signifies ice-mountain. I speak not here of the islands of ice which are borne to southern climates on the bosom of the ocean, but of those prodigious lodgments of ice which occur in the valleys adjoining the coast of Spitzbergen and other Polar countries, from which the floating icebergs seem to be derived. Where a chain of hills lies parallel to the line of the coast, and within a few miles distance of the sea-beach, having lateral ridges jutting towards the sea, at intervals of a league or two, we have a most favourable situation for the formation of icebergs. Such is precisely the nature of the situation a little to the northward of Charles' Island, where the conspicuous bodies of ice noticed by Martens, Phipps and others, and known by the name of the Seven Icebergs, occur. Each of these occupies a deep valley, opening towards the sea, formed by hills of about 2000 feet elevation on the sides, and termina.

[page] 102

ted in the interior by the chain of mountains, of perhaps 3000 to 3500 feet in height, which follows the line of the coast. They are exactly of the nature and appearance of glaciers; they commence at the margin of the sea, where they frequently constitute a considerable precipice, and extend along the valley, which commonly rises with a gentle slope, until they are either terminated by the brow of the mountain in the back-ground, or interrupted by a precipitous summit. Besides these icebergs, there are some, equally large, near the north-west angle of Spitzbergen, in King's Bay and in Cross Bay, and some of much greater magnitude near Point-look-out, besides many others of various sizes, in the large sounds on the western side, and along the northern and eastern shores of this remarkable country.

The Seven Icebergs are each, on an average, about a mile in length, and perhaps near 200 feet in height at the sea-edge; but some of those to the southward are much greater. A little to the northward of Horn Sound, is the largest iceberg I have seen. It occupies eleven miles in length, of the sea-coast. The highest part of the precipitous front adjoining the sea is, by measurement, 402 feet, and it extends backward toward the summit of the mountain, to about four times that elevation, Its surface forms a beautiful inclined plane of smooth snow; the edge is uneven and perpendicu-

[page] 103

lar. At the distance of fifteen miles, the frontedge. subtended an angle of ten minutes of a degree. Near the South Cape lies another iceberg, nearly as extensive as this. It occupies the space between two lateral ridges of hills, and reaches the very summit of the mountain, in the back-ground, on which it rests.

It is not easy to form an adequate conception of these truly wonderful productions of Nature. Their magnitude, their beauty, and the contrast they form with the gloomy rocks around, produce sensations of lively interest. Their upper surfaces are generally concave; the higher parts are always covered with snow, and have a beautiful appearance; but the lower parts, in the latter end of every summer, present a bare surface of ice. The front of each, which varies in height from the level of the ocean, to 400 or 500 feet above it, lies parallel with the shore, and is generally washed by the sea. This part, resting on the strand, is undermined to such an extent by the sea, when in any way turbulent, that immense masses, loosened by the freezing of water lodged in the recesses in winter, or by the effect of streams of water running over its surface and through its chasms in summer, break asunder, and with a thundering noise fall into the sea. But as the water is in most places shallow in front of these icebergs, the masses which are dislodged are commonly reduced into fragments before

[page] 104

they can be floated away into the main sea. This fact seems to account for the rarity of icebergs in the Spitzbergen sea

The front surface of icebergs is glistening and uneven. Wherever a part has recently broken off, the colour of the fresh fracture is a beautiful greenish-blue, approaching to emerald green; but such parts as have long been exposed to the air, are of a greenish-grey colour, and at a distance sometimes exhibit the appearance of cliffs of whitish marble. In all cases, the effect of the iceberg is to form a pleasing variety in prospect, with the magnificence of the encompassing snow-clad mountains, which, as they recede from the eye, seem to "rise crag above crag," in endless perspective.

On an excursion to one of the Seven Icebergs, in July 1818, I was particularly fortunate in witnessing one of the grandest effects which these Polar glaciers ever present. A strong north-westerly swell having for some hours been beating on the shore, had loosened a number of fragments attached to the iceberg, and various heaps of broken ice denoted recent shoots of the seaward edge. As we rowed towards it with a view of proceeding close to its base, I observed a few little pieces fall from the top, and while my eye was fixed upon the place, an immense column, probably fifty feet square, and one hundred and fifty feet high, began to leave the parent ice at the top, and leaning majestically forward

[page] 105

with an accelerated velocity, fell with an awful crash into the sea. The water into which it plunged was converted into an appearance of vapour or smoke, like that from a furious cannonading. The noise was equal to that of thunder, which it nearly resembled. The column which fell was nearly square, and in magnitude resembled a church. It broke into thousands of pieces. This circumstance was a happy caution; for we might inadvertently have gone to the very base of the icy cliff, from whence masses of considerable magnitude were continually breaking. This iceberg was full of rents, as high as any of our people ascended upon it, extending in a direction perpendicularly downward, and dividing it into innumerable columns. The surface was very uneven, being furrowed and cracked all over. This roughness appeared to be occasioned by the melting of the snow, some streams of water being seen running over the surface; and others having worn away the superficial ice, could still be heard pursuing their course through subglacial channels to the front of the iceberg, where, in transparent streams, or in small cascades, they fell into the sea. In some places, chasms of several yards in width were seen, in others they were only a few inches or feet across. One of the sailors who attempted to walk across the iceberg, imprudently stept into a narrow chasm filled up with snow to the general level. He instantly plunged up

[page] 106

to his shoulders, and might, but for the sudden extension of his arms, have been buried in the gulf.

In the first ages of the Spitzbergen fishery, when the ships frequented the bays and harbours, and sometimes moored close to the shore, many serious disasters were occasioned by the fall of pieces of icebergs. An instance is recorded by PURCHAS in his "Pilgrimes." One of the Russia Company's ships, which was on the whale-fishery in the year 1619, was driven on shore in Bell Sound, by ice setting in from the sea. The Captain, with most of his crew and boats, was absent at the time of the accident; but on the first intelligence, caused his boats to be hauled up on the ice, and proceeded on board to endeavour to get the ship off. After they had been using every endeavour for this purpose during about an hour, a main piece of an adjoining ice-cliff came down, and almost overwhelmed the vessel and her crew in its ruins. The shock must have been tremendous. The ice which fell, struck the ship so high and so forcibly, that it carried away the fore-mast, "broke the main-mast," sprung the bowsprit, and flung the ship over with such violence, that a piece of ordnance was thrown overboard from under the half-deck; and the Captain and some of the crew were projected in the same way. The Captain, notwithstanding his imminent danger, with fragments of ice flying in all directions, and the masts of the ship falling around

[page] 107

him, escaped unhurt; but the mate, and two more of the crew, were killed, and many others were wounded*.

Icebergs are probably formed of more solid ice than glaciers; but in every other respect they are very similar. The ice of which they consist is, indeed, a little porous; but considerable pieces are found of perfect transparency. Being wholly produced from rain or snow, the water is necessarily potable. Icebergs have also the same kind of origin as glaciers. The time of their foundation, or first stratum being frozen, is probably nearly coeval with the land on which they are lodged. Their subsequent increase seems to have been produced by the congelation of the sleet of summer or autumn, and of the bed of snow annually accumulated in winter, which, being partly dissolved by the summer sun, becomes consolidated; and, on the decline of the summer heat, frozen into a new stratum of transparent ice. Snow subjected by a gentle heat to a thawing process, is first converted into large grains of ice, and these are united, and afterwards consolidated, under particular circumstances, by the water which filters through among them. If, when this imperfectly congealed mass has got cooled down below the freezing temperature by an interval of cold weather,

* Letter of John Chambers to William Heley, dated Bell Sound, 16th June 1619;—Purchas' "Pilgrimes," vol. iii. p. 731.

[page] 108

the sun break out and operate on the upper surface so as to dissolve it, the water Which results runs into the porous mass, progressively fills the cavities, and being then exposed to an internal temperature sufficiently low, freezes the whole into a solid body. Or if, when the ice has been cooled by a low temperature, a fog or sleet occur, it is frozen as it falls, and encrusts the body of the iceberg with an additional varnish of ice.

Icebergs are as permanent as the rocks on which they rest; for though large portions may be frequently separated from the lower edge, or, by large avalanches from the mountain summit, be hurled into the sea, yet the annual growth replenishes the loss, and, probably on the whole, produces a perpetual increase. But the annual supply of ice is not only added to the upper part, but also to the precipitous crest facing the sea; which addition being run into, or suspended over the ocean, admits of new fragments being detached, and of the renewal of the vitreous surface which it presents to the eye after each separation. In some places, indeed, where the sea is almost perpetually covered with ice, the berg or glacier makes its way to a great extent into the sea, until it reaches the depth in the water, of several hundreds of feet; and then being capable of large dismemberments, gives rise to the kind of mountainous masses or icebergs, found afloat in such abundance in the sea to the westward

[page] 109

of Greenland. Thus, the extent of surface occupied by each iceberg, is limited by the mountains on three sides, and by the sea, in a measure, on the fourth; but as to its thickness, there seems no natural obstacle to its perpetual increase.

Spitzbergen and its islands, with some other countries within the Arctic circle, exhibit a kind of scenery which is altogether novel. The principal objects which strike the eye, are innumerable mountainous peaks, ridges, precipices, or needles, rising immediately out of the sea, to an elevation of 3000 or 4000 feet, the colour of which, at a moderate distance, appears to be blackish shades of brown, green, grey and purple; snow or ice in striæ or patches, occupying the various clefts and hollows in the sides of the hills, capping some of the mountain summits, and filling with extended beds the most considerable valleys; and ice of the glacier form, occurring at intervals all along the coast, in particular situations as already described, in prodigious accumulations. The glistening or vitreous appearance of the iceberg precipices; the purity, whiteness, and beauty of the sloping expanse, formed by their snowy surfaces; the gloomy shade presented by the adjoining or intermixed mountains and rocks, perpetually "covered with a mourning veil of black lichens," with the sudden transitions into a robe of purest white, where patches or beds

[page] 110

of snow occur, present a variety and extent of contrast altogether peculiar; which, when enlightened by the occasional ethereal brilliancy of the Polar sky, and harmonized in its serenity with the calmness of the ocean, constitute a picture both novel and magnificent. There is, indeed, a kind of majesty, not to be conveyed in words, in these extraordinary accumulations of snow and ice in the valleys, and in the rocks above rocks, and peaks above peaks, in the mountain groups, seen rising above the ordinary elevation of the clouds, and terminating occasionally in crests of everlasting snow, especially when you approach the shore under shelter of the impenetrable density of a summer fog; in which case the fog sometimes disperses like the drawing of a curtain, when the strong contrast of light and shade, heightened by a cloudless atmosphere and powerful sun, bursts on the senses in a brilliant exhibition, resembling the production of magic.

To this strong contrast of light and shade, with the great height and steepness of the mountains, is to be attributed a remarkable deception in the apparent distance of the land. Any strangers to the Arctic countries, however well acquainted with other regions, and however capable of judging of the, distance of land generally, must be completely at a loss in their estimations when they approach within sight of Spitzbergen. When at the distance of twenty miles, it would be no difficult matter to induce even

[page] 111

a judicious stranger to undertake a passage in a boat to the shore, from the belief that he was within a league of the land. At this distance, the portions of rock and patches of snow, as well as the contour of the different hills, are as distinctly marked, as similar objects, in many other countries, not having snow about them, would be at a fourth or a fifth part of the same distance. Not, indeed, strangers only, but persons who have been often to Spitzbergen, such as the officers and seamen of the whale-ships, have not unfrequently imagined, that their ship could not stand an hour towards the land without running aground; and yet, perhaps, the ship has sailed three or four hours directly "in shore," and still been remote from danger. This is a fact which I have seen realized among my own officers repeatedly. There are circumstances, indeed, when, by a slight change in the density of the atmosphere, a ship, after sailing towards the land for some hours, may appear to be as far off as at first. Thus, in clear weather, the high land of Spitzbergen is perfectly well defined, and every thing on it appears distinct, when at the distance of forty miles. If, after sailing five hours towards the shore, from this situation, at the rate of four or five knots per hour, the atmosphere should become a little hazy, or even only dark and cloudy, the land might appear to be further distant than before. Hence we can account, on a reasonable ground, for a curious circumstance

[page] 112

related in a Danish voyage, undertaken for the recovery of the last colony in Greenland, by Mogens Heinson. This person, who passed for a renowned seaman in his day, was sent out by Frederick II. King of Denmark. After encountering many difficulties and dangers from storms and ice, he got sight of the east coast of Greenland, and attempted to get to it; but though the sea was quite free from ice, and the wind favourable, and blowing a fresh gale, he, after proceeding several hours without appearing to get any nearer the land, became alarmed, tacked about, and returned to Denmark. On his arrival, he attributed this extraordinary circumstance, magnified, no doubt, by his fears, to his vessel having been stopped in its course by "some loadstone rocks hidden in the sea." Most authors who have had occasion to refer to Heinson's voyage, have speculated on this circumstance; but no one, I believe, has satisfactorily explained the origin of his fears. The true cause, however, of what he took to be a submarine magnetic influence, arose, I doubt not, from the deceptive character of the land as to distance, which I have attempted to describe.

From this character of Spitzbergen, there is little probability of strangers getting too near the shore, or running into danger; for even in hazy or snowy weather, the effulgence of the land penetrates the density of the atmosphere, to several times the extent to which other objects are visible; and even

[page] 113

in fogs, the tops of the mountains frequently appear above the region occupied by the densest stratum of mist, and warn the navigator of his advance into danger.

The same deception in the distance of terrestrial objects, and, consequently, in their real magnitude, prevails when a person is on shore, as when he views them from a station at sea. Whenever a little table land is found between the beach and the foot of the mountains, the distance across it will seldom appear above a furlong or two, though it actually should be nearly a league. Martens alluding to this deception, says, "The miles in Spitzbergen seem to be very short; but when you attempt to walk them upon the land, you will soon be weary, and undeceived."

Spitzbergen abounds with deep bays and extensive sounds, in many of which are excellent harbours. Instead of describing the situation and extent of each of these bays and sounds, which may be known by inspection of the accompanying map*, or by reference to the table of latitudes and longitudes in the Appendix, No. IV., I shall only no

VOL. I. H

* In the map of Spitzbergen, an extent of coast of above 200 miles, included between Point-look-out and Hackluyt's Headland, is laid down from an original survey. In several particular situations I found an error of 10 miles of latitude and 2 or 3 degrees of longitude, in our most approved charts.

[page] 114

tice such of the harbours, or other particular parts of the coast, as have been visited by myself or described by others.

From Point-look-out to Hackluyt's Headland, the west coast of Spitzbergen forms almost a series of rocks and foul ground; few parts, excepting the bays, affording anchorage for ships. In many place the rocks run off shore, to the distance of two or three miles, or even as many leagues, especially between Point-look-out and Horn Sound, and between the latter and Bell Sound; also near Black Point on the Foreland, as well as near some of the projections of this island; at Mitre Cape on the main, and near one of the Seven Icebergs, &c. Some of these rocks are dangerous to shipping, drying only at low water, or only showing themselves when the sea is high; others are constantly above water, or altogether so far below the surface, that they can either be seen and avoided, or sailed over in moderate weather without much hazard. On the east-side of Point-look-out, a ridge of stony ground stretches five leagues into the sea towards the south-east, on which the sea occasionally breaks.

Horn Sound affords tolerable anchorage; within Bell Sound are several anchoring places and some rivers; and in Ice-Sound, at Green-Harbour, is good anchorage near the bank, in ten to eight fa thorns water, or less. In several other places, when not encumbered with ice, there is pretty good

[page] 115

refuge for ships. But when these places are accessible, it is generally necessary to beware of the motions of the ice along the coast; for, in the latter end of summer or in the course of the autumn, when the ice begins to set in from the southward, it is time to be gone, otherwise ships are in danger of getting blockaded with it during the winter. On the side of Fair Foreland next the main, is a sandy bank, on which is good anchorage; also in English Bay, West Cross Bay, Magdalena Bay, Smeerenberg, the Norways, Vogel Saug, Love Bay, &c. there are good roadsteads. Fair Haven, consisting of several sounds among the islands lying on the north-west corner of Spitzbergen, was surveyed in the year 1773 by Captain Phipps. In one of these sounds, included between Vogel Sang and Cloven Cliff, as well as in the harbour of Smeerenberg, the expedition under Captain Phipps anchored. The former is represented as a good roadstead, but open from N. E, to N. W. But though exposed to the northward, the sound of Vogel Sang "is not liable to any inconvenience from that circumstance, the main body of the ice lying so near as to prevent any great sea; nor are ships in any danger from the loose ice setting in, as this road communicates with several others formed by different islands, between all which there are safe

H 2

[page] 116

passages*." This place, called also the North Harbour, is easily known, from the remarkable appearance of Cloven Cliff, the north-easternmost land seen from the anchorage. Being an insulated cliff, joining the other land only by a long narrow isthmus, it preserves in all situations nearly the same form; and being nearly perpendicular, is never disguised with snow. Besides this roadstead, is Cook's Hole, about two miles to the eastward, the Norways, a league and a quarter towards the south-east, and Smeerenberg, one of the best sheltered harbours on this coast, about eleven miles towards the south-west. The latter, formed between Amsterdam and other islands, and the main, affords good anchorage in thirteen fathoms, sandy bottom, not far from the shore †. The outlets are by the north, by the west, and by the south-west, three good channels: the western one, however, is a little obstructed with rocks.

On the north and east sides of Spitzbergen, are several harbours, some of them very safe and commodious; but they are not so often free from ice as those to the westward, and therefore have seldom been visited.

* PHIPP's Voyage towards the North Pole, p. 44.

† Idem, p. 68.

[page] 117

The access to some of the harbours of Spitzbergen, is, under some circumstances, and with certain winds, somewhat difficult, if not dangerous. Calms, from the shelter afforded by the high and precipitous mountains, are frequent in some harbours, and eddy-winds, squalls and whirlwinds, are found occasionally to prevail.

Though the whale-fishers in the present age generally see the land of Spitzbergen every voyage, yet not many of them visit its shores. Few opportunities indeed occur, for satisfying a rational curiosity, in the examination of this remarkable country. My Father, however, has been several times on shore in different parts. In the year 1813, he cruised for several days among the islands of Fair Haven; and in 1816, had boats on shore at Point-look-out. Here they observed several huts, forming the summer residences of the Russian hunters or fishers, who frequent this remote country, one of which, from a date marked on the side of it, appeared to have stood ever since the year 1784. A post erected near the beach, as a mark, probably, for the best landing place, or for a signal staff, was curiously carved with a number of grotesque figures. They observed something curious in the structure of the rocks, and in the productions of the country; but the dangers of the coast prevented them from making that examination which was desirable,

[page] 118

My first landing in an arctic country, was on Charles' Island or Fair Foreland, at the north-west point. On this occasion, I expected to have had time for a particular exploration of the country, as the weather was calm and clear when I went on shore; but suddenly, a thick fog and breeze of wind commencing, obliged us to put off with haste, and subjected us to great anxiety before we found the ship. As nothing particular was observed, which did not occur on future excursions, it is unnecessary to give any account of the objects of interest which excited my attention. I shall only mention, that the number of birds seen in the precipices and rocks adjoining the sea, was immense; and the noise which they made on our approach was quite deafening.

In the summer of 1818, I was several times on shore on the main near Mitre Cape*, and landed

* This being a remarkable point, and dangerous to shipping going into King's Bay or Cross Bay, being surrounded with blind rocks, and yet, as far as I could discover, without a name, I ventured to denominate it Mitre Cape, from an insulated rock about 1500 feet in height, which terminates the high land stretching towards the south, being cleft down the middle, and having the form of a mitre. For the sake of brevity in description, as well as perspicuity, I have also ventured to apply names to two or three other remarkable parts of the land, which have hitherto stood in the charts undistinguished.

[page] 119

once, in the same season, on the north side of King's Bay. Being near the land on the evening of the 23d of July, the weather beautifully clear, and all our sails becalmed by the hills, excepting the topgallant sails, in which we had constantly a gentle breeze, I left the ship in charge of a principal officer, with orders to stand no nearer than into thirty fathoms water, and with two boats and fourteen men rowed to the shore. We arrived at the beach about 7½ P.M., and landed on a track of low flat ground, extending about six miles north and south, and two or three east and west, from the east side of which, a mountain-arm takes its rise, terminating on the south with the remarkable insulated cliff constituting Mitre Cape. This table Land lies so low, that it would be overflown by the sea, were it not for a natural embankment of shingle thrown up by the sea; indeed, from the sea-weed and driftwood found upon it, it seems at no very remote period, to have been covered by the tide. The shingle forming the sea-bank consists, in general, of remarkably round pebbles; many of them being calcareous, are prettily veined.

After advancing about half a furlong from the sea, we met with mica-slate, in nearly perpendicular strata; and a little farther on, with an extensive bed of limestone in small angular fragments. Here and there we saw large ponds of fresh water, derived from melted ice and snow;

[page] 120

in some places small remains of snow; and, lastly, near the base of the mountains, a considerable morass, into which we sunk nearly to the knees. Some unhealthy looking mosses appeared on this swamp; but the softest part, as well as most of the ground we had hitherto traversed, was entirely void of vegetation. This swamp had a moorish look, and consisted apparently of black alluvial soil, mixed with some vegetable remains, and was curiously marked on the surface with small polygonal ridges, from one to three yards in diameter, so combined, as to give the ground an appearance similar to that exhibited by a section of honeycomb. An ascent of a few yards from the morass, on somewhat firmer ground, brought us to the foot of the first mountain to the northward of the Mitre. Here, some pretty specimens of Saxifraga oppositifolia and Groenlandica, Salix herbacea, Drabaalpina, Papaver alpina (of Mr Don,) &c.; and some other plants in full flower, were found on little tufts of soil, and scattered about on the ascent. The first hill rose at an inclination of 45 degrees, to the height of about 1500 feet, and was joined on the north side to another of about twice the elevation. We began to climb the acclivity on the most accessible side, at about 10 P. M.; but from the looseness of the stones and the steepness of the ascent, we found it a most difficult undertaking. There was scarcely a possibility of advancing by the common movement

[page] 121

of walking; for in this attempt the ground gave way at every step, and no progress was made: hence the only method of succeeding was by the effort of leaping or running, which, under the peculiar circumstances, could not be accomplished without excessive fatigue. In the direction we travelled, we met with angular fragments of limestone and quartz, chiefly of one or two pounds weight, and a few naked rocks protruding through the loose materials of which the side of the mountain, to the extent it was visible, was principally composed. These rocks appeared solid at a little distance, but on examination were found to be full of fractures in every direction, so that it was with difficulty that a specimen of five or six pounds weight, in a solid mass, could be obtained. Along the side of the first range of hills near the summit, was extended a band of ice and snow, which, in the direct ascent, we tried in vain to surmount. By great exertion, however, in tracing the side of the hill for about 200 yards, where it was so uncommonly steep that at every step showers of stones were precipitated to the bottom, we found a sort of angle of the hill free from ice, by which the summit was scaled.

Here we rested until I took a few angles and bearings of the most prominent parts of the coast; when, having collected specimens of the minerals, and such few plants as the barren ridge afforded, we proceeded on our excursion. In our way to the

[page] 122

principal mountain near us, we passed along a ridge of the secondary mountains, which was so acute that I sat across it with a leg on each side, as on horseback. One side of it made an angle with the horizon of 50°, and the other of 40°. To the very top, it consisted of loose sharp limestones, of a yellowish or reddish colour, smaller in size than the stones generally used for repairing high roads, few pieces being above a pound in weight. The fracture appeared rather fresh. After passing along this ridge about three or four furlongs, and crossing a lodgment of ice and snow, we descended by a sort of ravine to the side of the principal mountain, which arose with a uniformly steep ascent, similar to that we had already surmounted, to the very summit. The ascent was now even more difficult than before: we could make no considerable progress but by the exertion of leaping and running; so that we were obliged to rest after every fifty or sixty paces. No solid rock was met with, and no earth or soil. The stones, however, were larger; appeared more decayed; and were more uniformly covered with black lichens; but several plants of the saxifraga, salix, draba, cochlearia, and juncus genera, which had' been met with here and there for the first two thousand feet of elevation, began to disappear as we approached the summit. The invariably broken state of the rocks appeared to have been the effect of frost. On calcareous rocks, some of which

[page] 123

are not impervious to moisture, the effect is such as might he expected; hut how frost cau operate in this way on quartz, is not so easily understood.

As we completed the arduous ascent, the sun had just reached the meridian below the Pole, and still shed his reviving rays of unimpaired brilliancy on a small surface of snow which capped the mountain's summit. A thermometer placed among stones in the shade of the brow of the hill, indicated a temperature as high as 37°. At the top of the first hill, the temperature was 42°; and at the foot, on the plain, 44° to 46°: so that, at the very peak of the mountain, estimated at 3000 feet elevation, the power of the sun, at midnight, produced a temperature several degrees above the freezing point, and occasioned the discharge of streams of water from the snow-capped summit.

It may appear a little remarkable, that an effect of cold, amounting to perpetual frost, that is observed in elevated situations, in temperate, and even in hot climates, does not occur on the tops of considerable mountains in Spitzbergen: and it is really extraordinary, that inferior mountains, such as Ben Nevis, in Scotland, the elevation of which is only about 4380 feet, should sometimes exhibit a crest of snow throughout the year; while, in Spitzbergen, where the mean annual temperature is about 30° lower than in Scotland, and the mountains little inferior in elevation, the snow should sometimes be wholly

[page] 124

dissolved, at the most considerable heights. The higher Alps, excepting what is absolutely perpendicular, remain constantly covered with snow; and perhaps no instance of a thawing temperature ever occurs on any of the most elevated summits. But, in Spitzbergen, the frost relaxes in the months of July and August, and a thawing temperature prevails for considerable intervals on the greatest heights which have been visited. Martens observes, that in some of the countries of Europe, when rain falls in the valleys, snow descends upon the mountains, even in the height of summer; but that in Spitzbergen, rain falls on the tops of the highest hills.

As the capacity of air for heat increases as its density decreases, and that in such a degree that about every ninety yards of elevation in the lower atmosphere produces a depression of one degree of temperature of Fahrenheit, we find that the elevation of some of the Alps, Pyrenees, and mountains of Nepaul, in the temperate zone, and of the Andes and others in the torrid zone, is such, that their summits are above the level where a temperature of thawing can at any time prevail; and though, by the application of this principle to the mountains of Spitzbergen, we find that a thawing temperature may be occasionally expected; yet we do not see how the prevalence of a thaw should be so continual as

[page] 125

to disperse the winter's coat of snow, where the mean temperature of the hottest month in the year must, on a mountain of 1500 feet elevation or upward, probably be below the freezing point*. Perhaps the difficulty is to be thus resolved: The weather in the months of June, July and August, is much clearer at Spitzbergen than it is near the neighbouring ice, where most of my observations on temperature were made; and, as such, the temperature of these months on shore must be warmer than at sea, and so much higher indeed, as is requisite for occasioning the dissolution of the snow even on the tops of the mountains. And this is no doubt the fact; for, besides the increase of temperature produced by the prevalent clearness of the atmosphere, we may bring into the account the circumstance that, from the steepness of the hills, the sun is always actually vertical, to one surface or other

* The mean temperature of July in the Greenland sea, latitude 78°, as determined from a considerable series of observations (Appendix, No. II.), is no higher than 37°; and of August about 2 degrees less: as such, the mean temperature of July on a hill 500 yards high, must be below the freezing point: For 500 yards divided by 90 yards, the elevation requisite for producing 1 degree depression of temperature, give a product of 5 5/9°, which, subtracted from 37°, the temperature at the level of the sea, leaves 31 4/9°, as the mean temperature at the top of the hill.

[page] 126

of the mountainous coast, throughout its daily course.

The highest temperature I ever observed in Spitzbergen was 48°; but in the summer of 1773, when Captain Phipps visited Spitzbergen, a temperature of 58½° once occurred*. Supposing this to be the greatest degree of heat which takes place, it will require an elevation of 7791 feet for reducing that temperature to the freezing point; and hence we may reckon this to be about the altitude of the upper line of congelation, where frost perpetually prevails †,

The form of the mountain-summit which I visited, is round-backed; the area of the part approaching the horizontal position not being above a quarter of an acre. The south side where we ascended, and the south-cast, are the only accessible parts; the east, north and west aspects being precipitous nearly from top to bottom. What snow still remained on the summit, was but a few inches deep, and appeared to be in a state of rapid dissolution; the sides of the hill were almost entirely free from snow. The masses of stone on the brow

* Voyage towards the North Pole, p. 46.

† See Professor LESLIE'S Geometry, 2d edition, Table, p. 496.

[page] 127

of the mountain were larger than any we had yet met with, the fracture was less fresh, and they were more generally covered with lichens.

From the brow of the mountain, on the side by which we ascended, many masses of stone were dislodged by design or accident, which, whatever might be their size, shape or weight, generally made their way with accelerated velocity to the bottom. As they bounded from rock to rock, they produced considerable smoke at each concussion, and setting in motion numerous fragments in their course, they were usually accompanied by showers of stones, all of which were lodged in a bed of snow, lying 2000 feet below the place where the first were disengaged. This may afford some idea of the nature of the inclination. Most of the larger stones which were set off, broke into numbers of pieces; but some considerable masses of a tabular form, wheeled down upon their edges, and though they made bounds of several hundred feet at a time, and acquired a most astonishing velocity, they sometimes got to the bottom without breaking.

The prospect was most extensive and grand. A fine sheltered bay was seen on the east of us, an arm of the same on the north-east, and the sea, whose glassy surface was unruffled by a breeze, formed an immense expanse on the west; the icebergs rearing their proud crests almost to the tops of the mountains between which they were lodged,

[page] 128

and, defying the power of the solar beams, were scattered in various directions about the sea-coast and in the adjoining bays. Beds of snow and ice filling extensive hollows, and giving an enamelled coat to adjoining valleys, one of which, commencing at the foot of the mountain where we stood, extended in a continued line towards the north, as far as the eye could reach; mountain rising above mountain, until by distance they dwindled into insignificancy; the whole contrasted by a cloudless canopy of deepest azure, and enlightened by the rays of a blazing sun, and the effect aided by a feeling of danger, seated as we were on the pinnacle of a rock, almost surrounded by tremendous precipices,—all united to constitute a picture singularly sublime. Here we seemed elevated into the very heavens; and though in an hazardous situation, I was sensible only of pleasing emotions, heightened by the persuasion, that, from experience in these kind of adventures, I was superior to the dangers with which I was surrounded. The effect of the elevation, and the brightness of the picture, were such, that the sea, which was at least a league from us, appeared within reach of a musket shot; mountains a dozen miles off, seemed scarcely a league from us; and our vessel which we knew was at the distance of a league from the shore, appeared in danger of the rocks.

[page] 129

After a short rest, in which we were much refreshed with a gentle breeze of wind that here prevailed; and after we had surveyed the surrounding scenery as long as it afforded any thing striking, we commenced the descent. This task, however, which, before the attempt, we had viewed with indifference, we found really a very hazardous, and in some instances a painful undertaking. The way now seemed precipitous. Every movement was a work of deliberation. The stones were so sharp that they cut our boots and pained our feet, and so loose that they gave way almost at every step, and frequently threw us backward with force against the hill. We were careful to advance abreast of each other, for any individual being below us would have been in danger of being overwhelmed with the stones, which we unintentionally dislodged in showers. Having by much care, and with some anxiety, made good our descent to the top of the secondary hills, to save the fatigue of crawling along the sharp ridge that we had before traversed, we took down one of the steepest banks, the inclination of which was little less than fifty degrees. The stones here being very small and loose, we sat down on the side of the hill, and slid forward with great facility in a sitting posture. Towards the foot of the hill, an expanse of snow stretched across the line of descent. This being loose and soft, we entered upon it without fear, and our progress at

VOL. I. I

[page] 130

first was by no means rapid; but on reaching the middle of it, we came to a surface of solid ice, perhaps a hundred yards across, over which we launched with astonishing velocity, but happily escaped without injury. The men whom we left below, viewed this latter movement with astonishment and fear.

On the flat of land next the sea, we met with the horns of rein-deer, many skulls and other bones of sea-horses, whales, narwhales, foxes and seals, and some human skeletons laid in chest-like coffins, exposed naked on the strand. Two Russian lodges formed of logs of pine, with a third in ruins, were also seen; the former, from a quantity of fresh chips about them, and other appearances within, them, gave evidence of their having been recently inhabited. One of them, though small, seemed a middling kind of lodging, but smelt intolerably of the smoke of wood and steam of oil. Many domestic utensils were within and about it. A new hurdle lay by the door, and traps for foxes and birds were scattered along the beach. These huts were built upon the ridge of shingle adjoining the sea.

Among the shingle on the beach, were numbers of nests, containing the eggs of terns, ducks, and burgomasters, and in some of them were young birds. One of the latter, which we took on board, was very lively, and grew rapidly; but having taken a

[page] 131

fancy to a cake of white lead, with which the surgeon was finishing a drawing, he was poisoned. The nests were all watched by the respective birds they belonged to; which, with loud screams and bold attacks, defended them from the arctie gulls and other predatory birds that hovered about the place. They even descended within a yard or two of some of the sailors, who were so cruel as to take their eggs or young, and followed them for a considerable time, screaming most violently. Several of these eggs were afterwards hatched in warm saw-dust, but the young birds generally died soon after they left the shell.

The only insect I saw was a small green fly, which swarmed upon the shingle about the beach. The sea along the coast teemed with a species of helix, with the clio borealis, and with small shrimps. But no animal of the class Vermes was seen on the shore. The birds seen were the puffin, tern, little auk, guillemot, black guillemot or tyste, kittiwake, fulmar, burgomaster, arctic gull, brent-goose, cider-duck, crimson-headed sparrow (Friugilla flammea), sandpiper, &e.; but no living quadruped was observed.

Drift-wood was seen in some abundance; but all of it seemed to have lain long on the beach, being much battered and bleached, and some of it was worm-eaten.

A strong north-west wind having recently prevailed, the shore was in many places covered with

I 2

[page] 132

deep beds of sea-weed. Among these we distinguished the Fucus vesiculosus, esculentus, saccharinus, filum, plumosus, sinuosus, clavellosus, &c. and some species of Conferva.

Of all the objects, however, that we met with in the course of our research, none excited so much interest as the carcase of a dead whale, found stranded on the beach; which, though much swollen, and not a little putrid, at once fixed our attention, and diverted us from objects of mere curiosity. It proved a prize to us of the value of about 400 l., but was not secured without much labour. Being embedded in the shingle, and surrounded by rocks, we found it would be impossible to float it off; we were, therefore, under the necessity of flensing it where it lay, and of taking its produce to the ship in boats. After the first incision was made into its side, oil sprung out in streams, and required the attention of several persons to collect it and put it into the boats. From the dangerous nature of the coast, we were unable to bring the ship within two miles of the shore; our progress was, in consequence, uncommonly slow. The blubber and oil were put into casks as received on board. After we had secured the lading of five boats, the weather, which had hitherto been fine and calm, suddenly changed. The sky became overcast, rain-clouds appeared, and a fresh gale of wind with heavy rain, succeeded. The sixth boat had much difficulty in reaching the ship. By the

[page] 133

time its lading was discharged, the sea had become high, and the ship had drifted some miles from the place where nearly one-half of the crew were on shore. We were six hours before we could beat up to this station, when, having stood within a mile of the shore, though rocks were then on both sides of us, we despatched two boats under shelter of the windward rocks, and rescued the whole of the men. They had been by this time above thirty hours absent; they amused themselves on shore by cooking several birds which had been shot, and kept themselves warm with a fire made of drift-wood and the fragments of the ruinous hut. Several of them who had the first watch after they came on board, were so fatigued, that they actually slept as they stood on their feet on the deck.

On the following day, the weather having moderated, we set about securing the remainder of our prize, and after about eighteen hours close attention, we succeeded in bringing off all that was valuable. This whale, from a harpoon found in its body, appeared to have been struck by some of the fishers of the Elbe; and having escaped from them, it had probably stranded itself where we found it.

During these operations, my anxiety for the safety of the ship was considerable, as we navigated a dangerous shore, which had never been scientifically surveyed, and of the charts of which, such as they are, I had no copy. Rocks, at low-water, were seen a

[page] 134

mile and a quarter from the shore, and many others at smaller distances.

The next day, July 27., the weather continuing fine, we stood into King's Bay, when I was enabled to make considerable additions to a survey of the coast which I began in the year 1815, and continued throughout our stay near shore on this occasion. Six miles within the headlands forming the entrance of the bay, we had no soundings with fifty or sixty fathoms of line within a fourth of a mile of the shore on the north side; nor indeed did we ever strike the bottom while we remained in the bay.

I landed on the north side near an iceberg, where a small tract of rising ground was terminated by a perpendicular precipice of perhaps a thousand feet in height. This cliff was composed of a kind of bluish-grey marble, but, like all the rocks we had yet seen, was full of fissures in every direction. At a distance, it appeared like basaltic columns; but on nearer approach we found the resemblance was derived from deep channels formed in the perpendicular face, at intervals of a few fathoms asunder. Some of the cliffs on the opposite side of the bay had a similar appearance. The bank where we landed was covered with vegetation, and afforded beautiful specimens of several plants. A hut was erected on the beach, which appeared to have been inhabited within a few weeks. Towards the sea edge, the stones were so small, that few pieces could

[page] 135

be seen of more than two or three ounces in weight. There were several perforated rocks near the landing place, and a cave into which we rowed with the boat. The top was a regular arch of marble. Its length was thirty or forty yards, breadth about eight or ten yards, and the height of the roof about three. We could nowhere find the bottom with an oar eighteen feet long. Besides the common marble rock, we found in the cave specimens of rhomboidal calcareous spar.

The weather becoming threatening about this time, we put off, and after examining the southern shore, and taking a few angles, proceeded to sea. While we were in King's Bay, not far from the centre, I got an azimuth of the sun when it was directly over the north point of the Foreland, from whence the true bearing of that point was determined to be S. 68° W.

Two days after this, July 29., we experienced a heavy gale of wind, during which the discovery ships under Captain Buchan and Lieutenant Franklin, were driven into the northern ice, and narrowly escaped being wrecked. Our latitude was then about 79°, so that we were not far from them.

The climate of Spitzbergen is no doubt more disagreeable, to human feeling, than that of any other country yet discovered. Extending to within ten degrees of the Pole, it is generally intensely cold, and even in the three warmest months, the temperature

[page] 136

not averaging more than 34½ degrees, it is then subject to a cold occasionally of three, four, or more degrees below the freezing point. It has the advantage, however, of being visited by the sun for an uninterrupted period of four months in each year, thus having a Summer's Day, if so long an interval between the rising and setting of the sun may be so denominated, consisting of one-third part of the year. But its winter is proportionally desolate; the sun, in the northern parts of the country, remaining perpetually below the horizon from about the 22d of October to about the 22d of February. This great Winter Night, though sufficiently dreary, is by no means so dark as might be expected, as the sun, even during its greatest south declination, approaches within 13½° of the horizon, and affords a faint twilight for about one-fourth part of every twenty-four hours. Added to this twilight, the aurora borealis, which sometimes exhibits a brilliancy approaching to a blaze of fire,—the stars, which shine with an uncommon degree of brightness,—and the moon, which, in north declination, appears for twelve or fourteen days together without setting,—altogether have an effect which, when heightened by the reflection of a constant surface of snow, generally give sufficient light for going abroad;—but, with the light afforded by the heavens, when the moon is below the horizon, it is seldom possible to read.

All that is known respecting the climate of Spitzbergen, or nearly so, is derived from the three or

[page] 137

four published journals of persons having wintered by accident or design in this desolate region, together with the interesting information already alluded to, received by Colonel Beaufoy from those Russian adventurers, who not unfrequently resort hither and remain throughout the winter, for the purposes of hunting and fishing. From these sources of information, I am enabled to give the following sketch of the progress of the seasons. It is, however, designedly brief, as the climate of the arctic seas in general, which is very similar, forms a subsequent chapter of this volume.

After the sun passes the equinox, the approaches of winter, in the Polar countries, become very rapid. This gloomy season commonly sets in at the latter end of September or beginning of October, with winds from the N., N. N. W., or N. W.; or with calms, hard frost, and snow*. By the end of September or the beginning of October, all the birds which are only summer visitors to Spitzbergen, commence their flight towards milder regions; and by the middle of the latter month, the frost has, in some instances, been so intense, that casks of beer have been frozen in a hut, within eight feet of the fire. In November, the sun having disappeared, the frosts rapidly increase, both in frequency and intensity; but throughout the year, when strong southerly

* Col. Beaufoy's Queries, Nos. 2. & 33.

[page] 138

winds occur, they are generally accompanied with mild weather, and sometimes with thaw. About December and January, hard frosts with calm weather are common, but seldom a month passes without storms; storms, indeed, are so frequent, that two-thirds of the winter may be said to be boisterous*. The highest winds occur about the time of the equinoxes, and blow most frequently from the southern quarter. Snow storms are common, often continuing for several days, and, perhaps, once or twice a year, for some weeks together †. Hence, a great quantity of snow falls during the winter, which accumulates principally in sheltered glens; but on level ground, it seldom lies above three to five feet deep.

Bears seem to be the only quadrupeds which stir abroad throughout the winter; for, though foxes and rein-deer remain constantly in the country, they are only to be met with, in any quantity, at certain seasons. Foxes begin to appear in the month of February, and are to be seen in March in great numbers. Bears, at the same time, become more abundant, and the birds re-appear in the month of April.

The first human beings who are known to have passed the winter in Spitzbergen, were two parties of seamen belonging to English whalers, who were

* Bcaufoy's Queries, No. 4.

† Idem, No. 26.

[page] 139

left on shore by accident on two different occasions; the first party, consisting of nine persons, all perished; but the latter, composed of eight individuals, survived the rigours of the winter of 1630-1, and were all rescued. In the year 1633, seven volunteers belonging the Dutch fleet, were induced, by certain emoluments, to attempt the same enterprize, and succeeded in passing the winter without sustaining any injury; but on the same hazardous experiment being tried by seven other persons, the following winter, they all fell a sacrifice to the ravages of the scurvy. Some Russians seem to have been the next to attempt this adventurous exploit, who, from being inured to a winter little less severe at home, were enabled to accomplish it with more safety. Four men who landed on an island on the east side of Spitzbergen, in the year 1743, and were deprived of the means of getting away by an unexpected calamity having overtaken the vessel to which they belonged, remained there during six years. Being exposed to uncommon privations, they were led by their necessities to adopt some most ingenious devices, for providing themselves with food and raiment, in their long and severe banishment. One of their number died; but the others were relieved after a stay of six years and three months, by a vessel providentially driven upon the coast, and restored to their

[page] 140

friends, enriched with skins and other produce of the country, in which they had been exiled.

In modern times, people of the same nation have been in the habit of submitting to a voluntary transportation, with the object of making some considerable advantage, by the opportunities which such a measure affords them, of hunting and fishing. These persons were formerly employed in the service of the "White Sea Fishing Company;" but this company being now no longer in existence, the trade is conducted by private adventurers*. They now proceed from Megen, Archangel, Onega, Rala, and other places bordering the White Sea, in vessels of 60 to 160 tons, some intended for the summer fishing, and others for the winter. The former put to sea in the beginning of June, and sometimes return in September; the latter sail about a month later, and wintering in the most secure coves of Devil Bay? Bell Sound, Horn Sound, Cross Bay, Magdalena Bay, Love Bay, and others, return home in the month of August or September of the following year†.

The fishermen reside on shore during the winter, in huts of the same kind as those used by the peas-

* From a communication in answer to queries sent to Archangel by myself, in the year 1815, through Mr Edward Steward of Whitby.

† Col. Beaufoy's Queries, No. 1.

[page] 141

ants in Russia, which being taken out with them in pieces, are constructed with little trouble in the most convenient situations. They build their stoves with bricks, or with clay found in the country. Their largest hut, which is erected near the place where their vessels or boats arc laid up, is from twenty to twenty-five feet square, and is used as a station and magazine; but the huts used by the men who go in quest of skins, and which are erected along shore, at the distance of ten to fifty versts from each other, are only seven or eight feet square. The smaller huts are usually occupied by two or three men, who take care to provide themselves, from the store, with the necessary provisions for serving them the whole winter*.

I have visited several of these huts, some constructed of logs, others of deals two inches in thickness. The one constituting the most comfortable lodging I have seen, I met with on the north-west point of the Foreland, in the year 1809. It was built of logs of half round timber, (the original trees being slit up the middle); the round sides were put outward, and the ends of the timbers forming two adjoining sides stretched beyond the corner, and being notched half way into each other, formed a close joint. The logs were placed horizontally, and were built into a rectangular form, about fourteen feet

* Col. Beaufoy's Queries, No. 10.

[page] 142

long, ten broad and six high. The seams were caulked with moss. Near the ground were two windows, of six panes of glass each, one on the east side and the other on the south. The roof, which was flat, was formed of deals, and loaded with stones. A barrel without ends composed the chimney. To the north end of the building was attached a small square court, open at the top, having a door-way on the east side of it, communicating with, and affording some shelter to, the door of the hut. In the outer court were two casks of about 100 gallons capacity each, which were found to be filled with meal. Several tubs lay near the casks, and a quantity of pease. In the interior of the hut we found i a variety of domestic utensils, consisting of platters, a stool, an earthen pot, horn-spoons, a tomahawk, a boat-hook, a spear, and several small wax-tapers, with a variety of trifling articles. On a wooden bench fixed against the west side of the apartment, were ranged in order with pendant necks, at least twenty ducks, with a number of eggs about them; they were all in a state of putrefaction. From these appearances, I judged this hut had been occupied by some Russian hunters, who, from the quantity of provisions left behind, seemed to have either perished prematurely, or had some intention of returning. Lest the latter should happen to be the case, I caused the meal casks to be secured from the weather, and forbid the sailors from removing any arti-

[page] 143

cle of value. I only took with me the wax-tapers, which appeared to have been intended for religious purposes.

During the stay of the hunters, they employ themselves in killing seals, sea-horses, &c. in the water; and bears, foxes, deer, or whatever else they meet with, on land. They are furnished with provisions for eighteen months by their employers, consisting of rye-flour for bread, oatmeal, barley meal, pease, salt beef, salt cod, and salt holibut, together with curdled milk, honey, and linseed oil; besides which, they procure for themselves liondeer in winter, and birds in summer, the use of which is found to be very conducive to health. Their drink chiefly consists of a liquor called nuas, made from rye-flour and water; malt or spiritous liquors being entirely forbidden, to prevent drunkenness, as these persons, when they were allowed it, drank so immoderately that their work was often altogether neglected. For general purposes, they use spring-water, when it is to be had; or, in lieu of it, take water from lakes: but when neither can be got, they use melted snow*.

Their fuel, consisting of wood, is brought with them from Russia, and landed at their station-hut, from whence it is conveyed by water, in boats, or by land in small hand-sledges, to the different huts

* Beaufoy's Queries, Nos. 12, 13, 18.

[page] 144

disposed along the coast. Drift-wood is often met with, and used for the same purpose. The hunters defend themselves from the rigour of the frost, by a covering made of skin, over which they wear a garment called kushy, made of the skin of rein-deer, with boots of the same. A warm cap called a trucchy, defends the whole head and neck, and part of the face; and gloves of sheep-skin, the hands. They seldom travel far in winter; but the short excursions they have occasion to make, they perform on foot, on snow skaits, and draw their food after them on hand-sledges; but such as have dogs, employ them in this service. If surprised with a gale of wind, accompanied by snow drifts, when out of shelter, the traveller is obliged to lie down, covering himself with his kushy and his sledge, as well as he is able, until the hurricane is over; but when it continues for any length of time, the poor wretch often perishes*.

Inured to cold, as these hunters are, they seldom suffer much from its effects. And they are never prevented by cold from going abroad, though the accumulation of snow about their huts, and the fury of storms, sometimes confine them to their dwellings. They make a point of taking exercise in the air, for the prevention of the scurvy; so that when they cannot with safety or convenience walk about, they exercise themselves by throwing the snow off

* Col. Beaufoy's Queries, Nos. 11, 14, 15, 16, 17, & 21.

[page] 145

and from around their huts, which, in stormy weather, are often buried. In such cases, they are obliged to make their way through the chimney to get out. As an antiscorbutic, they make use of an herb produced in the country, a stock of which they generally provide themselves with on the approach of winter; but sometimes they are under the necessity of digging through the snow to obtain it. They either eat it without any preparation, or drink the liquor prepared from it by infusion in water. For the same purpose, they make use of a kind of raspberry, which is preserved by baking with rye-flour: this they eat, or drink the expressed juice of the fruit. A decoction of fir-tops, in water, is another beverage intended as an antidote against the scurvy*.

These men, however, hardy as they are, do not always escape the bane of these regions, the scurvy. Perhaps their hardihood in stopping so long as three years in Spitzbergen, which some of them have been known to do, might give a predisposition for this disease, and render it more fatal. In the year 1771, Mr Steward of Whitby, formerly a Greenland captain, landed on a projection of low table land, forming the south-westerly point of King's Bay, for the purpose of procuring drift wood

*Beaufoy's Queries, Nos. 8, & 9.

VOL. I. K

[page] 146

for fuel;—a practice very common among the London fishermen, at this period, who often sailed with a very scanty stock, of coals on board. Here the first wintering of the Russians, to the northward of the Foreland, had been attempted, their first hut having been built the preceding year. This hut having been seen by the party in search of wood, on their first landing, motives of curiosity led them to examine it. They hollowed as they approached it; but no one appeared. The door being defended by a small open court, one of the party entered it; and, applying his eye to the hole for the latch, observed a man extended on the floor, as he thought, sleeping. Receiving no answer to their shouts, they at length opened the door, and found the man a corpse. His cheek, which was laid on the ground, was covered with a green concretion of mould; and his covering, besides his clothes, was only a Russian mat. Several jackets, and other articles of clothing, were seen on a. bench, on which the inmates appeared to have slept; but no other individual, living or dead, was observed. It was supposed, that his companions had shared the same fate, and had been buried by him, who, as the lastsurvivor, had no one to perform the same kindly office on himself. The yawl belonging to the sufferers was found hauled up on the beach; it was fully equipped with oars, together with mast and sail.

[page] 147

Near the shore of Spitzbergen, the south-westerly current, so very evident at the distance of twenty or thirty leagues to the westward, is not observed. Such, indeed, is the effect of the land on this current, as well as on the tide, that the course of the stream is altogether uncertain. Captain Phipps, when in the Racehorse, in the year 1773, lying becalmed about two and a half leagues N. N. W. from Cloven Cliff, had a current setting to the westward, though his consort, the Carcass, at no great distance from him, was, at the same time, in a current running toward the eastward. Facts of a similar kind, proved by the singular movements of the closest bodies of ice, are frequently occurring. Captain Phipps observed that the tide of flood came from the southward, in latitude 79½°, on the west coast; and that the time of high water, at full and change, was half an hour past one: this corresponds exactly with an observation made by Baffin in 1613. In the harbour of Vogel Sang, the tide was observed to rise about four feet; and at Smeerenberg, a little more: the time of high water in each, being half an hour past one, as above. At Moffen Island, the tide appeared to flow eight or nine feet perpendicular. In general, the rise of tide may be stated at about six feet during the springs, and about two feet less during the neaps. The highest tides seem to be produced by south-westerly winds; and though the most general direction of the stream of flood-tide is

K 2

[page] 148

from the south towards the north, yet it runs by no means regularly at all times, even in the samé place.

The products of Spitzbergen, in animals, are of some worth; but in vegetables they are neither numerous, nor, as far as yet discovered, of much value; and, in minerals, they are very little known. As an account of the animals inhabiting this country, is included in the general view of the zoology of the Spitzbergen sea, it is unnecessary to notice them here.

Spitzbergen does not afford many vegetables. Of those which I was enabled to collect in the course of several excursions to the shore in 1818, I have been furnished with a catalogue, by Sir Joseph Banks, as drawn up by his librarian, Mr Robert Brown, and have given it, in full, in the Appendix*. It may be remarked, that vegetation goes on uncommonly quickly in this country. Most of the plants spring up, flower, and afford seed, in the course of a month or six weeks. They are chiefly of dwarfish size; some of the flowers are really pretty, but exhibit few colours, excepting yellow, white, and purple. And it is not unworthy of ob servation, that the only plant I met with in Spitzbergen, partaking of the nature of a tree, (a Salix allied to S. herbacea,) grows but to the height of three or four inches.

* See No. V.

[page] 149

Though Spitzbergen is probably rich in minerals, yet the examination of it has been so partial, and indeed trifling, that nothing of any value, excepting marble and coal, has yet been met with*. The former is found in some parts of King's Bay, of real beauty; and the latter, of a tolerable quality, near the same place. The coal is so easily procured, that many of the Dutch fishers, a few years ago, were in the habit of laying in a stock of this useful article, for fuel, on the passage homeward. Captain Jacob Broerties, an intelligent whale-fisher of Amsterdam, informed me that he had in his possession, a slab table of great beauty, manufactured out of a block of Spitzbergen marble, which he himself procured.

What has already been advanced concerning the appearances and productions of Spitzbergen, applies in general to the islands adjacent. A few remarks, however, on the peculiarities which have been noticed, may not be superfluous.

moffen Island, a small low island lying on the north side of Spitzbergen, in latitude 80° 1′, longitude 12° 43′ E, was visited and described by Captain Phipps, who intimates that none of the old navigators have taken any notice of it, though it is remarkably different from any thing to be seen on the west coast. This, considering their usual accu-

* A list, by my valued friend Professor Jameson, of a few specimens of the rocks occurring in and about King's Bay, is included in Appendix No. VI.

[page] 150

racy and minuteness, he deems rather extraordinary, and suggests the possibility that it had not long existed, but might have been thrown up, by the currents from each side of Spitzbergen meeting here.

This island is of a roundish form, about two miles in diameter, and has a shallow lake of water in the middle. This lake was frozen over, except thirty or forty yards round the edge, near the end of July. The whole island is covered with gravel and small stones, without the least vegetation of any kind. It is but a few feet above the level of the sea. The only piece of drift-wood found on it by Captain Phipps, which was about three fathoms long, and as thick as a ship's mizen mast, had been thrown over the sea-bank, and lay on the declivity near the lake. It was low water at 11 P. M. of 25th of July (1773,) when the boat landed; and the tide appeared to flow eight or nine feet. The velocity of the tide, which set N. W. and S. E., was about a mile an hour*.

Low Island, lying E. N. E. from Moffen Island, in latitude 80° 15′, and longitude 17° 35′E., was visited on the 29th of July 1773, by Dr Irving, who accompanied Captain Phipps on his expedition towards the North Pole.

The island is about seven miles in length, very flat, and covered chiefly with stones from eighteen to thirty inches in diameter, many of them hexa-

* Phipps' Voyage, p. 53.

[page] 151

gons, and commodiously placed for walking on. On the middle of the island, they found vegetation abundant. Two rein-deer were seen feeding; and one of them they killed. It was found to be fat, and of a high flavour. Several large fir-trees, at this time, lay on the shore, sixteen or eighteen feet above the level of the sea. Some of them were seventy feet long, and had been torn up by the roots; others had been cut down by the axe, and notched for twelve feet lengths. This timber was not in the least decayed; the marks of the axe indeed, were still fresh. There were likewise some pipestaves, and wood fashioned for use. The beach consisted of old timber, sand, and whalebones*.

Hope Island, on the south-east coast of Spitzbergen, lies in latitude 76° 20′, longitude about 20° E. It was discovered in the year 1613, by one of the English Russia Company's vessels, which accompanied their whale-fishing expedition. It is nine leagues long, but scarcely a mile broad, and lies N. E. by E. and S. W. by W. It consists of five mountains; the northernmost one is the highest; and those succeeding, diminish progressively in size. On the north side is good anchorage in twenty fathoms water. About half a league from each extremity of the island, the water is very shallow; on the south side the bottom is rocky, and unfit for anchorage; but the coast is there pretty bold.

* Phipps' Voyage, p. 58.

[page] 152

Cherie Island, though not immediately adjoining Spitzbergen, is, however, nearer it than any other country, and may be noticed here. It lies in latitude ahout 74° 30′, and longitude 20° E., being 130 miles S. S. E. (true) from Point-look-out. It was discovered in the year 1596, hy the Dutch navigators Barentz, Heemskerke and Ryp, on their advance towards the north, in search of a northern passage to India, and named by them Bear Island, from the circumstance of a large bear, whose skin was twelve feet in length, having been killed upon it. Stephen Bennet, who was sent by Sir Francis Cherie, in the year 1603, on a voyage towards the north, partly for trading and partly for discovery, fell in with this island, and in honour of his patron and owner, called it Cherie Island. Abounding in sea-horses or morses, it soon became an important place for taking these animals, of which a thousand were once killed in seven hours. Hence it was the constant resort of adventurers in this traffic for several years, until the morses began their retreat to the northward, and the discovery of the whale-fishery presented a much more lucrative occupation.

The greatest extent of this island is about ten miles. It is somewhat of the saddle form, being high at each end, and low in the middle. On the north-east end are three regular hills of considerable elevation, covered, in general, entirely with

[page] 153

snow; the south-west end is more irregular*. Besides morses, the island abounds with bears, foxes and sea-fowl, and its shores, at certain seasons, are said to be visited by cod and haddock. Much drift-wood also occurs on the coast. Lead-ore, in veins, at the surface of the ground, has been found here; likewise coal of a tolerable quality, and specimens of virgin silver. Lcad-glance also occurs on an adjoining rock called Gull Island, and three different mines were discovered by one of the early morse-fishers.

Near the north-east point of this island, is a little bay, where a ship may ride in shelter, with the wind from S. E. to S. W.; but the anchorage is exposed from E. S. E. (north about) to W. S. W. There is also anchorage in some other parts, in gravelly or stony ground.

Cherie Island is often inaccessible on account of ice, which, in the spring of the year, generally stretches in a straight line from here to the southern Cape of Spitzbergen. The flood-tide about it runs from the S. W. towards the N. E., and flows about four feet.

* See Plate 3. fig. 1.

[page] 154

SECT. II.

Account of Jan Mayen Island

JAN MAYEN Island derived its name from that of a Dutch navigator, who is said to hare first seen it in the year 1611*, though it may he suspected, as the whale-fishery of this nation did not commence until 1612. that it was not discovered until a later period. It was once named Mauritius' Island, or St Maurice, in honour of Prince Maurice of Nassau. This country was also discovered by the whalers of Hull about the same time, and named Trinity Island; in consequence of which, when the Russia Company attempted to monopolize the fishery of the whole of the Polar countries, this island was granted by the King to the Corporation of Hull, on their petition in the year 1618, as a fishing station. The Dutch, who were constantly in the habit of visiting Jan Maycn from the time of its discovery to the year 1630 or 1640, where theY derived great advantage from the whalefishery its coasts afforded, have given the principal accounts of its appearance, situation and navigation which have yet appeared. These accounts, besides being exceedingly meagre, arc likewise inaccu-

* Beschryving dcr Walvisvangst, vol. ii. p. 62.

[page] 155

rate. They place this island in latitude 71° to 71° 23′, and longitude (corrected to Greenwich) 5° 55′ to 7° 22′ W.*; and our charts place it about the same latitude, and in the longitude of 9° to 10° or 11° W. From a survey, however, of the east coast, which I accomplished on the 3d and 4th of August 1817, and from solar observations for latitude and longitude (by chronometer), I found its limits to be between the latitudes of 70° 49′ and 71° 8′ 20" N., and between the longitudes of 7° 26′ and 8° 44′ W †.

This island, which extends in length about ten leagues, from N. E. to S. W., is in no place above three leagues in breadth. The northern extremity is of a rhomboidal form, each side being about three leagues in length, and affords a base for the remarkable peak called Beerenberg, or Bear Mountain. The southern extremity, connected by a narrow isthmus to one of the acute angles of the northern land, is from 1½ to about 5 miles in breadth.

The coast affords several road-steads, with good anchorage in five to ten fathoms water, black sandy ground, but no harbour for a ship; all the anchorages being open to the sea in an angle of at least ten points of the compass. Few dangers occur on

* Beschryving der Walvisvangst, Map, vol. ii. p. 64.

† The positions of several remarkable parts of the coast, are included in the Table of Latitudes and Longitudes, Appendix, No. IV.

[page] 156

the coast at a moderate offing, but what may be seen; perhaps the greatest known danger is a rock lying about three leagues south, a little easterly, from the S. W. point of Little Wood Bay, having only eleven feet water upon it when the tide is at the lowest. It is about a stone's cast over, and was discovered by a fisher belonging to Delf-haven, who bilged his ship upon it.

The soundings about the island are very irregular, and the bottom generally consists of rocks or black sand. At the distance of eleven or twelve leagues S. S. E. from Cape South, are soundings in thirty-five and thirty-six fathoms water; but on the northern face of the island, there are 300 fathoms depth, a cannon shot from the shore. On the north-eastern coast the depth is also great; and also near Cape South-East; but in most other places, the depth, at the distance of half a league from the beach, varies from ten to fifty fathoms. Between Capes North-West and North-East, between Capes North-East and South-East, and in part of the distance between Little Wood Bay and Cape South, as well as in a few portions on the west side of the island, the coast consists of a kind of wall, being generally precipitous and inaccessible. The west side affording the greatest number of anchorages, having the best convenience for landing, and being better sheltered from the most frequent storms, was selected by the Dutch for their boiling stations.

[page] 157

They had apparatus for the manufacture of oil, together with tents, cooperages and warehouses, erected in South Bay, Rooberg, Wood Bay, English Bay, West Cross Cove, and East Cross Cove. In South Bay, the Dutch once suffered the loss of three of. their tents or huts, nine oil vessels, and thirteen boats, from the ground on which they stood being washed away by the sea. Mary Muss Bay, was the first place where oil was manufactured in the island, and was so called after an industrious woman of that name belonging to Rotterdam, who sent the first ship out for the purpose of reducing the blubber which might be taken, into oil on the spot. Three places on this island, called Wood Bay, Great Wood Bay, and Little Wood Bay, received their names from the great quantity of drift-wood found in them.

The western navigation of Jan Mayen is preferred to the eastern, as being less incumbered with ice, and less subject to calms, squalls and whirlwinds, which are often encountered on passing to the eastward of Beercnberg. The whole island is generally surrounded with ice in the spring of the year; but in the autumn, or even in summer, the ice sometimes sets so far to the westward, that it is not visible from any part of the land.

Though the Dutch, as well as the whalers of Hull, were, in the early part of the seventeenth century, annual visitants to the island of Jan Mayen, yet we have no account or description of it, except

[page] 158

what relates to its navigation, with a few brief notices respecting its principal mountain and glaciers. The British fishers, are now in the frequent habit of making this land in their outward passage, but seldom approach near the shore. I was, therefore, fortunate, in my passage homeward in the year 1817, in effecting a landing upon it. A narrative of my excursion upon this interesting island, was read before the Wernerian Society in December 1817; and the substance of that paper I shall now repeat in this place.

On approaching Jan Mayen with a clear atmosphere, the first object which strikes the attention, is the peak of Beerenberg. This mountain rears its icy summit to an elevation, as ascertained on this visit, of 6870 feet above the level of the sea. It frequently appears above the clouds, and may be seen, in clear weather, at the distance of thirty or forty leagues*. It is seated on a base, which is itself mountainous, being about 1500 feet in height; but in a small interval between two cliffs on the south side, the slope of the hill is continued with little variation, at an inclination of perhaps 40° to 50°, from the summit to the margin of the sea.

The general appearance of the land, has a striking resemblance to that of Spitzbergen, both in col-

* I saw Beerenberg from the deck of the ship Fame, on the 29th April 1818, when at the distance, (by observation,) of 95 to 100 miles.

[page] 159

our and character. As at Spitzbergen, your approach to it, seems amazingly tardy. At the distance of ten or fifteen miles, a stranger to polar lands would suppose himself within a league of the rocks.

At this season (August 4th) all the high lands were covered with snow and ice; and the low lands, in those valleys and deep cavities, where large beds of snow had been collected, still retained part of their winter covering, down to the very border of the sea.

Between Capes North-east and South-east, are three very singular icebergs. They occupy recesses in the cliff, where it is 1284 feet high by observation, and nearly perpendicular, and extend from the base of Beercnberg down to the water's edge. These polar glaciers differed in appearance from any thing of the kind I had before seen. They were very rough on the surface, and of a greenish grey colour. They presented the appearance of immense cataracts, suddenly arrested in their progress, and congealed on the spot, by the power of an intense frost. Like cascades, their prominent greenish colour was variegated with snow-white patches resembling foam, which were contrasted with the jet-black points of the most prominent rocks peeping through their surfaces. As in cataracts also, they seemed to follow in some measure the figure of the rocks, over which they lay,

[page] 160

and were marked with curvilineár striae from top to bottom.

I left my ship (the Esk of Whitby,) at three quarters past one in the morning, accompanied by Captains Jackson and Bennet, whose ships were near at the time, and landed at half-past two, amidst a considerable surf, on a beach covered with coarse black sand. This sand, which consisted of a very thick bed, occurred through an extent of two or three miles in length, and about a furlong in breadth. It was a mixture of iron-sand, augitc and pyroxene*. The black parts, which were very heavy, and readily attracted by the magnet, had an appearance exactly resembling coarse gunpowder.

This beach was the first place from Cape North-east, four leagues distant, where the coast seemed as we passed it, to be at all accessible. Great Wood Bay was immediately to the westward of us, and Cape South-east, about five miles distant to the eastward.

After a few feet rise, forming a sea-bank of black sand, the strand proceeded inland, on a horizontal level for about a fourth of a mile, where it was ter-

* This latter substance, which was mistaken for olivine, was pronounced by Dr Wollaston, to whom a specimen was given by the Reverend Dr Satterthwaite, to be pyroxene.— (Annals of Philosophy, by Dr Thomson, vol. xi. p. 195., Paper by Dr D. Clarke.)

[page] 161

minated by irregular cliffs. This strand appeared to have been occasionally covered with the sea, as it was strewed with drift-wood, part of which was tolerably good timber, and the rest bruised, and a little worm-eaten. One log, that I observed, had been squared, and was marked with the letter G.

I had not advanced many paces, before I observed signs of a volcano. Fragments of lava were seen at every step; blocks of burned clay were next met with; and, nearer the cliff, large masses of red clay, partly baked, but still in a friable state, occurred in great abundance. Numerous pointed rocks, probably of the trap formation, were sticking through the sand. One of these, which was vesicular basalt, had numerous beautiful crystals and grains of augite imbedded in it. Along with this, was a rock which appeared to be very nearly allied to the celebrated basaltic millstone of Andernach. After leaving the sea-shore, I perceived no other mineral, but such as bore undoubted marks of recent volcanic action, viz. cinders, earthy-slag, burned clay, scoriæ, vesicular lava, &c. The place from whence these substances appeared to have been discharged, being near, we attempted to reach it. In performing the ascent, the steepness of the hill, and the looseness of the materials, made the undertaking not a little arduous. We frequently slid backward several paces by the nodules of lava giving way beneath our feet; in which case, the ground generally

VOL. I. L

[page] 162

resounded, as if we had been travelling on empty metallic vessels, or vaulted caverns.

The baked clay, and other loose rocks, consisted chiefly of large masses at the bottom of the hill; but, about the middle of the ascent, these substances were in smaller fragments. Towards the top, blocks of half baked red clay, containing many crystals of augite, were again met with; and, about the southern part of the summit, a rugged wall of the same occurred, giving the mountain a castellated form of no small magnificence. On reaching this summit, estimated at 1500 feet elevation above the sea, we beheld a beautiful crater, forming a basin of 500 or 600 feet in depth, and 600 or 700 yards in diameter. It was of a circular form, and both the interior and exterior sides had a similar inclination. The bottom of the crater was filled with alluvial matter, to such a height that it presented a horizontal flat of an elliptical form, measuring 400 feet by 240. A subterranean cavern penetrated the side of the crater at the bottom, from whence a spring of water issued, which, after running a short distance towards the south, disappeared in the sand.

From this eminence we had a most interesting prospect. Towards the north appeared Beerenberg, now first seen free from clouds, rising in majestic importance into the region of perpetual frost. At the foot of the mount, on the south-east side,

[page] 163

near a stupendous accumulation of lava, bearing the castellated form, was another crater, of similar form to the one above described. Towards the south-west, the utmost extent of the island was visible; while, towards the north, a thick fog obscured the prospect, which, as it advanced in stately grandeur towards us, gradually shrouded the distant scenery, until the nearest mountains were wrapped in impenetrable gloom. The sea, at the same time was calm, the sun bright, and the atmosphere of half the hemisphere, without a cloud. Excepting the interest excited by the volcano, Beerenberg sunk every other object into comparative insignificance. A sketch of the appearance of this mountain from the sea, at ten miles distant, when seen above the clouds, is given among the engravings, and may afford some notion of its magnitude and beauty*.

The colour of the cliffs around, was different shades of brown or black; and the general character of the country seemed to indicate the action of volcanic fire.

A rocky hill, with a precipitous side towards the sea, lying a little to the westward, I descended towards it, from the ridge of the crater, with the expectation of finding some other kind of rock than what had yet been met with. It was found to consist only of a cliff of yellowish grey friable earth or

* Plate 5.

L 2

[page] 164

clay; in which crystals of augite, along with dark roundish granular pieces of basalt lay imbedded*.

A piece of iron, which appeared to have been derived from ironstone, by a smelting process conducted in the furnace of nature, was found near the volcanic mount; being very cumbrous, it was laid aside by our party as we ascended, and unfortunately left behind us when we quitted the shore. Of every other metallic, mineral, vegetable, or animal substance we met with, we took specimens.

As the icebergs observed on this island suggested the idea of frozen cascades, a poetic imaginationwould, in the hollow metallic sound of the earth on the volcanic mount, have conceived the cavern of Vulcan; and in the iron manufactured in the bowels of the earth, the fabrication of the same deity, for the use of his parent Jove.

The cliffs here afforded but few specimens of plants. Indeed we travelled a considerable distance before we could perceive the least sign of vegetation. As we advanced, however, we met with tufts of plants in full blossom, scattered widely about among the volcanic minerals; but under the last cliff we visited, the variety was greater, and the specimens more vigorous. Among the plants seen, we recognized the Rumex digynus, Saxifraga tricuspidata and oppositifolia, Arenaria peploides? Silene acaulis, Draba verna, &c.

A black sandy earth, or a yellowish-grey kind of clay, constituted the general soil where any occurred.

[page] 165.

Near the sea shore, the burrows of foxes were seen, and traces of their feet below high watermark; but none of these animals were met with. The feet-marks of white bears, and probably of rein-deer, were also perceptible. The birds were not so numerous as I anticipated. We only saw burgomasters, fulmars, puffins, guillemots, little auks, kittywakes, and terns. Several cetaceous animals, principally of the species Balæna Physalis, were seen, but no mysticete.

We returned to our ships at six in the morning; when the weather being clear, I took bearings of the most remarkable parts of the coast, with azimuths and altitudes of the sun, for determining the variation of the compass, and the longitude of the island by the chronometer.

A fishing party, which I sent out, proving unsuccessful in the offing, approached the shore, about two miles to the eastward of the place we visited, where, though the surf was very considerable, and the strand very contracted, they effected a landing. They observed much drift-wood, a boat's oar, a ship's mast, and some other wrought wood scattered along the shore. Every mineral they noticed, and all the specimens they brought away, bore the same volcanic character as those I observed. Near some large fissures, which here and there occurred in the rocky and precipitous cliff, immense heaps of lava were seen, which appeared to have been poured out

[page] 166

of these chinks in the rock. Cinders, earth-slag, iron-sand, and fragments of floetz rocks, covered the beach and so much of the cliff as they had an opportunity of examining.

The volcano discovered on this excursion, I ventured to name Esk Mount, after the ship I commanded at the time; and I named the first point of land to the eastward (within Cape South-east) Cape Fishburn, and the point within Egg Island, forming the east side of Great Wood Say, Cape Brodriek, out of respect to my friends Messrs Fishburn and Brodriek, the owners of the Esk. The intermediate Bay, where we landed, I named Jameson Ray, in remembrance of my respected friend Professor Jameson.

Some volcano in this neighbourhood, probably Esk Mount, was, I believe, in action in the spring of the following year. On the 29th of April 1818, we made the island of Jan Mayen, bearing north, in the ship Fame; and having the wind from the eastward, weathered it the next day. We stretch ed up to the northward among bay-ice, until we came abreast of Jameson Bay, and could see distinctly Egg Island, the three icebergs, and other objects of magnitude. From about the north side of Egg Island, near Esk Mount, we were surprised with the sight of considerable jets of smoke discharged from the earth, at intervals of every three or four minutes. At first we imagined the smoke

[page] 167

was raised by some sailors, having suffered the calamity of shipwreck; but after personally examining the phenomenon from the mast-head, for upwards of an hour, I was convinced that it could be nothing else than the feeble action of a volcano. The smoke was projected with great velocity, and seemed to rise to twice the height of the land, or about 4000 feet. On mentioning this circumstance to Captain Gilyott of the Richard of Hull, he informed me, that, while employed in killing seals in the neighbourhood of this island, in the same month of the year 1818, he observed a similar appearance. The smoke he saw frequently; and once he noticed a shining redness resembling the embers of an immense fire. He called his officers to observe it, and humorously intimated that the Moon had landed on Jan Mayen!

This fact serven to account for some strange noises heard by seven Dutch seamen, who attempted to winter here in the year 1633–4. In the beginning of the night of the 8th of September, in particular, they "were frightened by a noise, as if something had fallen very heavy upon the ground, but saw nothing." This, instead of being the fall of an iceberg, as some have supposed, was probably a volcanic phenomenon.

These seven seamen seem to have been the only human beings who ever passed the winter in Jan Mayen. They belonged to the Dutch whale-fish-

[page] 168

ing fleet, and voluntarily offered themselves to the "Greenland Company," for trying the practicability of living in the winter, and establishing a colony in this island. This scheme, masked under the pretence of determining the true condition of the country in winter; "concerning the nights there, and other curious observations, disputed among astronomers," was doubtless intended as a colonizing experiment, with a view of facilitating the capture of whales, and enhancing the value of the fishery to the adventurers. Their journal, which is given at some length in Churchill's "Collection of Voyages and Travels*," gives a better description of the state of the wind and weather, from the 26th of August to the 31st of April following, than almost any other account of observations, made in winter, in so high a latitude, that has yet been published. As such, I have extracted some particulars out of each day's remarks, and have given them, in a tabular form, in the Appendix, No. VII. This little party survived the severities of the winter, without much hazard of their lives, until the scurvy began to make its appearance among them. The requisite supply of fresh provisions not having been met with, its ravages were very rapid. One of the party died on the 16th of April; and all the rest shar-

* Vol. ii. p. 367,–378.

[page] 169

ed the same fate within about a month afterwards. Their journal terminates on the 31st of April; and, on the 4th of June, when the Dutch fleet arrived, they were all found dead in their huts.

[page] 170

CHAPTER III

HYDSROGRAPHICAL SURVEY OF THE GREENLAND SEA.

SECT. I.

Situation and Extent,Colour and Degree of Transparency,—Quality, Specific Gravity, and Saltness of the Greenland Sea.

OF all the substances which contribute to the composition of the surface of the globe, there is none so uniform in appearance, or so similar in reality,— none more important in its application, or so general in its distribution, as the water of the ocean. In all parallels, and on all meridians, it consists of one kind of liquid, known by the general name of sea-water. From the Tropics to the Arctic Circle, its composition and its saltness, as far as yet examined, appear to be pretty nearly the same.

[page] 171

There are, no doubt, many circumstances which must tend to produce an inequality in the colour, saltness, and component parts of the water of the ocean;—such as the mingling of the waters of large rivers, conveying saline and earthy substances along with them;'and the admixture of the soluble materials of which some parts of the bed of the sea are probably composed. But, at the same time, there are other circumstances which operate in a contrary manner, and have a tendency to equalize and combine the various qualities of sea-water, which might at one time have occurred in different regions of the globe: these are, tides along most sea-coasts,—currents in the main sea, some running superficially, some bodily, and others counter,—together with the influence of storms, and changes of temperature, causing a circulation among the particles of the water. Hence, perhaps, it is, that the difference in the degree of saltness is not, in the most distant places, very considerable. The highest specific gravity of the water of the main ocean, any where recorded, that has come to my knowledge, is 1.0297, observed by M. Lamarche, in latitude 20° 21′ south, and longitude 37° 5′ west of Paris*; and the lowest 1.0259, observed by myself, in latitude 78° 0′, longitude 7° 0′ east †. The saline con-

* Annals of Phil. vol. xii. p. 32.

† In some inland seas, the degree of saltness is less than in any part of the ocean. In Baffin's Bay, for instance, the surface of the sea, (into which had been poured the water from snow and ice, melted in consequence of a summer's heat,) was observed by Captain Ross to be of as low a specific gravity as 1.020; and the specific gravity of the water of the Baltic Sea, is stated at 1.014.—(Annals of Phil. vol. vii. p. 42.) In the Mediterranean, however, the specific gravity of the water appears to be greater than that of the ocean.—(Annals of Phil. vol. iv. p. 206.)

[page] 172

tents of these two extrémes, do not differ above oneeighth part of the whole.

As it is not my intention to consider the hydrography of the globe, but only that of a small portion of it, called the Greenland Sea, I shall proceed to state the limits under which this part of the Arctic Ocean is comprised.

According to a section of a public statute, intended for the regulation of the Northern Whale-fisheries, the Greenland Sea commences with the parallel of 59° 30′ of north latitude*, included between Europe and America, and extends as far towards the Pole as can be navigated. In general language, however, among the whalers, the sea adjoining Spitzbergen, in which the first considerable whale-fishery was conducted, together with the islands in this quarter, receive more particularly the title of Greenland; while the sea to the westward of Old Greenland, Hudson's and Baffin's Bays excepted, maintains the name of Davis' Straits.

In the Spitzbergen quarter, the hydrography of

* 26th Geo. III. cap. 41. § 16.

[page] 173

which I have most particularly to consider, the sea is different in colour, transparency, saltness, and temperature, from what it generally is in the Atlantic Ocean.

The water of the main ocean is well known to be as transparent and as colourless as that of the most pure springs; and it is only when seen in very deep seas, that any certain and unchangeable colour appears. This colour is commonly ultramarine blue, differing but a shade from the colour of the atmosphere, when free from the obscurity of cloud or haze. Where this ultramarine blue occurs, the rays of light seem to be absorbed in the water, without being reflected from the bottom; the blue rays only being intercepted. But, where the depth is not considerable, the colour of the water is affected by the quality of the bottom. Thus, fine white sand, in very shallow water, affords a greenish grey, or apple-green colour, becoming of a deeper shade as the depth increases, or as the degree of light decreases; yellow sand, in soundings, produces a dark green colour in the water; dark sand a blackish green; rocks a brownish or a blackish colour; and loose sand or mud, in a tide-way, a greyish colour. From this effect of the bottom, the names of the White Sea, the Black Sea, and the Red Sea, have doubtless been derived. Near the mouths of large rivers, the sea is often of a brownish colour, owing to the admixture of mud and other substances held in suspension, together with vegetable or mineral dyes,

[page] 174

brought down with the fresh water from the land, But, in the main ocean, in deep water, the prevailing colour is blue, or greenish blue. It may be observed, that there is a good deal of deception in the colour of the sea, owing to the effect of the sun, and the colour of clouds; and its true tinge can only be observed, with accuracy, by looking downward through a long tube, reaching nearly to its surface, so as to intercept the lateral rays of light, which, by their reflection, produce the deception, and thus obtain a clear view of the interior of the sea. The trunk of the rudder answers this purpose tolerably well. When thus examined, the colour of the sea is not materially affected, either by sun or clouds. But, if examined superficially, from an exposed situation, the sea, in all places, will be found to vary in appearance with every change in the state of the atmosphere. Hence the surface generally partakes of the colour of the clouds; and, when the sky is chiefly clear, a small cloud partially intercepting the sun's rays, casts a deep brown or blackish shadow over the surface, and sometimes gives the appearance of shallow water, or rocks, and thus occasions, in the navigator, unnecessary alarm. It is not, therefore, the varying aspect of the surface of the water that is meant by the colour of the sea; but the appearance of the interior of a body of waters, when looked into through a perpendicular tube. The only effect then produced by a change in the aspect of the sky, is to

[page] 175

give the water a lighter or darker shade; but it has little effect on its real colour. For, observed in this way, the same colours may be recognised in storm, or calm, in fine weather or foul, clear or cloudy, fair or showery, being always nearly the same.

The colour of the Greenland Sea varies from ultramarine blue to olive green, and from the most pure transparency to striking opacity. These appearances are not transitory, but permanent; not depending on the state of the weather, but on the quality of the water. Hudson, when he visited this quarter in the year 1607, noticed the changes in the colour of the sea, and made the observation, that the sea was blue where there was ice, and green where it was most open. This circumstance, however, was merely accidental. Captain Phipps does not appear to have met with any of the green water. This kind of water occurs in considerable quantity, forming, perhaps, one-fourth part of the surface of the Greenland Sea, between the parallels of 74° and 800. It is liable to alterations in its position, from the action of the current; but still it is always renewed, near certain situations, from year to year. Often it constitutes long bands or streams, lying north and south, or north-east and south-west; but of very variable dimensions: sometimes, I have seen it extend two or three degrees of latitude in length, and from a few miles, to ten or fifteen leagues in breadth. It occurs very commonly about the meri-

[page] 176

dian of London, in high latitudes. In the year 1817, the sea was found to be of a blue colour, and transparent, all the way from 12° east, in the parallel of 74° or 75°, to the longitude of 0° 12′ east, in the same parallel. It then became green, and less transparent. The colour was nearly grassgreen, with a shade of black. Sometimes the transition between the green and blue water is progressive, passing through the intermediate shades in the space of three or four leagues; at others, it is so sudden, that the line of separation is seen like the rippling of a current; and the two qualities of the water keep apparently as distinct as the waters of a large muddy river, on first entering the sea. In 1817, I fell in with such narrow stripes of various coloured water, that we passed streams of pale green, olive green, and transparent blue, in the course of ten minutes sailing.

The food of the whale occurs chiefly in the green coloured water; it therefore affords whales in greater numbers than any other quality of the sea, and is constantly sought after by the fishers. Besides, whales are more easily taken in it, than in blue water, on account of its great obscurity preventing the whales from seeing distinctly the approach of their enemies.

Nothing particular being observed in this kind of water, sufficient to give it the remarkable colour it assumes, I at first imagined that this appearance

2

[page] 177

was derived from the nature of the bottom of the sea. But on observing that the water was very imperfectly transparent, insomuch, that tongues of ice, two or three fathoms under water, could scarcely be discerned, and were sometimes invisible, and that the ice floating in the olive-green sea was often marked about the edges with an orange-yellow stain, I was convinced, that it must be occasioned by some yellow substance held in suspension by the water, capable of discolouring the ice, and of so combining with the natural blue of the sea, as to produce the peculiar tinge observed.

For the purpose of ascertaining the nature of the colouring substance, and submitting it to a future analysis, I procured a quantity of snow from a piece of ice that had been washed by the sea, and was greatly discoloured by the deposition of some peculiar substance upon it. A little of this snow, dissolved in a wine glass, appeared perfectly nebulous; the water being found to contain a great number of semi-transparent spherical substances, with others resembling small portions of fine hair. On examining these substances with a compound microscope, I was enabled to make the following observations.

The semi-transparent globules appeared to consist of an animal of the medusa kind. It was from l-20th to l-30th of an inch in diameter. Its surface was marked with twelve distinct patches or nebulæ, of dots of a brownish colour; these dots were disposed

VOL. I. M

[page] 178

in pairs, four pairs, or sixteen pairs alternately, composing one of the nebula. The body of the medusa was transparent. When the water containing these animals was heated, it emitted a very strong odour, in some respects resembling the smell of oysters, when thrown on hot coals, but much more offensive. The fibrous or hair-like substances, were more easily examined, being of a darker colour. They varied in length from a point to one-tenth of an inch; and when highly magnified, were found to be beautifully moniliform. In the longest specimens, the number of bead-like articulations was about thirty; hence their diameter appeared to be about the l-300th part of an inch. Some of these substances seemed to vary their appearance; but whether they were living animals, and possessed of locomotion, I eould not ascertain. From one of the larger specimens I observed some fine collateral fibres. They possessed the property of decomposing light; and, in some cases, showed all the colours of the spectrum very distinctly. The size of the articulations seemed equal in all, the difference in length being occasioned by a difference in the number of articulations. The whole substance had an appearance very similar to the horns or antennæ of shrimps, fragments of which they might possibly be, as the squillæ are very abundant in the Greenland Sea.

I afterwards examined the different qualities of sea-water, and found these substances very abun-

[page] 179

dant in that of an olive-green colour; and also occurring, but in lesser quantity, in the bluish-green water. The number of medusæ in the olive-green sea was found to be immense. They were about one-fourth of an inch asunder. In this proportion, a cubic inch of water must contain 64; a cubic foot 110,592; a cubic fathom 23,887,872; and a cubical mile about 23,888,000,000,000,000! From soundings made in the situation where these animals were found, it is probable the sea is upwards of a mile in depth; but whether these substances occupy the whole depth is uncertain. Provided, however, the depth to which they extend be but 250 fathoms, the above immense number of one species may occur in a space of two miles square. It may give a better conception of the amount of medusæ in this extent, if we calculate the length of time that would be requisite, with a certain number of persons, for counting this number. Allowing that one person could count a million in seven days, which is barely possible, it would have required, that 80,000 persons should have started at the creation of the world, to complete the enumeration at the present time!

What a stupendous idea this fact gives of the immensity of creation, and of the bounty of Divine Providence, in furnishing such a profusion of life in a region so remote from the habitations of men! But if the number of animals in a space of two

M 2

[page] 180

miles square be so great, what must be the amount requisite for the discolouration of the sea, through an extent of perhaps twenty or thirty thousand square miles?

These animals are not without their evident economy, as on their existence possibly depends the being of the whole race of mysticete, and some other species of cetaceous animals. For, the minute medusæ apparently afford nourishment to the sepiæ, actiniæ, cancri, helices, and other genera of Mollusca and Aptera, so abundant in the Greenland Sea, while these latter constitute the food of several of the whale tribe inhabiting the same region; thus producing a dependant chain of animal life, one particular link of which being destroyed, the whole must necessarily perish.

Besides the minute medusæ and moniliform substances, the water of the Spitzbergen Sea, taken up in latitude 77° 30′, was found to contain several species of animalcules. Of these I discovered three kinds, full of animal life, but invisible to the naked eye.

There can be no doubt, I think, after what has been advanced, that the medusæ and other minute animals that have been described, give the peculiar colour to the sea, which is observed to prevail in these parts; and that from their profusion, they are, at the same time, the occasion of that great diminution of transparency which always accompanies the olive-green colour. For in the blue water,

[page] 181

where few of the little medusæ exist, the sea is uncommonly transparent. Captain Wood, when attempting the discovery of a north-east passage, in the year 1676, sounded near Nova Zembla in 80 fathoms water, where the bottom was not only to be seen, but even the shells lying on the ground were clearly visible.

Never having been in a very high latitude during any part of the year when the sun sets, I have never observed whether the Greenland Sea possesses the property of shining in the dark. There is, however, great reason to believe, that as the luminousness of the sea is often derived from small animals of the medusa kind, that the green-coloured water found in the Greenland Sea would be strongly phosphorescent.

The sea in the Arctic regions is of somewhat less specific gravity, than it is in temperate or torrid regions; and consequently less salt. The correct analysis of sea-water being a difficult problem, the usual measure of the saltness of the sea, is by its specific gravity; this, though but an approximation to the truth, when the quantity of any particular salt only is considered, gives the saline contents in the gross with tolerable accuracy. A quantity of sea-water taken from the surface in latitude 77° 40′, longitude 2° 30′ E., of the specific gravity of 1.0267, afforded in 1000 grains the following ingredients:

[page] 182

Muriate of soda, dried at temperature 212°, 30.80 grains
Magnesian salts, dried at about 212°, 4.01
Sulphate of lime, 0.81
Gross saline contents, 35.62,

the proportion of salt in 1000 grains of sea-water, being between l-28th and l-29th, or 10-286ths, or 3.56 per cent.

The annexed table exhibits the result of experiments on the specific gravity of the sea, in different parallels between 57° and 79°, made in various voyages to the Spitzbergen whale-fishery*.

* Since this Table was sent to press, an account of the "Quantity of Saline Matter in the Water of the North Polar Seas," by Dr Andrew Fyfe, has been published in the Edinburgh Philosophical Journal, No. I. Several of the specimens of sea-water examined by Dr Fyfe, having been collected by myself, in situations included in the annexed Table, it may be interesting to subjoin an account of the quantity of "saline matter per cent." procured from such specimens.
Lat. Long. Saline Matter per cent.
64°.26′ 0°.38′E 3.54
66.45 1.00 3.79
69.14 3.00 3.75
71.10 5.30 3.75
74.34 10.00 3.77
76.33 10.20 3.60
77°.30′ 6°.10′ E 3.42
77.34 8.00 3.70
78.25 8.20 3.91
78.30 6.30 3.88
78.35 6.00 3.27

[page break]

TABLE.

OBSERVATIONS ON THE SEA. TIME.
Latitude. Longitude. Specific grav. Temp. 60°. Temp. at at Surf. Colour. Tem. of the Air. Da. Mon. Yr. Situation and Remarks.
57.22 1°.16' W 1.0269 41°.0 Greenish bl. 41° 25 Mar. 1814 At sea
57.42 0.45 1.0280 43.0 Ditto 42 12 — 1810 Ditto
57.40 4. 8 1.0231 38.0 Ditto 32 14—1810 In Murray Fr.
57.43 4. 9 1.0244 39.0 Ditto 39 18 — 1810 In Cromarty
59.56 1.20 1.0272 42.0 Blue 32 21 — 1810 At sea
60.09 1. 6 1.0278 44.0 Greenish bl. 46 4 Apr. 1814 In Brassa Sou.
1.0274 43.0 Ditto 55 22 Mar. 1811 Ditto
1.0262 41.0 Ditto 29 23 — 1811 Ditto
61.46 0.23 E 1.0268 47.0 Ultram. blue 50 29 — 1810 At sea
64.26 0.38 1.0269 43.5 Ditto 44 3 Apr. 1815 Ditto
64.58 0.20 1.0266 48.0 Ditto 47 4 July 1810 Ditto
65.18 0.22 W 1.0264 41.0 Ditto 44 31 Mar. 1810 Ditto
66.45 1. 0 E 1.0263 43.5 Ditto 44 5 Apr. 1815 Ditto
69. 0 0. 0 1.0275 36.0 Ditto 39 2 — 1810 Ditto
69.14 3. 0 1.0269 38.0 Ditto 39 6 — 1815 Ditto
69.25 8.55 1.0273 42.0 Ditto 40 4 July 1810 Ditto
70. 0 5. 0 1.0274 40.0 Ditto 30 28 Apr. 1812 Ditto
70.25 1. 0 W 1.0272 37.5 Ditto 30 9 — 1814 Ditto
70.33 1.20 E 1.0266 32.0 Ditto 35 3 — 1810 Sea luminous
70.36 2.40 1.0271 43.0 Greenish bl. 45 17 July 1811 At sea
70.49 7.15 1.0271 36.0 Ultram. blue 33 10 Apr. 1813 Ditto
71.10 5.30 1.0269 39.0 Ditto 41 8 — 1815 Ditto
71.17 2. 5 W 1.0271 28.5 Ditto 6 11 — 1814 Among bay ice
71.20 2.30 E 1.0266 29.3 Blue 32 4 — 1810 Do. in open str.
72.15 7. 5 1.0261 29.0 Greenish 25 18 — 1814 Near a pack
72.15 10.50 1.0269 41.0 Blue 17 21 — 1814 30 mil. from ice
73.22 8.43 1.0262 31.0 Ditto 26 7 — 1810 Loose ice
73.42 16.50 1.0266 37.5 Ditto 11 10 — 1810 No ice in sight
73.50 15.40 1.0271 29.3 Ditto 7 9 — 1810 Amo. much ice
74.33 13.50 1.0272 34.5 Ditto 6 13 — 1810 Ditto
74.34 10. 0 1.0267 32.0 Ditto 15 10 — 1815 At sea
74.40 11.50 1.0272 32.7 Ditto 16 14 — 1810 Ditto
74.50 10.33 1.0272 28.0 Ditto 17 14 — 1810 Ice sludge
75.34 15. 4 1.0263 29.7 Ditto 33 17 — 1811 Some loose ice
75.36 9.14 1.0264 28.3 Ditto 10 15 — 1810 Sea freezing
76. 0 7. 0 1.0272 31.0 Olive green 32 25 June 1810 20 mil. from ice
76.16 9. 0 1.0261 29.0 Ultram. blue 5 17 Apr. 1810 Much drift ice
76.30 5.45 W 1.0261 30.0 Ditto 34 28 June 1817 Ice-field near
76.33 10.20 E 1.0267 33.0 Ditto 11 11 Apr. 1815 At sea
76.34 10.20 1.0265 30.0 Ditto 35 23 — 1811 Ship beset
76.40 5.20 W 1.0266 30.0 Greenish bl. 35 26 June 1817 Near a field
76.40 9.30 E 1.0263 29.8 Ultram. blue 18 30 Apr. 1810 Ice streams
76.50 10.30 1.0260 31.0 Ditto 19 26 — 1810 Open drift ice
77.14 10. 0 1.0267 29.0 Ditto 11 5 May 1810 Water freezing
77.15 8.20 1.0267 29.2 Ditto 16 1 — 1811 Ship beset
77.22 8. 0 1.0267 29.5 Olive green 30 22 — 1811 Much ice
77.23 10. 0 1.0261 31.8 Ultram. blue 26 6 — 1810 Ice all round
77.30 6.10 1.0263 28.5 Olive green 30 17 — 1815 Ice in sight
77.34 8. 0 1.0267 38.0 Blue 20 18 Apr. 1815 Ice streams
77.40 2. 0 1.0267 29.0 Greenish bl. 30 20 May 1813 Floes & drift ice
77.48 3. 0 1.0264 29.5 Blue 34 11 June 1810 Moored toaficld
77.54 3.10 1.0261 29.0 Greenish bl. 30 7 — 1810 Ship beset
78. 0 7. 0 1.0259 34.0 Ditto 34 24 May 1815 Ice all round
78.20 6.30 1.0265 37.5 Ditto 35 2 July 1811 Drift ice
78.25 8.20 1.0265 31.0 Olive green 26 25 Apr. 1815 Open iea
78.30 6.30 1.0265 29.0 Blue 24 26 — 1815 Drift ice
78.34 3. 0 1.0261 30.0 Greenish bl. 22 1 June 1810 Fields and floes
78.35 5. 0 1.0254 29.0 Olive green 18 19 May 1810 Drift ice & str.
78.35 6. 0 1.0261 29.0 Ditto 16 11 — 1815 Bay & drift ice
78.36 5.30 1.0260 31.0 Ditto 15 13 — 1810 Drift ice & str.
79. 0 6.30 1.0271 30.0 Ditto 29 6 June 1811 Drift ice
79. 4 5.38 1.0269 29.0 Ditto 38 21 May 1816 Floes & drift ice

[page break]

[page] 183

A glass hydrometer, with a large bulb and very slender stem, was used for determining some of these specific gravities; but others were ascertained by weighing the water in a thin glass vessel, with a ground stopper, capable of containing 1012 grains of distilled water. When the specific gravities were determined at any other temperature than 60°, they were brought to that standard by the application of a correction derived from experiment*.

* Table of Changes of Specific Gravity of sea-water, for every five degrees of temperature, between 30° and 100°, applicable as a correction to bring observed specific gravities to that of temperature 60°.
Temperature. Correction subtractive Temperature. Correction additive.
30 — .0016 65 + .0004
35 .0015 70 .0009
40 .0013 75 .0015
45 .0010 80 .0022
50 .0007 85 .0030
55 .0004 90 .0039
60 .0000 95 .0049
100 .0060

[page] 184

SECT. II.

Temperature, Depth, and Pressure of the Greenland Sea, with a Description of an Apparatus for bringing up Water from great Depths, and an Account of Experiments made with it.

In a sea perpetually covered with ice, the temperature of the surface might he supposed to be at or near the freezing point, in all seasons. This is no doubt generally the case; but it is remarkable that, in some situations, even in the keenest frost, and in the midst of ice, the temperature of the sea, in latitude 76° to 78°, is sometimes as high as 36° or 38° of Fahrenheit.

As far as experiments have hitherto been made, the temperature of the sea has generally been found to diminish on descending. But, in the Greenland Sea, near Spitzbergen, the contrary is the fact. For determining this interesting point, I first made use of a cask, capable of containing about ten gallons of water, composed of two-inch fir plank, as being a bad conductor of heat. Each end of the cask was furnished with a valve, opening and shutting simultaneously, by means of a connecting wire. With the top of the upper valve, moveable with it, was connected a horizontal lever, having a flat circular extremity projecting beyond the chime, or edge of

[page] 185

the cask. This lever, on the descent of the vessel, being forced upward, lifted the valves, and allowed a free course to the water, through the cask; but, on the motion downward being suspended, the valves fell down by their weight, and prevented the water from changing. It was generally allowed to remain about half an hour at rest, that the wood might attain the temperature of the sea in that situation, and then hauled briskly up without stopping, and the temperature of the contained water immediately ascertained. In the ascent of the apparatus, the lever connected with the lipper valve, met the current of water in a contrary way, pressed the valve firmly down, and secured the water more effectually within the vessel.

The results thus obtained were highly satisfactory; the water brought up being invariably warmer than that at the surface; but, after a few experiments had been made, the wood of the cask became soaked with water; several of the staves rent from end to end; and the apparatus became leaky and useless.

Sir Joseph Banks, who manifested much interest in these experiments, and favoured me with valuable hints on the subject, from time to time, then furnished me with an apparatus, made by Carey, under the inspection of Messrs Cavendish and Gilpin, both of whom, it is remarkable, died before it was completed. It was made chiefly of wood, and bound with brass. But the first time it was sent

[page] 186

to the depth of 300 fathoms, the wood swelled, opened, and became leaky, and two plate glass illuminators, intended to admit light for reading oft the degrees on a Six's thermometer, which accompanied it, were broken. Thus this apparatus was also rendered useless. After this, I made a model of a similar instrument, and got it cast in brass. This I fitted up, with the assistance of an ingenious mechanic, and applied to it the valves made by Carey, which then proved an elegant and useful apparatus. This instrument, which I called a marine diver, is represented in plate 2. fig. 2. It was 14 inches in length, 5 inches in diameter at the top, and 6 at the bottom. The illuminators, consisting of plate glass, were each 8 inches long, and 2 to 2¼ inches broad, and were placed on opposite sides. The form of the instrument was an octagonal tapering prism. A slender spring operated on a quadrant of brass, fixed to the hinge-part of each valve, and was so adjusted, as merely to support the valve, when placed in its most open position, but no more. The top of the instrument was fixed on by two thumb screws, and could be removed in a few seconds, for facilitating the examination of the water. The weight of the whole being 23 pounds, it never required any load for sinking it.

With this instrument, and the fir-cask before mentioned, I completed a series of experiments on submarine temperature, as far as contained in the following table.

[page] 187

TABLE.

Lat. Long. Experiments on Sea-water. Tem. of Air. TIME. Da. Mo. Yr Situation of the Vessel.
Depth in Feet. Temp. Specific gravity. Colour.
16°.16′ 9°.0′E Surface 28.8 1.2061 Blue 12° 19 Apr.1810 Ship beset inice.
300 31.8
738 33.8 1.0270
1380 33.3 1.0269
76.16 10.50 Surface 28.3 16 23 Apr.1810 Ship frozen up
120 28.0
300 28.3
738 30.0
76.34 10.0 Surface 30.0 1.0265 25 23 Apr.1811 Ship frozen up
120 31.0 1.0264
240 35.0 1.0266
360 34.0 1.0268
600 34.7 1.0267
77.15 8.10 Surface 29.3 1.0267 16 1 May 1811 Ship beset in ice
120 29.3
240 29.3
360 30.0
600 30.0
77.40 2.30 Surface 29.0 1.0267 Greenish 30 20 May 1813 Am. floes, &c.
300 29.3 1.0265
660 31.0 1.0262
79.0 5.40 Surface 29.0 Olive gr. 34 20 May 1816 Moored to a floc.
78 31.0
222 33.8
342 34.5
600 36.0
2400 36.0 blank
79.4 5.38 Surface 29.0 1.0269 38 21 May 1816 Am. floes & fiel.
4380 37.0 1.0265
80.0 5.0 Surface 29.7 40 7 June 1816 Ship beset
720 36.3
78.2 0.10W Surface 32.0 Blue 36 7 June 1817 Ice near
4566 38.0

* Down to this experiment, the apparatus used for bringing up the water, was the fir-cask; and the mode of finding the temperature, was by a common thermometer, after it came to the surface. Hence some sight change in the temperature might possibly take place during its passage upward; but, in all the subsequent experiments, a Six's thermometer accompanied the marine-driver, and consequently marked with accuracy the extremes of temperature through which it passed.

[page] 188

After these experiments were made, I applied a wire-gauze across the upper valve of the marinediver, and thus converted it into a trap for insects and small fishes; so that, whatever animals might enter by the lower valve, in its descent, were expected to be brought up along with the water in the instrument. In an experiment, however, on the specific gravity, temperature, and effects of pressure of the sea, at the depth of 7200 feet, the greatest depth, I believe, ever sounded, which I attempted to make on the 28th June 1817, one of the lines broke, and the whole apparatus was lost. This unlucky accident was occasioned by the thickest, and apparently the strongest, line of the whole series in use, having been rotted by receiving accidental moisture.

The depth of the Greenland Sea corresponds, in a considerable degree, both in irregularity and quantity, with the height of the Arctic lands. But the generally received opinion, that where a coast is mountainous or precipitous, the sea which washes it is deep; and where the land is low, the sea is shallow, does not hold in every place about Spitzbergen. Near all the headlands, stretching towards the south, indeed, where the land is usually terminated by a flat strand, the sea is shallow to a considerable distance, agreeably to the general principle; and a few miles off shore, in the neighbourhood of the mountainous parts of the coast, the sea

[page] 189

is usually very deep, which also verifies the rule; but, in some particular cases, even at the bases of some of the highest mountains, those in Charles' Island, for instance, the sea is shallow and rocky for several miles from the shore.

Within sight of Spitzbergen, on the west side, we sometimes find instances of whales, after being harpooned, "running" perpendicularly downward, and, on their return to the surface, giving indubitable evidence of their having been at the bottom; and thus, by the quantity of line drawn out of the whale-boats, affording a good measure of the depth of the sea. In latitude 76° 53′, longitude 5° 56′ E. the depth was thus found to be 3600 feet; and, within a few leagues of the same place, 4000 feet. But mid-way between Spitzbergen and West Greenland, in latitude 75°, 76° or 77°, and in other situations farther to the northward, the sea has never yet been fathomed. I have attempted to sound in latitude 76° 16′, longitude 9° E. with 230 fathoms of line; in latitude 79° 4′, longitude 5° 35′ E. with 670 fathoms; in latitude 78° 2′, longitude 0 10′ W. with 721 fathoms; in latitude 75° 50′, longitude 5° 50′ W. with 1058 fathoms; and in latitude 76° 30′, longitude 4° 48′ W, with 1200 fathoms of line, without finding the bottom.

In sounding at great depths, where the pressure of the water becomes equal to, perhaps, several hundreds weight on every square inch of surface, some

[page] 190

persons have imagined that even lead cannot sink. but will be suspended mid-way in the sea! I have conversed, indeed, with very intelligent persons, who could not be persuaded that any dependence could be placed on soundings obtained at a depth exceeding 300 fathoms. Were water a compressible substance, like air, it would be possible, that, under a certain pressure, it might become as heavy as lead; so that lead, or any other ponderous body, could only sink to a certain depth; but water being incompressible, or nearly so, it is clear, however great the pressure may be, that it must be the same downward as upward, on any body suspended in it; consequently, bodies specifically heavier, will continue to gravitate downward, whatever be the depth, or the weight of the column of water above them.

The difficulty of getting satisfactory soundings, at great depths, arises, principally, from the uncertain intimation given, when the lead strikes the bottom. This uncertainty is increased by using a thick line: for, if a lead of a hundred pounds weight were used, the rope attached to it would require to be so thick, that, at the depth of six or eight hundred fathoms, the weight of the line, even in water, would be so many times greater than that of the lead, that scarcely any effect could be observed when it should reach the bottom. Hence I always prefer a light lead, and a very small line. With a lead of 20 pounds, I have sounded in above 1000.

3

[page] 191

fathoms, and felt assured that, if it had struck the bottom, I should have observed it; for the whole of the line in use, was not above twice as heavy as the lead; so that the diminution of one-third of the weight, would have been very observable. But, with a heavy lead and thick line, where the strength of several men is requisite to haul it up, there can be no evidence, without the test of weighing, of any trifling alteration in the strain or weight. Hence, if the lead is found to have been at the bottom, there can be no assurance that a quantity of the line, as well as the lead, has not also been on the ground. To a 20 lb. or 28 lb. lead, I generally attach 200 or 300 fathoms of common log-line, where there is no valuable apparatus along with it, and to this a small lead-line, and finish with a deep-sea line, thus increasing the line in thickness, with the increase of weight to be supported; and having the whole of such a weight that the line can be held in the hand, and the least stoppage made perceptible.

At great depths, the effect of the pressure of the sea is not a little curious. My Father met with the following singular instance, in the year 1794, which I have taken from his log-book.

On the 31st of May, the chief mate of the Henrietta of Whitby, the ship my Father then commanded, struck a whale, which "ran" all the lines out of the boat, before assistance arrived, and then dragged the boat under water, the men mean while

[page] 192

escaping to a piece of ice. When the fish returned to the surface to "blow," it was struck a second time, and soon afterwards killed. The moment it expired, it began to sink, which not being a usual circumstance, excited some surprise. My Father, who was himself assisting at the capture, observing the circumstance, seized a grapnel, fastened a rope to it, threw it over the tail of the fish, and fortunately hooked it. It continued to sink; but the line being held fast in the boat, at length stopped it, though not until the "strain" was such that the boat was in danger of sinking. The "bight" or loop of a rope being then passed round the fish, and allowed to drop below it, inclosed the line belonging to the sunken boat, which was found to be the cause of the phenomenon observed. Immediately the harpoon slipped out of the whale, and was, with the line and boat attached to it, on the point of being lost, when it was luckily caught by the encompassing rope. The fish being then released from the weight of the lines and boat, rose to the surface; and the strain was transferred to the boat connected with the disengaged harpoon. My Father, imagining that the sunken boat was entangled among rocks at the bottom of the sea, and that the action of a current on the line produced the extraordinary stress, proceeded himself to assist in hauling up the boat. The strain upon the line he estimated at not less than three-fourths of a ton,

2

[page] 193

the utmost power of twenty-five men being requisite to overcome the weight. The laborious operation of hauling the line in, occupied several hours, the weight continuing nearly the same throughout. The sunken boat, which, before the accident, would have been buoyant when full of water, when it came to the surface required a boat at each end to keep it from sinking. "When it was hoisted into the ship, the paint came off the wood in large sheets, and the planks, which were of wainscot, were as completely soaked in every pore, as if they had lain at the bottom of the sea since the Flood!" A wooden apparatus that accompanied the boat in its progress through the deep, consisting chiefly of a piece of thick deal, about fifteen inches square, happened to fall overboard, and though it originally consisted of the lightest fir, sunk in the water like a stone. The boat was rendered useless; even the wood of which it was built, on being offered to the cook as fuel, was tried and rejected as incombustible.

This curious circumstance induced me to make some experiments on the subject. I accordingly attached some pieces of fir, elm, and hickery, containing two cubical inches of wood each, to the marine-diver, and sent them to the depth of 4000 feet. Pieces of wood, corresponding with each of these in shape and weight, were immersed in a bucket of sea-water, during the time the marine-diver,

VOL. I. N

[page] 194

and its attached pieces, were under water, by the way of distinguishing the degree of impregnation produced by pressure, from the absorption which takes place from simple immersion. On being brought up, they were all specifically heavier than sea-water; and, when compared with the counterparts, the clear effect of impregnation by pressure, was found to be 302 grains in the fir and hickery, and 316 grains in the ash. This experiment was repeated in latitude 78° 2′, on the 7th June 1817, by the immersion of several articles of different shapes* and sizes, to the depth of 4566 feet. On this occasion, the apparatus was 30 minutes on its way down, rested 40 minutes, and took 36 minutes in drawing up, being altogether 106 minutes under water. The degree of impregnation produced on each of the different substances used in this experiment, is stated in the annexed Table.

* My friend Professor Leslie suggested this variation of trying the relative degree of impregnation, on pieces of the same kind of wood, of different shapes; —a hint which I profited by in my later experiments.

[page] 195

TABLE.

Name of Substances. Shape. Solid Contents. Specific Gravity after Immersion. Proportion of Weight gained per Cubic Inch in consequence of Pressure.
Cub. Inch. W.60°.1000 Drams A voir.
Hickery Wedge 1.4436 1.1760 4.606
Elm Rectang. prism 2.0040 1.1321 5.639
Beech Ditto 2.0040 1.1806 4.790
Fir Thin wedge 0.9505 1.1168 4.050
Mahogany Parallelopiped. 0.8792 1.0523 3.071
Lign. Vitæ Rectang. prism 1.9356 1.3315 0.336
Bone Ditto 0.1380 2.1372 0.725

This degree of impregnation is not surprising, when we consider that the pressure of water, at the depth to which these specimens of wood were sent, is equal, at least, to 2031 lb. or 18 cwt. 15lb. on every square inch of surface*.

* According to the estimation of Sir George Shuckburgh Evelyn, (Phil. Trans. vol. lxxxviii.), corrected by Mr Fletcher, (Phil. Journ. vol iv.), a cubic inch of distilled water, temperature 60°, weighs 252.5060 grains, being the usual unit of specific gravities, or 1.000. The mean specific gravity of the Greenland Sea, included between the parallels of 76° and 79° N, is, at temperature 60°, 1.0264, and at 30°, (the mean temperature of the water at the surface), 1.028; hence, As 1.000, the specific gravity of pure water, is to 252.506 grains, the weight of a cubical inch of pure Avater, so is 1.028, the specific gravity of the water of the Greenland Sea, to 259.5761, the weight of a cubical inch of the same, at the usual temperature of the sea. This, multiplied by 12, gives the weight of a column of sea-water, an inch square and a foot long, equal to 3114.91 grains; which, multiplied by 4566 feet, the depth to which the specimens of wood were sent, and divided by 7004, the number of Troy grains in a pound A voirdupois, affords the result of 2030.65 lb. for the weight of a column of water an inch square, and 4565 feet high.

N 2

[page] 196

On the occasion when the marine-diver was lost, I had a very extensive and improved experiment in view, on the effect of the pressure of the sea, at one of the greatest depths ever sounded. Attached to the apparatus, were specimens of wood and other substances, to the amount of twenty articles, all carefully weighed and adjusted, that the increase of specific gravity might be accurately determined. This failing, however, by the breaking of the line, I repeated the experiment on the 18th July 1818; but having no apparatus for bringing up the water, or for ascertaining the temperature below the surface, my object was confined solely to the effect of pressure. Finding, on former trials, that pieces of fir wood sent down 4000 feet, were more impregnated with sea-water than others immersed only half that depth, I was in hopes that the degree of impregnation of similar pieces of the same kind of wood, might be applicable as a measure of depth. If this were the case, it would serve a very valuable purpose, since all the plans hitherto contrived for

2

[page] 197

measuring depths from a vessel, when sailing slowly, or drifting through the water, cease to be useful beyond 200 or 300 fathoms*. With this view, I not only attached pieces of wood of different kinds, to the lead, and provided counterparts for immersion in a bucket of water; but I also fastened cubes of ash, from the same piece of timber, of about one inch solid contents, and of the same exact weight, to the line, at intervals of about 500 feet; by the weight of which, when taken up, I could ascertain whether the increase of specific gravity was in any way proportionate to the depth. When the specimens of wood for this experiment were procured, a clear grained piece, of double the size wanted for sending under water, was prepared, and then cut in two, and the two parts dressed to the same shape, and to within a quarter of a grain of the same weight: one of these was then adopted as a principal, and fixed to the lead or line; and the other as a counterpart, and put into a bucket of water. The specimens affixed to the lead were eleven in number, and consisted of wood of different kinds, shapes, and dimensions: they were sunk to the

* A very recent contrivance, for obtaining soundings from a vessel under-way, founded on the small change in bulk which takes place in water when strongly compressed, promises to answer the design at still greater depths than 200 or 300 fathoms.

[page] 198

depth of 6348 feet. The line was almost perpendicular for nearly an hour; and when the lead was hauled up, I was assured, from its appearance, (the end being covered with soft grease, that would have retained an impression had it struck the ground,) that it had not been at the bottom.

Each piece of wood attached to the line, was taken off as hauled in, plunged in a basin of water, and conveyed into the cabin, where its weight in air and in fresh water was immediately taken. The interval between any two pieces was such, that I had just time to determine the specific gravity of one, before the next came up. On the arrival of the lead, the attached specimens were immediately immersed in water, and weighed as quick as possible, together with their counterparts, which had been secured at the bottom of a bucket of seawater, during the time the experiment was in progress. As the counterparts would have floated, they were each loaded with a piece of copper, weighing 880 grains when under water. Hence the excess of 880 grains, above the weight of any specimen in water, with this load attached, gave the buoyancy of the wood; which excess, added to the weight of the specimen in air, afforded the weight of an equal bulk of water; and the comparison of the weight in air, with that of an equal bulk of water, gave, of course, the specific gravity of the wood.

3

[page] 199

The following Table exhibits the results of this experiment*.

* It may not be amiss to explain the method by which the calculations, in the annexed Table, were made. I shall take the first line as an example. A cube of ash, weighing in air 157 grains, weighed in snow-water, temperature 60°, with a load of 880 grains attached, 797 grains, (col. v.) Hence 880— 797= 83 + 157, (col. iv.) = 240, (col. vi.) Then, as 252½ grains, (the weight of a cubic inch of water, at temperature 60°,) is to 1 cubic inch, so is 240 grains, (col. vi.) to 0.951, (col. vii.) And as 240 grains, (col. vi.) is to 1.000, (the unit of specific gravity,) so is 157, (col. iv.) to 0.654, (col viii.) The difference between col. x. and xi. gives col. xii. Then, as 252½ grains, is to 1 cubic inch, so is 238 grains to 0.943, (col. xiii.) And as 238 grains, (col. xii.) is to 1.000, so is 278 grains, (col. x.) to l. l68, (col. xiv.) The difference between cols. iv. and x. gives col. xv. And, finally, as 0.943, (col. xiii.) is to 121 (col. xv.), so is 1.000 to 128 (col. xvi.)
All the results in columns iv, v, x, and xi, were found by means of an excellent hydrostatical balance, sensible to the twentieth of a grain. The scale-beam, which was made under my own inspection, and after a new plan, by an excellent workman, has two adjustments, derived from a perpendicular motion in the centre of the beam, and a horizontal motion in the centre of one of the ends. The former moving up and down by two opposite screws, adjusts the centre of gravity of the beam, in any way that may be required, either for a quick or a slow motion: and the latter, moving horizontally, adjusts the two arms to the same length. With this balance, most of the specific gravities, and other weights of any consequence, given in these volumes, were determined.

[page] 200

EXPERIMENTS on the COUNTERPARTS immersed Three Hours in a Bucket of Water. EXPERIMENTS on WOOD, immersed during Two or Three Hours, at Various Depths in the Sea.
N. Quality. Shape Weight in Air. Weight in Water, with a load of 880 gr. Weight of an eq. bulk of Fr. Wa. Tem. 60°. Solid Contents. Spec. gravity. Depth. Weight in Air. Weight in Fresh Water, T.60°. Weight of an eq. bulk of pu. Wa. Tem. 60°. Solid contents. Spec. gravity Increase of Weight by Pressure. Proportion of Weight gined per Cubic In.
I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. IX. X. XI. XII. XIII. XIV. XV. XVI.
Grains. Grains. Grains. Cub. Inch. Feet. Grains. Grains. Grains. Cub. Inch. Grains. Grains.
1 Ash. Cube 157 797 240 0.951 0.654 6348 278 40 238 0.943 1.168 121 128
2 157 797 240 0.951 0.654 5868 290 41 249 0.986 1.165 133 135
3 157 797 240 0.951 0.654 5370 283 40 243 0.963 1.165 126 131
4 157 797 240 0.951 0.654 4836 278 39 239 0.947 1.163 121 128
5 157 797 240 0.951 0.654 4284 288 38 250 0.990 1.152 131 132
6 157 797 240 0.951 0.654 3708 286 39 247 0.978 1.158 129 132
7 157 797 240 0.951 0.654 3198 280 37 243 0.962 1.152 123 128
8 157 797 240 0.951 0.654 2628 277 39 238 0.943 1.164 120 127
9 157 797 240 0.951 0.654 2058 289 35 254 1.006 1.138 132 132
10 Parallelo. 252 743 389 1.541 0.648 6348 493 73 420 1.663 1.174 241 145
11 Cube 318 723 475 1.881 0.669 6348 593 88 505 2.000 1.174 275 137
12 318 723 475 1.881 0.669 7308 594 88 506 2.004 1.174 276 138
13 449 625 704 2.788 0.638 6348 868 127 741 2.934 1.71 419 143
14 606 537 949 3.758 0.639 6348 1188 177 1011 4.004 1.175 582 145
15 606 537 949 3.758 0.639 4836 1180 173 1007 3.988 1.172 574 144
15 606 537 949 3.758 0.639 4836 1180 173 1007 3.988 1.172 574 144
16 Fir Rect. pris. 220 631 469 1.857 0.473 6348 531 40 494 1.956 1.081 314 161
17 Oak 350 758 472 1.870 0.720 6348 589 92 497 1.968 1.185 239 121
18 Hickery 407 849 438 1.734 0.929 6348 614 119 495 1.960 1.240 207 106
19 Teak 370 777 473 1.873 0.782 6348 574 94 480 1.900 1.196 204 107
20 Elm 8289 752 417 1.651 0.693 6348 538 54 484 1.917 1.112 249 129
21 Cork Cylinder 49 711 218 0.863 0.225 6348 86 -94 180 0.713 0.478 37 52

[page] 201

From this Table we may observe, that the greatest increase of specific gravity, by pressure, in the specimens of the different kinds of wood submitted to experiment, was obtained by the fir; the next greatest by the ash; the next by the elm; the next by the oak; the next by the teak; the next by the hickery; and the least by the mahogany. The cork gained still less than any of the pieces of wood. The proportion of impregnation of the same kind of wood, in specimens of different sizes and shapes, is derived from the experiments made on the ash; and it is curious to observe, that the largest cube of ash, No. 14. and the parallelopipedon of the same, No. 10. received the greatest proportional increase of weight; while the smaller pieces received less and less additional weight, per cubic inch, as they decreased in size. Thus, No. 14. containing about 4 solid inches of wood, gained 145 grains per cubic inch; No. 13. of about 3 solid inches, gained 143 grains per cubic inch; No. 11. of 2 solid inches, gained 137 grains per inch; and the specimens of 1 inch, solid contents, gained from 127 to 135 grains. It is also a little curious, that the specimens sent to the depth of 2058 feet, were as much impregnated as those sent down above 6000 feet. The cube of ash, No. 11. consisting of 2 solid inches of wood, gained 137 grains per inch, at the depth of 6348 feet, while a similar specimen gained 138 grains, at the inferior depth of 3708 feet. In the same way, a cube of 4 solid inches gained 145 grains per inch, at the extreme depth; and 144 grains per inch, at the depth of 4836

[page] 202

feet. The degree of impregnation of the one-inch cubes of ash, produced by immersion to the depth of 2058 feet to 6348 feet, varies irregularly, but is evidently as great at the depth of 2058 feet, as under any superior pressure; so that it is probable that the greatest permanent impregnation by pressure, of such open-grained woods as ash, elm, fir, &c. is produced at the depth of 300 or 400 fathoms. Hence it is clear that no use can be made of this effect of pressure, for determining the depth, unless it be within 2000 feet of the surface; and even in this limit, the results may be uncertain.

From a comparison of column VII. with XIII., and column IV. with XV., it appears, that an effect of the impregnation of the wood with sea-water, was to increase its dimensions, as well as its specific gravity; each specimen, on an average, having swelled 0.05 cubic inch in every solid inch of original dimensions, and gained 84 grains on every 100 grains of original weight; that is, an increase of one-twentieth in size, and twenty-one twenty-fifths in weight.

I have little doubt, but the degree of impregnation always increases with the increase of pressure; but the air contained in the pores of the wood, which is never wholly disengaged, exerting an expansive force when the load of pressure is removed, forces part of the water out again. This was clearly discernible in some of the specimens used in the foregoing experiments, at the moment they were hauled up, their surfaces being covered with a thin pellicle of froth. Hence pieces of fir sometimes be-

[page] 203

come buoyant, after being a few hours relieved from pressure, though kept constantly under water; but all other kinds of wood yet tried, though they lose a little of their moisture, yet remain specifically heavier than water, as long as they are kept immersed. Blocks of wood, indeed, are now in my possession, that were soaked with sea-water in the year 1817, and yet remain, at the bottom of a vessel of water, nearly as heavy as when first drawn up out of the sea.

The degree of pressure at the depth to which I sounded in my last experiment, is not a little astonishing, being, under a column of water, 6348 feet in length, at least, 2823 lb. or 25 cwt. 23 lb. on one square inch of surface*. Hence on the larger cubes of ash used in the experiment, though measuring only 1.59 inches in diameter, the whole pressure must have exceeded nineteen tons!

SECT. III.

Remarks on the Currents of the Arctic Sea, with Observations respecting Waves.

THE determination of the various horizontal motions in the great body of waters of the ocean, is a

* In this calculation, as well as others of the same nature, the weight of the column of sea-water is taken throughout, the same as at the surface, where a cubic inch, temperature 30°, weighs 259.58 grains. As, however, water is found to be, somewhat compressible, its weight, at great depths, must be greater than at the surface; and consequently the whole pressure on the specimens of wood, greater than in the above estimation.

[page] 204

problem attended with much difficulty and uncertainty. These motions, denominated Currents, being under the influence of some of the same principles as regulate the winds, are found to be somewhat similar to the movements of the atmosphere, though more regular and steady. The general agents employed in the production of currents, are considered to be the rotatory motion of the Earth, the varying attractions of the Sun and Moon, differences in temperature, and particularly strong or prevailing winds. These, when combined with the peculiarities of form in sea-coasts, and in the bed of the ocean, with other topical circumstances, may serve to account for many of the currents hitherto observed.

Currents, as regards their permanency, are either general, particular, or variable; and, as relates to their situation, or to the depth at which they prevail in the sea, are called either bodily, upper, or under currents.

General currents are such as are always directed towards the same point of the compass. Particular currents change their direction periodically: and variable currents are such as have no stated period, being chiefly produced by the action of the wind.

A bodily current prevails where the whole mass of waters, from the surface to the bottom, moves in the same direction, and with similar velocity. An upper or superficial current, is where a stratum at the surface of the sea is in motion, while the lower

[page] 205

parts are either at rest, or have a different motion: and an under current is where a deep stratum of water moves in a different direction from that at the surface.

Hence where the motions in the water are so various, there must evidently be great uncertainty in the usual methods of ascertaining the set and velocity of currents in deep seas. Superficial and bodily currents, indeed, may be discovered by their effects on the progress and course of vessels sailing in them, or by their influence in conveying wood, fruit, and other produce of one country, to the shores of another; as also in conducting buoyant articles, cast into the sea, in known situations, to remote regions, where they may be recognized. And, in shallow water, or wherever the depth is such as to be fathomed with sounding lines, a heavy body, with a line attached, being sunk to the bottom, shows, by the relative motion of a boat at the surface, to which the weight acts as an anchor, the true set and velocity of the current. As, however, there are doubtless under currents, as well as superficial and bodily currents, it is evident that the usual method of sinking a heavy bulky body, such as an iron kettle, mid-way in the sea, and connecting it by a line to a boat, and thus forming the kettle into a sort of floating anchor, and estimating the set and velocity of the current by the motion of the boat through the water, cannot be depended on for discovering the real nature of the current, but

[page] 206

can only give the relative motion of the superficial water, as compared with that of the stratum of water in which the kettle is suspended. In fact, this plan for determining the course and velocity of currents, goes on the supposition that currents are only superficial, or that the waters below are always at rest, which is not true. In a deep sea, therefore, where no soundings can be obtained, the determination of currents must always be a matter of difficulty; and, in some cases, of impracticability.

By the effects of currents on vessels and other floating bodies, the courses of many general and some particular currents, have been determined in a most satisfactory manner. That general and extensive current setting westward in tropical regions, a branch of which, after doubling the Cape of Good Hope, and extending considerably to the northward along the western coast of Africa, crosses the Atlantic, accumulates in the Gulf of Mexico, passes out by the Bahama Islands towards Newfoundland, and constitutes what has been called the Gulf Stream, —is too well known to need any proof or particular description. On the great bank of Newfoundland, this stream meets with a current setting southward from Baffin's Bay and the coasts of Greenland; and is deflected, perhaps, in two branches, towards the E. S. E. and E. N. E. By the influence of these, plants, timber, fruits, &c. the produce of America and the West Indies, are frequently washed on shore on the coasts of Ireland,

[page] 207

the Hebrides, or Orkneys, as well as on the different shores of the continent of Europe*; and various articles belonging to vessels wrecked in Davis' Straits, or thrown overboard from vessels on the passage thither, have, by the same influence, been conducted to the shores of Britain and the adjacent islands. Thus, a bottle thrown overboard off Cape Farewell, on the 24th of May 1818, from the Alexander, (one of the ships lately employed under Captain Ross in search of a north-west passage,) was picked up on the island of Bartragh in the Bay of Killala, on the 17th of March 1819, having floated across the Atlantic at the rate of about four miles a-day †.

But as some very light substances might be drifted across the Atlantic by the prevailing westerly winds, instead of being conducted by the current, it may be of moment to mention, that among the different articles known to have drifted from Davis' Straits into the neighbourhood of Britain, were some casks and shakes ‡, which, from the marks upon them, were found to have belonged to the Royalist and London, two Hull whalers, that were wrecked between the latitudes of 61° and 62°, and

* Quarterly Review, No. 36. p. 441. —(Note.)

† Idem, No. 41. p. 255.

† For convenience in stowage, empty casks are sometimes taken to pieces, and the staves closely packed up in a cylindrical form, constituting what are called shakes or packs.

[page] 208

about the longitude of 56° W; the former in the year 1814, and the latter in 1817. The staves of blubber casks being generally soaked with oil, shakes formed of them float almost entirely under water, and are, therefore, defended from the influence of the wind; and these shakes being of a cylindrical form, are rolled over on their axes by the force of the waves, instead of being propelled through the water. Hence, on any reasonable calculation, founded on the influence of prevailing winds, such bodies could not be expected to accomplish a passage across the Atlantic, unless by the operation of a current, under the period of many years. But the casks above mentioned, were picked up off the Butt of the Lewis, within twelve months of the vessels to which they had belonged being wrecked: and a shake that had belonged to the London, was found by the crew of the Royal George, drifting through the Orkneys, about eleven months after the accident. The latter had, therefore, performed a passage of about 1600 nautical miles within the year; that is, at the average rate of five miles per day. It might be reasonably asked, How is it, when such a current always prevails, that no iceberg was ever conveyed across the Atlantic to the British shore? This does not appear to arise from the icebergs being dissolved in their progress; because they perform a passage equally long in other directions, having been known to drift to the southward as far as the 40th degree of latitude,

[page] 209

which is as remote from Cape Farewell, as some parts of Orkney or the Western Islands; but it would seem to be owing to the circumstance, of these bodies of ice floating so deep in the sea, as to be within the influence of an under current of cold water setting out of Davis' Strait towards the south, while the upper current takes an easterly direction; and carries all light bodies along with it. If this be the fact, the heaviest or deepest icebergs should be found pursuing a southerly direction, and the lightest or shallowest should be found more to the eastward.

From the coast of Britain, the northern branch of the Gulf Stream probably extends, superficially, along the shore of Norway, towards the north-east. About the North Cape, its direction appears to be changed, by the influence of a westerly current from Nova Zembla; so that it afterwards sets towards the north-west, as high as the borders of the ice, and thus operating against the polar current setting to the south-westward, may be the means of preventing the polar ice from spreading across the North Sea. From the fact of the sea near Spitzbergen being usually six or seven degrees warmer at the depth of 100 to 200 fathoms, than it is at the surface, it seems not improbable that the water below is a still farther extension of the Gulf Stream. which, on meeting with water near the ice lighter than itself, sinks below the surface, and becomes a counter under-current.

VOL. I. O

[page] 210

That fresh water obtains its greatest density at a temperature a few degrees above the freezing point, and that it expands on any farther reduction of the temperature, are facts well established; but that sea-water follows a different law, and continues to contract down to the point of freezing, is a question which has not been sastisfactorily decided. Count Rumford, in his "Essays," (vol. ii. p. 302.) says, indeed, that "sea-water continues to be condensed, as it goes on to cool, even after it has passed the point at which fresh water freezes;" but from the circumstance of an under stratum of water in the Spitzbergen Sea, being generally warmer by some degrees than that at the surface, though of similar specific gravity, it would appear that the warmer water is in this case the most dense, or why does it not rise and change places with the colder water at the surface? Hence I think there is reason to believe, that sea-water. follows the same law as fresh water, with regard to the extreme of density being a few degrees above the freezing temperature, and that the under-stream of comparatively warm water, observed in the Spitzbergen Sea, which is of a temperature 16° to 20° above the mean temperature of the climate, is an under-current derived from a southern region.

In some situations near Spitzbergen, the warm water not only occupies the lower and mid regions of the sea, but also appears at the surface. From inspection of the preceding Table of the Specific

2

[page] 211

Gravity, &c. of Sea-water, it will be seen, that, in some instances, even among ice, the temperature of the sea at the surface, has been as high as 36° or 38°, when that of the air has been several degrees below freezing. This circumstance, however, has chiefly occurred near the meridians of 6° to 12° east; and we find, from observation, that the sea freezes less in these longitudes than in any other part of the Spitzbergen Sea.

Within the Arctic Circle, from the north-eastern point of Russia to the coasts of Greenland and Labrador, the prevailing current at the surface, is from east to west, from north-east to south-west, or from north to south.

In Behring's Strait, between East Cape and Cape Prince of Wales, (it has been before observed,) Lieutenant Kotzebue, the Russian navigator, found a current setting strongly to the north-east, with a velocity, as he thought, of two miles and a half an hour, which is more than double the velocity of the current observed by Captain Cook*. Along the northern face of Russia, the current is decidedly from the east towards the west, following the line of the coast †. After passing Nova Zembla, it sets westerly to Spitzbergen, where one part proceeds round Point-look-out, and along the western shore

* Barrow's "Voyages into the Arctic Regions," p. 358.

† Russian Voyages, pp. 339 and 391. —Quart. Rev. No. 36. p. 443, 444.

O 2

[page] 212

towards the north, until it meets with another branch passing to the northward of these islands; these two branches then reuniting, proceed a little to the westward; and afterwards, being deflected towards the south by the coast of Greenland, proceed regularly towards the south-west, setting with a much greater velocity near the Greenland shore than in the vicinity of Spitzbcrgen. Pursuing its course along the cast side of Greenland, the current passes to the westward of Iceland, down to Cape Farewell. Having doubled this promontory, according to the opinion of O. Fabricius*, it is urged northward; but meeting with another current setting down the strait of Davis, before it reaches Disco Island, it is probably deflected to the westward, when the accumulation of waters on the western side of the strait, escapes to the southward, along the American shore.

The general route pursued by this current, is proved by the movements of the floating ice, which, between Spitzbergen and Greenland, being of the field or drift kind, follows, in a great measure, the motion of the superficial water.

Some illustrations of the preceding remarks shall be brought forward.

Four Greenland whalers, the Leviathan, Dauntless, Fortitude and Lion, were wrecked in the Arc-

* From a MS. translation of FABRICIUS, "Nye Samling af det Kongelige Danske Videnskabers Selskabs Skrivter," — communicated to me by Sir JOSEPH BANKS.

[page] 213

tic ice, in latitude 78°, longitude 3° W., during a severe storm, May 5th 1817. One of these vessels, the Dauntless, after filling with water, floated in an upright position, and was drifted along with the ice towards the south-west. On the 18th of May, while the ship under my command was navigating the recesses of the ice in latitude 75° 28′, longitude 10° W., I discovered this vessel still floating, which we found had drifted 182 miles, in a S. W. by S. direction, in thirteen days, being at the rate of fourteen miles a-day. The winds, however, during this period, having prevailed chiefly from the N., E., and S. E., some of this drift must be attributed to their influence, but not a large proportion, as, on the wind becoming light, and shifting occasionally to a southerly quarter, the wreck continued to set to the southward; and before the end of May, was seen in latitude 73° 30′.

In the same season (1817,) being far immured among ice, near the main western body, we moored to a floe, and maintained our position for four days, during a strong gale of wind from the N. W., N. and N. E. When the storm subsided, we found, that we had drifted along with the ice, sixty miles to the southward, and considerably to the westward, at the average rate of near twenty miles per day. Our drift commenced in latitude 78° 34′, longitude 2° W. On the 1st of July following, we penetrated the ice in latitude 75° 30′, as far as the

[page] 214

meridian of 8°W., and remained during a thick fog until the 9th, generally moored to ice, or drifting to the northward, with the wind constantly from the south-westward. As the ice was light, and had considerable drift in the water, we expected we must have set at least eighty or ninety miles to the northward; whereas, from our first observation of the sun, we found we had set nearly thirty miles to the southward. Hence, allowing for the drift of the ship by the wind, the current appeared to have set 110 or 120 miles to the southward in nine days, being twelve or thirteen miles per day, southing, or half a mile per hour, besides the distance it might have set to the westward.

In the year 1803, the Henrietta of Whitby, while prosecuting the whale-fishery, was, by a southerly storm, entangled among the ice in latitude 80° north, longitude 6° east; and afterwards accompanied it in its drift, first to the westward, and then to the south-westward or southward, at the daily rate of from five to fifteen miles. They saw bears in uncommon numbers; and at one time the coast of Greenland, they believed, was in sight. The ice pressed dreadfully around them, and accumulated in amazing heaps; but the ship always escaped the heaviest crushes, and was wonderfully preserved. After a state of complete inertion during seven weeks, the ice began to slack; when, with vigilant and laborious measures, they were enabled to make

[page] 215

their escape, in latitude 73½°, and longitude 9° west. In this involuntary passage along with the ice, the ship was conveyed in a S S W. ½ W. direction, (true) a distance of about 420 miles; or with the average rate of 8½ miles per day.

These facts, then, I conceive, are conclusive as to the prevalence of a south-westerly current in the Greenland sea in high latitudes; and the following, will perhaps, be considered as establishing the continuance of the same current down to Cape Farewell.

From a narrative of the loss of several of the Dutch Greenland fleet in the year 1777, we learn, that the ship Wilhelmina was moored to a field of ice on the 22d of June, in the usual fishing-station, along with a large fleet of other whalers. On the 25th, the ice having rapidly closed around, the Wilhelmina was closely beset. The pressure of the ice was so great, that the crew were under the necessity of working almost incessantly for eight days, in sawing a dock in the field, wherein the ship was at that time preserved. On the 25th of July, the ice slacked, and the ship was towed by the boats to the eastward. After four days laborious rowing, they reached the extremity of the opening, where they joined four ships, all of which were again beset by the ice. Shortly afterwards, they were drifted within sight of the coast of Old Greenland, about the parallel of 75½° north. On the 15th of August,

[page] 216

nine sail were collected together; and about the 20th, after sustaining a dreadful storm, and being subjected to an immense pressure of the ice, which accumulated around them twenty or thirty feet high, two of the ships were wrecked. Two more were wrecked four or five days afterwards, together with two others at a distance from them. On the 24th, Iceland was in sight; some of the ice was in motion, and two ships seemed to escape. Another was lost on the 7th of September; and, on the 13th, the Wilhelmina was crushed to pieces, by the fall of an enormous mass of ice, which was so unexpected, that those of the crew who were in bed, had scarcely time to escape on the ice, half naked as they were. One ship now alone remained, to which the crews of four, and the surviving part of the crew of a fifth, (that was wrecked on the 30th September,) repaired. By the beginning of October, they had drifted to the latitude of 64°; and on the 11th, the last ship was overwhelmed by the ice and sunk. Thus, between three and four hundred men were driven to the ice, and exposed to the inclemency of the weather, atmost destitute of food and raiment, and, without hut or tent to shield them from the piercing wind.

On the 30th of October, the miserable sufferers divided. The greater part betook themselves to the land, and attempted to travel along its rugged shores, while the rest remained on a field of ice, until it drifted as far as Staten Hook, and then pro-

[page] 217

ceeded in their boats along shore. The want of shelter and proper clothing, exposed them to dreadful fatigue and suffering, being often under the necessity of walking to and fro on a sheet of ice during the obscurity of night, to save themselves from being frozen to death. At length, after experiencing several acts of kindness from the native Greenlanders, about 140 of the men reached the Danish settlements on the west coast of Greenland; the remainder, consisting of about 200 persons, perished*.

Thus, it appears, that the ship which survived to the latest period, set with the ice in a south-westerly direction from the usual fishing-station, (probably in latitude 78° to 80°) to the latitude of about 62°; and, at the same time, from the longitude, perhaps, of 5° to 6° east, to about 40° west; and that the ice still continued to advance along the land to the southward. This extensive drift, at the lowest calculation, must have embraced a distance of about 1300 miles, on a course S. 43° W. (true), and having been performed in about 108 days, averages twelve miles a-day exclusive of the advance that was made towards the east, from the 25th to the 28th of July.

That remarkable agitation produced in the surface of the sea by the action of the wind, called WAVES,

* Beschryving der Walvisvangst, vol. iv. p. 18. -32. &c.

[page] 218

is, in nautical language, distinguished into different kinds. The first effect of the wind on the water, such as that observed in small lakes or rivers in strong winds, is denominated lipper or wind-Upper, and constitutes in the high sea or in large waters, the rudiments of all larger waves. The higher waves observed in the ocean, carrying inequalities and inferior waves in all parts of their surface, are, collectively or individually, called a sea, and are distinguished into different kinds, according to their characters, properties or appearances; such as, "a high sea," "a heavy sea," "a short sea," "a long sea," "a true sea," "a cross sea;" or, as relating to the position in which a ship traverses the surges, a "head-sea," a "beam-sea," and so on. But the smooth undulations of the sea which remain after a storm, or which extend beyond the influence of the wind into a calm region, where no such waves took their rise, is most frequently denominated a swell. Lastly, The sublime appearance of waves in shallow water, seen also occasionally in deep seas, in which their towering summits overrunning the velocity of the hollows, are reared beyond the perpendicular, and fall over like a cascade, is, the well-known and dreaded breakers, or broken water, of the mariner.

It has been intimated by Boyle, that the highest natural or ordinary waves do not rise more than

[page] 219

six feet above the general level of the sea. Such an elevation of the water occasioning an equal depression, produces waves of twelve feet perpendicular height. Accidental or extraordinary waves, however, such as where cross seas meet, or where parallel waves over-run one another, are sometimes much higher. The first cause of waves is doubtless the action of the wind; but the undulations which continue for many hours after the producing cause ceases to act, are attributed to the same causes as those which occasion the continuation of the vibrations of a pendulum for some time after any impulse.

The apparent progressive motion of waves has been shown, by Sir Isaac Newton, to be in the sub-duplicate ratio of their breadth, and the time in which a wave moves its breadth forward, (measured from the top of one wave to the top of the next), to be about the same as that in which a pendulum will perform one single oscillation, "whose length between the point of suspension and the center of oscillation, is equal to the breadth of the wave." Thus, while the particles of water have no horizontal motion whatever, the ridge of each wave may move with a velocity of 16 or 18 miles per hour. The progressive motion of waves resembles considerably the progress of a vibration on a very long tight cord or wire. If a cord of 20 or 30 yards in length, moderately extended in the air, be struck near one end, a vibration resembling a wave will

[page] 220

proceed to the other extremity, with a velocity proportionate to the degree of tension. If, by putting the thumb above the cord, and a finger below, a small portion of it be made to assume the form of the letter S, and then the hand be suddenly withdrawn, a vibration of the very form produced by the hand will procced to the opposite end, and from thence be reflected back, and then forward again for several successive times; and indeed, whatever impression be made on the cord, if in the form of two or three waves, the same will advance from end to end, preserving continually the same form. In this case, as well as in the case of waves, though the cord has itself no progressive motion, yet the undulations move with great freedom and celerity; not in proportion to their height, indeed, but, what operates in the same way as gravity on the water, namely, in proportion to the degree of tension of the cord. In cords of different thicknesses, with the same tension, the velocity of the vibration will of course be the greatest in the smallest cords.

As there is nothing very remarkable in the waves that occur in the Greenland Sea, excepting as to the effects produced on ice, hereafter to be noticed, any observations on this subject will equally apply to the waves in other seas.

Waves, though the entire product of the wind, are dependent, as to their magnitude, on the nature

3

[page] 221

and extent of the sea in which they take their rise, and on the state of dryness and degree of pressure of the atmosphere,

The natural progressive motion of waves being in the same direction as the wind, the windward or "weather-side" of a lake, river or sea, is generally almost as smooth in a storm as in a calm. Waves increase in size, accordingly as the strength of the wind and the distance from the windward-shore, become greater; but after they attain a certain magnitude, any greater distance from shore is productive of no further increase in size. Then they move forward, maintaining a similar elevation and velocity, (excepting where they are accidentally augmented by two or three waves of different elevations overtaking one another, and combining in the formation of one great sea,) to a distance often of many leagues beyond the limit to which the wind that produced them extends.

Were the atmosphere without pressure, it is probable, that no waves, unless of the smallest kind, would be produced. The pressure of the atmosphere bringing the wind and sea into immediate contact, produces more or less friction in proportion to the dryness or dampness of the air. Thus, when the air is very dry, it possesses a great attraction for water, passes over the surface of the sea with more friction, and produces more considerable waves; but whenever it is saturated with moisture, the at-

[page] 222

traction is diminished, and the waves are not so high. Most seamen will have observed, that in strong winds accompanied with heavy rain, the sea is seldom very high, and that much less forcible winds, with a dry air, produce higher waves. In this case, it is said, "the rain keeps the sea down." Whatever, therefore, diminishes the friction of the wind in passing over the water, or prevents the attraction of air and water, must operate against the formation of waves. Thus oil scattered on the sea, soon spreads over a great extent of surface, intercepts the attraction between the wind and water, and by its smoothness diminishes the friction between the two elements, so as to prevent the formation of the rudiments of waves. By subduing the inferior waves, it prevents the higher waves from overrunning them and producing breakers, and thus keeps the surface of the water, however undulated, in a smooth and pretty regular surface. A pellicle of ice formed on the sea, interrupts the free mobility of the superficial particles of the water, possibly reduces the friction, and produces a similar effect.

In temperate and frigid regions, where the winds are very variable and partial, two or three distinct swells, pursuing different courses, are sometimes observed at the same time; and it is a very usual circumstance, in traversing the ocean, to meet with various swells, the evident result of powerful winds,

[page] 223

indicating the prevalence of storms in the immediate neighbourhood, without ever being reached by the storms by which such swells are produced. Thus, in latitude 68°, in the month of July 1813, I experienced heavy swells from the E. N. E. and W. S. W., distinctly visible at the same time, while the wind was from the south. In latitude 63°, in April 1815, we had strong swells from both the northward and southward, indicating storms on both sides of us, while we had light variable winds; and before these subsided, an additional swell from the eastward made its appearance; occasionally the three distinct swells might be observed at the same time, but most generally only one of them was very conspicuous. In the month of July 1816, while crossing the North Sea, swells from the N. E., S. W. and E. occurred together; and in April 1817, heavy distinct swells from the W., N. W. and S. S. E., prevailed at the same time.

Swells in the polar seas are often the harbingers of storms. They are more considerable near the edge of firm ice, or among loose drift-ice, than in the open sea. And in the same way waves are often higher near shore and in shallow water than in the Main Sea. In the Greenland Sea, intermitting swells are not uncommon, especially among ice. I call them intermitting, because several waves of remarkable magnitude appear in succession, and then, for an interval of perhaps some minutes, the swell is almost imperceptible.

[page] 224

The original direction of waves is capable of being altogether changed by a particular form of an adjoining sea-coast, body of ice, or channel of the sea. When the wind blows directly along or parallel to the line formed by the shore, the waves incline towards the land. If a high sea takes its rise where the wind blows along shore, and the coast falls gradually back, so as to bring the direction of the wind off land, the sea will usually continue to roll along shore, following the form of the land, and changing its direction with every alteration in the line of the coast. In this way, where no large points interrupt its progress, the sea makes its way along an irregular coast of ice, until in some cases it is actually so inflected, as to proceed, obliquely, against the wind.

[page] 225

CHAPTER IV.

AN ACCOUNT OF THE GREENLAND OR POLAR ICE.

SECT. I.

A Description of the Various Kinds or Denominations of Ice.

Of the inanimate productions of the Polar Seas, none perhaps excites so much interest and astonishment in a stranger, as the ice in its great abundance and variety. The stupendous masses, known by the name of Ice-islands, or Ice-bergs, common to Davis' Strait, and sometimes met with in the Spitzbergen Sea, from their height, various forms, and the depth of water in which they ground, are calculated to strike the beholder with wonder; yet the prodigious sheets of ice, called fields, more peculiar to the Spitzbergen Sea, are not less astonishing. Their deficiency in elevation, is sufficiently com-

VOL. I. P

[page] 226

pensated by their amazing extent of surface. Some of them have been observed extending many leagues in length, and covering an area of several hundreds of square miles; each consisting of a single sheet of ice, having its surface raised in general four or six feet above the level of the water, and its base depressed to the depth of ten to twenty feet beneath.

The ice in general is designated by a variety of appellations, distinguishing it according to the size or shape of the pieces, their number or form of aggregation, thickness, transparency, situation, &c.

As the different denominations of ice will be frequently referred to in the course of this work, it may be useful to give definitions of the terms in use among the whale-fishers, for distinguishing them.

1. An ice-berg or ice-mountain, is a large insulated peak of floating ice; or a glacier, occupying a ravine or valley, generally opening towards the sea, in an arctic country.

2. A field is a sheet of ice so extensive, that its limits cannot be discerned from a ship's mast-head.

3. A floe is similar to a field, but smaller; inasmuch as its extent can be seen. This term, however, is seldom applied to pieces of ice of less diameter than half a mile or a mile.

4. Drift-ice consists of pieces less than floes, of various shapes and magnitudes.

5. Brash-ice is still smaller than drift-ice, con-

[page] 227

sisting of roundish nodules, and fragments of ice, broken off by the attrition of one piece against another. This may be considered as the wreck of other kinds of ice.

6. Say-ice is that which is newly formed on the sea, and consists of two kinds, common bay-ice, and pancake-ice; the former occurring in smooth extensive sheets, and the latter in small circular pieces with raised edges.

7. Sludge consists of a stratum of detached icecrystals, or of snow, or of the smaller fragments of brash-ice floating on the surface of the sea. This generally forms the rudiments of ice, when the sea is in agitation.

8. A hummock is a protuberance raised upon any plane of ice above the common level. It is frequently produced by pressure, where one piece is squeezed upon another, often set upon its edge, and in that position cemented by the frost. Hummocks are likewise formed, by pieces of ice mutually crushing each other, the wreck being heaped upon one or both of them. To hummocks, principally, the ice is indebted for its variety of fanciful shapes, and its picturesque appearance. They occur in great numbers in heavy packs, on the edges and occasionally in the middle of fields and floes, where they often attain the height of thirty feet or upwards.

9. A calf is a portion of ice which has been depressed by the same means as a hummock is ele-

U 2

[page] 228

vated. It is kept down by some larger mass; from beneath which, it shows itself on one side. I have seen a calf so deep and broad, that the ship sailed over it without touching, when it might be observed on both sides of the vessel at the same time; such an experiment, however, is attended with considerable danger, and necessity alone can warrant it, as calves, when disturbed by a ship sailing over them, have not unfrequently been called from their sub-marine situation to the surface, and with such an accelerated velocity, as to damage the vessel, or even to occasion shipwreck.

10. A tongue is a point of ice projecting nearly horizontally from a part that is under water. Ships have sometimes run aground upon tongues of ice.

11. A pack is a body of drift-ice of such magnitude, that its extent is not discernible. A pack is said to be open, when the pieces of ice, though very near each other, do not generally touch; or close, when the pieces are in complete contact.

12. A patch is a collection of drift or bay-ice of a circular or polygonal form. In point of magnitude, a pack corresponds with a field, and a patch with a floe.

13. A stream is an oblong collection of drift or bay-ice, the pieces of which are continuous. It is called a sea-stream, when it is exposed on one side to the ocean, and affords shelter from the sea, to whatever is within it.

[page] 229

14. Open ice, or sailing-ice, is where the pieces are so separate as to admit of a ship sailing conveniently among them.

15. Heavy and light are terms attached to ice, distinguishable of its thickness; heavy ice having a considerable depth in the water, and light ice very little; the former being dangerous to shipping, and the latter not. Bay-ice may be said to extend from the first pellicle of ice, up to a foot in thickness; light ice from a foot to a yard in thickness; and heavy ice from about a yard upwards.

16. Land-ice consists of drift-ice attached to the shore; or drift-ice, which, by being covered with mud or gravel, appears to have recently been in contact with the shore; or the flat ice, resting on the land, not having the appearance or elevation of icebergs.

17. A bight is a bay in the outline of the ice. 18.

18. A lane, or vein, is a narrow channel of water in packs, or other large collections of ice.

When the sea freezes, the greatest part of the salt it contains is deposited, and the frozen mass, however spongy, probably contains no salt, but what is natural to the sea-water filling its pores. Hence the generality of ice, when dissolved, affords fresh water. As, however, the ice frozen altogether from sea-water does not appear so solid and transparent as that procured from snow or rain water, the whale-

[page] 230

fishers distinguish it into two kinds, accordingly as it affords water that is potable, or the contrary; and accordingly as it appears to have been the product of fresh or salt water.

What is considered as salt-water ice, appears blackish in the water, but in the air, is of a white or grey colour, porous, and in a great measure opaque, (except when in very thin pieces), yet transmits the rays of light with a blue or bluish-green shade. When dissolved, it produces water sometimes perfectly fresh, and sometimes saltish; this depends in a great measure on the situation from whence it is taken: such parts as are raised above the surface of the sea in the form of hummocks, or which, though below the surface, have been long frozen, appear to gain solidity, and are commonly fresh, whilst those pieces taken out of the sea, that have been recently frozen, are somewhat salt. Although I have never been able to obtain, from the water of the ocean, by experiment, an ice either compact, transparent, or fresh, yet it is very probable that the retention of salt in ice, may arise from the sea-water contained in its pores; and, in confirmation of this opinion, it may be stated, that if the newest and most porous ice be removed into the air, allowed to drain for some time in a temperature of 32°, or upwards, and then be washed in fresh water, it will be found to be nearly quite free from salt, and the water produced from it may be drunk. And that sea-water has a

[page] 231

tendency to produce fresh ice, is farther proved by the concentration observed in a quantity exposed in an open vessel to a low temperature, by the separation of the salt from the crystals of ice, in the progress of the freezing. Thus it is, that, in the coldest weather, when a ship exposed to a tempestuous sea, is washed with repeated sprays, and thereby covered with ice, that in different places obstructing the efflux of the water overboard, a portion always remains unfrozen, and which, on being tasted, is found to consist of salt water highly concentrated. This arises from the freezing point of water falling in a certain ratio, according to the degree of saltness; thus, though pure water, of specific gravity 1.0000, freeze with a temperature of 32°, water of specific gravity 1.0263, containing about 5¾ oz. (avoird.) of salt in every gallon of 231 cubic inches; that is, with the degree of saltness common to the Greenland Sea, freezes at 28½°. Sea-water, concentrated by freezing, until it obtains the specific gravity of 1.1045, requires a temperature of 132/3° for its congelation, having its freezing point reduced 18frac13° below that of pure water; and water saturated with sea-salt remains liquid, at a temperature of zero.

Thus, we are presented with a natural process for extracting salt from the sea, or at least for greatly facilitating that process in a concentration of the saline particles, by the agency of frost.

3

[page] 232

Fresh-water ice of the sailors, is distinguished by its black appearance when floating in small pieces in the sea, and by its transparency when removed into the air. Large pieces may occasionally be obtained, possessing a degree of purity and transparency, equal to those of the most beautiful crystal; but generally, its transparency is interrupted by numerous small globular or pear-shaped air-bubbles: these frequently form continuous lines intersecting the ice in a direction apparently perpendicular to its plane of formation.

Fresh-water ice is fragile, but hard; the edges of a fractured part, are frequently so keen, as to inflict a wound like glass. The most transparent pieces are capable of concentrating the rays of the sun, so as to produce a considerable intensity of heat. With a lump of ice, of by no means regular convexity, I have frequently burnt wood, fired gunpowder, melted lead, and lit the sailors' pipes, to their great astonishment; all of whom, who could procure the needful articles, eagerly flocked around me, for the satisfaction of smoking a pipe ignited by such extraordinary means. Their astonishment was increased, on observing, that the ice remained firm and pellucid, while the solar rays emerging from it were so hot, that the hand could not be kept longer in the focus than for the space of a few seconds. In the formation of these lenses, I roughed them out with a small axe, then scraped them with a

2

[page] 233

knife, and polished them merely by the warmth of the hand, supporting them during the operation in a woollen glove. I once procured a piece of the purest ice, so large, that a lens of sixteen inches diameter was obtained out of it; unfortunately, however, the sun became obscured before it was completed, and never made its appearance again for a fortnight, during which time, the air being mild, the lens was spoiled.

All young ice, such as bay-ice and light ice, which form a considerable part of drift and packed ice in general, is considered by Greenland sailors as salt-water ice; while fields, floes, bergs, and heavy ice chiefly consist of fresh-water ice. Brash-ice likewise affords fine specimens of the latter, which when taken out of the sea, are always found crowded on the surface with sharp points and conchoidal excavations.

The most porous and opaque ice, and the most solid and transparent, do not differ materially in their density; the highest specific gravity I have observed, (compared with fresh-water at a freezing temperature) being 0.925, and the lowest 0.915. And it is a little curious, that in several careful experiments for ascertaining the specific gravity of ice, recently made, the most transparent specimens have proved the lightest, and the most opaque the heaviest*. The

* I have made several experiments on the buoyancy of ice, by cutting it into cubical or parallelopipedonal blocks, and measuring the part that floated above the surface in rain and sea-water, at different temperatures. This method, however, was found to give discordant results, on account of different sources of error to which it was liable. As such, I tried the specific gravity, by weighing different pieces of ice in the air, when the weather was cold, and then in fresh and salt water, at a freezing temperature, with a piece of metal attached to each specimen, to sink it. The difference between the weight of the ice in water, with the load attached, and the weight in water of the load singly, showed the difference between the weight of the ice, and an equal bulk of Avater; consequently, this difference, added to the weight of the ice in air, afforded the weight of an equal bulk of water; and the comparison of the two latter weights, gave, in the usual Avay, the specific gravity of the ice.
These experiments were alvays performed in the open air, when the temperature was 30° to 32°. The different specimens Avere dried Avith a coarse cloth before they were weighed in air, and immediately afterwards Avere weighed in salt and fresh water, at a freezing temperature. The particulars of these experiments will be found in the Appendix, No. VIII.

[page] 234

mean specific gravity of ice being considered as 0.92, it will appear, that the proportion floating above to that below the surface, when plunged in fresh-water, temperature 32°, must be as 1 to 11.5. But the specific gravity of ice, when compared with the sea-water occurring on the Spitzbergen coast, temperature 35°, was ascertained to be 0.894 to 0.900; as such, when ice floats in the sea, the proportion above to that below the surface, appears, by calculation, to be as 1 to 8.2. For every solid foot of ice, therefore, which, is seen above water in a

[page] 235

mass floating in the sea, there must be at least 8 feet below. A cubic inch of compact ice weighs 231.5 grains, and a cubic inch of Greenland sea-water at a freezing temperature, specific gravity (temp. 60°) 1.0264, weighs 259.58 grains; the weight of ice being to the weight of sea-water as 8 to 8.97, or 8 to 9 nearly.

Water, under usual circumstances, is known to contain a large quantity of air, amounting to perhaps 1/28th or 1 th of its bulk, which air, it is supposed is chi efly disengaged when the fluid is boiled. It would, however, appear, that the whole of the air contained in water is by no means disengaged even when boiling, as water that has been boiled and then frozen in vacuo, does not form a transparent ice. The following experiment on the disengagement of air from water during the freezing, intended for observing the phenomena more minutely than can be seen on the great scale on which nature, in the expanse of the ocean, operates, was made near Spitzbergen.

Into a 4 oz clear glass-phial, I poured 2 oz. of ice-water, and placing it upon the fire in a salt-water bath, soon brought it to the boiling point. Being removed to the front of a brisk fire, a strong ebullition commenced, which having continued for some time, accompanied with a copious disengagement of steam, the phial was suddenly corked and inverted. It was then exposed to a temperature of

[page] 236

10°, and the ebullition continued brisk whenever the phial was plunged into cold water or snow, for a period of 15 or 20 minutes. This showed that there could be little or no air in the phial. No crystals of ice were observed, until an hour and a half after the ebullition ceased, and then the process of freezing went on briskly. In two or three hours afterwards, the whole of the water was consolidated. Air-bubbles were observed moving towards the surface, as the process advanced, and, when completed, the ice had a milky appearance throughout, and was found crowded with minute globules of air. Hence it is probable, either that water is not entirely freed from air by boiling, or that some of the water is decomposed during the progress of the freezing process.

In consequence of this disengagement of air, ice formed in small vessels, or in confined situations, cannot be altogether transparent; for whenever a pellicle of ice covers the surface, the air as it is dislodged, is prevented from escaping, but rising as high as the ice will permit, there gets inclosed by the formation of new crystals, and renders the ice obscure. But where, from accidental circumstances, the air, as it is disengaged, can make its escape, the ice which is formed may present considerable masses totally free from any visible pore. Thus, when water contained in a large cylindrical vessel, is exposed to a low temperature, the first

[page] 237

appearance of freezing is about the surface and sides, in needles shooting along the surface, or obliquely downward. The ice on the sides then extends lower and lower, leaving a quantity of water in the middle in the form of a cone, which forms a receptacle for the air disengaged, as the freezing process goes on. Hence the ice on the sides, which is formed when the evolving air has liberty to escape towards the centre, is found purely diaphanous, while the last formed ice, in the shape of a cone, having its base on the bottom of the vessel and touching the surface with its apex, becomes the receptacle for the disengaged air, and is necessarily nebulous throughout.

Ice, when rapidly dissolved, continues solid, as long as any remains; but when exposed to the air at a temperature of only 2 or 3 degrees above the freezing point, its solution is effected in a very peculiar manner. Thus a large lump of fresh-water ice, when acted on by such a process, if placed in the plane of its formation, resolves itself into considerable columns of a prismatic appearance. These columns are situated in a perpendicular position, and are almost entirely detached, so that when a blow is struck with an axe, the whole mass frequently falls to pieces. In the land ice-bergs, these columns are often of amazing magnitude, so as, when separated, to form floating ice-bergs.

[page] 238

All the ice floating in the sea, is generally rough and uneven on the surface, and, during the greater part of the year, covered with snow. Even newly-formed ice, that is free from snow, is so rough and soft, that it cannot he skaited on.

Under water, the colour of the ice varies with the colour of the sea; in blue water, it is blue, and in green water, green, and of deeper shades in proportion to its depth. In the thickest olive-green coloured water, its colour, far beneath the surface, appears brownish.

SECT. II.

On the Formation of Ice on the Sea.

Some naturalists have been at considerable pains to endeavour to explain the phenomena of the progressive formation of the ice in high latitudes, and the derivation of the supply which is annually furnished, for replacing the great quantity that is dissolved and dissipated by the power of the waves, and the warmth of the climate into which it drifts. It has frequently been urged, that the vicinity of land is indispensable for its formation. Whether this may be the case or not, the following observations may possibly determine.

[page] 239

I have often noticed the process of freezing from the first appearance of crystals, until the ice had obtained a thickness of more than a foot; and did not find that the land afforded any assistance or even shelter, which could not have been dispensed with during the operation. It is true, that the land is sometimes the cause of the vacancy or space free from ice, where this new ice is generated; the ice of older formation being driven off by easterly winds, assisted perhaps by a current; yet this new ice frequently occurs at the distance of forty or fifty leagues from Spitzbergen. But I have also many times seen ice grow to a consistence capable of stopping the progress of a ship with a brisk wind, even when exposed to the waves of the Atlantic Ocean, on the southern aspect of the main body of the Greenland ice, in about the seventy-second degree of north latitude. In this situation, the process of freezing is accomplished under peculiar disadvantages. I shall attempt to describe its progress from the commencement.

The first appearance of ice when in the state of detached crystals, is called by the sailors sludge, and resembles snow when cast into water that is too cold to dissolve it. This smooths the ruffled surface of the sea, and produces an effect like oil in preventing breakers. These crystals soon unite, and would form a continuous sheet; but, by the motion

[page]240

of the waves, they are broken into very small pieces, scarcely three inches in diameter. As they strengthen, many of them coalesce, and form a larger mass. The undulations of the sea still continuing, these enlarged pieces strike each other on every side, whereby they become rounded, and their edges turned up, whence they obtain the name of cakes or pancakes; several of these again unite, and thereby continue to increase, forming larger flakes, until they become, perhaps, a foot in thickness, and many yards in circumference. Every large flake retains on its surface, the impression of the smaller flakes of which it is composed; so that, when, by the discontinuance of the swell, the whole is permitted to freeze into an extensive sheet, it sometimes assumes the appearance of a pavement.

But when the sea is perfectly smooth, the freezing process goes on more regularly, and probably more rapidly. The commencement is similar to that just described; it is afterwards continued by constant additions to its under surface. During twenty-four hours keen frost, it will have become an inch or two in thickness; and in less than forty-eight hours time, capable of sustaining the weight of a man. Both this kind and cake-ice, are termed bay-ice.

It is generally allowed, that all that is necessary in low temperatures for the formation of ice, is still water: Now, this is easily obtained independent of

[page] 241

the land: for in every opening of the main body of ice at a distance from the sea, the water is always as smooth as that of a harbour; and as I have observed, the growth of ice up to a foot in thickness in such a situation, during one month's frost, the effect of many years we might deem to be sufficient for the formation of the most ponderous fields.

There is no doubt but a large quantity of ice is annually generated in the bays, and amidst the islands of Spitzbergen; which bays, towards the end of summer, are commonly emptied of their contents, from the thawing of the snow on the mountains causing a current outwards. But this will not account for the immense fields which are so abundant in Greenland. These evidently come from the northward, and have their origin between Spitzbergen and the Pole.

SECT. III.

Description of Ice-Fields, and Remarks on their Formation and Tremendous Concussions.

Ice-fields constitute one of the wonders of the deep. They are often met with of the diameter of twenty or thirty miles; and when in a state of such close combination that no interstice can be seen, they sometimes extend to a length of fifty or near

VOL. I. Q

[page] 242

a hundred miles. The ice of which they are composed, is generally pure and fresh; and in heavy fields, it is probably of the average thickness of ten to fifteen feet, and then appears to be flat, low, thin ice; but where high hummocks occur, the thickness is often forty, or even fifty feet. The surface before the month of July, is always covered with a bed of snow, of perhaps a foot to a fathom in depth; this snow dissolves in the end of summer, and forms extensive pools and lakes of fresh water. Some of the largest fields are very level and smooth, though generally their surfaces are varied with hummocks. In some, these hummocks form ridges or chains, in others, they consist of insulated peaks. I once saw a field that was so free from either fissure or hummock, that I imagine, had it been free from snow, a coach might have been driven many leagues over it in a direct line, without obstruction or danger. Hummocks somewhat relieve the uniformity of intense light reflected from the surface of fields, by exhibiting shades of delicate blue in all the hollows, where the light is partly intercepted by passing through a portion of ice. When the surface of the snow on fields is frozen, or when the snow is generally dissolved, there is no difficulty in travelling over them, even without either snow skaits or sledges; but when the snow is soft and deep, travelling on foot to any distance, is a work of labour. The tribe of Esquimaux discovered by Captain Ross, made

[page] 243

use of sledges drawn by dogs, for conveying them across the rough land-ice, lying between the ships and the shore;—a journey they performed with such celerity, that Captain Ross conjectures "they could travel fifty or sixty miles a-day*." Hence, if such a distance were practicable on the drift-ice occurring near shore, it would be much more easy on the smoother ice of fields.

The term field, was given to the largest sheets of ice by a Dutch whale-fisher. It was not until a period of many years after the Spitzbergen fishery was established, that any navigator attempted to penetrate the ice, or that any of the most extensive sheets of ice were seen. One of the ships resorting to Smeerenberg for the fishery, put to sea on one occasion, when no whales were seen, persevered westward to a considerable length, and accidentally fell in with some immense flakes of ice, which, on his return to his companions, he described as being truly wonderful, and as resembling fields in the extent of their surface. Hence the application of the term Field to this kind of ice. The discoverer of it was distinguished by the title of "Field Finder."

As strong winds are known to possess great influence in drifting off the ice, where the resistance is not too considerable, may not such winds form open-

* "Voyage to Baffin's Bay," p. 133.

Q 2

[page] 244

ings in the ice far to the north, as well as in latitudes within our reach and observation? Notwithstanding the degree in which this cause may prevail is uncertain, yet of this we are assured, that the ice on the west coast of Spitzbergen has always a tendency to drift, and actually does advance in a most surprising manner to the south or south-west; whence, some vacancy must assuredly be left in the place which it formerly occupied.

These openings, therefore, may be readily frozen over, whatever be their extent, and the ice may in time acquire all the characters of a massy field.

It must, however, be confessed, that from the density and transparency of the ice of fields, and the purity of the water obtained from them, it is difficult to conceive that it could possess such characters if frozen entirely from the water of the ocean;—particularly as young ice is generally found to be porous and opaque, and does not afford a solution altogether pure. The following theory, therefore, is perhaps more consonant to appearances; and although it may not be established, has at least probability to recommend it.

It appears from what has been advanced, that openings may occasionally occur in the ice between Spitzbergen and the Pole, and that these openings will in all probability be again frozen over. Allowing, therefore, a thin field or a field of bay-ice to be formed in such an opening, a superstructure may

[page] 245

probably be added by the following process. The frost, which almost constantly prevails during nine months of the year, relaxes towards the end of June or beginning of July, whereby the covering of snow annually deposited to the depth of two or three feet on the ice*, dissolves. Now, as this field is supposed to arise amidst the older and heavier ice, it may readily occupy the whole interval, and be cemented to the old ice on every side, in such a manner as to prevent the melted snow from making its escape. Or, whatever be the means of its retention on the surface of the young field, whether by the adjunction of higher ice, the elevation of its border by the pressure of the surrounding ice, or the irregularity of its own surface, several inches of ice must be added to its thickness on the returning winter, by the conversion of the snow-water into solid ice. This process repeated for many successive years, or even ages, together with the enlargement of its under-side from the ocean, might be deemed sufficient to produce the most stupendous bodies of ice that have yet been discovered; at the same time, that the ice thus formed would doubtless correspond, in purity and transparency, with that of fields in general.

* That snow is deposited on the ice in high northern latitudes, is here allowed, because no field has yet been met with which did not support a considerable burden of it.

2

[page] 246

Fields may sometimes have their origin in heavy close packs, which, being cemented together by the intervention of new ice, may become one solid mass. In this way, are produced such fields as exhibit a rugged hummocky appearance.

Fields commonly make their appearance in the month of May or June, though sometimes earlier. They are frequently the resort of young whales. Strong north and westerly winds expose them to the whalers, by driving off the loose ice.

The invariable tendency of fields to drift to the south-westward, even in calms, is the means of many being yearly destroyed. They have frequently been observed to advance a hundred miles in this direction, within the space of one month, notwithstanding the occurrence of winds from every quarter. On emerging from amidst the smaller ice, which before sheltered them, they are soon broken up by the swell, are partly dissolved, and partly converted into drift-ice. The places of such, are supplied by others from the north.

The power of a swell in breaking the heaviest fields, is not a little remarkable. A grown swell, that is so inconsiderable as not to be observed in open water, frequently breaks up the largest fields, and converts them wholly into floes and drift-ice in the space of a few hours; while fields composed of bay-ice or light-ice, being more flexible, endure the same swell without any destructive effect.

[page] 247

The occasional rapid motion of fields, with the strange effects produced by such immense bodies on any opposing substance, is one of the most striking objects the polar seas present, and is certainly the most terrific. They not unfrequently acquire a rotatory movement, whereby their circumference attains a velocity of several miles per hour. A field thus in motion, coming in contact with another at rest, or more especially with another having a contrary direction of movement, produces a dreadful shock. A body of more than ten thousand millions of tons in weight*, meeting with resistance, when in motion, produces consequences which it is scarcely possible to conceive! The weaker field is crushed with an awful noise; sometimes the destruction is mutual: pieces of huge dimensions and weight, are not unfrequently piled upon the top, to the height of twenty or thirty feet, while a proportionate quantity is depressed beneath. The view of those stupendous effects in safety, exhibits a picture sublimely grand; but where there is danger of being overwhelmed, ter-

* A field of thirty nautical miles square, and thirteen feet in thickness, would weigh somewhat more than is here mentioned. Allowing it to displace the water in which it floats, to the depth of eleven feet, the weight would appear to be 10,182,857,142 tons nearly, in the proportion of a cubic foot of sea-water, to 64 lb.

1

[page] 248

ror and dismay must be the predominant feelings. The whale-fishers at all times require unremitting vigilance to secure their safety, but scarcely in any situation so much, as when navigating amidst those fields: in foggy weather, they are particularly dangerous, as their motions cannot then be distinctly observed. It may easily be imagined, that the strongest ship is but an insignificant impediment between two fields in motion. Numbers of vessels, since the establishment of the fishery, have been thus destroyed; some have been thrown upon the ice, some have had their hulls completely torn open, or divided in two, and others have been overrun by the ice, and buried beneath its heaped fragments. The Dutch have lost as many as twenty-three sail of ships, among the ice, in one year. In the season of 1684, fourteen of their ships were wrecked, and eleven more remained beset during the winter.

In the year 1804, I had a good opportunity of witnessing the effects produced by the lesser masses in motion. Passing between two fields of bayice, about a foot in thickness, they were observed rapidly to approach each other, and before our ship could pass the strait, they met with a velocity of three or four miles per hour: the one overlaid the other, and presently covered many acres of surface. The ship proving an obstacle to the course of the ice, it squeezed up on both sides, shaking her in a dreadful manner, and producing

[page] 249

a loud grinding, or lengthened acute tremulous noise, accordingly as the degree of pressure was diminished or increased, until it had risen as high as the deck. After about two hours, the motion ceased; and soon afterwards, the two sheets of ice receded from each other, nearly as rapidly as they had before advanced. The ship, in this case, did not receive any injury; but had the ice been only half a foot thicker, she might have been wrecked.

In the month of May of the year 1814, I witnessed a more tremendous scene. While navigating amidst the most ponderous ice which the Greenland sea presents, in the prospect of making our escape from a state of besetment, our progress was unexpectedly arrested by an isthmus of ice, about a mile in breadth, formed by the coalition of the point of an immense field on the north, with that of an aggregation of floes on the south. To the north field we moored the ship, in the hope of the ice separating in this place. I then quitted the ship, and travelled over the ice to the point of collision, to observe the state of the bar which now prevented our release. I immediately discovered, that the two points had but recently met; that already a prodigious mass of rubbish had been squeezed upon the top, and that the motion had not abated. The fields continued to overlay each other with a majestic motion, producing a noise resembling that of complicated machinery, or distant thunder. The

[page] 250

pressure was so immense, that numerous fissures were occasioned, and the ice repeatedly rent beneath my feet. In one of the fissures, I found the snow on the levl to be three and a half feet deep, and the ice upwards of twelve. In one place, hummocks had been thrown up to the height of twenty feet from the surface of the field, and at least twenty-five feet from the level of the water; they extended fifty or sixty yards in length, and fifteen in breadth, forming a mass of about two thousand tons in weight The majestic unvaried movement of the ice,—the singular noise with which it was accompanied,—the tremendous power exerted,—and the wonderful effects produced, were calculated to excite sensations of novelty and grandeur, in the mind of the most careless spectator!

SECT. IV.

Description of Icebergs, and Remarks on their Formation.

THE term Ice-bergs has commonly been applied to the glaciers occurring in Spitzbergen, Greenland, and other arctic countries. It is also as commonly extended to the large peaks, mountains or islets of ice, that are found floating in the sea. The fixed ice-bergs, or polar glaciers, have been described in

[page] 251

the account of Spitzbergen; it is only necessary, therefore, in this place, to mention the floating icebergs.

Ice-bergs occur in many places in the Arctic and Antarctic regions; some of them of astonishing magnitude. In the Spitzbergen sea, indeed, they are neither numerous nor bulky, compared with those of other regions; the largest I ever met with in this quarter not exceeding 1000 yards in circumference and 200 feet in thickness. But in Hudson's Strait, Davis' Strait, and Baffin's Bay, they occur of a prodigious size. Ellis describes them as sometimes occurring of the thickness of 500 or 600 yards. Frobisher saw one ice-berg which was judged to be "near fourscore fathoms above water." Captain Middleton states the occasional size of bergs as being three or four miles in circumference, 100 fathoms under water, and a fifth or sixth part above. Captain Ross, in Davis' Strait and Baffin's Bay, observed a variety of icebergs; at one time at least 700 being in sight, of which some were of astonishing magnitude, and of very singular form. One berg is described by Captain Ross as being 40 feet high and 1000 feet long; another 85 feet high and 1200 feet in circumference; another 325 feet high and 1200 feet long; another aground in 150 fathoms water, and several together aground in 250 fathoms; and one, he particularly describes, (the dimensions of which were

[page] 252

given in by Lieutenant Parry,) as having nine unequal sides, as being aground in 61 fathoms, and as measuring 4169 yards (paces) long, 3689 yards broad, and 51 feet high. The weight of this ice-berg, taken at somewhat smaller dimensions, was estimated by an officer of the Alexander, at 1,292,397,673 tons. This amount, however, is greater than the truth, the cubical inch of ice being taken at 240 grains, whereas it does not exceed 231.5 grains.

Captain Cook, when exploring the regions beyond the antarctic circle, met with ice-bergs on every course, in great abundance, as well as of vast size; many, according to Forster, were one or two miles in extent, and upwards of 100 feet above the water. On the 26th of December 1773, they counted 186 ice-bergs from the mast-head, whereof none were less than the hull of a ship.

The most abundant source of floating ice-bergs known in the arctic regions, is Baffin's Bay. From this remarkable sea, they constantly make their way towards the south, down Davis' Strait, and are scattered abroad in the Atlantic to an amazing extent. The banks of Newfoundland are occasionally crowded with these wonderful productions of the Frigid Zone; beyond which they are sometimes conveyed, by the operation of the southerly under-current, as low as latitude 40° north, and even lower, a distance of at least 2000 miles from the place of their origin.

[page] 253

Ice-bergs commonly float on a base which is larger in extent than the upper surface. Hence the proportion of ice appearing above water, is seldom less in elevation than one-seventh of the whole thickness; and when the summit is conical, or of the steeple form, the elevation above water is frequently one-fourth of the whole depth of the berg.

Perhaps the most general form of ice-bergs, is with one high perpendicular side, the opposite side very low, and the intermediate surface forming a gradual slope. When of such a form, Captain Ross found that the higher end was generally to windward. Some ice-bergs have regular flat surfaces; but most usually they have different acute summits, and occasionally exhibit the most fantastic shapes. Some have been seen that were completely perforated, or containing prodigious caverns, or having many clefts and cracks in the most elevated parts, so as to give the appearance of several distinct spires.

On some ice-bergs, where there are hollows, a great quantity of snow accumulates; others are smooth and naked. The naked sides are often filled with conchoidal excavations of various magnitudes; sometimes with hollows the size of the finger, and as regular as if formed by art. On some bergs pools of water occur stagnant: on others, large streams are seen oozing through crevices into the sea. In a high sea, the waves break against them

[page] 254

as against a rock; and, in calm weather, where there is a swell, the noise made by their rising and falling is tremendous. When ice-bergs are aground, or when there is a superficial current running to leeward, the motion of other ice past them is so great, that they appear to he moving to windward. Fields of ice of considerable thickness, meeting a berg under such circumstances, are sometimes completely ripped up, and divided through the middle. Ice-bergs, when acted on by the sun, or by a temperate atmosphere, become hollow and fragile. Large pieces are then liable to be broken off, and fall into the sea with a terrible crash, which in some places produces an extraordinary echo in the neighbouring mountains. When this circumstance, called calving, takes place, the ice-berg loses its equilibrium, sometimes turns on one side, and occasionally is inverted. The sea is thereby put into commotion; fields of ice in the vicinity are broken up; the waves extend, and the noise is heard to the distance of several miles; and sometimes the rolling motion of the berg not ceasing, other pieces get loosened and detached, until the whole mass falls asunder, like a wreck*.

Ice-bergs differ a little in colour, according to their solidity and distance, or state of the atmosphere. A very general appearance is that of cliffs

* FABRICIUS, Translation by Sir JOSEPH BANKS.

[page] 255

of chalk, or of white or grey marble. The sun's rays reflected from them, sometimes give a glistening appearance to their surfaces. Different shades of colour occur in the precipitous parts, accordingly as the ice is more or less solid, and accordingly as it contains strata of earth, gravel, or sand, or is free from any impurity. In the fresh fracture, greenishgrey, approaching to emerald-green, is the prevailing colour.

In the night, ice-bergs are readily distinguished, even at a distance, by their natural effulgence; and, in foggy weather, by a peculiar blackness in the atmosphere, by which the danger to the navigator is diminished. As, however, they occur far from land, and often in unexpected situations, navigators crossing the Atlantic in the gloom of night, between the parallels of 50° and 60° of latitude, or even farther to the south, require to be always on the watch for them. In some places, near Cape Farewell, or towards the mouth of Davis' Strait, they sometimes occur in extensive chains; in which case, fatal accidents have occurred, by vessels getting involved among them in the night, during storms. But ice-bergs occurring singly, have rarely been productive of any serious mischief.

Ice-bergs, though often dangerous neighbours, occasionally prove useful auxiliaries to the whale-fishers. Their situation, in a smooth sea, is very little affected by the wind: under the strongest gale, they are not perceptibly moved; but on the contrary, have

[page] 256

the appearance of advancing to windward, because every other description of ice moves rapidly past them, on account of its finding less resistance from the water, and consequently drifting faster to leeward, in proportion as its depth beneath the surface is diminished. From the ice-berg's firmness, it often affords a stable mooring to a ship in strong adverse winds, or when a state of rest is required for the performance of the different operations attendant on a successful fishery. The fisher likewise avails himself of this quiescent property, when his ship is incommoded or rendered unmanageable by the accumulation of drift ice around, when his object is to gain a windward situation more open. He moors under the lee of the ice-berg,—the loose ice soon forces past,—the ship remains nearly stationary,— and the wished-for effect seldom fails to result. Mooring to lofty ice-bergs, is attended with considerable danger: being sometimes finely balanced, they are apt to be overturned; and, while floating in a tide-way, should their base be arrested by the ground, their detrusion necessarily follows, attended with a thundering noise, and the crushing of every object they encounter in their descent. Thus have vessels been often staved, and sometimes wrecked by the fall of their icy mooring; while smaller objects, such as boats, have been repeatedly overwhelmed, even at a considerable distance, by the vast waves occasioned by such events.

[page] 257

All ice becomes exceedingly fragile towards the close of the whale-fishing season, when the temperate air thaws its surface, and changes its solid structure into a brittle mass of imperfectly attached columns. Bergs, in this state, on being struck by an axe, for the purpose of placing a mooring anchor, have been known to rend asunder, and precipitate the careless seamen into the yawning chasm, whilst occasionally the masses are hurled apart, and fall in contrary directions with a prodigious crash, burying boats and men in one common ruin. The awful effect produced by a solid mass many thousands or even millions of tons in weight, changing its situation with the velocity of a falling body, whereby its aspiring summit is in a moment buried in the ocean, can be more easily imagined than described.

Though a blow with an edge-tool on brittle ice does not sever the mass, still it is often succeeded by a crackling noise, proving the mass to be ready to burst from the force of internal expansion, or from the destruction of its texture by a warm temperature.

It is common, when ships moor to icebergs, to lie as remote from them as their ropes will allow, and yet accidents sometimes happen, though the ship ride at the distance of a hundred yards from the ice. Thus, calves rising up with a velocity nearly equal to that of the descent of a falling berg, have produced destructive effects. In the year 1812, while

VOL. I. R

[page] 258

the Thomas of Hull, Captain Taylor, lay moored to an ice-berg in Davis' Strait, a calf was detached from beneath, and rose with such tremendous force, that the keel of the ship was lifted on a level with the water at the bow, and the stern was nearly immersed beneath the surface. Fortunately the blow was received on the keel, and the ship was not materially damaged.

From the deep pools of water formed in the summer season, on the depressed surface of some bergs, or from the streams running down their sides, the ships navigating where they abound, are presented with opportunities for watering with the greatest ease and despatch. For this purpose, casks are landed upon the lower bergs, filled, and rolled into the sea; but from the higher, the water is conveyed by means of a long tube of canvas or leather, callcd a hose, into casks placed in the boats, at the side of the ice, or even upon the deck of the ship.

The greater part of the ice-bergs that occur in Davis' Strait, and on the eastern coast of North America, notwithstanding their profusion and immense magnitude, seem to be merely fragments of the land ice-bergs or glaciers, which exist in great numbers on the coast, forming the boundaries of Baffin's Bay. These glaciers fill immense valleys, and extend in some places several miles into the sea; in others, they terminate with a precipitous

[page] 259

edge at the general line formed by the coast. In the summer season, when they are particularly fragile, the force of cohesion is often overcome by the weight of the prodigious masses that overhang the sea; and in winter, the same effect may be produced, by the powerful expansion of the water filling any excavation or deep-seated cavity, when its dimensions are enlarged by freezing, thereby exerting a tremendous force, and bursting the berg asunder.

Pieces thus or otherwise detached, are hurled into the sea with a dreadful crash. When they fall into sufficiently deep water, they are liable to be drifted off the land, and down Davis' Strait, according to the set of the current; but if they fall into a shallow sea, there they must remain until sufficiently wasted to float away. In their passage down the Strait, they often ground on the reefs or shallows which occur in different situations, where they interrupt the passage of the drift-ice, and become formidable barriers to the advance of the whale-fishers into Baffin's Bay. On these reefs, and in the bays in Davis' Strait, ice-bergs have been known to take the ground, and remain stationary for some years. Fabrieius and Crantz mention two immense ice-bergs having grounded in South-East Bay, where they remained several years. From their vast size, they were named by the Dutch. Amsterdam and Haarlem.

R 2

[page] 260

Spitzbergen is possessed of every character which is supposed to be necessary for the formation of the largest ice-bergs:—high mountains, deep extensive valleys, intense frost, occasional thaws, and great falls of sleet and snow; yet here a berg is rarely met with; and the largest that occur are not to be compared with the productions of Baffin's Bay. The reason of the difference between Spitzbergen and Old Greenland, as to the production of ice-bergs, is perhaps this: That while the sea is generally deep, and the coast almost continually sheltered by drift-ice at the foot of the glaciers in Baffin's Bay; in Spitzbergen, on the contrary, they usually terminate at the water's edge, or where the sea is shallow, so that no very large mass, if dislodged, can float away, and they are at the same time so much exposed to heavy swells, as to occasion dismemberments too frequently to admit of their attaining a very considerable magnitude.

Some ice-bergs, it is possible, may have their origin in deep-sheltered coves or narrow bays, which, from their contracted outlets, may prevent the ice annually formed from being disembogued, and may thus form a secure basement for a superstructure of any magnitude. Such coves being at length filled, the ice may protrude beyond its capes, and give rise to floating ice-bergs.

Müller, in his "Summary of Voyages made by the Russians on the Frozen Sea." relates a circum-

[page] 261

stance, from which there is reason to infer, that some ice-bergs have their origin in the wide expanse of the ocean. He informs us, in a brief account, already noticed, of the expedition of Alexei Markoff, across an extensive body of ice, in the year 1714; that after this traveller had proceeded seven days northward, from the mouth of the Jana, as fast as his dogs could draw, his progress was impeded by ice rising in the sea like mountains, from the top of which no land could be seen, but only ice.

Here, therefore, is a fact of a continent, if we may so speak, of mountainous ice existing, and probably constantly increasing in the ocean, at a distance of between three and four hundred miles from any known land: indeed, it must, in such a situation, be so completely sheltered by the exterior drift or field-ice in all directions, that every facility seems to be afforded for its growth, that a sheltered bay in the land could supply: For if we can conceive, from the fore-mentioned process of the enlargement of fields by the addition of the annually deposited humidity, that a few years may be sufficient for the production of considerable fields of ice, what might be the effect of fifty or sixty centuries, affording an annual increase? And if, to the precipitations from the atmosphere, we add the store of ice supplied by the sea during intense frosts, and conceive also of a state of quiescence, for the full operation of these causes, secured for ages,—the question of

[page] 262

the possibility of ice-bergs being produced in the sea, would seem to have a sufficient solution.

Should this conclusion be admitted, that icebergs may in some cases have their origin at a distance from land, then it would appear that the occurrence of ice-bergs in the antarctic zone, is by no means decisive of the existence of land around the Southern Pole.

SECT. V.

On the Situation or General Outline of the Polar Ice.

That extensive body of ice, which, with occasional tracts of land, occupies the northern extremity of the earth, and prevents all access to the regions immediately surrounding the Pole, fills, it appears, on an average, a circle of above 2000 geographical miles diameter; and presents an outline which, though subject to partial variations, is found, at the same season of each succeeding year, to be generally similar, and often strikingly uniform.

The most remarkable alteration in the configuration of the polar ice on record, is that said to have taken place between Iceland and Greenland, in the beginning of the fifteenth century, whereby the intercourse between the Icelanders and the colonies

[page] 263

in Greenland was interrupted; and although many attempts have been made on the part of Denmark, for the recovery of these colonies, and for ascertaining the fate of the colonists, they have not yet succeeded in either. It appears, that a considerable trade had been carried on between Iceland and Greenland, for upwards of 400 years, (the coasts of the latter being always accessible in the summer,) when a suspension of the intercourse took place, in consequence, it is imagined, of the polar ice having suddenly extended its usual limits, launched down by the land to Cape Farewell, and having so completely barricadoed the whole of the eastern and southern coasts, as to render them totally inaccessible. Whether this was the real and only cause of the loss of the Greenland colonies to Denmark and Iceland? Whether any of the inhabitants yet remain, or the whole race is extinct? Whether the change in the position of the ice was partial or permanent? And whether the coast where the settlements were made, may not now be approached? Are questions at present unanswerable; but which, in the main, might, perhaps, be resolved by a single examination of the coast.

In various countries, changes of climate to a certain extent, have occurred, within the limits of historical record; these changes have been commonly for the better, and have been considered as the effects of human industry, in draining marshes and

[page] 264

lakes, felling woods, and cultivating the earth: but here is an occurrence, if indeed true, the reverse of common experience, concerning the causes of which it is not easy to offer any conjecture.

Another alteration in the position of the Greenland ice, of little importance, however, compared with the above, took place since the year 1815; a body of about 2000 square leagues of ice, having drifted out of the Greenland Sea, from between the parallels of 74° and 80°. This dispersion of ice, however great as it appears to be, is probably only temporary; and may, in a very few years, may, in a season or two, be entirely replaced.

With each recurring spring, the north Polar ice presents the following general outline. Filling the bays of Hudson and Baffin, as well as the straits of Hudson and part of that of Davis, it exhibits an irregular waving, but generally continuous line, from Newfoundland or Labrador, to Nova Zembla.

From Newfoundland it extends in a northerly direction, along the Labrador shore, generally preventing all access to the land, as high as the mouth of Hudson's Strait; then turning to the north-eastward, forms a bay near the coast of Greenland, in latitude, perhaps, 66° or 67°, by suddenly passing away to the southward, to the extremity of Greenland. The quantity of ice on the east side of Davis' Strait, being often small, the continuity of its border is liable to be broken, so as to admit of ships

[page] 265

reaching the land; and sometimes the bay of the ice usually occurring in the spring, in latitude 66° or 67°, does not exist; but the sea is open up the strait to a considerable distance beyond it.

After doubling the southern promontory, or Cape Farewell, it advances in a north-eastern direction along the east coast, sometimes enveloping Iceland as it proceeds, until it reaches the island of Jan Mayen. Passing this island on the north-west, but frequently enclosing it, the edge of the ice then trends a little more to the eastward, and usually intersects the meridian of London, between the 71st and 73d degree of latitude. Having reached the longitude of 5° or 6° east, in some instances as far as 8° or 10°; in the 73d or 74th degree of north latitude, it forms a remarkable promontory, and suddenly stretches to the north, sometimes proceeding on a meridian to the latitude of 80°; at others, forming a deep sinuosity, extending two or three degrees to the northward, and then south-easterly to Cherie Island; which having passed, it assumes a more direct course a little to the southward of east, until it forms a junction with the Siberian or Nova Zemblan coast.

During the winter and spring months, the Polar ice seems closely to embrace the whole of the northern shores of Russia, to the eastward of Nova Zembla; and filling, in a great measure, Behring's Strait and the sea, to the northward of it, continues in contact with the polar face of the American conti-

[page] 266

nent, following the line of the coast to the eastward, until it effects a junction with the ice in the Spitzbergen Sea, or in the great north-western bays of Hudson and Baffin, or is terminated by land yet undiscovered.

That remarkable promontory, mid-way between Jan Mayen and Cherie Islands, formed by the sudden stretch of the ice to the north, constitutes the line of separation between the east or whaling, and west or sealing ice of the fishers: And the deep bay laying to the east of this promontory, which may be called The Whale-fisher's Bight, invariably forms the only previous track for proceeding to fishing latitudes northward. When the ice at the extremity of this bay occurs so strong and compact, as to prevent the approach to the shores of Spitzbergen, and the advance northward beyond the latitude of 75° or 76°, it is said to be a close season; and, on the contrary, it is called an open season, when an uninterrupted navigation extends along the western coast of Spitzbergcn to Hackluyt's Headland. In an open season, therefore, a large channel of water lies between the land and the ice, from 20 to 50 leagues in breadth, extending to the latitude of 79° or 80°, and gradually approximating the coast, until it at length effects a coalition with the northwestern extremity, by a semicircular head. When the continuity of the body of ice, intervening between Old Greenland and Nova Zembla, is thus in-

3

[page] 267

terrupted in an open season, the ice again makes its appearance on the south of Spitzbergen, proceeding from thence direct to Cherie Island, and then eastward as before.

Such is the general appearance of the margin or outline of the polar ice, which holds, with merely partial changes, for many successive seasons. This outline, however, is necessarily more or less affected by storms and currents; their more than ordinary prevalence in any one direction, must cause some variety of aspect in particular places, which becomes more especially apparent in the vicinity of land, where its coasts afford marks by which to estimate the advance and retreat of the ice.

The line formed by the exterior of the ice is variously indented, and very rarely appears direct or uniform. Open bays or arms occur, from a few fathoms to several miles or leagues in depth. None of them, however, have any determinate form or place, except the Whale-fisher's Bight, or great bay before described, in which the Greenlandmen always seek a passage to the fishing stations.

The place where whales occur in the greatest abundance, is generally found to be in the 78th or 79th degree of north latitude, though from the 72d to the 81st degree they have been met with. These singular animals, which, on account of their prodigious bulk and strength, might be thought entitled to reign supreme in the ocean, are harmless and timid.

[page] 268

They seem to prefer those situations which afford them the most secure retreats. Among the ice, they have an occasional shelter; but so far as it is permeable, the security is rather apparent than real. That they are conscious of its affording them shelter, we can readily perceive, from observing, that the course of their flight when scared or wounded, is generally towards the nearest or most compact ice. The place of their retreat, however, is regulated by various circumstances; it may sometimes depend on the quality and quantity of food occurring, the disposition of the ice, or exemption from enemies. At one time, their favourite haunt is amidst the huge and extended masses of the field ice; at another, in the open seas adjacent. Sometimes the majority of the whales inhabiting those seas, seem collected within a small and single circuit; at others, they are scattered in various hordes, and numerous single individuals, over an amazing extent of surface. To discover and reach the haunts of the whale, is an object of the first consideration in the fishery, and occasionally the most difficult and laborious to accomplish.

In close seasons, though the ice joins the south of Spitzbergen, and thereby forms a barrier against the fishing-stations, yet this barrier is often of a limited extent, and terminates on the coasts of Spitzbergen in an open space, either forming, or leading to, the retreat of the whales. Such space is some-

[page] 269

times frozen over until the middle or end of the month of May, but not unfrequently free of ice. The barrier here opposed to the fisher, usually consists of a body of ice from 20 to 30 or 40 leagues across, in the shortest diameter. It is generally composed of packed ice, and often cemented into a continuous field by the interference of bay ice, which incredibly augments the difficulty of navigating among it.

As the time that can be devoted to the whalefishery is, by the nature of the climate, limited to three or four months in the year, it is of importance to pass this barrier of ice as early as possible in the season. The fisher here avails himself of every power within his command. The sails are expanded in favourable winds, and withdrawn in contrary breezes. The ship is urged forward amongst driftice by the force of the wind, assisted with ropes and saws. Whenever a vein of water appears in the required direction, it is if possible attained. It always affords a temporary relief, and sometimes a permanent release, by extending itself through intricate mazes, amidst ice of various descriptions, until at length it opens into the desired place, void of obstruction, constituting the usual retreat of the whales.

[page] 270

SECT. VI.

Changes which take place, with the advance of the Season, in the Situation of the Ice, in the Sea of Greenland and Davis' Strait.

The formidable barrier before described, when it occurs, is regularly encountered on the first arrival of the Greenland ships in the month of April, but is generally removed by natural means as the season advances. However extensive, heavy and compact it may be, it is usually found separated from the land, and divided asunder by the close of the month of June; and hence it is, that however difficult and laborious may have been the ingress into the fishing country, the egress is commonly effected without much inconvenience.

That the ice should envelope the whole coasts of Spitzbergen in the winter season, and expose the western shore about the month of June; that the ocean should be almost annually navigable on the meridians of 5° to 10° E., to the 80th degree of north latitude, while the ice in other parts of the world can rarely be penetrated beyond the 73d or 74th degree, are facts that appear to be worthy of consideration.

[page] 271

On the recession of the ice from the west side of the land, a lane of water must he left from one extremity to the other; while to the south of Point Look-out, a parallel motion of the ice leaves no opening or evidence of its change of place; for here, the ice meeting with no obstruction to cause it to divide, moves on in a solid body, retained firm and unbroken by the tenacious cement of the interjacent bay-ice.

In the month of May, the severity of the frost relaxes, and the temperature occasionally approaches within a few degrees of the freezing point: the salt in the sea then exerts its liquefying energy, and destroys the tenacity of the bay-ice, makes inroads in its parts by enlarging its pores into holes, diminishes its thickness, and, in the language of the whale-fisher, completely rots it. The packed drift-ice is then liberated; it submits to the laws of detached floating bodies, and obeys the slightest impulses of the winds or currents. The heavier having more stability than the lighter, an apparent difference of movement obtains among the pieces. Holes and lanes of water are formed, which allow the entrance and progress of the ships, without that stubborn resistance offered earlier in the spring of the year.

Bay-ice is sometimes serviceable to the whalers, in preserving them from the brunt of the heavy ice, by embedding their ships, and occasioning an

[page] 272

equable pressure on every part of the vessel: but, in other respects, it is the greatest pest they meet with in all their labours: it is troublesome in the fishery, and in the progress to the fishing ground; it is often the means of besetment, as it is called, and thence the primary cause of every other calamity. Heavy ice, many feet in thickness, and in detached pieces of from 50 to 100 tons weight each, though crowded together in the form of a pack, may be penetrated, in a favourable gale, with tolerable despatch; whilst a sheet of bay-ice, of a few inches only in thickness, with the same advantage of wind, will often arrest the progress of the ship, and render her in a few minutes immoveable. If this ice be too strong to be broken by the weight of a boat, recourse must be had to sawing, an operation slow and laborious in the extreme.

When the warmth of the season has rotted the bay-ice, the passage to the northward can generally be accomplished with a very great saving of labour. Therefore it was, the older fishers seldom or never used to attempt it before the 10th of May, and foreign fishers in the present day, are in general late. Sometimes late arrivals are otherwise beneficial; since it frequently happens, in close seasons, that ships entering the ice about the middle of May, obtain an advantage over those preceding them, by gaining a situation more eligible, on account of its nearness to the land. Their predecessors, mean-

1

[page] 273

whil, are drifted off to the westward with the ice, and cannot recover their easting; for they are encompassed with a large quantity of ice, and have a greater distance to go than when they first entered, and on a course precisely in opposition to the direction of the most prevailing winds. Hence it appears, that it would be economical and beneficial to sail so late, as not to reach the country before the middle of May, or to persevere on the sealing stations until that time. There are, however, some weighty objections to this method. Open seasons occasionally occur, and great progress may sometimes be made in the fishery before that time. Also, although the majority of the whalers do not commonly succeed in passing the barrier in close seasons before a certain period, yet some individuals, by a superior exertion, perseverance, ability, or good fortune, accomplish the end considerably before the rest, and thereby gain a superiority in the fishery, not to be attained by later arrivals. A week or fortnight's solitary fishing, under these circumstances, has frequently gained half a cargo, —an advantage of the most interesting importance, in a voyage of such limited duration.

The change which takes place in the ice amidst which the whale-fisher pursues his object, is, towards the close of the season, indeed astonishing. For, not only does it separate into its original individual portions,—not only does it retreat in a

VOL. I. S

[page] 274

body from the western coast of Spitzbergen, but in general, that barricr of ice which encloses the fishing site in the spring, which costs the fisher immense labour and anxiety to penetrate, by retarding his advance towards the north, and his progress in the fishery, for the space of several weeks,— spontaneously divides in the midst about the month of June, and on the return of the ships is not at all to be seen! Then is the sea rendered freely navigable from the very haunts of the whales, to the expanse of the Atlantic Ocean.

This quality of the ice, is of the first importance to the navigator. It is this known property which gives him confidence in his advance, and enables him to persevere without restraint, calculating on an easy return. As one half of the fishing season is often spent in the ingress were the regress as arduous, there would be no time left for fishing: besides, the return would be rendered doubly hazardous by the prevalence of the summer fogs, which are thick in the extreme, and sometimes continue for days together, without intermission.

Were the barrier of ice not passable, the haunts of the whalcs could not be attained; and were the regress not favoured by natural facilities, every attempt to prosecute the whale-fishery with effect, would be attended with imminent danger; I may say, with almost certain destruction.

[page] 275

Similar changes as those above described, also take place in the ice of Hudson's Bay, Baffin's Bay, and Davis' Strait. The navigation of the former bay is first interrupted by ice, generally, in the month of November; but on the east side of Davis' Strait, the ice does not usually make its appearance under the land until the spring. Little progress can be made through the ice into the great bays of Hudson and Baffin, until the month of June or July, in the course of which all the bay-ice that serves as a cement to the heavy ice being dissolved, or very much reduced, a passage to the extremity of each bay is gradually opened. Baffin accomplished the navigation to the extremity of the bay called by his name, without much difficulty, in the beginning of July; but Captain Ross, in his late voyage, had much trouble in effecting the same, about the middle of August. In the months of August and September, the ice in the bays seems to be the most open, and in the Straits of Davis and Hudson almost entirely dispersed.

S 2

[page] 276

SECT. VII.

Situation of the Ice in the Region visited by the Greenland Ships, with Observations on the Alterations which have occurred during a Series of Sixteen Years.

WHAT has hitherto been advanced on the situation of the polar ice, refers to its most general and permanent characters. It will now be my object to give a sketch of the most prominent appearances which have annually marked the ice in the region visited by the Spitzbergen or Greenland whalefishers, during a period of sixteen years.

The year 1803 was an open season. So early as the middle of April, there was no obstruction to the navigation to the 81st degree of north latitude; that is, on a meridian about 5° east of Greenwich. The weather was tempestuous; the most prevailing winds from the north-east. No particular change took place in the ice during the stay of the whalers. The egress was consequently without obstruction. The fishery, on the whole, was unsuccessful.

In 1804, the entrance into the northern fishing stations, was obstructed by a barrier composed of open drift-ice, consolidated by bay-ice of peculiar tenacity and strength. The bay-ice was broken up and dispersed on the 12th of May, and a sufficient

[page] 277

passage for the ships opened. The fishery was tolerably good. The egress was easy.

In 1805, the fishing-stations were open, by the end of April, up to the 78th degree of latitude. The fishery was moderately good; the egress easy.

The singular position of the ice, in the year 1806, was the occasion of a most interesting voyage; having afforded us the opportunity of performing an extraordinary navigation, and of advancing nearer to the Pole than on any other occasion since I have been in the habit of visiting the Spitzbergen seas. It was a close season; and the barrier of ice was so uncommonly extensive, and continued so long, that not more than three ships accomplished a passage through it. This barrier extended from latitude 75° 20′ to 79° 30′; being 250 miles across. Beyond it was an open sea, from 30 to 50 miles north and south; from a western situation in which, we sailed in an E N E direction (true) nearly 300 miles, without observing any signs of its termination. As an abstract of the journal of the proceedings in this extraordinary navigation, is given in a following section, it is unnecessary to enter into more particulars here.

A close season again occurred in 1807. The margin of the ice was, however, pervious to a considerable extent, wherein many large whales being seen, some ships made a successful fishing in latitude 75° or 76°; other ships, which persevered to the northward, and passed the barrier, likewis sue-

[page] 278

cceded tolerably well. The prevailing wind was from the north-east.

Though ice occurred in the place usually occupied by the barrier, in the year 1808, yet being open, and in a great measure free from bay-ice, it afforded shelter to the fishermen without obstructing their progress. Whales being plentiful, the weather fine, and the ice generally open, the fishery was uncommonly good. No difficulty was experienced by the whalers on their return, until they reached the latitude of 74°, when a remarkable barrier presented itself. It consisted of loosely packed ice, and was found to extend from the main western ice, above 100 miles to the eastward, with a general breadth of 10 to 20 leagues. A few ships forced their way through it, but most of the fleet doubled the easternmost extremity.

In 1809, we had a close season. Few ships passed the barrier before the end of May. Those which first succeeded made a prosperous fishery. At the close of the season, a free navigation led to seaward in a south-westerly direction, from latitude 79° and longitude 6° E. But near the coast of Spitzbergen, a vast body of ice was accumulated.

The season of 1810 was similar to that of 1804. Young ice cemented together the detached pieces of heavy ice that lay in the passage to the northward. A severe storm occurred on the 6th and 7th

[page] 279

of May, which, producing a heavy swell from the northward, annihilated most of the bay-ice in one day. The retreat of the whales was soon afterwards attained, and the fishery proved partially successful. At the close of the season, an isthmus of ice stretched 50 or 60 miles from the main western body to the eastward, the extremity of which lay in longitude 12° 30′ E.

The season of 1811 was uncommonly close. Though the most arduous exertions were made by the fishers for four or five weeks, few ships passed the barrier before the 26th of May. Whales occurred in great plenty, and the fishery was generally good. During the stay of the ships, a pack of heavy ice, formed between them and the land, joining the main ice in the 80th degree of north latitude, and preserving its continuity in a southerly direction, with a breadth of 15 to 20 leagues, as far as latitude 73° 40′. In latitude 77° 30′, it approach; ed the main ice within a few miles, but still leaving a channel leading in a south-westerly direction to seaward. This channel, however, was so narrow, that the majority of the ships did not discover it, but forced through the eastern pack, and then performed the passage to the southward along its eastern margin.

A season more singularly close than this occurred in 1812. The barrier consisted of a compact body of floes and fields. In each of the preceding years,

1

[page] 280

the obstruction invariably consisted of packed ice, consolidated by the intervention of bay ice into a continuous sheet; but, on this occasion, the most ponderous field-ice barred the navigation. This singular barrier extended from the eastern pack, lying between Point-Look-out and Cherie Island, in a north-western direction to the main western ice. Much open drift ice covered the south-western side of it, and preserved the fields and floes from being destroyed by the sea. This barrier was one of the most formidable that had ever been encountered. All attempts to pass it before the close of the month of May were attended with imminent danger, and were generally nugatory. But after a week's continuance of mild calm weather, the fields and floes were released by the partial destruction of the bay-ice among them, and a winding navigation of about sixty miles in extent, opened into a clear sea adjoining the land. For some time after passing the barrier, but few whales were seen; the fishery was late, and only partially successful. The remarkable change which occasionally takes place in the polar ice, is rarely more striking than that which occurred in this season: for, notwithstanding the compact, extensive, and formidable nature of the barrier which opposed the entrance of the ships into the northern fishing stations, yet, on their return, in the month of July, they did not meet with the

2

[page] 281

least obstruction, but found an open sea extending from the latitude of 79° into the Atlantic Ocean.

The year 1813 was an open season. So early as the beginning or middle of April, many ships advanced beyond the 80th degree of latitude. The weather was uncommonly tempestuous. Several of the storms prevailed with almost unabated violence for three successive days; and it was not until the month of June had commenced, that the weather became settled and moderate. In consequence of the prevalence of easterly winds, the ice was generally packed, and the fishery was bad. Scarcely more than three or four ships obtained full cargoes, and several returned without a single whale. This year, it is somewhat remarkable, the fishery in Davis' Strait was still more unsuccessful. In consequence of the failure of both fisheries, whale-oil attained a price before unequalled; having risen, towards the close of the year, as high as sixty pounds per ton!

In 1814, we hed an open season. The ice was not packed, as in the preceding year, but was generally open and navigable. Whales occurred in great numbers in the open water; the weather was generally favourable; and the fishery proved very successful. After the middle of May, the wind prevailed from the southern and western quarters, whereby the main western ice was still more opened, and drifted up to the very shores of Spitzbergen.

[page] 282

Among this ice, many whales were seen and caught at a very late season.

The season of 1815 was also open in the month of April. In May a loose body of ice, partly occupied the opening in the 79th degree of latitude, and remained about a month. In June it dispersed. The fishery to the northward was closed by the middle of June; but it recommenced about the end of the month, in latitude 76°, at the edge of the ice, and continued during two or three weeks of July, a little within the borders of the ice, in the same parallel.

In 1816, we had a season partially open; the most early fishers having sailed without obstruction to a high northern latitude, while the later arrivals had to pass through a considerable open pack. The northern parts of the country were filled with bay ice most of the month of May. The fishery became general in June, but was not very prosperous.

The season of 1817 was remarkable, on account of its openness, and on account of the westerly position and peculiar penetrability of the ice. To the northward of latitude 74°, the Spitzbergen Sea is seldom navigable to the westward of the meridian of London; but, in this season, I had an opportunity of sailing as far as longitude 11° 40′ W. in latitude 75° 28′ N.; to longitude 10° W. in latitude 75° 10′ N.; and to longitude 10° 37′, (by chronometer,) in latitude 74° N. In the two first instances,

[page] 283

the weather was thick, and our position a little uncertain; but, in the last, the weather was clear, and my observations, both for latitude and longitude, were good. The east side of West Greenland, a coast never, I believe, approached, excepting by ships beset in the ice, since Hudson's voyage in 1607, was at this time seen by myself from the mast-head; but the commencement of a fog put a stop to our farther advance, otherwise the ice appeared sufficiently open to have permitted us to reach its shores. We were then a distance of 80 or 90 miles within the exterior limits of the ice. In this season, from the too great extent of the sea open to the whales, and the wide dispersion of them, the fishery was in general very bad. In the month of June the northern land-ice joined the western ice, in the 79th degree of latitude, and extended in a line to the south-eastward, as far as Point-Look-out. At the point of junction of the land-ice, and main western ice, a successful but partial fishery occurred.

An open season, a good deal similar to the last described, again occurred in 1818. The edge of the ice, however, lay farther to the eastward, between latitude 76° and 80°, and farther to the westward, between 73° and 76°. On the 1st of July, we reached the longitude of 9° W. in latitude 74° 54′, without entering the ice. Indeed the edge of the ice, from latitude 74° to 77°, was, about this period, firm and impervious. The fishery, on the

[page] 284

whole, was only moderately good. In the early part of the season, the prospect was excellent; but the latter fishery almost entirely failed.

In these two seasons of 1817 and 1818, the sea was more open than on any former occasion remembered by the oldest fishermen; an extent of sea amounting to about 2000 square leagues of surface, included between the parallels of 74° and 80° N. being quite void of ice, which is usually covered by it*.

SECT. VIII.

Remarks ou the Properties, peculiar Movements, and Drifting of the Ice.

1. THE ice always has a tendency to separate during calms. This property holds, both with regard to field and drift ice; and seems to arise from a repelling tendency between the individual masses, or from the action, of a very superficial current, carrying the light ice away faster than the heavy ice. Hence it is, when a body of heavy ice is released from its confinement and continuity, by the disso-

* Plate VII. shows the particular position of the Greenland ice, in the seasons of 1817 and 1818, as well as its general outline in close and open seasons.

[page] 285

lution of the intervening bay-ice, the pieces generally spread abroad in a calm, so as to allow a free passage for ships, which before, could not be urged on by the power of the wind, combined with every effort of art. From the same cause, it is, that ice which, with strong winds, is formed into streams or patches, and allows a safe and commodious navigation amidst these large aggregations, will, on the occurrence of two or three days of calm weather, be disseminated into every opening, and seem to occupy every space, allowing only a troublesome and sinuous passage for ships. In this case, the dispersion is so general, that scarcely any two pieces can be said to touch each other.

2. Openings in packs and among fields or floes, frequently break out or disappear, without any apparent cause. It is often of importance to the fisher to determine, whether any space be in the course of diminishing or enlarging. The freezing of the water frequently affords an intimation of its closing, as it rarely takes place to any considerable extent, on the extension of the bounding ice. The birds likewise instinctively leave the closing spaces, and fly in search of such as are in the course of opening.

The closing of heavy ice, encircling a quantity of bay-ice, causes it to run together with such force, that it overlaps wherever two sheets meet, until it sometimes attains the thickness of many feet. In this case, when a ship happens to be in the midst of

[page] 286

the pressure, the ice sometimes rises to the height of the gunwale, squeezing and shaking her in a terrible manner. Drift ice does not often coalesce with such a degree of force, as to endanger any ship which may happen to be beset in it; when, however, land opposes its motion, or the ship is immured in the centre of a heavy body of it, the pressure is sometimes alarming.

3. Fields often open, close, and revolve in the most extraordinary way, in calms as well as in storms. Sometimes these motions may be accounted for; at other times they are altogether anomalous. Fields, floes, and compact bodies of drift-ice, are disturbed by the wind, by currents and tides, or by the pressure of other ice against them. The wind forces all ice to leeward, with a velocity nearly in the inverse proportion to its depth under water; light ice, consequently, drives faster than heavy ice, loose ice faster than fields, and fields faster than bergs. Fields may approximate each other from three causes, dependent on the influence of the wind. First, If the lighter field be to windward, it will necessarily be impelled towards the heavier, by the influence of the wind. Secondly, As the wind frequently commences blowing on the windward-side of the ice, and continues several hours before it is felt a few miles distant to leeward, the windward field begins to drift, before any impression is produced on the ice to leeward of it; and, thirdly, Fields

[page] 287

are not unfrequently impelled towards each other by winds, acting upon each from opposite quarters.

Though the set of the current in the Greenland Sea be generally towards the south-west, yet near the shore, where there are eddies and tides, it is very irregular. This irregularity produces striking effects upon the ice. Near Hackluyt's Headland, and, indeed, at the distance of ten to twenty leagues from it, in and about the same parallel, the influcnce of a tide or irregular current is observed. This occasions ripplings in the water, and periodical closings and openings of the ice. At the borders of fields connected with the main body of ice, a striking movement in the drift-ice may be often observed; the loose ice adhering closely to the edge of the adjoining fields for a few hours, then moving off in a body for a short period, and alternately advancing and retreating at regular intervals.

Fields are liable also to be put in motion, by the force with which drift-ice occasionally presses against them. Thus, a body of loose ice drifting against and grazing along the side of a field in its course to leeward, becomes deflected, and its re-action causes a circular motion of the field.

4. The amazing changes which take place in the most compact ice, are often unaccountable. They astonish even those who are accustomed to their occurrence. Thus, ships immoveably fixed with regard

[page] 288

to the ice, have been known to perform a complete revolution in a few hours; and two ships beset a few furlongs apart, within the most compact pack, have sometimes been separated to the distance of several leagues within the space of two or three days, notwithstanding the apparent continuity of the pack remained unbroken!

On the 7th of May 1798, the Dundee of London, (then commanded by my Father,) while forcing to the northward on the most eligible course, was suddenly stopped by a shift of wind, and enveloped by the ice at a very short distance from the land. The Volunteer of Whitby, and three other ships, were likewise arrested, a little way from the Dundee. During the day, three Russian hunters visited them, coming over the ice from the nearest shore; but as none of the crew could speak their language, they were prevented from deriving any information from them.

The next day, a heavy gale of wind prevailed from the north-west; the frost was intense, and much snow fell. The pressure of the ice was very severe; insomuch, that their iron-tiller was broken, the ship lifted above two feet, and forced within a mile and a-half of the land. All the bay-ice was squeezed upon the top of the heavy ice, and the whole was rendered so compact, that they could not find a hole sufficient to admit a lead, for the purpose of ascertaining the depth of the water. They

[page] 289

got their provisions upon deck, considering the ship in great danger.

On the 9th, they were in latitude 77° 38′ N. The intensity of the pressure was not diminished. The Volunteer lay beset three miles off, under a like dangerous pressure. On the 10th, the Dundee and Volunteer began to separate, though the ice continued close, and the ships were firmly beset.

In my Father's journal of the 12th, appear the following remarks: " N. B—I cannot, from the top-gallant-mast-head, see over the flat of ice to the north-east, into which the ship is frozen: and yet in fifty hours it has revolved from the south-southwest, westerly to north, and carried the ship with a semicircular motion 15 or 20 leagues: On the 10th instant, we were within a mile and a-half of the land, whereas our distance is now 10 leagues, and our advance to the northward even greater. The Volunteer has drifted out of sight in the south-west quarter."

On the 15th, after labouring eight and forty hours without rest, they escaped into a place of safety.

On the 17th of June 1813, I observed a strange commotion among the Greenland ice, without being able to discover any cause at all comparable with the effect. The wind had blown a fresh gale, but was now moderate; the sea was smooth, and the situation of the ice was remote from any swells. The latitude was 78°10′N., longitude 3°10′E. We

VOL. I. T

[page] 290

passed through a patch of drift-ice into a considerable opening, bounded by a field on the west, driftice on the east, and floes and heavy drift-ice on the north and south. Here, the motion of the ice was wonderful. Large masses of drift-ice were advancing to the southward, with a velocity of two to three miles per hour, leaving eddies in the sea like those produced by a strong tide in shallow water, while other masses of ice, similar in kind and situation, were at rest. We passed between a floe and some drift-ice, which actually closed as fast as the ship sailed. Some insulated pieces of ice astonished us with their motion; and proceeded with a steady velocity and undeviating course across the middle of the opening. The ice on every side but that on the north, being nearly at rest, the lake we navigated was rapidly filled up; on our approach to it, there was a space of some leagues in circumference free from ice; but in a few hours, the largest space to be seen was not fifty yards in diameter. With difficulty we made our escape to the eastward; but still remaining by the edge of the packed ice, we could observe the effect produced. Drift-ice continued pouring down from the north against the side of the field; so that in the course of twelve hours, the intervening ice formed a body of seven or eight miles in width.

5. When speaking of the currents of the Spitzbergen Sea, I remarked, that the polar-ice, in this

[page] 291

situation, has a constant tendency to drift to the south-westward. Near Spitzbergen, indeed, this tendency is not usually observed; because the influence of the tide, eddies, peculiar pressures, &c. sometimes produce a contrary effect; but at a distance from land, its universal prevalence can be illustrated by numerous facts of almost annual occurrence. Some of these facts have already been given; one more shall suffice.

In the beginning of May 1814, we entered with the ship Esk of Whitby, a spacious opening of the ice, in latitude 78° 10′, longitude 4° E., to a distance of ten or twelve leagues from the exterior, wherein we were tempted to stay, from the appearance of a great number of whales. On the 9th of May, the weather, which had previously been stormy, moderated, when, the frost being severe, the ship was soon fixed in bay-ice. At the same time, the external sheets of ice on the north-east wheeled to the south, and forming a junction with the ice south-east from us, completely enclosed us. Until the 16th, we lay immoveable; a break of the bay-ice then appeared about half a mile from us, to attain which we laboured with energy, and in eight hours accomplished a passage for the ship. On the 18th, we pursued the same opening to its eastern extremity, and endeavoured, but without success, to force through a narrow neck of ice, into another opening leadingfarther in the same direction. On the 20th, in at-

T 2

[page] 292

tempting this object, we endured a, heavy pressure of the bay-ice, which shook the ship in an alarming manner. The next day, we made a small advance; and on the 22d, after a fatiguing effort in passing through the midst of an aggregation of floes, against the wind, we reached a channel which led us several miles to the south-eastward. On the 23d, we lay at rest together with four other ships. The day following, having sawn a place for the ship in a thin floe, we forced forward between two large masses, where bay ice unconsolidated had been compressed, until it had become 10 or 12 feet thick. We were assisted by about a hundred men from the accompanying ships, which followed close in our rear; and after applying all our mechanical powers during eight or nine hours, we passed the strait of about a furlong in length, and immediately the ice collapsed and rivetted the ships of our companions to the spot. As they declined our proffered assistance, (which indeed, at this time, would have been quite unavailing), we determined to improve the advantage we had acquired, by proceeding to the utmost limits of the opening. Accordingly, we advanced, on various winding courses, amidst bay-ice and fields, in narrow obscure passages, a distance of several miles. We then discovered a continuation of the navigation between two immense sheets of ice; but the channel was so narrow and intricate, that, for the distance of near a mile, it did not appear more than 10 to 20 yards in width. The

[page] 293

prospect was indeed appalling; but, perceiving indications of the enlargement of the passage, rather than the contrary, we advanced under a press of sail, driving aside some disengaged lumps of ice that opposed us, and shortly accomplished our wishes in safety. Here, an enlivening prospect presented itself: to the extreme limits of the horizon, no interruption was visible. We made a predetermined signal to the ships we had left, indicative of our hopes of a speedy release. In two hours, however, our sanguine expectations of an immediate escape received a check, for we then met with fields in the act of collapsing and completely barring our progress. As the distance across was scarcely a mile, and the sea to appearance clear beyond it, the interruption was most tantalizing. We waited at the point of union, in the hope of the separation of the two fields; and on the morning of the 26th of May, our anxiety was happily relieved, by the wished-for division of the ice. The ship, propelled by a brisk wind, darted through the strait, and entered a sea, which we considered the termination of our difficulties. After steering three hours to the southeastward, as directed by the northern ice, we were concerned to discover that our conclusions had been premature. An immense pack opened on our view, stretching directly across our track. There was no alternative, but forcing through it: we therefore pushed forward into the least connected part. By availing ourselves of every advantage in sailing,

[page] 294

where sailing was practicable, and boring* or drifting, where the pieces of ice lay close together, we at length reached the leeward part of a narrow channel, in which we had to ply a considerable distance against the wind. When performing this, the wind, which had hitherto blown a brisk breeze from the north, increased to a strong gale. The ship was placed in such a critical situation, that we could not for above an hour accomplish any reduction of the sails; and while I was personally engaged performing the duty of a pilot from the topmast-head, the bending of the mast was so uncommon, that I was seriously alarmed for its stability. At length, we were enabled to reef our sails, and for some time proceeded with less danger. We continued to manœuvre among the ice in those situations where its separation was most considerable. Our direction was now east, then north for several hours, then easterly ten or fifteen miles;—when, after eighteen hours of the most difficult, and occasionally hazardous sailing, in which the ship received some hard blows from the ice; after pursuing a devious course nearly ninety miles, and accomplishing a distance on a direct north-east course of about forty

* Boring is the operation of forcing a ship through crowded ice by the agency of the wind on the sails. The impetus of the ship is studiously directed against the opposing pieces, and a passage thereby effected. It can be performed only with favourable winds.

[page] 295

miles,—we found ourselves at the very margin of the sea, separated only by a narrow sea-stream. The sea was so great without, and the wind so violent, that we durst not hazard an attempt to force through this remaining obstacle. After waiting about thirty hours, on the morning of the 28th of May, the weather cleared, and the wind abated. The sea-stream which, the preceding day, did not exceed two hundred yards in breadth, was generally augmented to upwards of a mile broad. One place alone was visible, where the breadth was less considerable; to that we directed our course, forced the ship into it, and by prompt and vigorous exertions, were enabled to surmount every difficulty, and accomplish our final escape into the open sea.

I have been thus minute in the relation of the progress of our extrication from an alarming, though not very uncommon, state of besetment, both for the purpose of giving a faint idea of the difficulties and dangers which those engaged in the whalefishery have occasionally to encounter, and also more particularly to show the extraordinary manner in which ships are imperceptibly immured amidst the ice, and carried away from their original situation, by the regularity of its drift to the south-westward.

From this narrative, it will appear, that, notwithstanding we only penetrated 25 or 30 miles on our ingress, and among ice most widely disposed; yet, before our extrication was accomplished,

[page] 296

we had passed on a direct course a distance of 35 or 40 leagues, whereof one-half was in contracted channels, amidst compact and formidable ice. And, further, that in less than a fortnight, while at rest with regard to the ice, our drift, as ascertained by astronomical observations, had been 60 or 70 miles to the south, and a distance nearly as great to the west.

SECT. IX.

Effects of the Ice on the Atmosphere, and of the Ice and Sea on each other.

THE profusion of ice in the polar regions, produces peculiar and marked effects on the surrounding elements. The sea, in consequence, exhibits some interesting characters, and the atmosphere, some striking phenomena. Of these, the power the ice exerts on the wind,—on aqueous vapour,—on the colour of the sky,—and on the temperature of the air, are the most prominent; and of those the results are varied accordingly as the ice or swell lias the ascendency.

1. When the wind blows forcibly across a solid pack or field of ice, its power is much diminished ere it traverses many miles: Insomuch, that a storm will frequently blow for several hours on

[page] 297

one side of a field, before it be perceptible on the other; and, while a storm prevails in open water, ships beset within sight, will not experience onehalf of its severity.

2. It is not uncommon for the ice to produce the effect of repulsing and balancing an assailing wind. Thus, when a severe storm blows from the sea directly towards the main body of ice, an opposite current will sometimes prevail on the borders of the ice; and such conflicting winds have been observed to counterpoise each other, a few furlongs distant from the ice, for several hours: the violence of the one being, as it were, subdued by the frigorific repulsion and greater density of the other. The effect resulting, is singular and manifest. For,

3. The moist and temperate gale from the southward, becomes chilled on commixture with the northern breeze, and having its capacity for moisture thereby diminished, discharges its surplus humidity in the thickest snow*. As the quantity of the snow depends considerably on the difference of temperature of the two assimilating streams of air, it follows, that the largest proportion must be precipitated on the exterior of the main body of ice,

* It is almost needless to say, that the foundation of this, and some of the following remarks, on the same subject, is derived from Dr HUTTON'S ingenious Theory of Rain, an able and beautiful illustration of which we have in Professor LESLIE'S Essay " On the Relations of Air to Heat and Moisture," p. 122.

[page] 298

where the contrast of temperature is the greatest: and since that contrast must he gradually diminished, as the air passes over the gelid surface of the ice, much of its superabundant moisture must generally he discharged before it reaches the interior. Hence we can account for the fewness of the clouds, —the consequent brightness of the atmosphere,— and the rareness of storms, in situations far immured among the northern ice.

From this consideration, it might be supposed, that after the precipitation of a certain small depth of snow on the interior ice, the atmosphere could alone replenish its moisture from the same surface, and that whatever changes of temperature might occur, it could only discharge the same again: or, in other words, that the very same moisture would be alternately evaporated and deposited, without a possibility of adding to a limited depth of snow. Now, this would assuredly be the case, if nothing more than the same moisture evaporated from the snowy surface of the ice, were again deposited. But, it must be observed, that notwithstanding winds from the north, east or west, may not furnish any considerable quantity of snow; and that although those warm and humid storms which blow from the south, may afford a large proportion of their humidity to the exterior ice; yet, as the temperature of the northern regions would be gradually elevated, by the long continuance of a southerly gale,

[page] 299

the advance of the wind must in consequence be farther and farther before it be reduced to the temperature of the ice; and, therefore, some snow would continue to be precipitated to an increasing and unlimited extent.

Hence, as winds blowing from the Pole must be replaced by air that is both warmer and damper, it is not possible that they should carry away more moisture from the circumpolar regions than the air which replaces them brings: but, on the contrary, as the snow deposited on the interior ice by southerly storms, (from the nature of the circumstances), must be derived from evaporations out of the sea; it is evident, that there must be an increase of snow in the icy latitudes, and that we cannot possibly determine any limit beyond which it may be affirmed that no snow can be deposited.

4. On approaching a pack, field, or other compact aggregation of ice, the phenomenon of the ice-blink is seen whenever the horizon is tolerably free from clouds, and in some cases even under a thick sky. The ice-blink consists in a stratum of a lucid whiteness, which appears over ice in that part of the atmosphere adjoining the horizon. It appears to be occasioned thus: Those rays of light which strike on the snowy surface of the ice, are reflected into the superincumbent air, where they are rendered visible, either by the reflective property of the air, simply, or by a light haze, which, on such occasions,

[page] 300

probably exists in the atmosphere; but the light which falls on the sea, is in a great measure absorbed, and the superincumbent air retains its native ethereal hue. Hence, when the ice-blink occurs under the most favourable circumstances, it affords to the eye a beautiful and perfect map of the ice, twenty or thirty miles beyond the limit of direct vision, but less distant in proportion as the atmosphere is more dense and obscure. The ice-blink not only shows the figure of the ice, but enables the experienced observer to judge whether the ice thus pictured be field or packed ice: if the latter, whether it be compact or open, bay or heavy ice. Field-ice affords the most lucid blink, accompanied with a tinge of yellow; that of packs is more purely white; and of bay-ice, greyish. The land, on account of its snowy covering, likewise occasions a blink, which is more yellow than that produced by the ice of fields.

5. The ice operates as a powerful equaliser of temperature. In the 30th degree of north latitude, at the edge of the main body of ice, with a northerly gale of wind, the cold is not sensibly greater than in the 70th degree, under similar circumstances.

6. Fogs are most prevalent among loose ice; but they are dispersed, and a clear sky generally produced, at the borders of a solid body of ice. The approach to solid ice is sometimes announced by this clearing of the air, and by the reduction of the tempera-

[page] 301

ture. On coming near a body of ice, from off which the wind blows, a remarkable increase of cold is felt; as much sometimes as ten degrees in an hour's sailing.

7. The reciprocal action of the ice and the sea on each other, is particularly striking, which ever may have the ascendancy. If, on the one hand, the ice be arranged with a certain form of aggregation, and in due solidity, it becomes capable of resisting the turbulence of the ocean, and can, with but little comparative diminution or breaking, suppress its most violent surges. Its resistance is so effectual, that ships sheltered by it, rarely find the sea disturbed by swells. On the other hand, the most formidable fields yield to the slightest grown swell, and become disrupted into thousands of pieces; and ice of only a few weeks growth, on being assailed by a turbulent sea, is broken and annihilated with incredible celerity. Bay-ice, indeed, which for weeks has been an increasing pest to the whale-fisher, is sometimes removed in the space of a few hours. The destruction is in many cases so rapid, that to an unexperienced observer, the occurrence seems incredible, and rather an illusion of fancy, than a matter of fact. Suppose a ship immoveably fixed in bay-ice, and not the smallest opening to be seen: after a lapse of time sufficient only for a moderate repose, imagine a person rising from his bed,—when, behold, the insurmountable obstacle has vanished!

[page] 302

Instead of a sheet of ice expanding unbroken to the verge of the horizon on every side, an undulating sea relieves the prospect, wherein floats, the wreck of the ice, reduced to a small fraction of its original bulk! This singular occurrence, I have more than once witnessed.

That ice should be forming or increasing, when exposed to the swells of the ocean, while the annihilation of bay-ice is so sudden and complete, might seem an anomaly or impossibility, were the circumstances passed over in silence. It must be observed, that the operation of a swell is merely to rend the bay-ice in pieces, while its destruction is principally effected, by the attrition of those pieces against each other, and the washing of the wind-lipper*. Herein the essential difference consists: pancake ice is formed in masses so small and so strong, that the swell cannot divide them; and the effect of the wind-lipper is repressed by the formation of sludge on its seaward margin. Hence, whenever ice does occur in agitated waters, its exterior is always sludge, and its interior pancake ice, the pieces of which gradually increase in size with the distance from the edge.

When a swell occurs in crowded yet detached ice, accompanied with thick tempestuous weather, it presents oue of the most dangerous and terrific na-

* The first effects of a breeze of wind on smooth water is by seamen called wind-lipper. From it, all high seas are derived, and it is always apparent on their surfaces.

[page] 303

vigations that can be conceived. Each lump of ice, by its laborious motion, and its violent concussions of the water, becomes buried in foam, which, with its rapid drift, and the attendant horrid noise, inspires the passing mariner with the most alarming impressions; whilst the scene before him, is, if possible, rendered more awful, by his consciousness of the many disasters which have been occasioned by similar dangers.

When exposed to a high sea, the largest and heaviest pieces of drift-ice are forced to leeward with much greater velocity than small and light pieces. Masses of ice capable of holding a ship to windward in a storm, when the sea is smooth, frequently drive, in a swell, with a velocity of two or three miles an hour. This renders loose ice very dangerous in a swell, particularly with light winds or calms. In the season of 1818, the ship I commanded, the Fame, was exposed to great danger by an insulated piece of ice running against her in a calm. We were in latitude 78°, lying at a short distance from the western ice, at the conclusion of a gale of wind. A fog, intensely thick, prevailed, the sea was very high, but the wind had just subsided to a calm. No chance of danger from ice was apprehended, until a prodigious lump was heard approaching. It was not a hundred yards distant when it made its appearance, and, in a state of tremendous agitation, with the sea beating, roaring, and breaking upon it

2

[page] 304

the same as on a lee shore, advanced directly towards us with a velocity of about three knots. All hands were instantly roused, the boats were manned and lowered into the water to tow the ship; but before she could be moved from the place, the ice was alongside. Happily the ship rolled from it at the moment the first blow was struck, which weakened the shock, and, perhaps, prevented the ship from being stove. The succeeding blows, though all received under the ship's bottom, near the keel, proved less and less formidable, until the ship was fairly beaten out of the way; so that the ice passed to leeward, and was in a few minutes out of sight.

When a swell operates against the side of a stream or pack of ice, it washes away the snow from the surface of the most exposed pieces, as well as part of the ice, and forms every corner into a tongue. These tongues, from the different depths they occupy in the sea, are forced one upon another, and so locked together, that the most violent waves, being incapable of moving them at a little distance from the edge, become totally suppressed. Hence a stream of heavy ice, however narrow, provided it consist of half a dozen or more pieces in breadth, and be well compacted, is capable of resisting the highest swells in an astonishing degree, and for a considerable period. Under shelter of such a stream, though the waves of the Atlantic beat against it, the navigator finds a comfortable retreat, in a sea almost as smooth as a

2

[page] 305

river. So long as the ice hangs together, and preserves its continuity, it sustains but little loss from the most violent surges; hut whenever the sea breaks through it, like an army dispersed and retreating in confusion before a victorious enemy, the pieces flee before the sea, increase rather than diminish the swell, are overrun by the foaming waters, and subjected to a rapid dissolution.

Thus, while a small stream of compact ice suppresses a swell, a large body of heavy ice, when loose or unconnected, produces little effect, the sea being found to penetrate with little diminution for many leagues. A swell among ice is discovered by the breaking of fields, or by the motions of loose pieces, when it cannot be otherwise observed. In some cases it becomes a useful guide to the involved navigator, by pointing out, in the direction in which it penetrates, the way of escape. In thick weather, especially, it is often the means of extrication to ships the most awkwardly entangled among ice, and preserves them from being deeply and dangerously beset.

8. A balance of power seems to be preserved between the wasting influence of the waves and the solidity and increasing property of the polar ice; the former preventing the undue enlargement of the boundaries of the ice, and the latter defying any extensive, or at least permanent, inroads into the situations usually occupied by it. For, as fast as

VOL. I. U

[page] 306

the borders of the ice are destroyed by the sea, or the mildness of the climate under southerly winds, all the losses are made up by the prevalence of the current proceeding to the south-west, which continually brings fresh supplies of ice, and presents a new front to the action of the waves.

SECT. X.

Remarks on the closest Approximations towards the Poles hitherto accomplished, under different Meridians.

IT has already been remarked, that the 80th or 81st degree of north latitude, is generally accessible to the Spitzbergen or Greenland whale-fishers, under the meridian of 6° or 8° E.; and that on some particular occasions the latitude of 80° or even 81° has been exceeded. None of the navigators, however, who have been sent on this or any other track, with the express object of exploring the Polar regions, have been able to reach the parallel of 81°. From this circumstance, from the general experience of the whale-fishers, and from an experience of seventeen voyages which I have myself made into the Spitzbergen Sea, I think I may venture to assert, that the navigation of the North Polar Sea is generally terminated by an impervious body of

[page] 307

ice, in the latitude of 80° or 81°; and that although some instances may have occurred in which vessels have proceeded a little farther, yet few of these instances can be authenticated.

One case, and only one, I can myself establish. While I served in the capacity of chief mate, in the Resolution of Whitby, commanded by my Father, (whose extraordinary perseverance is well known to all persons in the Greenland trade,) we were enabled, by astonishing efforts, and with exposure to imminent hazard, to penetrate as far as latitude 81° 30′. This being, I imagine, one of the most remarkable approximations towards the Pole yet realized, it may not be uninteresting to give an abstract of a part of my journal of this voyage.

On the 23d of March 1806, we sailed from Whitby, and, on the 12th of April, saw the first ice, near the Island of Jan Mayen, which was then in sight. The next day we penetrated the loose ice in search of seals, until we reached the edge of a solid pack; but seeing nothing to induce our stay, we made the best of our way to the eastward for the whale-fishery.

Until the 20th, the winds were mostly unfavour able; our progress was in consequence only eighty leagues on an easterly course. We then steered to the north-eastward, and soon fell in with ice, which, however, did not put us out of our course until the

U 2

[page] 308

following clay, when we were obliged to bear more away, on account of close ice, which trended to the E., S. E., and afterwards S. S. E.

At 8 P. M. of the 24th of April, supposing ourselves near land, both from our reckoning and from the vast quantity of birds seen, the ship was laid too, the weather being thick with snow. At 10 p. M., the weather cleared, and we discovered Cherie Island ten leagues distant to the north-east, with the appearance of ice around it. This induced our prompt return along the edge of the ice, judging that direction the most prudent, though seventeen out of twenty ships in company continued to proceed to the south-eastward. Whether the masters of these ships did not see the land, or, seeing it, were determined to search for a new passage to the fishing stations on the cast side of Cherie Island, we could not ascertain; but we considered it more safe to pursue the accustomed track, though apparently blocked up with an impervious body of ice.

Having surveyed the margin of the ice for four days, without discovering any material inlet, we penetrated the borders with a northerly wind, as far as practicable, and then moored to an ice-berg.

Two days afterwards, the wind veered to the south, with which we forced a little farther to the northward, and, on the 2d of May, moored to another ice-berg.

[page] 309

On the 4th, we observed, that some ships which, four days before, were several miles to the southward of us, had, by the peculiar set of the current, revolved to the northward.

On the 5th, with a light breeze of wind, we proceeded several miles through various intricate channels in the ice, and on the wind dying away to a calm, we advanced by totting*. Struck a whale, but lost it by the breaking of the line.

A heavy swell, with a strong wind from the S. W., prevailed on the 6th, by which the situation of the ship was rendered very hazardous Lay too.

On the 7th, towed to an ice-berg, and made fast.

An opening appeared in the ice on the 9th, leading to the northward. Made sail, and pursued a devious channel during six hours, with the velocity of eight or nine miles an hour. The wind having then increased to a heavy gale, and the ice having become crowded and dangerous, we were obliged to moor. The Foreland in sight.

The next day the wind was easterly, but moderate, and the ice a little slack; as such, we plied towards the land, and after much critical sailing

* The process of dragging a ship, or any other body floating in water, forward by boats, is called lowing. The boats are all connected by ropes to the ship, and are then rowed forward, by which the ship is drawn after them.

[page] 310

among dangerous ice, we entered an opening so considerable, that we could not discover its extent from the top-mast-head. We now flattered ourselves that our exertions were about to be rewarded, by having an immediate opportunity of commencing the fishery. Our hopes, however, were soon frustra ted; the open space we now navigated did not present us with a single whale, and though of an extent of 400 or 500 square miles, was, within three days, contracted to an area of a few acres.

This circumstance, so unexpected, at the same time so uncommon, would have had a tendency to paralize our efforts, had not a swell, apparently from the north, and the appearance of water in that direction by the sky, encouraged us to persevere.

On the 13th, therefore, we again pushed forward into a continuous sheet of ice; being a combination of bay-ice with scattered pieces of drift-ice. During five days we persevered in the most laborious exertions, in towing, boring, warping* and mill-dolling†; frequently draggin heavy boats

* Warping is the process of moving a ship by means of ropes, called warps, which being attached to some distant fixed object, a large piece of ice, for instance, admit of the ship's being drawn forward, by the application to the ropes of the different mechanical powers on board.

Mill-dolling, consists in breaking a passage through thin ice, for a ship, by a sort of ram, let fall from the bowsprit; or by one or more boats attached to the jib-boom, having several men in each, who move from side to side, and keep them in continual motion. As the ship advances, the rope by which the boats are attached to the jib-boom, draws them forward, and prevents them from being run down.

[page] 311

across extensive plains of bay-ice, for the purpose of breaking a passage for the ship; scarcely allowing time for refreshment, with very limited and distant periods for rest; when, on the 18th of May, after having passed a barrier of most extraordinary extent, we accomplished our wishes, and exceeded our most sanguine expectations, by getting into a sea, to which we could see no bounds, but the ice we had passed through on the south side, and the land to the eastward. Our latitude, at this time, was about 79° 35′; Hakluyt's Headland bearing E. N. E. 35 miles distant.

We now proceeded a little towards the N., afterwards towards the N. W. or W., accordingly as appearances in the ice or sea suggested a greater probability of meeting with whales. As we advanced, we found that a pack lay to the northward, as well as to the southward of us; the two bodies of ice being ten to twenty leagues apart. The wind blowing very strong from the southward, and the sea being quite open, our progress to the westward was very rapid; so much so, indeed, that among the contracted meridians in the 80th degree of latitude, we advanced almost a degree of longitude every hour

[page] 312

during the day; the interval between the sun coming to the meridian, below the Pole, on the 18th, and to the same meridian on the 19th, being nearly twenty-five hours. When we reached the longitude of about 8° W., in latitude 79° 30′, no whales having been seen all the way, we tacked. Our advance to the west, in this parallel, was unexampled; and yet an expanse of sea lay before us, of which, from the appearance of the sky, we could with confidence affirm, that neither ice, in any considerable body, was within thirty miles, nor land within sixty miles of us, in a westerly direction.

On stretching to the northward, from this, we met with a compact body of ice, in latitude 80° 10′, along the edge of which we sailed on an E. or E. N E. course (true), a distance of nearly three hundred miles, examining every sinuosity, and keeping a vigilant watch the whole way, without seeing any whales, excepting a dead one. On the 23d, our latitude, by a careful observation, at mid-night, was 81° 12′ 42″; and, on the morning of the 24th, we considered ourselves nearly a degree to the northward of Captain Phipps's farthest advance, our latitude being estimated at 81° 30′, and longitude 19° E. Here a similar expanse of sea presented itself, as on our western reach. The margin of the ice continued to trend to the E. N. E., (true), as far as it was visible; and, from the appearance of the atmosphere, it was clear that the sea was not incommoded by

2

[page] 313

ice, between the E. N. E. and S. E. points, within thirty miles, or limited by land within 60 or even 100 miles of the place of the ship.

Had the purport of our voyage been discovery, instead of whale-fishing, we should certainly have been enabled to add something more to our knowledge of the Globe, by the exploration of a region seldom attainable. Discovery, however, being only in a limited degree compatible with our object, considerations of safety and prudence induced our return. Our situation was solitary indeed. No ship, or human being, it is believed, was within 340 miles of us. We, doubtless, occupied the most northerly situation of any individuals in the world. The sea began to freeze, and threatened our detention. We had made no progress in the fishery; nor could we find any whales: and the sailors began to be anxious, fearful, and troublesome. Such were the considerations that induced us to return.

We now proceeded to the south-west, at a distance from the ice that we examined on our advance. On the 24th, at noon, we were in latitude 81° 1′ 53″, longitude 17° 30′ E.

Having run to the south-west about 120 miles, Hakluyt's Headland was seen, bearing S. E. distant 19 or 20 leagues. On penetrating a body of open ice encompassing the Headland, we saw a whale, and pursued it with all our boats, but without success. From hence we steered to the west-

[page] 314

ward, and found the ice, which was very compact when we passed it on the 21st of the month, now loose and navigable. The drift-ice from the north, had formed a chain of communication between the two packs, among which, on the 28th of May, in latitude 80° 8′, longitude 0° 40′ E., we met with whales so numerous, that, in the course of a month, we succeeded in capturing twenty-four of the species. These, with two seals, two sea-horses, two bears, and one narwhale, afforded an excellent cargo*.

On the 30th of June, we prepared for our passage home; and the day following, entered the icy barrier that we encountered on our advance, which now consisted of an open but heavy pack. After a troublesome navigation of two or three days, we emerged from the ice into the open sea, and did not afterwards meet with any obstruction.

From the 9th of May, until the 10th of July, we saw but one ship.

On our arrival in England, we were informed, that two French frigates had cruized the fishing country during the latter end of the season, and had destroyed several of the whalers; one of which frigates we narrowly escaped on our passage home, it having been captured near the Faroe Islands, within a day of our passing the same. This an-

* The whole produced upwards of 216 tons of oil.

[page] 315

noyance from an enemy, together with the unfavourable situation of the ice, and the scarcity of whales on its southern aspect, was the occasion of a very general failure in the fishery.

In no part of the Globe has any navigator been able to approach within ten degrees of the Pole, excepting on the west side of Spitzbergen.

In Baffin's Bay, between the longitudes of 60° and 70° west, ships have seldom advanced beyond the 74th or 75th degree of latitude; and only one instance is upon record, wherein the latitude of 77½°, near the extremity of the bay, has been reached.

Through Behring's Strait, the adventurous COOK, on the meridian of 161° or 162° W., (very near the American shore), advanced to the latitude of 70° 44′ N., on the 18th of August 1778; and, on the 26th, in longitude 176° W., they found the ice impervious beyond the latitude of 69° 45′ N. After the lamentable death of this illustrious navigator, Captain CLERKE directed the proceedings; and, on the 18th of July, in the following year, reached the latitude of 70° 33′, being about four leagues short of their former advance.

Along the greater part of the extensive northern face of the Russian dominions, the polar ice closely adheres during two-thirds of the year; and, in the height of summer, seldom recedes far from any part of the coast comprised between Nova Zembla and

2

[page] 316

the north-eastern termination of Asia. From some parts of the coast, indeed, it is doubtful whether the ice ever recedes at all; though, in some situations, near extensive promontories, a considerable north latitude has been obtained. Between the meriridians of 60° and 70° E., along the coast of Nova Zembla, Barentz in 1596, observed in latitude 76° 15′, and is supposed, in doubling the northern Cape of this country, to have reached at least the latitude of 77° N.; and in a preceding voyage, undertaken in the year 1594, the same navigator reached the latitude of about 77° 25′, when in sight of Nova Zembla, being prevented from going further by an extensive field of ice.

In longitude about 100° E., Lieutenant Prontschitscheff, in the year 1736, penetrated the ice, near Cape Ceverovostochnoi, as far as latitude 77° 25′. And about the longitude of 175° E. a little Russian vessel, being part of an expedition of seven kotches, is said to have doubled the north-eastern promontory of Asia, in the country of the Tchuktchi, supposed to extend into a high northern latitude, at any rate considerably beyond the extent reached by Captain Cook, about 60 leagues farther to the eastward.

Hence it appears, that the nearest approach towards the North Pole, between the meridians of Nova Zembla and the north-eastern Cape of Asia, has, as might reasonably be expect-

2

[page] 317

ed, been made by the Russians; that on the meridian of Nova Zembla, the highest northern latitude has been attained by the Dutch; and that in the sea of Spitzbergen, in Hudson's and Baffin's Bay, in the sea beyond Behring's Strait, and towards the sea, washing the northern shores of America, the highest northern latitudes, have been reached by the British. Towards the southern Pole, the most careful and extensive explorations have also been made by our countrymen; Captain Cook, with indefatigable perseverance, having advanced towards the Pole on various meridians, as far as the ice would permit. On his first attempt, in the year 1772, they met with ice in about 51° S. latitude, and longitude 21° E. They saw great fields in 55° S. on the 17th January 1773; and on February the 24th, were stopped by field ice in 62° south latitude, and 95° east longitude.

Again, on the second attempt in December of the same year, they met with ice in about 62° south latitude, and 172°-173° west longitude; and on the 15th, saw field ice in latitude 66°. On the 30th of January 1774, they were stopped by immense ice-fields in latitude 71° 10′ 30″ S., and in longitude 107° W., which was the most considerable approximation towards the South Pole that had ever been effected.

[page] 318

SECT. XI.

Abstract of the preceding Observations on the Formation, Properties, and Situation of the Polar Ice.

FROM what has been advanced respecting the situation, properties, and manner of formation of the ice surrounding the Pole, the following conclusions seem naturally to result; and as far as relates to the formation of ice, will apply generally to all situations within the Polar circles where ice occurs.

I. Bay-ice.—That much bay-ice is annually formed in the seas of Spitzbergen and Davis' Strait; in the Bays of Hudson and Baffin, and in other situations near the Pole, where it sometimes attains such a degree of strength and solidity, as to produce light fields and floes, and when broken up, light drift-ice.

That the kind of bay-ice called Pancake or Cake Ice, is frequently formed in bodies of considerable extent, and in sheets of considerable thickness on the southern face of the main body of the polar ice, even where exposed to the swells of the Atlantic Ocean; and that bay-ice is necessarily derived entirely from sea-water.

[page] 319

II. Drift-ice.—That the light packed or drift ice is the yearly product of the bays of the Arctic lands, and of the interstices in the body of older ice, and that it is wholly derived from the water of the ocean.

That the heavy packed or drift ice generally arises from the disruption of fields.

III. Icebergs.—That most of the ice-mountains or icebergs that occur in Baffin's Bay, Davis' Strait, Hudson's Strait, and on the eastern coast of North America, are derived from the glaciers generated on the land between the mountains of the sea-coast, and are consequently the product of snow or rain water.

That some icebergs may possibly be formed in narrow coves and deep-sheltered bays in any of the polar countries, where the set of the current or prevailing winds has not a tendency to dislodge them. Such having their bed in the waters of the ocean, must be partly the product of sea-water, and partly that of snow and rain water. And it is not improbable,

That a continent of ice-mountains may exist in regions near the Pole, yet unexplored, the nucleus of which may be as ancient as the earth itself, and its increase derived from the sea and atmosphere combined.

[page] 320

IV. Fields.—That some fields arise from the cementation, by the agency of frost, of the pieces of a closely aggregated pack, which may have consisted of light or heavy ice; and, consequently, which may have been wholly derived from the ocean, or from the sea and atmosphere combined.

That the most considerable masses are generated in openings of the far northern ice, produced by the constant recession towards the south of that body lying near the coasts of Spitzbergen; and, that such fields are at first derived from the ocean, but are indebted for a considerable portion of superstructure, to the annual addition of the whole, or part of their burden of snow.

V. Ice in general.—That however dependant the polar ice may have been on the land for its formation and preservation, from the time of its first appearance, to its gaining an ascendency over the waves of the ocean, sufficient to resist their utmost ravages, and to arrest the progress of maritime discovery, at a distance of perhaps from 600 to 1000 miles from the Pole,—it is now evident, that the proximity of land is not essential, either for its existence, its formation, or its increase.

VI. Freshness of ice.—That the ice of bergs, of heavy fields, floes, and drift-ice, and indeed of all other kinds when solid, whether formed from rain-

[page] 321

water or sea-water, is, excepting such parts above water as have been recently washed by the sea during frost, perfectly free from salt.

That porous light ice, and even bay-ice, when well drained in a mild temperature, and washed with fresh water, generally produce potable water, though not always entirely free from salt.

VII. Quantity of ice.—That an equilibrium between the quantity of new ice produced and of old ice destroyed, is so well preserved, that the absolute quantity of ice in the polar seas is always nearly the same; the south-westerly drift of the ice renews the front exposed to the sea, and prevents the inroads of the swell, while the general action of the waves of the ocean, and the influence of a comparatively mild temperature, prevent the ice from spreading over the Atlantic.

That when the quantity of ice in any place is enlarged or diminished, the variation is only temporary and partial; the usual equality being generally restored in the course of a few years by the reversed operation of the very causes which produced the inequality.

VIII. Quantity of ice greater in the southern than in the northern hemisphere.—That there appears to exist a remarkable difference between the two hemispheres with regard to the extent from the Poles occupied by the ice; the ice which en-

VOL. I. X

[page] 322

circles the Southern Pole, being much less pervious, and extending to much lower latitudes than that around the Northern Pole.

That the 73d or 74th, and sometimes the 76th or 78th degree of North latitude, can be attained at any season of the year, and the 80th degree, if not higher, at least once in every summer; whereas the 71st degree of South latitude is probably but seldom attainable, and has only been once passed:—And,

That while the antarctic ne plus ultra appears to be the 72d degree of latitude, that of the arctic zone extends at least to the 82d degree, or 600 miles further, so that while the closest approach to the South Pole is not nearer than 1130 miles, the common and annual approach to the North Pole is within 600 miles.

[page] 323

CHAPTER V.

OBSERVATIONS ON THE ATMOSPHEROLOGY OF THE ARCTIC REGIONS; PARTICULARLY RELATING TO SPITZBERGEN AND THE ADJACENT GREENLAND SEA.

SECT. I.

Remarks on the Climate of the Arctic Regions, and the Effects of Cold.

THE climate of Spitzbergen and the adjacent sea, is, in the autumn and spring seasons, variable and tempestuous. The temperature passes through its extreme range, which probably exceeds fifty degrees in the same season, or even in the same month, with a rapidity unknown in countries situate within the temperate zones. North, west, and east winds bring with them the extreme cold of the icy regions

X 2

[page] 324

immediately surrounding the Pole, whilst a shift of wind to the south-west, south, or south-east, elevates the temperature towards that of the neighbouring seas.

It is not easy to associate with our ideas of summer, the view of eternal ices and snow, and the sensation of almost perpetual frost; yet, as the power of the sun is sometimes such as to produce a comfortable degree of warmth,—as much ice and snow is dissolved, and especially as on some parts of the shore vegetation appears, advances, and is perfected,—the name of Summer to such a season may, for a limited period, be applicable.

An Arctic winter consists of the accumulation of almost every thing among atmospheric phenomena, that is disagreeable to the feelings, together with the privation of those bounties of Heaven, with which other parts of the earth, in happier climates, are so plentifully endowed. Here, during the whole of the winter months, the cheering rays of the sun are neither seen nor felt, but considerable darkness perpetually prevails; this, with occasional storms of wind and snow, and a degree of cold calculated to benumb the faculties of man, give a character to those regions most repugnant to human feeling.

The most severe cold, says Crantz, that occurs in Greenland, sets in, as in temperate climates, "after the New-Year, and is so piercing in February and

[page] 325

March, that the stones split in twain, and the sea reeks like an oven*."

When the sun returns to enlighten the benighted north, the arctic countries become more tolerable. The months of May, June and August, are even occasionally pleasant; but with July, and partially with June and August, the densest fogs prevail. On these occasions, though the temperature of the air be mild, the feelings are much more annoyed, and the spirits much more depressed by this tedious and painful obscurity, than by the enduring of a much colder atmosphere.

The temperature of the atmosphere, in the polar seas, is, in the summer months, very uniform. In the month of July, when fogs occur, the thermometer is generally near the freezing point, and is found not to be above three or four degrees higher at mid-day than it is at mid-night, and sometimes, with steady winds and constant fog, the temperature does not vary above a degree or two for several days together. But in the spring and winter seasons, the atmospheric temperature is subject to very great and rapid alterations; and it is worthy of observation, that the most remarkable of those changes are frequently simultaneous with the greatest changes of pressure.

* History of Greenland, vol. i. p. 43.

[page] 326

The following Table affords a view of the most considerable variations of temperature which have occurred within the sphere of my own observation, but it is probable that they bear no comparison with those alterations of temperature which take place in the winter months. Those instances distinguished by an asterisk, will be found, by reference, to the Table of remarkable Barometrical Variations hereafter given, to have been attended with correspondent changes of atmospheric pressure.

[page] 327

TABLE of Remarkable Changes of Temperature.

Year. Month, &c. Latitude. Thermometric Changes. Interval.
Hours.
1804, April 19. 76°.10′ 17° 18
1805, — 30. 78.30 14 3
1811, — 4. 70.33 20 21
— 14. 70.52 20 12
— 20. 76.21 18 22
May 5. 77.34 14 2
— 14. 77.2 21 24
1812, — 3. 75.35 16 7*
June 11. 78.44 9 16
July 12. 77.56 7 11
1813, April 23. 80.7 11 8*
— 23. 80.10 18 12*
— 24. 80.10 25 24*
— 24. 80.10 32 30*
May 22. 77.28 14 10
June 21. 78.2 14 12
July 27. 69.45 12 16
1814, April 10. 71.0 25 22
— 13. 71.0 32½ 24*
May 11. 78.9 20 12
— 13. 78.6 11 2
— 14. 78.9 18 8
— 18. 77.36 18 12
June 13. 78.23 12 12
1815, April 10. 74.56 17 12
— 16. 77.50 14 14
— 24. 78.16 14 8
May 14. 77.7 12 10
June 2. 79.10 8 12
June 14. 78.33 14 20
1816, April 10. 71.24 19 19
— 11. 73.4 13 10
— 12. 73.5 17 24
— 15. 73.55 14 11
May 5. 78.10 12 10
— 11. 78.45 14 12
June 10. 79.47 15 14
1817, April 27. 78.20 13 9
May 14. 76.15 8 10
— 16. 75.12 13 9
June 16. 78.17 9 16

[page] 328

From the circumstance of the thermometer and the barometer frequently suffering great and rapid simultaneous changes, the thermometer becomes a valuable appendage in assisting in the prognostication of the weather. Thus, when the thermometer rises with a falling barometer, a storm may be expected from the south. When the barometer rises and the thermometer falls, during a southerly storm, the return of fine weather is indicated, with a change of wind towards the north. When the barometer falls, together with the thermometer, during a southerly or easterly breeze, a northerly or westerly wind may be expected, but not of great intensity, unless the fall of the barometer be very considerable.

The great depression of temperature which takes place in the proximity of ice with a northerly wind, appears equally as considerable to the feelings in low as in high latitudes. Thus the ice, when accumulated into a connected body, extending, apparently, from the place of observation to the Pole, causes an equalization of temperature between the two situations, so that whatever may be the latitude, it is probable, that the cold under a strong northerly gale, will be very nearly as intense as at the Pole. In confirmation of this, I may remark, that as great a degree of cold as ever I noticed, in a series of twelve years' observations, (once

[page] 329

excepted), was in the latitude 71¼°, April 12. 1814, when the mean of three thermometers indicated the temperature of zero; and on the same occasion, during an interval of three days, the mean temperature was less than 5°. The wind, in the mean time, was constantly from the north-eastward, generally blowing a gale, but sometimes moderate. On the 25th April 1813, latitude 80°, the thermometer fell to —4° during a hard gale from the northeast (per compass), but, on account of the ship being driven away from the ice, it soon rose to 10° or 15°. These are the only instances in which I have observed the thermometer at zero; though on one occasion, in the year 1803, April 23., when we had no thermometer iu the ship, I am persuaded the cold was still more intense, as I never observed its effects so apparent. Ten or fifteen men were employed on the main-yard in an operation which occupied them about a quarter of an hour; of these, it was found, when they descended the mast, that scarcely one had escaped being frost-bitten; some in the hands, some in the feet, and others in different parts of the face. The effect of the ice in reducing the temperature, is so considerable, that our proximity to it is often announced by the coldness, before it can be seen. In consequence of this, the difference of a few leagues in position sometimes produces a surprising increase of cold. On the 29th of April 1815, in latitude 78° near Spitz-

[page] 330

bergen, we had a temperature of 19° to 24°, while ships at the distance of only 14 or 15 leagues to the north-west of us, had a uniform cold of 8 degrees.

The Greenland sailors being well defended from external cold, by a choice selection of warm clothing, generally support the lowest temperature, after a few days habitude, without much inconvenience. When, however, its attacks are not gradual, as when a ship, which has attained the edge of the ice under a southerly gale, is suddenly exposed to a northerly breeze, the change of temperature is so great and so rapid, that the most hardy cannot conceal their uneasiness under its first impressions. In one of the instances above quoted, in the year 1814, when a temperature of zero occurred, we reached the latitude of 70°, without experiencing any cold below 30°; but in less than twenty-four hours, the thermometer fell 25°, and indicated a temperature of 5°. Thus, between the time of my leaving the deck at night, and arising the following morning, there was an increase in the cold of about 20°. This remarkable change was attended with singular effects. The circulation of the blood was accelerated,—a sense of parched dryness was excited in the nose,—the mouth, or rather lips, were contracted in all their dimensions, as by a sphincter, and the articulation of many words was rendered difficult and imperfect; indeed, every part of the body was more or less sti-

[page] 331

mulated or disordered by the severity of the cold. The hands, if exposed, would have been frozen in a few minutes; and even the face could not have resisted the effects of a brisk wind, continued for any length of time. A piece of metal when applied to the tongue, instantly adhered to it, and could not be removed without its retaining a portion of the skin; iron became brittle, and such as was at all of inferior quality, might be fractured by a blow; brandy of English manufacture and wholesale strength, was frozen; quicksilver, by a single process, might have been consolidated; the sea, in some places, was in the act of freezing, and in others appeared to smoke, and produced, in the formation of frost-rime, an obscurity greater than that of the thickest fog. The subtile principle of magnetism seemed to be, in some way or other, influenced by the frost; for the deck compasses became sluggish, or even motionless, while a cabin compass traversed with celerity. The ship became enveloped in ice; the bows, sides, and lower rigging were loaded; and the rudder, if not repeatedly freed, would, in a short time, have been rendered immoveable. A considerable swell at this time prevailing, the smoke in the cabin, with the doors closed, was so intolerable, that we were under the necessity of giving free admission to the external air to prevent it. The consequence was, that in front of a brisk fire, at the distance of a yard and a-half from it, the temperature was 25°;

[page] 332

water spilt on the table froze, and, indeed, congelation took place in one situation, at the distance of only two feet from the stove. Hoar-frost also appeared in the sailors bed cabins, arising from their breath, and was deposited upon their blankets.

Under a temperature such as this, the effects of which have just been described, the whale-fishery could not be prosecuted; for nature could not sustain any continued exposure to the pungent force of the wind. With a calm atmosphere, however, the sensible effects of cold are singularly diminished; the cold of zero then becomes equally supportable with the temperature of 10, 15, or even 20 degrees, when impressed by a brisk wind; hence, the sensations produced on the body, become a very equivocal criterion for estimating the degree of cold.

The effect of cold in preventing the traversing of compasses exposed to its influence, has been noticed by some navigators. Ellis, in his voyage to Hudson's Bay, in conclusion of some remarks on this subject, states, as a remedy against this inconvenience, the propriety of removing the compasses into a warm place, by which the needles speedily resume their activity.

It does not appear, from experiments made on this subject, that the inferior activity of a compass when exposed to a cold atmosphere, arises from any diminution in the magnetic energy, but rather from some peculiar effect produced in the needle, or in the centre on which it turns. For nei-

[page] 333

ther the attractive nor directive power of the magnet, appears to suffer any diminution by an increase of cold. A magnet which, with difficulty, supported a weight of seven pounds in my cabin, where the temperature was 50°, on being removed into the air, where a cold of 8° prevailed, also supported the same, and after some interval one pound more; but on another pound being added, the weight fell off, and it would then only carry seven pounds as before. Hence, the attractive property of the magnet could not be said to be diminished, and scarcely to be increased, by a reduction of temperature amounting to 42°. A theodolite needle, 5.55 inches in length, when made to oscillate horizontally in the cabin, performed ten vibrations in sixty seconds, and then ceased. On the deck, it oscillated five times in thirty seconds, and then ceased. Thus, the time required for performing a vibration, was the same both in a high and in a low temperature; consequently, the directive force is unaffected by changes in temperature; but the number of vibrations performed by the needle, though equally deflected from the magnetic meridian when set in motion, was much fewer in a cold situation, than it was in a warm one. Hence, though the magnetic influence, both as to its attractive and directive property, be fully as great in low as in high temperatures, yet there appears to be an increase of friction, or an introduction of some unknown principle, which occa-

1

[page] 334

sions a diminution in the mobility of magnetic needles, when the degree of cold is very much increased.

Many remarkable effects of severe cold, are to be met with in the journals of the polar navigators, who have wintered in Spitzbergen, Nova Zembla, Greenland, Hudson's Bay, Iceland, and other situations, subject to the visits of the polar-ice, or where ice is formed on the sea.

Captain James, when wintering in Hudson's Bay, latitude 52° N., experienced such a severity of cold, that on the 10th of December, many of the sailors had their noses, cheeks, and fingers frozen as white as paper. On the 21st of the same month, their sack, vinegar, and oil, with every other thing that was liquid, were frozen so hard, that hatchets were required for cutting them with; the inside of their hut, at the same time, was lined with ice, to within a yard of the fire; and the clothes on their beds were sometimes covered with hoar-frost.

Ellis, who wintered in Hudson's Bay in 1746–7, in a creek of Haye's River, latitude 57° 30′, remarked several curious effects of cold. In the creek where the vessel lay, much ice appeared on the 5th of October; on the 8th, it was covered with a sheet of ice; and on the 31st, the river was frozen over quite hard. By the 3d of November, bottled beer, though wrapped in tow and placed near a good constant fire, was found to be frozen solid; and in the course of

[page] 335

the winter, beer casks placed in the ground, at the depth of several feet, froze almost solid, and some of them burst; many of the sailors had their faces, ears, and toes frozen; iron adhered to the fingers; glasses used in drinking stuck to the mouth, and sometimes removed the skin from the lips or tongue; and, a sailor, who inadvertently used his finger for stopping a spirit bottle, in place of a cork, while removing it from the house to his tent, had his finger fast frozen in the bottle, in consequence of which, a part of it was obliged to be taken off, to prevent mortification.

Captain Middleton, in describing the cold of Hudson's Bay, notices the bursting of ice, rocks, trees, joists and rafters of buildings, with a noise like the firing of cannon, as an effect of severe frost. He also states, that those persons who go abroad in north winds, are liable to have their arms, hands and faces blistered and frozen in a shocking manner; in such a degree, indeed, that the skin occasionally peels off when they enter too suddenly into a warm apartment.

A Hamburgh whaler, under the command of Jacob Janzen, was beset by the ice near Spitzbergen, in the year 1769, and detained until the middle of November, during which, though they were constantly driving to the southward, a most intense cold was sometimes experienced. On one occasion, early in November, the effect of the frost was such,

1

[page] 336

that the seams in the upper part of the ship's sides cracked, and opened with a noise resembling the report of a pistol, so that it was apprehended the ship would either sink or fall to pieces. These openings, at first, rendered the vessel very leaky, but after she was liberated and got into open water, and into a milder climate, they closed and became again impervious to water*.

In the interesting narrative by Pelham, of the preservation of eight seamen, who were accidentally left in Spitzbergen, in the year 1630, and wintered there, are some remarks on the effects of cold. The sea of the bay where they took up their abode, froze over on the 10th of October. After the commencement of the New-Year, the frost became most intense. It raised blisters in their flesh, as if they had been burnt with fire; and if they touched iron at such times, it would stick to their fingers like birdlime. Sometimes, when they went out of doors to procure water, they were seized in such a way by the cold, that their flesh felt as sore as if they had been cruelly beaten.

Seven Dutch sailors who wintered in Spitzbergen in the year 1633–4, were exposed to such a degree of cold, that as early as the 13th of October,

* Beschryving der Walvisvangst, vol. iii. p. 17. This effect, it may be observed, was probably caused by dryness rather than cold.

[page] 337

casks of beer placed within eight feet of the fire, froze three inches thick, and soon afterwards became almost entirely consolidated. In all cases of beer, ale, wine and spirits, freezing, it may be observed, that the aqueous parts only freeze so as to become solid; whereby, even in ale or beer, the liquor becomes concentrated in the centre, until almost as strong as spirits.

When the Dutch navigator, Barentz, wintered in Nova Zembla, in 1596–7, a most extraordinary degree of cold was sometimes felt. During the month of November, in the hut erected by the miserable sailors for their accommodation, ice two inches thick formed on the floor, and their beds were covered with hoarfrost; and when the people washed their linen indoors, it would sometimes freeze almost immediately on being taken out of the warm water. In December, wine froze in their hut, so that they were obliged to melt it every time an allowance was served out. At the close of the year, the intensity of the cold almost deprived the suffering sailors of sensation; they had recourse to hot stones, as an application to their feet and bodies, for keeping them warm; and though sitting before the fire, their backs would sometimes be white with frost, and their stockings would be burnt before they felt any warmth in their feet.

The effects of cold at Disco, as observed by M. Paul Egedé, on the 7th January 1738, and recorded by David Crantz, in his excellent "History

VOL. I. Y

[page] 338

of Greenland," are too striking to be omitted. "The ice and hoar-frost," says Egede, "reach through the chimney to the stove's mouth, without being thawed by the fire in the day-time. Over the chimney is an arch of frost, with little holes, through which the smoke discharges itself. The doors and walls are as if they were plastered over with frost, and, which is scarcely credible, beds are often frozen to the bedsteads. The linen is frozen in the drawers. The upper eider-down bed and the pillows are quite stiff with frost an inch thick from the breath."

These effects of cold, so different from any thing experienced in Britain, are not greater than might be expected, when we consider the lowness of the temperature which sometimes prevails.

The morbid effects of a low temperature, in the degree in which the Greenland sailors are exposed to it, are principally confined to the partial freezing of particular members. Thus the hands, feet, or even the face, are occasionally frostbitten. The prompt application of spirit of wine with friction, or a hearty rubbing with snow, so as to keep the temperature of the part low until the circulation is restored, seldom fails as a specific. The principal diseases incident to this cause, may be comprised under the genera catarrhus and scorbutus, although intermittents, asthmas, &c. some-

[page] 339

times attack persons who have been subject to such complaints. Catarrhs are very rarely followed by any dangerous consequences, but are generally expelled without proving the harbinger of other disorders.

It is a prevailing opinion, that sudden transitions from heat to cold, are very inimical to health. Where the heat is productive of copious perspiration, the sudden exposure to cold might operate unfavourably; but where no sensible perspiration prevails, I have never seen, in a healthy person, any ill effects resulting from the greatest transitions. For my own part, indeed, whenever I have occasion to expose myself to a severe cold, I like to get the body well warmed, finding that the more I am heated the longer I can resist the cold without inconvenience. Internal warmth, however, is clearly preferable to superficial heat, and the warmth produced by simple fluids, such as tea or soup, preferable to that occasioned by spirits. After the liberal use of tea, I have often sustained a cold of 10°, at the masthead, for several hours without uneasiness. And though I have often gone from the breakfast table, where the temperature was 50 or 60 degrees, to the mast-head, where it was 10°, and without any additional clothing excepting a cap, yet I never received any injury, aud seldom much inconvenience from the uncommon transition. Hence when the sea is smooth, so that the smoke

Y 2

[page] 340

of the stove can make its escape, I generally have my cabin heated as high as 50 or 60 degrees, and sometimes upward, though I am liable to be called upon deck or even to the mast-head, at a moment's warning.

In these frigid regions, the scurvy becomes a very alarming disease. It is, however, rarely seen in a Greenland ship, and is chiefly known to be destructive here, from the miserable manner in which many individuals have perished, by attempting to winter in Spitzbergen and the neighbouring countries. It seems, however, pretty certain, that this disease is not so much influenced by the severity of the climate, as by the use of improper aliment. From an excellent paper on this subject, by Dr John Aikin, published in the Memoirs of the Literary and Philosophical Society of Manchester, we may very satisfactorily deduce the conclusions following:—

That the intense cold which prevails, is probably the proximate cause of the scurvy attacking persons attempting to winter in arctic countries.

That the mode of living is nevertheless of such essential importance, as to be capable of either bringing on or repelling the attacks of the disease.

That the use of salted provisions and spirituous liquors, form a regimen the most inimical to health, by inducing a state of the body so liable to the attacks of the scurvy, that under all recorded instances, this disorder, in all its severity, has constantly

[page] 341

followed, and has seldom failed to produce its most deleterious effects. And,

That, on the contrary, the constant use of fresh provisions, whether cured by cooking, freezing or smoking, the occasional use of oleaginous substances, together with frequent exercise, a warm dwelling and warm clothing, may be considered as a plan of living which, if judiciously pursued, would be the best calculated for the preservation of health, and so probably effectual, that there would be little danger of resisting disease throughout the severities of a Spitzbergen winter.

Though the weather in the polar regions is very damp and unpleasant in some of the summer months, yet the very equable temperature which prevails, renders this season of the year particularly healthy.

The antiseptical property of frost is rather remarkable. Animal substances, requisite as food, of all descriptions, (fish excepted), may be taken to Greenland, and there preserved any length of time, without being smoked, dried or salted. No preparation, indeed, of any kind, is necessary for their preservation, nor is any other precaution requisite, excepting suspending them in the air when taken on shipboard, shielding them a little from the sun and wet, and immersing them occasionally in seawater, or throwing sea-water over them after heavy

[page] 342

rains, which will effectually prevent putrescency on the outward passage; and in Greenland, the cold becomes a sufficient preservative, by freezing them as hard as blocks of wood. Beef, mutton, pork and fowls, (the latter neither plucked nor drawn,) are constantly taken out from England, Shetland or Orkney, and preserved in this way. When used, the beef cannot be divided but by an axe or a saw; the latter instrument is generally preferred. It is then put into cold water, from which it derives heat by the formation of ice around it, and soon thaws; but if put into hot water, much of the gravy is extracted, and the meat is injured without being thawed more readily. If an attempt be made to cook it before it is thawed, it may be burnt on the outside, while the centre remains raw, or actually in a frozen state. The moisture is well preserved by freezing, a little from the surface only evaporating, so that if cooked when three, four or five months old, it will frequently appear as profuse of gravy as if it had been but recently killed. But the most surprising action of the frost, on fresh provision, is in preserving it a long time from putrefaction, even after it is thawed and returns into a warm climate*. I have eaten unsalted mutton and

* In the year 1808, a leg of mutton which was taken out to Greenland in the ship Resolution, returned to Whitby unsalted. It was then allowed to remain on board of the ship, exposed to the sun during two remarkably hot days, when the thermometer in the shade was as high as 80°. After this, it was presented to an epicure in the town; and although it was reduced to about half its original dimensions by the loss of fat, &c. it was declared, when cooked, to be the most exquisite morsel that he had ever tasted.
Another remarkable instance of beef and mutton being kept a long time unsalted, under very unfavourable circumstances, occurred in my visit to the Spitzbergen fishery, in the year 1817. Our stock of fresh provision was killed on the 17th of March, soon after which the ship was expected to sail; but unfavourable winds detained us in port until the 1st of April. During this interval, the weather being very mild, our fresh meat was hung up in a large warehouse, to shelter it from the sun and rain. Until the 21st of April, we had so little frost, that it remained soft; but soon afterwards it was hard frozen. After the middle of June, the weather became mild, the summer-fogs set in, and the meat soon thawed. Every day in July, but four, we had either fog or rain, with an average temperature of 36°.8. The last of this provision was cooked about the 13th of August; and although the average temperature for fourteen days, had been above 50°, yet it proved sweet and palatable.

[page] 343

beef nearly five months old, which has been constantly exposed to a temperature above the freezing point for four or five weeks in the outset, and occasionally assailed by the septical influences of rain, fog, heat, and electricity, and yet it has proved perfectly sweet. It may be remarked, that unsalted meat that has been preserved four or five months in a cold climate, and then brought back to the British coasts during the warmth of summer, must be consumed very speedily after it is cut into, or it will

[page] 344

fail in a day or two. It will seldom, indeed, keep sweet after being cooked above 20 or 30 hours.

A further antiseptical effect is produced by the cold of the polar countries, on animal and vegetable substances, so as to preserve them, if they remain in the same climate, unchanged for a period of many years. "It is observable," says Martens, in his "Voyage to Spitzbergen," "that a dead carcase doth not easily rot or consume; for it has been found, that a man buried ten years before, still retained his perfect shape and dress." An instance corroborative of this remark, is given by M. Bleau, who, in his Atlas Historique, informs us, that the bodies of seven Dutch seamen, who perished in Spitzbergen in the year 1635, when attempting to pass the winter there, were found twenty years afterwards, by some sailors who happened to land about the place where they were interred, in a perfect state, not having suffered the smallest degree of putrefaction.

Wood and other vegetable substances are preserved in a similar manner. During my exploration of the shores of Spitzbergen, in the year 1818, several huts, and some coffins built entirely of wood, were observed. One of the latter appeared, by an adjoining inscription, to contain the body of a native of Britain, who had died in the year 1788; and though the coffin had lain completely exposed, excepting when covered with snow, during a period of

[page] 345

thirty years, the wood of which it was composed, not only was undecayed, but appeared quite fresh and new. It was painted red; and the colour even seemed to be but little faded. Things of a similar kind, indeed, have been met with in Spitzbergen, which have resisted all injury from the weather, during the lapse of a century.

SECT. II.

General Remarks on Meteorology, with an Investigation of the Mean Monthly, and Annual Temperature of the North Polar Regions, including some Inferences on the Constant Tendency to Equalization of Temperature in the Atmosphere.

THOUGH in a state of rapid improvement, the science of Meteorology is acknowledged to be yet in its infancy.

Prior to the 17th century, no accurate mode of ascertaining the variations in atmospheric temperature was known; and, before the discovery of the weight of the atmosphere by Torricelli, about the year 1630, no means of registering its variations of pressure could be known or practised. Hence we can have no very correct idea of the relative temperature of climates, in the present and remote periods,

1

[page] 346

unless from occasional historical remarks of the formation of ice in particular lakes, rivers, or parts of the sea, or from the capability of the earth, in any region, for producing certain fruits or grain which cannot now be raised, or the contrary.

Until after the 17th century, meteorology seems to have been principally attended to, at least as far as regards the indications of wind and rain, by illiterate persons; the success of whose occupations depending considerably on their ability to anticipate the most particular atmospheric changes, necessitated them to study the face of the sky. The various appearances of the clouds, of the sun, moon, and stars, together with the notes or peculiar actions of certain animals, were their principal signs. But since the invention of the barometer, and more particularly of late years that it has become of general use, the farmer avails himself of its oscillations, in predicting such changes as affect his interests, by endangering the fruits of his industry. In consequence of this increased use of the thermometer and barometer,—instruments approaching so near to perfection, that their indications in the most distant quarters of the globe can be compared, and the comparison relied on,—meteorology, as a science, has made a considerable advance. Not only has it received an increased attention from professed philosophers, but also from retired persons of a scientific turn, who, within the last few years, have been in the habit

[page] 347

of attending to the phenomena which these instruments indicate, in the vicinity of their different places of abode. These records have already been useful; but, by continuing to register their observations upon the atmospheric changes, until a sufficient number shall be obtained, they will confer an important obligation on the generalizing meteorologist, and contribute to the advancement of the science of the atmosphere.

Among philosophers, Mayer, Kirwan, Hutton, Franklin, Playfair, Leslie, Wells, Forster, Halley, De Luc, Fontana, La Place, Humboldt, D'Alembert, and numerous others, have laboured in the science of meteorology with various credit and success. Among these, Professor Mayer has given us a formula for determining the temperature of any situation on the globe, where observations have not been made. Dr Hutton has presented us with a theory of rain, ingenious and plausible, and calculated to explain some phenomena, which could not before be accounted for, on any allowed principle. Kirwan, Humboldt, and others, have advanced our knowledge of the climates of different countries, by their laborious researches on atmospheric temperature. Dr Wells, by his investigation of the phenomena of dew, has accomplished a most interesting result in the discovery of the cause on which its formation depends. Professor Leslie, by the invention of several curious and useful instruments, and by his

1

[page] 348

profound researches on the relations of air to heat and moisture, and on the propagation of heat and cold through the atmosphere to distant regions, has contributed very largely to the advancement of meteorological knowledge, and to our information on the properties of the atmosphere; and, in his invention of a correct hygrometer, the action of which is dependent upon known and calculable philosophical principles, he has presented the meteorologist with a gift, which, when more generally known and adopted, will afford results, on the dryness and dampness of the atmosphere, as satisfactory as those on its temperature and pressure.

Such researches as these have not been made in vain; yet the knowledge of atmospheric phenomena must remain in imperfection, until the relations to each other, of heat, electricity, pressure, &c. the principles on which these phenomena are supposed to depend, be ascertained, and the laws by which they are individually governed, be fully discovered. But when we consider the difficulty of investigating the characters and properties of principles so obscure, and fluids so subtle as air, aqueous vapour, electricity, light, heat, &c. there is reason to believe that their various combinations and effects on each other, will never be wholly elucidated.

In the economy of Nature, we find that varying and fluctuating phenomena are produced by opposing or counteracting forces or principles; and that

[page] 349

whenever one or more of these forces, by any disturbing cause, gains an extraordinary advantage over the counteracting principle, the latter, in its turn, by a kind of oscillation produced by the prevailing tendency to equilibrium, recovers nearly an equal advantage over the other; and hence, whenever any extraordinary disarrangement takes place, it is seldom evidenced by the appearance only of a single great oscillation, or wave, as it were, which immediately subsides; but it is usually followed by other lesser fluctuations, until the equilibrium of the repelling forces be in some measure restored. Though, in some phenomena, this equilibrium never exactly takes place, yet the tendency to it is fully evidenced by the re-action which may generally be observed. This doctrine is applicable to the phenomena of waves, tides, winds, pressure and temperature of the atmosphere, as well as numerous other inequalities discoverable in the operations of Nature.

The temperature of the atmosphere, in any particular region, is one of those phenomena, which, however they may fluctuate, or whatever may be their daily, monthly, or yearly variations, and however unequal and capricious these variations may appear to be, will, on the average of numerous corresponding periods, be found to be dependent upon some certain laws, tending to produce equilibrium; so that the general results are remarkably uniform. This is a fact now generally received;—a fact which becomes

[page] 350

the more interesting and striking, the more it is investigated.

When we experience particularly cold winters, or particularly hot summers, we might suppose that the mean temperature of the years in which the former occur, would he greatly below, and that of the years in which the hot summers occur, would be greatly above the general standard. But this will seldom be found to be the case*. For here the causes, whatever they may be, which tend to produce the equilibrium, exert their influence, and compensate for the disarrangement, by an extraordinary supply or abstraction of heat, whereby the general mean is still preserved nearly uniform. Hence in temperate climates of the northern hemisphere, the mean temperature of any one year, derived from the mean of the daily extremes of heat and cold, or from any particular number of daily observations, continued

* When the frost was so severe in London, that the Thames was passable on the ice, in 1788, the mean temperature of the year was 50°.6, being within a small fraction of a degree of the standard; and in 1796, when the greatest cold ever observed in London occurred, the mean temperature of the year was 50°.1, which is likewise within a small fraction of a degree of the standard temperature. In the severe winter of 1813,–14, when the Thames, Tyne, and other large rivers in England were completely frozen over, the mean temperature of the two years was 49°, being a little more than a degree below the standard. And in the year 1808, when the summer was so hot that the temperature in London was as high as 93°.5, the mean heat of the year was 50°.5, which is about that of the standard.

[page] 351

through the course of twelve successive months, seldom differs from the general mean temperature, as derived from the observations of a great number of years, more than two or three degrees*.

The mean temperature of any single month, cannot be supposed to be equally uniform; since the uncommon prevalence of a south wind in winter, or a north wind in summer, may cause the particular month in which such winds occur, to be considerably colder or warmer than the standard. This, however, does not differ so widely from the general mean of that month as might be expected†.

* From the meteorological register kept at the apartments of the Royal Society, we find, that in twenty years, included between 1795 and 1814, the mean annual temperature was 50°.4. Now, in eight of these years, the mean temperature was within 0°.5, or half a degree of the general mean; in thirteen years, within one degree; in sixteen years, within two degrees; and, in no instance, differed more than two and a half degrees from the general mean. Hence in similar climates, by one year's thermometric observations, we derive the mean temperature thereof, within 2½°, by a probability of at least twenty to one: that is, it is more than twenty to one, in the way of chance, but the annual mean temperature ascertained, is within 2½° of the general mean, or standard temperature; four to one that it is within 2°; three to two that it is within 1°; and two to three, that it is within half a degree.

† The mean temperature in London, of the months of March, April, May, June, July, and August, never, in one instance, differed so much from the general mean temperature of the relative month, as 5°; and February, October, and November, never more than 6°; but the greatest difference in December, amounted to 8°.4; and in January, to 11°.4.—(Phil. Traps. 1796 to 1815.)

[page] 352

My object in bringing forward these facts, is, to show what degree of reliance may be placed upon a limited number of observations upon the temperature of the atmosphere of any country; and the consequent degree of approximation to the truth, which may be reasonably inferred. As the mean annual temperature of a country is probably given, by one year's observations only, to within two or three degrees of the truth, the mean of a period of eight or ten years, will probably come within one degree of the truth. Therefore, whenever we have a series of accurate observations conducted through such a period, we may, I think, consider the temperature of that place determined to the fraction of a degree.

Thus, by a series of thermometrical observations, continued through the space of a few years, the mean temperature of different parts of the earth, particularly of most of the capital cities, and other remarkable places in Europe, has been ascertained to the satisfaction of the philosopher. From the comparison of the results of observations made in different countries, with each other, tracing the changes of temperature which appear, with certain changes of latitude or situation, some ingenious and philosophical men have endeavoured, by principles of analogy and induction, to determine the mean temperature of every parallel of latitude from the Equator to the North Pole. For facilitating this purpose, Professor Mayer contrived a simple for-

[page] 353

mula*, which, through the extent of the Atlantic Ocean, determined a temperature that was found to correspond with most of the observations which had been made, to a surprising nearness. For the estimation of the temperature of regions peculiarly situated as to elevation, or remoteness from the sea, either of which circumstances was found to diminish the mean heat, different philosophers have presented appropriate formulæ. From Mayer's formula, and from all the tables of the mean temperature of the polar regions, which I have met with, the temperature of the North Pole comes out about 31° or 32°, and that of latitude 78°, about 33° or 34°†. This has been considered as a near approximation; and, so long as observations were wanting, served for purposes of investigation, to complete the scale of the temperature of the globe. But though an approximation, it will be found to be very wide

*The following is Mayer's formula as given by Professor PLAYFAIR, in his "Outlines of Natural Philosophy," vol. i. p. 296, 3d edit.:
"Let t be the mean temperature of any parallel of which the latitude is L, M the mean temperature of the parallel of 45°, and M + E the mean temperature of the equator, then is t = M + E cos 2 L. In this formula, M = 58°, and E = 27°. When 2 L > 90, cos 2 L is negative."

† Hutton's Philosoph. and Mathem. Dictionary, edit. 1815, Art. Temperature, (by Mayer's formula from Kirwan);—Temperature of the Pole, 31° of lat. 78° 33°.2
According to Leslie, Elem. of
Geometry, p. 496, 32° — 78° 34°.2

VOL. I. Z

[page] 354

of the truth; for when we reach the regions of perpetual ice, a remarkable anomaly is discovered, the mean temperature falling below the estimation by the formula, at once 17°! As this fact is of much importance in generalizing our knowledge of the temperature of the globe, I have subjoined to this volume a series of observations on the temperature, &c. of the polar regions, conducted with care during twelve successive voyages to the Greenland sea*, from whence I am enabled to deduce the following conclusions as to the probable temperature of the polar regions, in different latitudes, during every month of the year.

The mean temperature of the months of April, May, June and July, are satisfactorily derived, directly from the means of the latitudes and of the observations of temperature contained in the Appendix;—but the mean temperature of the whole year, and of the winter months, wherein no observations in such high latitudes have yet been made, can only be ascertained from analogy. From the examination of numerous thermometrical registers, particularly one consisting of 54,750 observations made in a succession of fifty years, at Stockholm, the valuable results of which are published in the Annals of Philosophy, (vol. i.p. 113.) it would seem, that the month of April (Old Style) affords a temperature which, in northern latitudes, is the mean of the year; or that a month, of which the middle is called the 27th–28th

* Appendix, No. I.

[page] 355

of April (New Style,) furnishes a mean temperature, which does not materially differ from that of the whole year*;—that a month, the middle of which falls on the 24th of July is the warmest of the year; or that in the average of centuries, the 24th of July is probably the warmest day in the whole year;—that the 22d–23d of January is the coldest of the whole year;—that the 19th–20th of October, and the 27th–28th of April, are each, on a long average, of the same mean temperature as that of the year;—that the difference between the mean temperature of the year and that of January, is nearly the same, though probably not quite so great, as the difference between the mean of the year and that of July†;—and that in high northern latitudes, the progressive increase of temperature from January to July, and the decrease from July

Z 2

* From the fifty years observations at Stockholm, wherein the mean temperature of every five days throughout the year is given, the mean of the penthemeron, which bears the mean temperature of the year, is the 27th–28th of April, which is later by one day only, than the middle-day of April (O. S.) And the mean of thirty days, or fifteen preceding and fifteen following the 27th–28th of April, differs from the mean of the penthemeron by only a small fraction of a degree; consequently, a month, of which the 27th–28th of April is the middle, may be considered as affording a temperature corresponding with that of the year. The 19th of October, taken as a mean of five days, likewise affords the mean temperature of the year.—(See Annals of Phil. vol. i. p. 114, & 266.)

† The difference between the mean temperature of the year and that of January, in Stockholm, is one-fourteenth part less than the difference between the mean of the year, and that of July; and in London, (from the mean of twenty years observations,) one fifty-third part less.—Append. No. II. Tables E and F.

[page] 356

to December, follow a similar ratio in almost every maritime situation.

Considering, then, the mean temperature of the year to he indicated by that of the 27th–28th of April, I have collated 656 observations made on 242 days, in nine different years, extending equally before and after the 27th of April, from which the mean temperature of the year in latitude 76° 45′, near the meridian of London, appears to be 18°.86. Before proceeding to the investigation of the temperature of the winter months, it will be convenient to reduce all the monthly temperatures derived from my observations to one parallel, say, to the latitude of 78° N. The observations of May, June and July, being generally made near the ice, and consequently pretty uniformly affected by its influence, are reduced to one parallel, by applying, as a correction, the difference in the temperature of the mean latitude observed and that of 78°, as determined by Mayer's formula, which, in these three instances, does not, in any one case, amount to the third of a degree; but the correction of the mean temperature of the year as well as that of April, is, I acknowledge, more arbitrary. The mean latitude of the observations for April is 75° 59′ or 2° 1′ from the parallel preferred. Considering the circumstances as similar to those above,

[page] 357

the correction here would only have been about 0°.8; but as a great decrease of temperature takes place on removing from the coast to the interior of a country, much more so must be the case in passing deeper into the body of the polar ice, the frigorific effect of which on the general temperature is so striking. Now, the observations of May, June and July, were generally made in or very near the body of ice, and mostly in similar situations; but many of the observations of April were made at a considerable distance from the ice, and consequently much less under its influence. I conceive, therefore, that 3° of temperature for these 2° of latitude, as a correction, is not too considerable; and that this correction is probably very nearly what it ought to be, will more fully appear, when we observe the striking conformity between this, together with all the other mean temperatures from observation, and those derived from the calculations which follow, founded upon analogy. By the application of this correction, the temperature of April, latitude 78°, becomes 14°. 23, and the mean of the year in the same proportion exactly 17°*.

The general results of all the observations on the temperature of the Greenland sea, with the cor-

* As 2° 1′ (the difference of latitude between the April observations and 78°), is to 3° (the correction of temperature), so is 1° 15′ (the difference between the mean latitude of the observations for determining the mean temperature of the year, and latitude 78°), to 1°.86 (the correction of temperature for the mean of the year.)

[page] 358

rections, to reduce them to one parallel, and the comparison of the reduced mean temperatures with those derived by calculation from a formula which follows*, are contained in the following Table.

Month of Period. Mean Latitude. Extremes of Longitude. THERMOMETER. Mean Temp. by Obs. reduced to lat. of 78° N. Mean Temp. by Calc. from formu. App. G. Differ. betw. Mean Temp. by Cal. & Obs.
No Observ. Mean Temp. Table in App. N° 11.
April, 75.59 ———— 370 17°.23 C 14°.23 13°.74 0°.49
May, 77.17 15.13 E, 11.20 W. 956 22.81 A 22.52 23.28 0.76
June, 78.15 14.40 E, 10.37 W. 831 31.30 A 31.37 31.72 0.35
July, 77.18 ———— 548 37.28 D 37.00 —— ——
Mean of year, 76.45 ———— 656 18.86 B 17.00 —— ——

Having now discovered by observation, chiefly, the mean temperature of the months of April, May, June and July, and the probable mean temperature of the year, in the icy regions adjoining Spitzbergen, I conceive it not difficult to calculate, on very reasonable data, the temperature of the remaining months, in which no observations have yet been made. I shall still proceed on the basis of the Stockholm register, as being one of the most complete and minute registers that I have yet met with, besides having the advantage of referring to a higher latitude† than any British register.

* Appendix, No. II. Table G.

† Latitude 59° 20′ 31″.

[page] 359

The difference between the mean temperature of the year and that of July, is 21½° in Stockholm, and 20° near Spitzbergen. Finding not only that the difference of temperature between the mean of the year and July, near Spitzbergen, but that the progressive increase of temperature from April to July, also bore a strong analogy to the relative circumstances at Stockholm, I formed a scheme of decimals connected with a simple formula, by which the same proportion of change which has been observed to take place every month at Stockholm, may be very readily applied to any other country*, whence, situation and circumstances being nearly similar, the temperature of unobserved months may be calculated. The data requisite, are the temperatures of January and July, or the mean of the year and July. My observations on the temperature of the atmosphere in the Greenland sea, afford the latter data, from which, by the formula in the Appendix, I have calculated the last column but one in the foregoing table, which agrees so nearly with the results by observation, as to afford a strong presumption of the fairness of the inferences. By the same rule, the temperature of January, latitude 78°, comes out—1°, that of February 0°.7, March 6°.1, August 34°.9, September 27°.8, October 18°.5, November 9°.8, and December 3°.1.

It might be urged against the truth of these inferences and calculations, that southerly winds may

* See Appendix, No. II. Tables F and G.

[page] 360

prevail more in winter than in those months wherein the temperature has been tried by observation, and consequently, that the weather would be warmer than it is here made out. I cannot find, however, any reason for supposing that this is the case, but rather the contrary, as will more particularly appear from the observations, in a following section, on the winds.

Before I quit this speculative subject, I am naturally led to the consideration of the probable temperature of the North Pole. Following the example of every generalizing meteorologist, I may, with some propriety, extend my speculations to the verge of the Earth, provided I can proceed on data not merely arbitrary or fanciful, but founded on observation and analogy.

It has been observed, that Professor Mayer's theorem for ascertaining the temperature of every latitude, becomes exceedingly wide of the truth, when we approach the regions of perpetual ice, notwithstanding in most other situations on the sea, or bordering thereon, it holds sufficiently near. The anomaly is evidently the frigorific effect of the ice. Admitting, then, that Mayer's formula, which has been received with very slight limitations, by almost every meteorologist, is founded on philosophical principles and correct observation, and consequently that it would have applied with accuracy throughout the northern hemisphere, provided there had

[page] 361

been no particular cause to affect it,—then the mean temperature of latitude 76° 45′ near the western coast of Spitzbergen, would have been 33° 8 instead of 18°.8, as shown by my observations, and the mean temperature of the Pole would have been about 31°*. Now, the difference between the mean temperature of latitude 76° 45′ by observation and calculation, which is here 15°, may be considered as the frigorific effect of the ice, because there is no other known cause why there should be any difference at all. But if the ice be the sole cause of the anomaly, it must chiefly produce its effect through the medium of those winds which brush over its surface†, whilst the mild winds from the south and east, will generally bring a temperature uninfluenced by it, and consequently tending to elevate the mean temperature above what it would be in a situation in the ice, so remote from the sea, that the milder winds could never reach it unchanged. Now, at the Pole, no wind whatever could convey the mild influence of a temperate climate, because, from

* I here follow KIRWAN, who, from Mayer's formula, calculates the temperature of latitude 77° at 33.7, and of 76° at 34.1; hence 76° 45′ or 76¾° = 33.8. Professor LESLIE, in the second edition of his Geometry, p. 496. calculates the temperature of 76° 45′ at 34°.7, assuming that of the North Pole at 32°.

† The effect of what has been called Radiation, being inconsiderable, under a dense atmosphere, subject to almost daily obscurities by snow or fog, is not here brought into consideration.

2

[page] 362

whatever direction it should blow, it must he cooled down by brushing over an extensive surface of ice; consequently the full frigorific effect of the ice must be greater at the Pole, than in places situated at or near the borders of the ice. For if Mayer's formula be well founded, and if the difference between the observed temperature of the polar seas and that by estimation on this formula, be entirely the frigorific effect of the ice;—then the frigorific effect of the ice in the parallels which have been observed near the sea, will be to the same at the Pole, as the amount of frigid winds (or winds blowing over an extensive surface of ice,) during any period in those places whose temperatures have been observed, is to the amount of frigid winds during the same period at the Pole. Let us apply this proposition for examining into the frigorific effect of the ice at the Pole.

From the meteorological results, contained in the Appendix, (No. II. Table B.), it appears, that during nine years observations made in the months of April and May, or such parts thereof as are used in the estimation of the mean temperature, as stated above, the wind blew off the ice, or from the land covered with snow and ice; that is, in the quarters included between the S. W. b S. and N. E. points, (north about) 147.4 days*; but in the remaining quarters, included between N. E. and S. S. W. only 58.8 days; to the former of which, (147.4) if we

* See the next following Note.

3

[page] 363

add 25.6 days (out of 35.8) of variable winds and calms, being the proportion of frigid winds in 206.2 days, we find, that in the total period of 242 days, the temperature of the air was more or less influenced by the ice during 173 days of that period, whilst there were only 58.8 + 10.2 = 69 days, in which the winds blowing from the south and east (increased by their proportion of the variable winds and calms) could not be said to be cooled by the ice*. Hence, as 173 (the number of days in which the temperature was influenced by the ice,) is to 15°

* These numbers are derived from Table B in Appendix, No. II. In the manner following.
Frigid Winds, being cooled by passing over ice. No. of days they prevailed in 9 yrs. in part of April and May.
E N E to N E b N, (half) 17.0
N N E to N b W 51.8
N N W to N W b W, 40.2
W N W to W b S, 25.2
W S W to S W b S, 13.2
—147.4
Proportion of variable winds and calms, having their temperature reduced by the ice, 25.6*
173.0
Mild Winds, blowing out of the Sea. No. of days they prevailed in 9 years, in part of April and May.
S S W to S b E, 9.6
S S E to S E b E, 12.5
E S E to E b N, 19.7
E N E to N E b N, (half) 17.0
—58.8
Proportion of variable winds and calms not having their temperature reduced by the ice,
10.2
69.0

* Remark.—As the frigid winds blew 147.4 days, whilst the milder winds blew only 58.8 days, the variable winds and calms may be considered as influenced by the frigid winds, more than the mild winds, or in the proportion of 147.4 to 58.8. Hence, as (147.4 + 58.8) = 206.2 is to 35,8, (the amount of variable winds and calms,) so is 147.4 to 25.6, the proportion of the variable winds and calms to be added to the frigid winds.

[page] 364

(the anomaly thereby occasioned in the mean temperature,) so is 242 the whole number of days in consideration, to 21°, the probable anomaly which might be expected, were the temperature always influenced by the ice, or the anomaly which may be supposed to occur at the Pole. Therefore, if from 31°, the calculated temperature of the Pole, we deduct 21°, we have 10° for the corrected mean temperature thereof.

This result will be farther corroborated, if we apply the same mode of investigation to another series of observations. In the former, the observations made in the Greenland Sea, in part of the months of April and May, or in the mean temperature month, have been the data for determining the frigorific effect of the ice on the temperature of the Pole; we shall now make use of the observations made in the month of May, during a series of twelve years, for the same purpose.

The amount of frigid winds, including the proportion of variable winds and calms, that occurred in the 78th parallel of latitude in the month of May, during a period of twelve years, comprising 372 days, was 257.2 days; and the mild winds which prevailed during the same period, amounted to 114.8 days. The mean temperature of May, latitude 78°, appears by observation to be 22°.5, but by calculations made by Kirwan, founded on Mayer's formula, it comes out 37°; so that the frigorific ef-

[page] 365

feet of the ice in the month of May, in this parallel, appears to be 14°.5. Hence, as 257.2, the number of days in which the temperature was influenced by the ice, is to 14°.5, the anomaly thereby occasioned in the temperature of May, so is 372, the whole number of days under consideration, to 21°, the probable anomaly which may be supposed to exist in the month of May at the Pole. Now, it is not a little pleasing, that the anomaly thus found, is precisely the same as that discovered by the former process.

As an objection to this conclusion, it might be urged, that the place where the meteorological observations were made, from whence all the deductions are derived, was not always at the margin of the solid ice, but, on the contrary, rarely so; consequently, that the northern winds would pass over a surface of water as well as one of ice, and that the full frigorific effect of the ice would be thereby diminished. The force of this argument must be allowed when singly considered; but when it is likewise remarked, that southerly winds as frequently passed over a small surface of drift-ice, as the northerly winds passed over water, the effects may perhaps be admitted to compensate each other; at least I have thus considered it, and leave the reader to determine with what degree of propriety.

Another objection to the conclusion might be suggested, on the possibility of there being a basin of water at the Pole, unencumbered with ice. But should this be the case, though I conceive we have no

[page] 366

good ground for imagining such a thing, I presume the objection would not bear upon the conclusion; because, though a basin of water might occur, it must be entirely surrounded with ice, whereby every general wind which could blow, must pass over such an extent of ice, that nearly the full frigorific effect might be supposed to be produced, of which its influence was capable.

I might, in connection with this subject, enter into an investigation of the probable range of temperature in the winter months, from a similar mode of reasoning as has been hitherto adopted; but the subject being so entirely speculative, I shall content myself with mentioning the range of temperature in those months, in which my observations have been conducted. The mean annual range of temperature in the polar seas, observed in April during seven years, was 26°, the greatest range 41°; the mean highest temperature 30°.6, and the mean lowest 4°.6. The following table, however, will show these matters more conveniently.

Month. No of Years Observed. Extremes of Latitude. Mean Latitude. MONTHLY RANGE OF TEMPERATURE. EXTREMES OF TEMPERATURE.
Mean Highest. Mean Lowest. Half sum of Highest & Lowest. Mean Range. Highest ever Observed. Lowest ever Observed. Greatest range. Mean of Hig. & Lowest.
April 7 70° 0′, to 80°, 10′ 76°. 0′ 30.6 4.6 17.6 26.0 37 —4 41 16.5
May 12 70.50 to 80.5 77.17 34.6 10.2 22.4 24.4 40 +5 35 22.5
June 10 70.50 to 80.1 78.15 40.5 21.4 31.0 19.1 48 15 33 31.5
July 3 68.24 to 79.22 76.13 46.0 30.0 38.0 16.0 48 28 20 38.0

[page] 367

From this table we find, that as the temperature decreases, the range of the thermometer increases; hence it is probable, that in the winter months, the range is nearly, if not fully, double of what it is in summer.

That tendency to equalization, which has been observed to hold very generally in the varying appearances and effects of meteorological phenomena, derives a beautiful illustration from the investigation of the extremes of temperature and pressure of the atmosphere, as indicated by the range of the barometer and thermometer. From a great number of registers of temperature which I have had occasion to examine, I am enabled to suggest the following general inferences.

1st, That in a period of several years, the mean of the highest and lowest temperature observed in the course of each year, agrees with the mean temperature of the place, generally to the fraction of a degree.

Thus, from the twenty years register kept at the Royal Society's apartments, between 1795 and 1814, the sum of the highest temperature observed each year is 1628°, and of the lowest 372° 5, the amount of which, 2000.5, divided by 40, the number of observations, gives 50.01 for the mean of the whole, which differs only 0.39 of a degree from the mean temperature,

[page] 368

derived at least from 14,600 observations, supposing only two observations to have been made each day.

2d, That in a period of years, the mean of the extremes of temperature observed in any one month, agrees with the mean temperature of that month, generally, to the fraction of a degree.

In Table A of meteorological results, No. II. of the Appendix, the sum of the highest temperatures observed in the month of May for twelve years is 415°, and of the lowest 122°; the amount, 537, divided by 24, the number of observations, gives a mean of 22.38, differing from the mean temperature of this month, as derived from 956 observations, only 0.43 of a degree. From the same Table, it appears, that the sum of the highest temperatures observed each year for ten years in June, is 405, and of the lowest 214, the amount of which, 619, divided by 20, the number of observations, gives 30.95 for the mean, differing only 0.35 of a degree from the mean temperature as derived from 831 observations. In the same way the mean of the extremes of temperature in April is 17.6, differing from that derived from the mean of 370 observations only 1½ degrees; and of July, 37.86, differing from the mean of the month, by 548 observations, only 0.89 of a degree.

[page] 369

3d, That the mean of the highest and lowest temperature, occurring in every month during one year, corresponds with the mean temperature of that year, generally to within two or three degrees; and in a series of years to the fraction of a degree.

At Okak, on the coast of Labrador the mean temperature of the year 1779–80, from 1460 observations, was 31°.0, the mean of the highest and lowest observations, [641+135/24] = 32.3, differing 1°.3 from the mean; and at the same place in 1777–8, the mean temperature was 24°.7, and that of the monthly extremes 27°.7, difference 3°.0. At Nain, on the same coast, the mean temperature in 1779–80 was 30°.3; the mean of the monthly extremes, [641+194/24] = 30°.8, difference 0°.5; and at the same place in 1777–8, the mean temperature was 24°.6, and the mean of the extremes 27°.9, difference 3°.3

4th, That the mean of the greatest heat and greatest cold, which occur in any fixed place, in temperate climates, in any particular year or period of years, affords a temperature which, in many instances, corresponds very nearly, with the mean temperature of that period.

In London, from the Royal Society's register, the greatest cold which was observed in the 20 years included between 1795 and 1814, was 4°,

VOL. I. A a

[page] 370

the greatest heat 93°.5; the mean is 48°.75 or 1°.65 less than the mean temperature of the same period. Even the mean of the extremes of temperature observed in any one year, does not differ so considerably from the mean of the year as might be imagined. One year, indeed, in London, the mean of the yearly extremes was 8°.1 below that of the mean temperature; but in the 20 years, the mean of the extremes corresponded with that of the year, 4 times to within a degree, 10 times to within 2°, 12 times to within 3°, 15 times to within 4°, 17 times to within 5°, and 19 times to within 6°. Hence it is as great a probability that the mean of the yearly extremes of temperature is within 2° of the mean temperature of the same year, as that it differs more.

SECT. III.

Remarks on the Pressure of the Atmosphere, with Observations on the Use of the Barometer in predicting the Weather.

IN the winter and spring months, the pressure of the atmosphere, in polar latitudes, as well as its temperature, is liable to sudden and very considerable variations. But as my observations have been

2

[page] 371

confined to the spring and summer seasons, I cannot give a precise account of the magnitude of those changes. I shall, however, specify a few of the most remarkable that have occurred within my own observation.

Year. Month, &c. Latitude. Change of the Barometer. Interval.
Inches. Hours.
1808, April 4. 66°.59′ fell, 0.92 24
May 12. 77.40 fell, 0.72 24
1809, — 6. 73.49 fell, 0.62 24
1812, — 2. 75.23 fell, 0.77 12
— 3. 75.35 fell, 0.92 24
1813, April 7. 66.30 rose, 0.50 12
— 13. 73.11 fell, 1.02 12
— 23. 80.07 fell, 0.82 24
— 24 80.10 rose, 0.86 24
1814, — 13. 71.0 fell, 1.00 24
1815, — 12. 77.21 rose, 0.60 14
— 27. 78.20 fell, 0.81 24
— 28. 78.10 rose, 0.67 12
— 29. 78.0 rose, 0.80 20
1816, — 14. 72.54 fell, 0.53 16
1817, — 13. 68.3 fell, 0.73 24
— 18. 71.56 fell, 1.12 21
— 20. 73.25 rose, 1.01 35

The greatest height of the mercury I ever observed during twelve Greenland voyages, was 30.57, which occurred on the 2d of May 1815; and the greatest depression 28.03, when near the ice in latitude 66° 50′, on the 5th of April 1808. Hence

A a 2

[page] 372

the greatest range of the barometer between the 1st of April and the close of July, observed within the Arctic circle during the twelve years, was 2.54 inches. It may be observed, however, that I have never seen the mercury lower than 28.75 to the northward of the 71st degree of latitude; so that the above range in the months of April to July, must be very uncommon. The greatest range of the barometer observed in the month of April during seven years, was from 28.03 to 30.48, or 2.45 inches; the greatest range in May during 12 years, was from 29.23 to 30.57, or 1.34 inches; the greatest range in June during 10 years, was from 29.25 to 30.37, or 1.12 inches; and the greatest range observed in July during six years, was from 29.30 to 30.30, or 1 inch. The average range in April is about 1.30 inches; in May 0.94, in June 0.79, and in July 0.72.

The changes in the pressure of the atmosphere, in the spring of the year, as indicated by the barometer, are not only great and rapid, but frequently portentous. I never knew the barometer mark a pressure of less than 29 inches, without its being followed or accompanied by a gale of wind, either at the place of observation, or in the immediate neighbourhood of it; and in the course of my observations of the oscillations of the mercury during sixteen successive voyages, not above five or six storms have, I think, occurred, which were not pre-

[page] 373

dicted by the barometer. The value of this instrument, therefore, in a country where there is frequently not an interval of five minutes between the most perfect calm and the most impetuous storm, is almost incalculable. The faithfulness of its indications are certainly not sufficiently appreciated, else it would be more generally used. At one period, I amused myself by registering my predictions, from the changes observed in the barometer; and on reviewing those memoranda, I find, that of 18 predictions of atmospheric changes in the year 1812, whereof several were remarkable, 16 or 17 proved correct.

During the whole period in which I have been in the habit of observing the barometer, I have never been able to detect any small periodical changes indicative of atmospheric tides. Two remarks, however, I may offer, as being pretty general: That the greatest fall of the mercury is frequently preceeded or followed by the greatest rise: And that the same tendency to equality takes place in the pressure, as has been traced in regard of the temperature of the atmosphere; the mean of the highest and lowest observations in a long series corresponding to a great minuteness with the mean pressure. The former observation will be found frequently to hold, by examination of the series of meterological tables in the Appendix; and the latter, most particularly, if we refer to the first table of meteorological re-

[page] 374

suits*. In the month of May, during 12 years, the mean maximum pressure, being the mean of the highest observation each year, is 30.36, the mean minimum pressure 29.43, and the mean of the two 29.89, corresponding with the mean pressure to within two hundredth parts of an inch. And from the observations during ten years in June, a similar result is obtained: Mean maximum 30.25, mean minimum 29.47, mean of the two 29.86, and mean pressure 29.869; difference only 0.009. But the comparison of the greatest with the least pressure that occurred during the series of years, is scarcely less striking: Highest observation in June 30.37, lowest 29.25, and mean 29.81; differing from the mean pressure 0.059. And highest observation in May 30.57, lowest 29.23, mean 29.90; differing from the mean pressure, by above 1000 observations, only 0.009.

The following are the relations which, in polar latitudes, I have been enabled to trace between the barometer and the weather.

1. A hard westerly gale with snow, occasions the greatest depression of the mercury, and a light easterly wind with dry weather, the greatest elevation.

2. The rising of the mercury foretels the subsidence of wind or rain, a change of wind, or fine

* Appendix, No II. Table A.

[page] 375

weather; and its falling, rain, snow, or a change or increase of wind.

3. The mercury rising unusually high, and then becoming stationary, indicates, in the months of April and May, a continuance of fine weather; but in June or July, foggy weather.

4. If, in the month of April, the mercury fall with some rapidity, an inch or more, a storm will most certainly succeed, however contrary appearances may be, which will probably be the more severe in proportion as it approximates the east, and will frequently continue with unabated violence for fifty or sixty hours.

5. The rising of the mercury usually preceedes the cessation of a storm; but does not invariably determine the period of its continuance, as storms frequently blow for a day or two after the first rise of the mercury.

6. Sudden and repeated fluctuations in the barometer are indicative of unsettled weather; but the rapid fall of the mercury is no indication of a short gale, though in other regions the reverse is said to be the case; for before storms that continue two or three days, the barometer frequently falls an inch within twenty-four hours, and, indeed, in a gale as long and as heavy as I almost ever witnessed, the fall of the mercury was above an inch in twelve hours.

[page] 376

7. Before very heavy storms, when the barometer falls uncommonly low, the mercury seems to get below its natural level, and often rises two or three tenths of an inch as soon as the predicted storm commences; hence this first rise of the mercury is no indication whatever of an abatement of the wind.

8. On account of the different states of the barometer in west and east winds, the usual level of the mercury with a moderate wind at west, not being much higher than with a galeat east, a change of wind from one of these quarters to the opposite, may be accompanied with the greatest alteration in the strength of the wind, without producing any effect on the barometer. Thus a storm at east veering to west, may subside, or a gentle breeze at west veering to east, may increase to a storm, without any alteration taking place in the mercury of the barometer. But in these cases, it has already been observed, that the change which takes place in the temperature, often compensates for the imperfect action of the barometer.

[page] 377

SECT. IV.

Appearance, Colour, Transparency, Density, degree of Dryness, and state as to Electricity, of the Atmosphere.

THE appearance of the Greenland atmosphere, corresponds in some degree with the winter sky of Britain; the colour of the former is, however, of a deeper azure; and its transparency, when clear, and free from icy crystals, perhaps more perfect.

Far within the borders of compact ice, the atmosphere, in summer, is often cloudless, and the weather serenely pleasant, though cold. But in the usual fishing-stations, and on the exterior of the ice in general, a clear sky is not frequent; nevertheless, when it does occur, its transparency is peculiarly beautiful. The sun sometimes sweeps two or three times round the Pole, without being for a moment obscured by a cloud. Objects the most remote, may be seen perfectly distinct and clear. A ship's top-gallant-mast, at the distance of five or six leagues, may be discerned when just appearing above the horizon, with a common perspective glass; and the summits of some mountains are visible at the distance of sixty to a hundred miles. This perfect clearness, occurs most frequently before easterly winds. In general, however, especially in very

[page] 378

cold weather, objects on the horizon, when viewed with a high magnifier, appear affected with a perpetual tremor; whence, the contemplation of distant objects is accomplished as perfectly with a good pocket glass, as with the best telescope. This tremulous motion, is evidently produced by the quantity of delicate icy crystals, which, in very low temperatures, are almost always seen floating in the air.

The general obscurity of the atmosphere, arising from clouds or fogs, is such, that the sun is frequently invisible during several successive days. At such times, when the sun is near the northern tropic, there is scarcely any sensible variation in the quantity of light, from noon to midnight. Hence, when the sailors have been long abroad in the boats, or so fully engaged as to be unable to mark the progress of time, the inquiry, Whether it be day or night, is not unfrequent.

There is nothing remarkable in the appearance of the sun at midnight, excepting, that when its altitude is very small, it may be viewed with the naked eye, without producing any painful sensation; but when it is more than four or five degrees above the horizon, it generally appears as effulgent as with the same elevation in Britain. The force of the sun's rays is sometimes remarkable. Where they fall upon the snow-clad surface of the ice or land, they are, in a great measure, reflected, without producing any

[page] 379

material elevation of temperature; but when they impinge on the black exterior of a ship, the pitch on one side occasionally becomes fluid, while ice is rapidly generated on the other; or while a thermometer, placed against the black paint-work on which the sun shines, indicates a temperature of 80 or 90 degrees, or even more, on the opposite side of the ship a cold of 20 degrees is sometimes found to prevail.

This remarkable force of the sun's rays, is accompanied with a corresponding intensity of light. A person placed in the centre of a field or other compact body of ice, under a cloudless atmosphere and elevated sun, experiences such an extraordinary intensity of light, that, if it be encountered for any length of time, is not only productive of a most painful sensation in the eyes, but sometimes of temporary, or even, as I have heard, of permanent blindness. Under such circumstances, the use of green glasses affords a most agreeable relief. Some of the Indians in North America defend their eyes by the use of a kind of wooden spectacles, having, instead of glasses, a narrow perpendicular slit, opposite to each eye. This simple contrivance, which intercepts, perhaps, nine-tenths of the light that would reach a naked eye, prevents any painful consequences from the most intense reflection of light that ever occurs.

[page] 380

The constant light of the sun during the summer, prevents the stars from being seen; and this, together with the frequency of cloudy or foggy weather, rarely admits a sight of the moon. Hence the longitude, which is of such essential importance in navigation, can seldom be determined by lunar observations. Chronometers, therefore, though but little used by the whale-fishers, become of enhanced value: and even a good watch, well regulated, will, where the degrees of longitude are so very contracted, point out the meridional situation of the ship for short intervals, with a very tolerable degree of accuracy.

Though the air, in the Arctic Seas, is generally in a state of dampness, approaching to complete saturation, yet, the absolute quantity of moisture cannot, when the cold is excessive, be very considerable. It is remarked by Ellis, in his voyage to Hudson's Bay, that metals are less apt to rust here than in any other climate. This observation, if we consider the relative humidity of the atmosphere, as indicated by a hygrometer, is certainly correct. Perhaps the lowness of the temperature, which, I should think, is not favourable to oxidization, and the small absolute quantity of moisture in the air, may be the occasion of this circumstance. The relative degree of dryness of the atmosphere near Spitzbergen, was ascertained by Professor Leslie's hygrometer, in the summer of the year 1817. The greatest dryness

[page] 381

that was observed, amounting to 27°, occurred on the 5th of May, when the temperature was 27°. But the average state of the hygrometer was not, I believe, more than 5° or 6° of dryness in May, perhaps 7° or 8° in the beginning of June and end of July; and when the foggy season prevailed, from the 25th June to the 14th July, the greatest dryness was only 5°, and the average probably not above 2 or 3 degrees. But though the air in the polar regions be so generally damp, yet it is probable, that there is no habitable situation in the known world, in which such a degree of actual dryness prevails, as in a house, or in the cabin of a ship, well heated, when the external air is intensely cold. In calm weather, I have frequently had my cabin heated up to 60°, when the external air was as cold as 10° or 15°. In such cases, the evaporation from the bulb of a common thermometer, coated with filtering paper wetted with water, has occasioned a reduction of temperature in the instrument, of 10° to 15°; and Leslie's hygrometer has marked an extent of dryness exceeding 150 degrees. When the external air was at the temperature of 26°, and the cabin 50°, the hygrometer marked 85°; and when the temperature in the open air was 30°, and in the cabin 64°, the hygrometer indicated 7° of dryness in the former, and 102° + in the latter. Now, Professor Leslie observes, that when the hygrometer indicates 50 or 60 degrees, we account it very dry, and from 70

3

[page] 382

degrees upwards, intensely dry. In consequence of the uncommon dryness of the cabin of a ship in cold weather, the wainscotting sometimes shrinks as much as half an inch in a pannel of about fifteen inches broad, being equal to one-thirtieth of its breadth; but on returning to Britain, the same pannel expands again almost to its original dimensions.

Few observations, comparatively, seem to have been made on the Electricity of the atmosphere, especially in high latitudes. Perhaps some trials that I made in the spring of 1818, on this subject, were the first that have been attempted within the Arctic circle. On my passage towards Spitzbergen, when in latitude 68°, I erected an insulated conductor, eight feet above the main top-gallant-mast head, connected by a copper wire, with a copper ball attached by a silk string to the deck. The conductor consisted of a slender tapering tube of tinned iron, terminated by a pointed brass wire. It was fixed in an iron socket, supported by a large cylindrical piece of glass, which glass, by means of another iron socket, was secured to the top of a long pole, elevated several feet above the mast head. A tin cone encompassed the bottom of the conductor, the mouth of which being downward, defended the rod of glass from getting wet, so as to injure its insulating property. The conducting wire being kept carefully clear of the rigging of the ship, was expected to ex-

[page] 388

hibit in the ball where it terminated, any difference between the state of the electricity of the ship or sea, and that of the atmosphere. The test of electricity, was a Bennet's gold-leaf electrometer, brought into contact with the ball; but though trials were made for several successive days, from latitude 68° to 75°, during clear, cloudy, and showery weather, not the least excitation was ever observed. That the effect might be rendered more perceptible, the electrometer was well dried and warmed immediately before each experiment, without which, indeed, no excitation could be produced in it, either with glass or sealing-wax. The nights being light, the aurora borealis could not be seen; but on the evening of the 20th of May, an appearance was observed very much resembling the aurora borealis, yet no signs of electricity were observed in the electrometer applied to the conductor.

SECT. V.

Atmospheric Phenomena, dependent on Reflection and Refraction.

The production of ice-blinks, by the reflection of the rays of light, has already been noticed, when speaking of the ice. As a proof of the benefit that might be derived from this phenomenon, I may here

[page] 384

observe, that on one occasion, my Father, in the ship Resolution, accompanied by several other vessels, was surrounded by a vast quantity of drift-ice, aggregated so closely, that the navigation became extremely troublesome. Observing by the blink, a field of ice surrounded with open water, at a great distance northward, he immediately stood towards it, though the wind was south*, the weather tempestuous, and the intervening ice apparently closely packed. To the astonishment of the seamen of his own, and the masters of some accompanying ships, he, after some hours of arduous manœuvring, gained the edge of the field. His crew immediately began a successful fishery, while the people belonging the ships they left, had sufficient employment in providing for their own safety.

There are several phenomena of the atmosphere caused by refraction, which deserve to be noticed. Under certain circumstances, all objects seen on the horizon, seem to be lifted above it a distance of 2 to 4, or more minutes of altitude, or so far extended in height above their natural dimensions. Ice, land, ships, boats, and other objects, when thus enlarged and elevated, are said to loom. The lower parts of looming objects, are sometimes connected with the sensible horizon, by an apparent fibrous or

* The fishermen have a great aversion to running northward among crowded ice with a southerly wind, as it can rarely be accomplished without considerable hazard of getting beset.

[page] 385

columnar extension of their parts, which columns are always perpendicular to the horizon: at other times, they appear to be quite lifted into the air, a void space being seen between them and the horizon. This phenomenon is observed most frequently on or before an easterly wind, and is generally considered as indicative of such.

When the glaciers, lying to the south of Bern and Neufchatel, "appear nearer, plainer, and larger than usual, the country man looks for rain to follow," which commonly occurs the next day. "And the Tartars at the mouth of the river Jenisei in Siberia, look upon a magnificent appearance of the islands, as the presage of a storm*."

A most extraordinary appearance of the Foreland or Charles's Island, Spitzbergen, occurred on the 16th of July 1814†. While sailing to the southward along the coast, with an easterly wind, I observed what appeared to be a mountain, in the form of a slender but elevated monument. I was surprised that I had never seen it before; but was more astonished when I saw, not far distant, a pro-

* GMELIN'S journey, t. iii. p. 129., from CRANTZ' Greenland, i. 50.

† Latitude of the ship 77° 50′, longitude 9° E. Thermometer at noon 46°, 6 P. M. 42°, midnight 40°. A light breeze of wind at E. S. E. Barometer 29°.79. Thick fog in the morning.

VOL. I. B b

[page] 386

digious and perfect arch, thrown across a valley of above a league in breadth. The neighbouring mountains disclosed the cause, by exhibiting an unnatural elevation, with the columnar structure of looming objects. Presently, the scene was changed; the mountains along the whole coast, assumed the most fantastic forms; the appearance of castles with lofty spires, towers and battlements, would, in a few minutes, be converted into a vast arch or romantic bridge. These varied and sometimes beautiful metamorphoses, naturally suggested the reality of fairy descriptions; for the air was perfectly transparent, the contrast of snow and rocks was quite distinct, even in the substance of the most uncommon phantasms, though examined with a powerful telescope, and every object seemed to possess every possible stability. I never before observed a phenomenon so varied or so amusing. The land was not alone affected by this peculiar refraction, since every object between the N.E. and S.E. points of the compass, was more or less deformed by it. A mass of ice on the horizon, appeared of the height of a cliff, and the prismatic structure of its front, suggested the idea of basaltic columns. It may be remarked, that these phenomena took place on a clear evening, after an uncommonly warm afternoon.

Another similar appearance of the coast of Spitzbergen, though not quite so interesting, occurred on

2

[page] 387

the 14th of June 1816. The weather was clear and mild, the barometer low, the wind easterly. The lower part of the coast in sight, lying in the 80th degree of latitude, had its usual appearance; but the upper part of the hills, over which was spread in some parts, a thin stratum of visible fog, was curiously distorted. The general appearance was that of variegated basaltic columns; but the tops of some mountains were extended into the air, in the form of monumental towers. An iceberg in one place, was elevated in an extraordinary degree, and assumed the character of a prodigious cliff of alabaster pillars.

Other peculiar effects of refraction I have observed, of which some instances shall be noticed. At 6 P. M. of the 13th of May 1814*, when the ship I commanded lay beset in the ice, the wind, which for some days had blown fresh from the N. W. veered to the S. E. and subsided. A dense appearance in the atmosphere, arose to the southward of us, and advanced with the wind towards the N.W. When it came to the S. W. of us, I first noticed that the horizon, under this apparent density, was considerably elevated; and that a separation of seven

* Latitude 78° 6′, longitude 4° 10′ E. Barometer 30.10. Thermometer at noon 14°, at 6 P. M. 10°, at midnight 7°, and two hours afterwards, 18°.

B b 2

[page] 388

minutes extent of the altitude, showed the division of the true and refracted horizons. This disunion in the horizon, was very similar in appearance to the natural horizon, when viewed through the horizon glass of a sextant, having a considerable index error. Viewed from the mast-head, the refracted horizon extended about 30° farther westward than when seen from the deck. It had the appearance of a line drawn nearly parallel to the true horizon, distant from it 7 minutes, with an open space between. Two ships lying beset about fourteen miles off, the hulls of which, before the density came on, could not be wholly seen, seemed now from the mast head, not to be above half the distance, as the horizon was visible considerably beyond them. The appearance of these ships was singular. Their hulls were much enlarged and elongated, and their masts very much shortened. They had precisely the prospective appearance of ships in a heeling position.

Again, on the 16th of the same month, the ship I commanded being similarly situated with regard to the ice, the phenomenon was repeated, with some alteration*. The refracted portion of the horizon appeared again in the south-east quarter: it was at

* Latitude 77° 56′, longitude 3° 54′E.; barometer 30.51; thermometer at noon 19°, at 10 P.M. 10°; wind N.E. by N. to N.N.W., blowing a fresh breeze.

[page] 389

first direct and undivided; but, in a short time, it separated in several places, and each distinct portion was inclined at a small angle towards the true horizon. The effect of refraction was six minutes of altitude. A particular haziness was evident to the east and north of the broken horizon.

On the 28th of April 1811, I had an opportunity of ascertaining the exact effect of a singular refraction, by the alteration produced in the distance of the visible horizon. A ship, the Henrietta of Whitby, bearing easterly from us, lay beset at such a distance, that her hull was not visible; and when viewed from an elevation of ninety feet, with a good telescope, half her lower masts were intercepted by the ice on the horizon. Now, at the elevation from which this ship was seen, the horizon, under common circumstances, would be nine miles distant; and from the knowledge of the dimensions of her masts, I estimated the portion of the hull and masts intercepted by the horizon, at about 22 feet; consequently, her distance beyond the horizon must have been at least 4½ miles, and her distance from us not less than 13½.

The day had been almost cloudless, the sun powerful. At 11 P.M.*, I was informed by the

* Latitude 77° 4′; longitude 8° 50′ 52" E.; barometer 30.17; thermometer at noon 26°, at 11 P. M. 16°; the wind had been easterly, but now blew a brisk breeze from the north.

[page] 390

officer of the watch, that the ship to the eastward of us, appeared to be forced by the ice upon her beam ends, or into an heeling posture. I immediately ascended the deck, and having cleaned the glasses of a good telescope, I hastened to the mast-head. I at once attributed the cause of the deception to unequal refraction. This ship, which, two hours before, was 4½ miles beyond the visible horizon, now appeared as far within it, and was in every respect deformed like the ships above mentioned. The ice between us and the Henrietta, was compact and motionless; in confirmation of which, a few hours afterwards, we found she had resumed her former appearance; that is, she had apparently returned to her situation beyond the horizon. Now, the distance of the Henrietta, 13½ miles, as before determined, added to about 4 miles that the horizon was visible beyond her, gives 17½ miles for its distance, which is greater by 8½ miles, than we derive from estimation, on the principle of the earth's curvature, with an elevation of 90 feet.

The horizon on this occasion, between the east and north, though continuous, appeared curiously undulated. There appeared a difference of nearly a quarter of a degree, between the elevation of the highest and lowest portions of the circumferential boundary.

I have occasionally observed other effects of atmospheric refraction, such as produce an inverted image of distant ships; an elevation of the bow or

[page] 391

stern, and a peculiar distortion of the masts; a division of a ship in the middle, and a lengthening of the hull, &c.; but the preceding having been more attentively studied in connection with the state of the atmosphere, they are more satisfactory, and consequently more worthy of particular detail.

From the whole of these facts, the following remarks may be deduced.

1st, That the curious refractions of the atmosphere in the polar regions, as far as they have been observed, have usually occurred in the evening or night, after a clear day.

2d, That they are most frequent on the commencement or approach of easterly winds. And,

3d, That they are, probably, occasioned by the commixture, near the surface of the land or sea, of two streams of air of different temperatures, so as to occasion an irregular deposition of imperfectly condensed vapour, which, when passing the verge of the horizon, may produce the phenomenon observed*.

Those phenomena, considered as the effects of refraction, &c. which remain to be mentioned, are not

* Perhaps the refraction of the dense vapour incumbent on the surface of the Thames, which at high water brings into the view of a spectator on the opposite bank, objects that are invisible at low water, may, in some measure, illustrate, or serve to account for this phenomenon.

[page] 392

peculiar to the polar seas; they may, however, be briefly noticed.

Parhelia and coronæ are, perhaps, not so frequent in Greenland as in some parts of America. I do not recollect to have observed these phenomena more than thrice. The first occurred on one of my earliest voyages to the fishery, and passed off merely as a wonderful appearance, without inducing me to minute the particulars. I perfectly recollect, however, that there were two or three parhelia, and four or five coloured circles. The primary one encompassed the sun, the remainder had their centres in its circumference; and some of the intersections exhibited the splendour of the parhelion. Some of the circles almost equalled in their colours the brilliancy of the rainbow; a grand arch resembling which, was at the same time displayed, in the opposite quarter. The other two instances occurred on the passage. The one, when outward bound, April 14. 1807, latitude 64° or 65°, consisted of several parhelia, which, accompanied by coloured circles and arcs of circles, and succeeded by a lunar halo, together with the aurora borealis, proved the harbingers of a tremendous tempest. The last phenomenon of this kind which I saw, appeared on the passage homeward, in July 1811. It consisted of a large circle of luminous whiteness, passing through the centre of the sun, in a direction nearly parallel to the horizon, intersected in various places with coloured circles of smal-

2

[page] 393

ler dimensions. At two of the intersections of the coloured with the white circle, were exhibited brilliant parhelia of an irregular form.

Huygens accounts for these phenomena, on the supposition that the sun's rays are refracted by cylindrical hail. It is, however, probable, that such a form of hail does not occur in nature, though snow or hail of a prismatic or spicular form is not uncommon in the polar regions. These prisms or spiculsæ are so slender, that they assume the appearance of white hair chopped into portions of one-twentieth to one-fourth of an inch in length. They fall most frequently when the temperature is about the freezing point, and sometimes in great profusion.

Several appearances resembling the rainbow, produced by the refraction and reflection of the sun's rays, in particles of congealed vapour, have been observed. On the 5th of June 1817, in particular, a beautiful iris was produced in a snow-shower; and on the 1st of June in the same year, in latitude 78° 29′, a similar arch was impressed on a shower of a kind of frozen fog. The colours, however, were not so brilliant as those of the rainbow, and the arch was much broader. The chord of this arch at midday, measured 50°, and its versed sine or altitude 9°.

The rainbow itself is an appearance so common, that there is no need of dwelling upon it. The

[page] 394

fog-bow, or rather fog-circle, is, on the contrary, more rarely observed, and is consequently entitled to some of our attention. The intense fogs which prevail in the polar seas, at certain seasons, occasionally rest upon the surface of the water, and reach only to an inconsiderable height. At such times, though objects situated on the water can scarcely be discerned at the distance of 100 yards, yet the sun will be visible and effulgent. Under such circumstances, on the 19th of July 1813, being at the top-mast-head, I observed a beautiful circle of about 30° diameter, with bands of vivid colours, depicted on the fog. The centre of the circle was in a line drawn from the sun through the point of vision, until it met the visible vapour in a situation exactly opposite the sun. The lower part of the circle descended beneath my feet to the side of the ship; and although it could not be an hundred feet from the eye, it was perfect, and the colours distinct. The centre of the coloured circle was distinguished by my own shadow, the head of which enveloped by a halo, was most conspicuously pourtrayed. The halo or glory was evidently impressed on the fog, but the figure appeared to be a shadow on the water, the different parts of which became obscure in proportion to their remoteness from the head, so that the lower extremities were not perceptible. I remained a long time contemplating the beautiful phenomenon before me. Notwithstanding the sun was

[page] 395

brilliant and warm, the fog was uncommonly dense beneath. The sea and ice, within 60 yards of the ship, could scarcely be distinguished. The prospect thus circumscribed, served to fix the attention more closely on the only interesting object in sight, whose radiance and harmony of colouring, added to the singular appearance of my own image, were productive of sensations of admiration and delight.

SECT. VI.

Observations on the Winds of the Polar Regions, with some Notices respecting Meteors not aqueous.

IN my researches on the phenomena of the Greenland atmosphere, I have not attempted either to establish any particular theory, or to frame a new one; but have principally devoted my attention to the object of forming such a combination of facts as may be applied with advantage by those naturalists who engage in the arduous task of generalizing the phenomena of nature. Excepting where my observations happen to afford an illustration of some popular or ingenious opinion, I have generally avoided theories and speculations, contenting myself with stating the plain matter of fact. At the same

[page] 396

time, I have been careful in mentioning every little particular which has come under my own notice, that my researches may in some degree compensate for that great deficiency of observations in the polar regions, which has hitherto rendered the natural history of this part of the world so incomplete.

Respecting atmospheric temperature and pressure, I have been enabled to offer the result of several years observations, which, from the perfect nature of the instruments employed in the investigation, may be received without reserve. In the phenomena of the Winds, however, which I am now about to describe, I cannot be so precise; being able to give a correct idea only of their peculiarities and direction, whilst their relative force, founded on conjecture, I am unable to express otherwise than in the phraseology of the mariner, which, it must be allowed, is somewhat ambiguous*.

In proportion as we recede from the Equator, we find the winds become more variable, irregular, and partial. In the torrid zone, the trade-winds blow with striking regularity, and flow in a similar di-

* The varieties and gradations of the force of the Winds, may be comprised under the following designations: Calm, inclinable to calm, light air, gentle breeze, moderate breeze, brisk breeze, fresh breeze, strong breeze, brisk gale, fresh gale, strong gale, hard gale, very hard gale, excessive hard gale, hurricane.

[page] 397

rection across a great portion of the circumference of the globe. In temperate climates, the winds are capricious, and, if we except forcible gales, are in general local. A very little attention, indeed, will discover, that at certain seasons the wind blows from some particular quarter more than any other, though, in the same seasons, winds of various degrees of force and generality are observed to occur in every point of the compass. Advancing towards the polar regions, we find the irregularities of the winds increased, and their locality more striking:—storms and calms repeatedly alternate, without warning or progression;—forcible winds blow in one place, when at the distance of a few leagues, gentle breezes prevail;—a storm from the south, on one hand, exhausts its impetuosity upon the gentle breeze, blowing from off the ice, on the other, without prevailing in the least;—ships within the circle of the horizon may be seen enduring every variety of wind and weather at the same moment; some under close-reefed topsails, labouring under the force of a storm; some becalmed and tossing about by the violence of the waves; and others plying under gentle breezes, from quarters as diverse as the cardinal points. The cause of some of these phenomena, has, in the last chapter, been referred to the frigorific influences of the ice, the accuracy of which opinion, experience and observation confirm.

[page] 398

These irregularities in the arctic winds, will be now more particularly noticed, beginning with the phenomena attendant on sudden storms. The most general preliminaries to such are, perfect calm; curiously variable breezes with strong squalls; singular agitation of the sea; together with thick snow, which often changes from flakes to powder, and falls in such profusion as to occasion an astonishing gloominess and obscurity in the atmosphere. If the snow clear away, the gale is often at hand, whilst a luminousness on the horizon, resembling the ice-blink, sometimes points out its direction, and a noise in the upper regions of the air announces its immediate approach. As these appearances are subject to some variety, they may be more clearly explained by reference to a few of the most striking instances I have observed, in which the value of the barometer, studied in connection with the thermometer, in this variable and occasionally tempestuous climate, will be satisfactorily proved.

In the evening of the 5th of April 1811, latitude 70° 49′ N., and longitude 7° 15′ E., the wind blew a fresh gale from the northward, and the barometer which had been stationary for 35 hours, stood at 29.88 inches. At noon, on the following day, we had a moderate breeze of wind from the north-west, which, towards evening, increased to a fresh gale, exceedingly variable and squally, accompanied by thick showers of flaky snow. At 9 A. M., the ther-

[page] 399

mometer stood at 10°, at 4 P. M., it had risen to 17°, and at 6 P. M. to 27°. This remarkable rise, of 17° of temperature in nine hours, indicated a southerly or easterly wind, and, because the barometer had fallen to 29.50, a severe storm was expected. Since the barometer stands highest on easterly winds, had it remained stationary, we should have expected a storm, on the veering of the wind from the N. W. to the opposite quarter; but, when this change was preceded by a fall of near four-tenths of an inch in the column of mercury, a violent gale might be anticipated.

I now walked the deck somewhat alarmed at the awful appearance of the sky, in the short intervals of the showers. At one time, a luminousness resembling the ice-blink, appeared in the horizon, extending from the N.N.E. to the E.S.E*. It did not, however, proceed from any ice, as I was afterwards perfectly satisfied; neither was it likely to arise from the effects of the sun, as it was in the western quarter.

* A few weeks afterwards, when mentioning this circumstance to an old Greenland commander, he told me he had seen the phenomenon I described, and always considered it as the prognostic of a storm, while the position of the luminousness pointed out the quarter from whence the wind would commence.

[page] 400

In the midst of a thick shower, the snow was observed to clear away to leeward, which warned me of an approaching shift of wind. Immediately, all hands were ordered on deck, to attend the sails, and every man at his station awaited the event. In about ten minutes the sails gave a violent shake, and were the next instant taken flat aback. The wind, though blowing a fresh gale, veered in a moment from N. N. W. to E. S. E. We steered by the wind, after reefing sails, about an hour and a half to the north-eastward, when the snow began to abate, but the wind of a sudden became so violent, that the utmost exertions of all the crew were but just sufficient to prevent the sails from blowing to pieces. At length, all was made snug; a close-reefed main-topsail, and storm try-sail, were alone exposed to the fury of the tempest. On the second day of the storm's continuance, a heavy sea struck the ship, and with dreadful violence mounted the deck; it had nearly precipitated a boat suspended from the weather quarter, over the rail,—it lifted and removed an eighteen pounder carronade;— filled two boats with water,— and stove or washed away the whole of the bulwark, fore and aft.

During the whole of this gale, which lasted three days, the barometer remained perfectly stationary.

On May 17. 1812, lat. 76°. 7′ long. 9½° E. the ship which I commanded was immured among ice, and the wind blew a hard gale from the N. N. W.

[page] 401

The day following it subsided, and a moderate breeze prevailed, veering from N. N. W., gradually to W., S., E., and finally settling again at N. N. W., after touching on every point of the compass. The barometer, meanwhile, was depressed. In the evening it was nearly calm. While we were in the act of towing the ship through a narrow opening between two floes, a heavy shower was observed in the N. W., advancing towards the ship. On its approach, the vane at the mast-head whirled round, the sails were violently shaken, and in a moment the snow enveloped the ship in obscurity, and a violent storm of wind dashed her, spite of every exertion, stern first, against a floe of ice which she was in the act of doubling. The concussion, though violent, was prevented, by the prompt activity of the sailors, in getting out a rope to one of the adjoining sheets of ice, from producing any particular injury. After enduring considerable pressure from the two floes, which, at the same instant, collapsed, we were enabled to make our escape, from a situation of the most perilous nature, and happily without any serious damage being sustained by the ship.

May the 10th 1813, the barometer indicated a storm; and the singular appearance of the atmosphere strengthened the indication. After twelve or eighteen hours of calm and variable weather, occasioned evidently by conflicting winds, a sudden and impetuous storm arose, which continued with little intermission for six days.

VOL. I. C c

[page] 402

The approach of sudden storms, it has been observed, is sometimes announced by a noise in the the air. My Father once removed his ship from a most dangerous bight in the main ice, where she would probably have been lost, had she remained a few minutes longer, in consequence of his having heard the rushing of a storm in the air, when at the mast-head. Before the ship was out of danger, a heavy gale commenced; but the sails being set, and the ship under command, she was extricated from the perilous situation. From this circumstance, he imagines, that sudden storms frequently commence at some height in the atmosphere, and gradually descend to the surface.

A phenomenon of a description similar to that of sudden storms, and almost equally common, is intermitting gales. The nature of these winds will be best explained, by mentioning two or three instances.

April the 22d 1814, latitude 73° 29′, we had intermitting gales, snow-showers and high sea. The squalls continued from five minutes to half an hour at a time; and the intervals of calm weather were a little longer. During the squalls, the ship could only bear close-reefed topsails and courses; but in the intervals she might have carried royals. This kind of weather prevailed from 8 A. M. until 3 P. M., when, in a shower of snow, a sudden calm occurred and continued for an hour. The gale then sudden-

[page] 403

ly recommenced with increased severity. At 9 P. M. the wind veered at once from N. N. W. to E. N. E., and then subsided. From 9 to 12 P. M., a thickness of six inches of snow fell upon the deck.

The morning of the 18th of April 1815, in the 78th degree of latitude, near Spitzbergen, was beautifully clear and serene. At 11 A. M. clouds began to obscure the face of the sky, and soon afterwards much snow fell. In the evening we experienced fresh gales from two or three quarters, with intervals of calms, in the space of an hour. North, east, and south gales, alternately prevailed, in rapid but irregular succession, during several hours. The winds not being dangerous, the appearance was uncommonly interesting.

Variable winds, and local or partial winds, are common in all temperate, and in some of the warmer climates; but not in that striking degree in which they occur in the frigid zone. The winds, indeed, among ice, are generally unsteady in their direction, and attended with strong gusts or squalls, particularly in very cold weather, and towards the termination of a storm. This variableness being the effect of the unequal temperature of the ice and water, is curious; but the phenomenon that is most calculated to excite surprise is, that several distinct, and even opposite winds, with the force, in many instances, of a fresh gale, will occasionally prevail at the same moment of time, within the range of the

C c 2

[page] 404

horizon. The situation in which this circumstance occurs, would appear to be the point where conflicting winds contend for the superiority; and as in some instances their forces are effectually balanced, the winds which simultaneously blow from the southward and northward, or from the eastward and westward, have their energies almost destroyed at the place of combination. Thus, it sometimes happens, that ships within sight of each other, will, at the same period of time, experience every variety of weather, from calm to storm, from fair weather to thickest snow, together with several distinct and contrary currents of wind. An instance or two may not be uninteresting.

On the morning of the 30th of April 1810, the ship Resolution, in which I served in the capacity of chief mate and harpooner, was, during thick showers of snow, sailing by the edge of a stream of ice, with the wind from the north-westward. About 10 A. M. the snow abated, and several ships were seen within the distance of three or four miles. As all of these ships were sailing "on a wind," it was easy to ascertain the direction of the wind where they were, and curious to observe its variableness. Two ships bearing north-east from us, had the wind at N. E.; two bearing east, at E. or E. N. E.; two bearing S. E., had the wind at S. E.; while with us, it blew from the N. W. In each of these situations a fresh breeze prevailed; but in some situations,

[page] 405

where there happened to be no ships, there appeared to be no wind at all. The clouds above us at the time, were constantly changing their forms. Showers of snow were seen in various places at a distance.

Another instance occurred also within my own observation, in April 1813. The crew of the ship Esk, under my command, were engaged in pursuit of some whales, near the edge of the main western ice, in latitude 80° 7′, during which the ship was laid-to, near the scene of the chace. In the course of the day, we had winds from every point of the compass, and with every degree of force from storm to calm. While a gentle breeze of wind from the N. prevailed with us, a heavy swell from the S. S. E. came on, and a dense black cloud appeared in the southern horizon, which rapidly arose into the zenith, and shrouded one-half of the heavens. The commixture of this dense air with the cold wind from the N., produced a copious discharge of snow. When the snow ceased, though we were nearly becalmed, we observed several ships a few miles to the south-eastward, under close-reefed topsails, having evidently a gale of wind blowing in the direction of the swell. About two hours afterwards, the southerly wind reached us, and, as we stood to the eastward, gradually increased to a gale. On returning towards the ice, however, at 5 P. M., the wind again subsided, so that when we came within four or five miles of it, the sky cleared, and we were again becalmed.

[page] 406

From the clear atmosphere to the northward and westward, and the dense sky to the southward and eastward, with the heavy swell from the S. S. E., it was evident that we were between two winds;— a southerly storm to the southward of us, and a northerly breeze to the northward. At seven P. M. of the same day, a north-east wind commenced, and soon blew a tremendous storm. All the previous winds had been partial; this was general, and extended several degrees of latitude to the southward. This storm was particularly predicted by the barometer and thermometer; the mercury in the former, having fallen from 29.74 to 28.98; and in the latter from 30° to 12°, in about twelve hours.

Instances of local storms are not uncommon in temperate climates; but, in the arctic regions, they are frequent and striking. Their locality is such, that a calm may occur when a storm is expected, and actually does prevail at a short distance; so that the indications of the barometer may appear to be erroneous. In such cases, however, the reality of the storm is often proved by the agitation of the sea. Swells from various quarters make their appearance, and frequently prevail at the same time.

My Father, whose opportunities of observation have been very numerous, relates the following instance of the locality of a storm. When commanding the ship Henrietta, he was on one occasion navigating the Greenland Sea, during a tedious gale

[page] 407

of wind, accompanied with snowy weather. As the wind began to abate, a ship appeared in sight, under all sails, and presently came up with the Henrietta. The master hailed, and inquired what had happened that my Father's ship was under close-reefed topsail in such moderate weather. On being told that a storm had just subsided, he declared that he knew nothing of it: he observed, indeed, a swell, and noticed a black cloud a-head of his ship, that seemed to advance before him, until he was overshadowed with it, a little while before he overtook the Henrietta; but he had had fine weather and light winds the whole day.

The last example of local storms that I shall give, occurred in the year 1817. At noon of the 4th of May, the Esk, under my command, was in latitude 78° 55′, near the ice, with a brisk breeze of wind from the E. S. E. In the evening we stood to the southward, experienced a considerable increase of wind, and at midnight tacked. We then steered under a brisk sail to the N. E., as high as latitude 80° 10′, finding less wind and clearer sky as we went to the northward; while dense clouds appeared in the southern quarter, and a heavy swell from the same direction pursued us. The wind was light in the evening of the 5th; tacked at the edge of the northern ice, and returned to the south-westward. During the whole of the next day, we continued our course, under all sails, having a fresh breeze of wind at

[page] 408

S. E., heavy southerly swell, and a constant fall of snow, consisting of the most beautiful crystals I ever saw. The day following, we joined several ships, when the weather was calm and the sea fallen. We now were informed, that, while we enjoyed fine weather in the latitude of 80°, the ships in the 79th degree of latitude, during two days, had experienced a most tremendous storm; in consequence of which, some whales that had been killed before the gale came on, were lost, and four ships that were driven into the ice, were wreeked.

It is almost needless to allude to the sudden gusts and various currents of wind which occur at some elevation in the atmosphere, since they are common to all climates. As, however, it is connected with this part of my subject, it may not be amiss to quote a single instance. On a particularly fine day, my Father having landed on the northern part of Charles' Island, incited by the same curiosity which led him on shore, ascended, though not without great difficulty and fatigue, a considerable elevation, the summit of which was not broader than a common table, and which shelved on one side as steep as the roof of a house, and on the other formed a mural precipice. Engaged in admiring the extensive prospect from an eminence of about 2000 feet, he scarcely noticed the advance of a very small cloud. Its rapid approach and peculiar form, (having somewhat the appearance of a hand,) at length excited his at-

[page] 409

tention; and, when it reached the place where he was seated, in a calm air, a torrent of wind assailed him with such violence, that he was obliged to throw himself on his body, and stick his hands and feet in the snow, to prevent himself from being hurled over the tremendous slope which threatened his instant destruction. The cloud having passed, the air, to his great satisfaction, again became calm, when he immediately descended, by sliding down the surface of snow, and in a few minutes reached the base of the mountain in safety.

The course of the seasons, as relates to prevailing winds, is as follows. In the spring, N., N. E. and E. winds are frequent, with severe storms from these and other quarters. The storms from the N. E., E. and S. E. are generally the most violent. When they occur in March and April, they frequently continue without intermission for two or three successive days, and rarely subside until the wind veers round to the N. or N. W. Storms, in the spring of the year, blowing from the S. E., generally change, before they abate, to the E., N. E, N. and N. W.; but storms commencing at S. W. or S. usually veer before they subside, in the contrary direction towards the N. W., and sometimes continue changing until their strength is spent in the N. or N. E. quarter. A storm beginning to blow from the western quarter, seldom continues long; when it

[page] 410

blows hard, it commonly veers to the N. or N. E.; and it is observable, that a very hard southerly or easterly gale is frequently succeeded, within a few days, by another from the opposite quarter.

With the advance of the month of May, storms become less frequent, and the weather becomes sensibly better. The winds then begin to blow more frequently from the N. W. In June, the most common winds are N. and N. W., S. and S. W.; and in July south and south-westerly winds prevail. At this season, calms or very light winds also become frequent, and continue sometimes for several days together. In high northern latitudes, however, very heavy storms from the southward occur in July, and blow for thirty or forty hours at a time. Such storms are common about Hakluyt's Headland, when, at the same time, they are not felt to the southward of the Foreland. In August, north-east winds begin again to prevail.

In one of my Father's journals, appear the following remarks on this subject. "For sixteen out of twenty-two years, in which I have successively visited the Greenland Seas, the wind, during the months of April and May, has almost always blown from the N., N. E., E. and E. S. E., between the latitude of 74° and 81° N.; but very rarely from the westward, until about the middle of June, when winds from the W. and N. W. mostly occur*."

* These directions are per compass; all the others are referable to the true meridian.

[page] 411

In the frigid zone in general, as well as in icy regions without the Arctic Circle, winds blowing from the ice towards the open sea, are the most prevalent. In Hudson's Bay, westerly winds blow for three-fourths of the year*; at Kamtchatka the prevailing winds are from the westward †; in Greenland northerly winds occur during seven months in the winter ‡; and in a similar proportion nearly in Spitzbergen, Jan Mayen, and Nova Zembla, as far as the observations of the adventurers who have occasionally wintered in these desolate countries can testify.

In the Appendix, (No. II. Table A.) the mean duration of different winds is partly determined in the horizontal columns of "General Mean." The following Table shows the duration in days of each wind, and the number of stormy days in April, on an average of seven years; in May on an average of twelve years; in June on an average of ten years; and in July on an average of six years.

N. N. E E. S. E S. S. W. W. N. W. Variable. Calm. Stormy Days.
April, 6.0 4.4 3.0 1.6 3.0 2.1 2.4 3.6 2.0 1.9 11.0
May, 7.4 3.7 2.0 2.3 2.1 1.6 2.1 5.6 2.4 1.8 6.1
June, 5.1 1.9 1.4 2.7 4.3 3.2 1.8 3.9 3.2 2.5 3.3
July, 2.7 2.1 1.7 1.5 5.5 5.3 2.5 2.6 3.1 4.0 3.1

* PENNANT'S Arctic Zoology, Supplement, p. 41.

† Idem, Arctic Zoology, cxiii.

‡ Middleton's Vindication, p. 201.

[page] 412

The south-westerly and southerly storms of the autumn blow with particular violence, not only about Hakluyt's Headland in Spitzbergen, but in most other countries in high northern latitudes. In West Greenland, it is observed by CRANTZ, "when it once begins to be stormy, which happens mostly in autumn, the wind rages so vehemently, that the houses quiver and crack, the tents and lighter boats fly up into the air, and the sea-water scatters about in the land like snow dust. Nay, the Greenlanders say, that the storm rends off stones a couple of pounds weight, and mounts them in the air. If any one is obliged at such times to go out of the house to bring the boats into shelter, he must constantly lie and creep upon his belly, that the wind may not make him its sport. In summer, whirlwinds also spring up, that draw up the waters out of the sea, and turn a boat round several times. The most and fiercest storms rise in the south, and take a compass round to north, where they again subside and terminate in clear weather. At such times, the ice in the bays is torn from its bed, and hastens into the sea in heaps*."

Storms as tremendous as those described by Crantz, also occur in Iceland. Some facts of this nature have been given by Sir GEORGE MACKENZIE. On the 6th of November 1809, a most awful gale

* History of Greenland, vol. i. p. 47.

[page] 413

of wind occurred in Iceland, which blew from the north during the whole twenty-four hours. The country, to an extent of several miles from the shore, was covered with salt-water driven from the sea in the form of rain; boats on the beach were taken up into the air, and dashed to pieces*.

When the countries of temperate climates suffer under tempests in frequent succession, the polar regions enjoy a comparative tranquillity. After the autumn gales have passed, a series of calm weather, attended with severe frost, frequently succeeds. Crantz makes the general remark, that "in Disco it is often for two or three months constantly calm, and the air clear, though filled with vapours." So striking, indeed, is the stillness of the northern winter, and even that of Russia, in parts which merely border on the frigid zone, that Dr Guthrie, in his Dissertation on the Climate of Russia, after observing, that hail is a rare appearance in the winter season, and that tempests are equally uncommon, proceeds to remark, that nature seems "to have studied a perfect equality in the distribution of her favours, as it is only the parts of the earth which most enjoy the kindly influences of the sun, that suffer by the effects of its superior heat; so that if the atmosphere of the north is not so genial as that of the south, at least it remains perfectly quiet and serene,

* Travels in Iceland during the Summer of 1810.

[page] 414

without threatening destruction to man, and the product of his industry, as in what are commonly called happier climates*."

The reciprocal effects of the ice, sea, land, and wind, on each other, have, in different places of this work, been alluded to. One fact which applies in this place, yet remains to be noticed.

A striking and very singular effect of the land on the wind, is frequently observed in Davis' Strait. The island of Disco, lying in latitude 69° 40′ and longitude 54° 30′ W., presents towards the sea, on the west side, a considerable cliff, with mountainous land beyond it. In the season corresponding with our summer, the sea near it is commonly open. At this time, when ships lying in the middle of Davis' Strait, have a hard gale of wind blowing from the west, on steering towards this island, which is then a lee shore, they gradually find the force of the wind abate, until when come within a certain distance of the land, it subsides almost into a calm! As this circumstance is said invariably to occur, ships navigating in Davis' Strait, when oppressed by the violence of the westerly winds, are generally enabled to attain a situation in which the wind blows with such a diminished degree of force, as may best suit their convenience. Whether this effect is produced by the height of the land, or is the effect of the repul-

* Edin. Phil. Trans., vol. ii.

[page] 415

sion of an off-land wind, I am not prepared to decide.

The principal meteors, not being of the aqueous kind, that remain to be considered, are Lightning and the Aurora borealis. As we approach the Pole, the former phenomenon becomes more rare, and the latter more common. Lightning, indeed, is seldom seen to the northward of the arctic circle; and when it does occur, is almost never accompanied by thunder. In Hudson's Bay, Ellis, James, Hudson, and other voyagers, have observed heavy storms of thunder and lightning; but in West Greenland, where, according to Crantz, a thunder cloud sometimes gathers, and emits flashes of lightning, thunder seldom occurs; "and when something like it is heard, one cannot decide whether the sound proceeds from a distant thunder clap, or from the crack of ice and stones rending and precipitating from the rocks." In Spitzbergen, neither thunder nor lightning has, I believe, ever been observed. For my own part, I have never seen lightning to the northward of latitude 65°, and only in two instances, when at any considerable distance from land. July the 25th 1815, latitude 63° longitude 0° 55′ W., lightning was seen in the western quarter; and on the 4th of April in the same year, much lightning with thunder, occurred in the latitude of 65° and longitude 0°10′W. In no other cases have I seen

3

[page] 416

lightning at sea, excepting when within 20 or 30 leagues of land.

The aurora borealis, on the contrary, occurs independent of land and of cold, becoming more frequent in its appearance as we approach the Pole, and enlivening by its brilliancy, and peculiar grandeur, the tedious gloom of the long winter's nights. This phenomenon having been described by many authors, some of whom have exhausted the powers of language in the elegance of their representations, renders it unnecessary for me to attempt any general description of this interesting spectacle. I shall, therefore, confine my remarks to a few particulars.

This appearance, though not very frequently seen in Britain, is very common as far south as Shetland and Feroe. In Iceland, and other countries bordering on the arctic circle, the northern lights occur almost every clear night during the winter. But in summer, the season in which I have been in the habit of visiting the polar seas, they can seldom be seen, on account of the continual presence of the sun. On the passage from England to Spitzbergen, indeed, they occur occasionally; but the general obscurity of the atmosphere in the spring of the year, prevents their frequent exhibition. It may not be altogether uninteresting, to give a table of the state of the weather, on the different occasions on which I have observed them.

3

[page] 417

Table of the State of the Weather when the Aurora Borealis was seen.

Year. Month & Day. Latitude. Longitude. Barometer. Therm. Winds. Weather. Remarks.
1807, April 15. 66.10 6°.17′ W 29.64 25 E. erly Fine. mod. Bril. aur; fol. by a trem. storm
1809, Mar. 19. 58.52 1.20 30.09 N W Fine, clear Slight aur; fine weath. contin.
1810, April 4. 71.30 3.0 E SE Moderate Consid. aur; follow, by storm
1811, Mar.28 66.52 2.0 30.40 16 W. erly Boisterous Bril. aur.; fol. by change. wea.
— 29. 67.20 3.10 30.31 20 E. erly Variable Slight aur.; fine weath. fol.
— 30. 68.20 4.10 30.32 16 E N E Fine Bril. aur.; fine weather cont.
— 31. 68.50 4.0 30.20 16 N N W Fine & clear Ditto ditto
1815, April 5. 67.40 2.10 29.26 37 E b S Boisterous Sight aur.; windy weath. cont.
— 6. 69.22 3.45 29.18 36 E Ditto Considerable aur.; ditto
— 7. 70.10 4.40 29.82 30 Calm Variable Bril. aur.; followed by storm
1817, — 5. Zet land. 30.62 46 N Fine Slight aur.; fine weath. cont.
— 8. 65.6 1.45 29.45 28 N. erly Stromy Bright aur.; storm increasd
1818, — 22. 62.10 0.30 W 29.72 42 E. erly Windy Slight aur.; squally wea. fol.
— 23. 62.16 2.10 E 29.70 40 N b W Windy Bright aur.; do. with high sea

Among unenlightened nations, the appearance of the northern lights is generally associated with some curious or absurd superstition. Some uncivilized people regard them as portending national calamities; others consider them as the effect of the merriments of the dead*, or attribute them to causes equally ridiculous.

However vain the notions of savage nations may be, as to the causes or effects of the northern lights, there is reason to believe that their connection with other atmospheric phenomena is such, that their occurrence, under certain circumstances or appearances, is portentous. In several of the instances in the preceding Table, stormy weather followed the appearance of the brilliant aurora; and one of the

* Robson's Account of Six Years residence in Hudson's Bay. p. 49.

VOL. I. D d

[page] 418

most tremendous storms I was ever exposed to, succeeded a splendid exhibition of the northern lights. From an intelligent old man, one of the Lerwick pilots, I received the following information on the connection supposed to exist between certain appearances of the northern lights, and the weather. When seen in the north-west quarter, resting near the horizon, without extending their rays to the zenith, they are (in winter) considered indicative of calm frosty weather. When they appear in brilliant display, extending towards the south-west, a gale of wind is to be expected; or, extending towards the south-east, a southerly gale, with rain or sleet; and, when they are seen at a considerable altitude above the horizon, having a red or copper colour, and shooting their rays into the zenith, they are supposed to be indicative of a violent storm. The first and the last of these observations correspond with general experience; but of the accuracy of the intermediate opinion, I have had no opportunity of judging. Neither have I had opportunity of observing any agitation of the magnetic needle, or any peculiarities of an electrical nature, in the lower atmosphere, during the prevalence of the northern lights. These are subjects which I yet hope to have the means of investigating.

[page] 419

SECT. VII.

Aqueous Meteors, including Observations on Clouds, Rain, Hail, Snow, Frost-rime, Hoarfrost and Fog.

VERY little clear weather occurs in the Greenland Seas; for often when the atmosphere is free from any visible vapour on the land, at sea it is obscured by frost-rime in the spring of the year, and by clouds or fog in the summer; so that scarcely one-twentieth of the season devoted to the whale-fishery can be said to consist of clear weather.

The clouds most generally consist of a dense stratum of obscurity, composed of irregular compact patches, covering the whole expanse of the heavens. The cirrus, cirro-cumulus, and cirro-stratus, of Howard's nomenclature, are occasionally distinct; the nimbus is partly formed, but never complete; and the grandeur of the cumulus or thunder-cloud, is never seen, unless it be on the land. A cloud bearing some resemblance to the cumulus, sometimes appears near the horizon: this, when partly intercepted by the horizon, has an appearance so very similar to that of the mountains of Spitzbergen, that it is often mistaken for land. In the atmosphere over the coasts of Greenland and Spitzbergen, where the air is greatly warmed by the con-

D d 2

[page] 420

centration and reflection of the sun's rays in the sheltered valleys, a small imperfect cumulus is sometimes exhibited. The most common definable cloud seen at sea, is a particular modification, somewhat resembling the cirro-stratus, consisting of large patches of cloud arranged in horizontal strata, and enlightened by the sun on one edge of each stratum.

Rain is a meteor too well known to need any description; but the causes which operate so as to produce it, under the great variety of circumstances in which it occurs, are not altogether understood. The known agents made use of, in the economy of Nature, for the production of rain, are changes of temperature and electricity. The latter principle is supposed to act most powerfully in the production of thunder showers; in which case it is not unlikely but a portion of the air of the atmosphere is, by the passing of the lightning from one cloud to another, converted into water. The former seems to be the chief agent in the colder regions of the globe, where electricity is either more equal in its distribution, or not so active in its operations, as in the warmer climates. Were the capability of the atmosphere for absorbing moisture, the same at all temperatures, or were its capability increased in a similar ratio with the increase of heat, no change, however great, produced by the admixture of two streams of air of different temperatures, could occa-

[page] 421

sion the precipitation of any rain. But, from the beautiful theory of the late Dr James Hutton, supported by the able and ingenious researches of Professor Leslie, it appears, that "while the temperature advances uniformly in arithmetical progression, the dissolving power which this communicates to the air, mounts with the accelerating rapidity of a geometrical series*;" and this, in such a ratio, that the "air has its dryness doubled at each rise of temperature answering to fifteen centesimal degrees," or twenty-seven of Fahrenheit †. Hence, "whatever be the actual condition of a mass of air, there must always exist some temperature at which it would become perfectly damp ‡;" and hence, whenever two streams of air, saturated with moisture, of different temperatures, are mixed together, or brush against one another, in the form of different currents of wind, there must always be a quantity of moisture precipitated. For, if two masses of air of different temperatures, but equal in quantity, and both saturated with moisture, were mixed together, the resulting temperature would be nearly the mean of the two; but, at that temperature, the capacity of air for moisture, being less than the quantity contained in the two commixed masses,

* LESLIE;—" A Short Account of Experiments and Instruments, depending on the relations of Air to Heat and Moisture," p. 123.

† Idem, p. 122.

‡ Idem, p. 123.

[page] 422

the surplus must be deposited. By the help of the following Table, derived from measurements of the curve representing the dissolving power of the air, this subject may be more familiarly illustrated*.

Temp. of the Air by Fahrenh. Dissolving Power. Temp. of the Air. Dissolving Power Temp. of the Air. Dissolving Power. Temp. of the Air. Dissolving Power. Temp. of the Air. Dissolving Power.
—24° 0.55 +3° 1.08 30° 2.16° 57° 4.33 84° 8.64
—21 0.60 6 1.16 33 2.34 60 4.68 87 9.33
— 18 0.65 9 1.25 36 2.53 63 5.06 90 10.07
—15 0.70 12 1.35 39 2.73 66 5.47 93 10.87
—12 0.75 15 1.46 42 2.95 69 5.91 96 11.74
— 9 0.81 18 1.58 45 3.18 72 6.38 99 12.68
— 6 0.87 21 1.71 48 3.43 75 6.88 102 13.70
— 3 0.93 24 1.85 51 3.70 78 7.42 105 14.81
0 1.00 27 2.00 54 4.00 81 8.00 108 16.00

Now, a mass of air at temperature zero, can support, it appears, about one three hundred and sixty-fifth part of its weight of moisture; or a mass of air 365 lb. in weight, can contain, when saturated at temperature 0°, 1 lb. of water; at temperature

* This Table, though very nearly correct, is yet but an approximation. It, however, serves every purpose of illustration. What is here called the dissolving power of the air, is perhaps, correctly speaking, the dissolving power of caloric, the water itself that is evaporated being converted into an elastic vapour, by its combination with the matter of heat. This vapour forms a part of the air of the atmosphere. Decrease of atmospheric pressure and increase of temperature, accelerate its formation.

[page] 423

27°, 2 lb.; at temperature 54°, 4 lb.; at temperature 81°, 8 lb. and so on. As such, the numbers in the second column of the above Table, show the quantity of water in pounds which 365 lb. of air can contain at any temperature between — 24° and 108°. Suppose, then, for example, two masses of air of 365 lb. weight each, one of the temperature 18°, the other 36°, a case quite within the limits of probability in the polar regions, to be mixed together, the resulting temperature would be nearly the mean of the two, or 27°. But the two masses of air before commixture, if saturated, must contain respectively 1.58 lb. and 2.53 lb. of moisture, the sum of which, 4.11, exceeds by 0.11 lb. or one-ninth of a pound, the quantity of water, as shown by the Table, which twice 365 lb. of air could possibly sustain at the mean temperature of 27°. This 0.11 lb. of water must therefore be precipitated after the commixture of every 730 lb. of saturated air of the temperatures proposed. At higher temperatures, however, the precipitation must be greater; for, suppose the two assimilating streams of air to be of the temperatures 42° and 84°; then the quantity of water suspended by 365 lb. of each, would be respectively 2.95 and 8.64, amounting to 11.59 lb.; but the quantity of moisture which 730 lb. of air could at most support, at the mean temperature 63°, would be only 10.12 lb., so that the excess 1.47 lb. must be precipitated.

[page] 424

I merely give these illustrations, for the sake of those readers who are not acquainted with the writings of Dr Hutton and Professor Leslie on this subject; considering them, at the same time, the more necessary, as this ingenious theory of rain, of which I have attempted a brief explanation, is referred to in different parts of this volume.

Rain is by no means common in the polar countries, excepting in the months of July and August, and then only with southerly or westerly winds. During all seasons of the year, however, with strong gales blowing from a southern climate, rain is occasionally observed in situations near the edge of the ice; but snow or sleet are more common even under such circumstances; and in remote situations among ice, near the 80th parallel of latitude, rain seldom or never occurs.

Hail is a much more familiar meteor in temperate than in frigid climates. In the Greenland Sea, indeed, this aqueous concretion is very rarely seen; and if we define it as consisting of pellucid spherules of ice, generated in the atmosphere, it may be said to be unknown in very high latitudes. This fact is in favour of the electrical origin of hail, as it is well known to be common in temperate climates, where the air is in a high state of electricity, and to be the frequent concomitant of thunder and lightning. The only substance resembling hail, that is generat-

[page] 425

ed in the frigid zone, consists of a white porous spherical concretion, of a light and snowy texture.

Snow is so very common in the arctic regions, that it may be boldly stated, that in nine days out of ten, during the months of April, May and June, more or less snow falls. With southerly winds, near the borders of the ice, or in situations where humid air blowing from the sea, assimilates with a gelid breeze from the ice, the heaviest falls of snow occur. In this case, a depth of two or three inches is sometimes deposited in an hour. The thickest precipitations also frequently precede sudden storms.

The form of the particles of snow, presents an endless variety. When the temperature of the air is within a degree or two of the freezing point, and much snow falls, it frequently consists of large irregular flakes, such as are common in Britain; sometimes it exhibits small granular, or large rough white concretions; at others, it consists of white spiculæ, or flakes composed of coarse spiculæ, or rude stellated crystals, formed of visible grains. But in severe frosts, though the sky appears perfectly clear, lamellar flakes of snow, of the most regular and beautiful forms, are always seen floating in the air, and sparkling in the sun-beams; and the snow which falls in general, is of the most elegant texture and appearance.

1

[page] 426

Snow of a reddish or brownish colour is not unfrequently seen. The brownish stain which occurs on shore, is given by an earthy substance brought from the mountains, by the streams of water derived from thawing ice and snow, or the fall of rain; the reddish colour, as far as I have observed, is given by the mute of birds; though, in the example met with by Captain Ross in Baffin's Bay, the stain appears to have been of a vegetable nature. The little auk (Alea alle), which feeds upon shrimps, is found, in some parts of the polar seas, in immense numbers. They frequently retreat to pieces of ice or surfaces of snow, and stain them all over red with their mute. Martens saw red snow in Spitzbergen, which he considered as being stained by rain-water running down by the rocks.

The extreme beauty and endless variety of the microscopic objects procured in the animal and vegetable kingdoms, are perhaps fully equalled, if not surpassed, in both the particulars of beauty and variety, by the crystals of snow. The principal configurations are the stelliform and hexagonal; though almost every shape of which, the generating angles of 60° and 120° are susceptible, may, in the course of a few years observation, be discovered. Some of the general varieties in the figures of the crystals, may be referred to the temperature of the air; but the particular and endless modifications of similar classes of crystals, can only be referred to the will and

3

[page] 427

pleasure of the Great First Cause, whose works, even the most minute and evanescent, and in regions the most remote from human observation, are altogether admirable.

The various modifications of crystals may be classed under five general kinds or genera. 1. Lamellar. 2. A lamellar or spherical nucleus, with spinous ramifications in different planes. 3. Finespiculsæ or six-sided prisms. 4. Hexagonal pyramids. 5. Spiculæ having one or both extremities affixed to the centre of a lamellar crystal.

1. Lamellar crystals. The varieties of this kind are almost infinite. They occur at all temperatures, and in the greatest abundance; and most of the specimens are extremely thin, transparent, and of an exquisitely delicate structure. They may be subdivided into several distinct species.

a. Stelliform; having six points radiating from a centre, with parallel collateral ramifications in the same plane. This species, represented in Plate VIII. Fig. 1, is the most general form met with. It varies in size from the smallest speck, to about one-third of an inch diameter. It occurs in greatest profusion when the temperature approaches the freezing point.

b. Regular hexagon. This occurs in moderate as well as in the lowest temperatures; but it becomes more delicate and thin, and diminishes in size as the cold increases. Some specimens consist of simple transparent plates, (Plate VIII. Fig. 23.)

[page] 428

others are beautifully variegated, within the perimeter, by white lines, forming smaller hexagons or other regular figures, in immense variety; Plate IX. Fig. 25, 27, 28, 36; Plate X. Fig. 49, &c. The size of this species is from the smallest visible speck to about one-tenth of an inch diameter.

c. Aggregations of hexagons. This beautiful species admits of immense variety. It occurs chiefly at low temperatures, and presents great limits of dimensions; Plate VIII. Figs. 2, 9, 10, 14, 17; and Plate IX. Figs. 29, 34, 37, 39, &c. afford examples of this species.

d. Combinations of hexagons, with radii or spines, and projecting angles. This constitutes the most extensive species in the arrangement; and affords some of the most beautiful specimens. Fig. 7, Plate VIII. is an elegant combination of spines and hexagons; and Figures 50, 55, 58, 59, 60, &c. Plate X. together with all the others distinguished by the letter s after the numbers, constitute a novel and beautiful variety, which I have only once observed. The parallel lines that appear in these figures, are not intended as shadings, but actually occurred in the crystals, though with this difference, that the lines which appear black in the plate, were all white in the originals. Figures 56, 63, 64, and 93, were opaque crystals, and were not so thin as the others.

The latter of these, as well as Fig. 94, each having twelve spines, appear to be accidental varieties, and

[page] 429

are produced probably by the correct application of two similar crystals upon one another.

2. A lamellar or spherical nucleus, with spinous ramifications in different planes.—This genus not being easily represented, is not illustrated by any figure. It consists of two or three species.

a. The fundamental figure, consisting of a lamellar erystal of any of the species above described, from the lateral and terminal planes of which arise small spines, similar to the collateral ramifications of Fig. 1. Plate VIII. These spines arise either from one or both of the lateral planes or principal surfaces, or from both lateral and terminal planes; and always maintain the usual angle of 60° with the plane from which they take their rise. The diameter of this figure sometimes exceeds the fourth of an inch. This species falls most frequently at a temperature of 20° or 25°.

b. Having a spherular nucleus, giving rise to radii in all directions. In the former species, the central figure is a transparent crystal; in this it consists of a small rough white concretion. The spines or radii are similar in both figures. The diameter of this seldom reaches a quarter of an inch. The form is echinose. This species falls when the degree of cold is near the freezing, and sometimes in rather low temperatures.

3. Fine spiculæ or six-sided prisms.—These are sometimes very delicate and crystalline; atothers white and rough. The finest specimens,

[page] 430

which resemble white hair cut into lengths not exceeding a quarter of an inch, are so small and clear, that the exact figure is not easily determined; and the larger exhibit a fibrous or prismatic structure. Some of these are occasionally the third of an inch in length. This genus is only seen when the temperature is near the freezing point. When the thermometer is about 28 degrees, the finer specimens occur; when about the freezing, the coarser appear. The latter are very common during fog showers, and appear to be composed of aggregations of the frozen particles of the fog, and to have their origin in the lower parts of the atmosphere.

4. Hexagonal pyramids.—This kind of snowcrystal I have but once seen. A variety, consisting apparently of a triangular pyramid, was observed; but whether its base was a triangular or six-sided figure, similar to No. 96. Plate XI. is doubtful. These pyramids were about the thirtieth part of an inch in height, and fell along with some other curious figures, during a fresh gale of wind from the northward, in very large quantity. Figures 44, and 47, Plate IX. represent this kind of crystal.

5. Spiculæ or prisms having one or both extremities inserted in the centre of a lamellar crystal.—This is the most singular genus I have ever seen, and has been observed but twice. It resembles a pair of wheels, united by an axletree; the wheels consisting of hexagonal or other lamellar crys-

[page] 431

tals, and the axle of a slender prism. Figure 43, 45, 46, and 48, represent this modification of snow-crystal. Figure 46, consists of but one tabular crystal and a prism; and Figure 45, of three laminae and two prisms. The length of this was one-sixth of an inch; of the other kind, from one-thirtieth to one-tenth. Some of this extraordinary figure occurred along with the last-described genus: Of which kinds, principally, a quantity of snow three or four inches in depth, once fell on the deck of the ship in which I sailed, in the course of a few hours. The temperature, when this kind of crystal fell, was in one instance 22°, and in the other 20°.

Plates VIII, IX, X, and XI. contain representations of ninety-six different snow-crystals, magnified from thirty to about four hundred times. The Italic letter following the number of the figure, refers to the second column of the annexed Table, by which, the state of the atmosphere and weather, when each crystal was observed, may be seen. The fractional number which succeeds the Italic letter, shows the diameter of the crystal in parts of an inch. The largest crystal represented was one-third of an inch diameter; the smallest one-thirty-fifth. They were all perfect figures. Many instances, it may be observed, occur of mutilated and irregular specimens; some wanting two or three radii, and others having radii of different sizes and shapes. But in low temperatures, the greatest pro-

[page] 432

portion of crystals that fall are probably perfect geometrical figures. This constant regard to equality in the form and size of the six radii of the stellates; the geometrical accuracy of the different parts of the hexagons; the beauty and precision of the internal lines of the compound figures, with the proper arrangement of any attendant ramifications, and the general completion of the regular figure,—compose one of the most interesting features in the Science of Crystallography.

[page] 433

A TABLE showing the State of the Atmosphere when each of the Figures of Snow delineated in the annexed Plates VIII, IX, X, and XI, were observed.

Date. Reference to the Plates. Thermometer. Barometer. WINDS. REMARKS.
Direction. Force.
1809, April 15. a 21 29.92 N N E Fresh gale Snow very profuse.
— — 17. b 19 29.84 N N E Fresh gale A considerable quantity of snow.
— — 29. c 19 29.63 ENE, NNE Light wind Snow profuse.
— May 1. d 12 29.68 N E Strong br. Occasional crystals deposited.
— — 2. e 10 29.84 N N E Fresh gale Delicate crystals floating in the air.
— —3. f 18 29.87 N E. erly Strong gale Snow in considerable quantity.
— —11. g 14 30.10 N N E Fresh br. Profuse in quant., accomp. by much opaque small gran. snow.
— —15. h 22 29.78 E Strong gale Ship's deck covered with these curious crystals, 3 or 4in. deep.
— —30. i 20 30.04 N E, N Fr. or str. ga. Slight showers of snow.
—June 16. k 32 29.50 [Nearly calm] Fell in great quantities.
1810, April 12. l 22 29.80 E N E Strong gale A constant light shower.
— — 14. m 16 30.08 N N E Fresh br. Small showers. Many rough cryst. formed or opaque grains.
— —20. n 21 29.72 S. erly Strong gale A moderate but continued deposition of snow.
— — 21. o 20 29.67 N E. erly Strong gale Snow in considerable quantity.
— —May 16. p 19 29.70 N. Brisk gale Small showers; delicate crystals.
1816, April 29. q 23 29.95 N N W Mod. breeze Small showers of fine crystals.
1817, May 2. r 17 29.75 N. erly Fresh gale Shower of delicate well-formed crystals.
— — 6. s 27-26 29.80 S E Fresh breeze Various and beautiful figures vastly profuse; deck of the ship covered several inches deep.

VOL. I. E e

[page] 434

Frost-rime or frost-smoke, is a meteor peculiar to those parts of the globe, where a very low temperature prevails for a considerable time. It consists of a dense frozen vapour, apparently arising out of the sea or any large sheet of water, and ascending, in high winds and turbulent seas, to the height of 80 or 100 feet; but in light breezes and smooth water, creeping along the surface. The particles of which it consists are as small as dust, and cleave to the rigging of ships, or almost any substance against which they are driven by the wind, and afford a coating of an inch or upwards in depth. These particles adhere to one another, until the windward surface of the ropes is covered; and form long fibres, somewhat of a prismatical or pyramidal shape, having their points directed towards the wind. Frost-rime adheres readily to articles of clothing; and from the circumstance of its lodging in the hair, and giving it the appearance of being powdered, the sailors humorously style it "the barber." Such of the frost-rime as is dislodged from the rigging whenever the ship is tacked, covers the deck to a considerable thickness; and when trod upon, emits an acute sound, resembling the crushing of fine particles of glass. When collected in heaps, it has the appearance of snow dust, and if dissolved, affords pure water.

Frost-rime sometimes appears at a temperature of 20° or 22°; but generally, it is not observed until

[page] 435

the cold is reduced to 14°. It is most abundant in the lowest temperatures, with a high sea and strong winds; but diminishes as the swell and wind subside, or whenever the sea begins to freeze. When the air is clear and apparently dry, it commences at a higher temperature than when it is dark and damp. Indeed, this meteor is most common when the air is free from clouds. Hence, though it sometimes occasions such an obscurity in the lower atmosphere, that objects near the surface of the water cannot be seen at the distance of 100 yards; yet, at the masthead, where the observer is lifted above the mist, ships can be distinguished at the distance of five or six miles, and high land at the distance of ten or fifteen leagues; and when the frost-rime does not rise above forty or fifty feet, objects on the water, such as ice, may be discovered three or four miles off, though they may be invisible from the deck when within a furlong.

The cause of this phenomenon may, perhaps, be similar to that producing rain, as it can be very well explained on Dr Hutton's theory, already described. The wind that brushes over the surface of the water, and is, by the pressure of the atmosphere, brought into immediate contact, being much colder than the sea, must receive heat from it, and have its temperature somewhat elevated. This increase of temperature, enables it to abstract some moisture from the sea, and being thus rendered specifically lighter,

E e 2

[page] 436

it exchanges situations with the stratum of air immediately above it, and rises in the atmosphere until it gets cooled down, by admixture with other air to the common temperature. But its capacity for moisture diminishing more rapidly than its temperature, prevents it, on Dr Hutton's principle, from sustaining the water absorbed from the surface of the sea, in consequence of which, the surplus moisture is gradually deposited, and being immediately frozen, is exhibited in the air in the form of frost-rime.

An aqueous vapour, consisting of very minute frozen particles, sometimes occupies the lowest region of the atmosphere, in both temperate and frigid climates, during frosty weather; and is deposited upon the ground, upon surfaces of ice, or almost any other substance with which it comes in contact. This vapour, which seems to be of the nature of hoar-frost, generally appears in the evening, after a bright sunshiny day. When the sun declines towards the horizon, and its rays, struggling through the obliquity of a dense atmosphere, begin to lose their power, the excess of moisture evaporated during the meridian heat, is again precipitated. The first precipitation is discovered in a slight mistiness appearing to rise from the surface of the ice: as the cold increases, this mistiness attains a greater elevation, until an obscurity, like that of frost-rime, or of a considerable fog, is produced. Such of the particles

[page] 437

as are borne by the breeze into contact with a ship's rigging, affix themselves to the windward side of the different ropes, and form a thick fringe of frozen vapour. In some states of the atmosphere, the coating of hoar-frost resembles the coating of frost-rime, consisting of an irregular fringe; but in others, every particle affixes itself in a determinate order, so that the most delicate, and in some cases the most beautiful crystals are produced. I have never, however, observed more than two different forms of these crystals; one, consisting of a combination of angular cup-like figures, inserted into one another in an herbaceous form, not unlike a species of erica or heath, was seen upon the land; the other, having the form and texture of a feather, occurred when the ship was in the midst of a compact body of ice. The circumstances under which the latter appeared were these. Ice of the field kind encompassed the ship to an extent of many leagues; the latitude was 78°9′; the longitude about 2° E.; the wind easterly. At mid-day a thermometer exposed to the sun's rays rose to 54°, while the air in the shade was only 18°. At midnight the temperature fell to 10°, and the frozen vapour made its appearance. It soon increased to the density of frost-rime, and was carried by the wind in clouds or showers. In the course of the night, the rigging of the ship was most splendidly decorated with a fringe of delicate crystals. The general form of these, was that of a feather having half of

[page] 438

the vane removed. Near the surface of the ropes, was first a small direct line of very white particles, constituting the stem or shaft of the feather; from whence, at an angle of 60 degrees, extended a collateral series of finer fibres in close and parallel order, forming the vane of the feather; and from each of these fibres in another plane, proceeded a short delicate range of spiculæ or rays, discoverable only by the help of a microscope, with which the elegant texture and systematic construction of the feather were completed. Many of these crystals, possessing a perfect arrangement of the different parts corresponding with the shaft, vane, and rachis of a feather, were upwards of an inch in length, and three-fourths of an inch in breadth. Some consisted of a single flake or feather; but many of them gave rise to other feathers, which sprung from the surface of the vane at the usual angle. There seemed to be no limit to the magnitude of these feathers, so long as the producing cause continued to operate, until their weight became so great, or the action of the wind so forcible, that they were broken off, and fell in flakes to the deck of the ship.

Whatever may be the predisposing cause of crystallization, it is clear, from these facts, that regular crystals may be formed in an aerial as well as in an aqueous menstruum; by slow and progressive additions, as well as by sudden shoots; and by a combination of visible particles, as well as by the applica-

[page] 439

tion of molecules to one another, when in a state of invisible solution. In the crystallization of water, and of many salts, an accurately formed needle or other regular figure, is consolidated by an instantaneous shoot or rapid progression through the substance of the crystallizing liquor; but the formation of hoar-frost crystals is accomplished by a slow and gradual deposition of particles, brought into contact with the crystallizing surface by the motion of the air. And it is a fact worthy of notice, that a continued accession of new particles, adds nothing to the thickness of the crystal that first appears, but merely extends its principal surface, and as it extends, completes the several arrangements of the particles corresponding with the shaft, vane, and rachis of a feather. This principle in crystallography, which tends to produce a perfect figure, and operates so beautifully in the formation of snow flakes, as to complete each of the six-sides or radii of the crystal, after the same plan and dimensions, suggested to me not only an argument for giving to the molecules of crystals a certain polarity, or attraction for inducing them to unite together by one side rather than another, but also induced an opinion, that complete figures are formed in consequence of the mutual attractions of the crystallizing integrant particles, requiring an equilibrium of weight or of attractions round the nucleus or central particle of the crystal. Thus, in the formation of snow-crystals, it appears,

[page] 440

that whatever form the first few particles that combine may assume, others, which afterwards come within their attraction, can adhere in no other than correspondent positions, until the figure is perfected by the balancing or the neutralizing of their united polarities. And as the connecting of the two poles of a magnet by a piece of iron, suppresses its power and intercepts its attraction for other iron, so, the perfecting of a snow-crystal, after a regular geometrical form, it appears, suspends the attractive property of its substance for extraneous atoms; but so long, it would seem, as one single particle is wanting, the annexed surfaces exert their attraction, until some particle comes within their influence and completes the crystal.

Fog or mist, is the last meteor that remains to be considered. This is one of the greatest annoyances that the arctic whalers have to encounter. It frequently prevails during the greater part of the month of July, and sometimes for considerable intervals in June and August. Its density is often such, that it circumscribes the prospect to an area of a few acres, not being pervious to sight at the distance of 100 yards. It frequently lies so very low, that the brightness of the sun is scarcely at all intercepted; in such cases, substances warmed by the sun's rays, give to the air immediately above them, an increased capacity for moisture, by which evapora-

[page] 441

tion goes briskly on during the densest fogs. In Newfoundland, I understand, on occasions when the sun's rays penetrate the mist, and heat the surface of the rocks, fish is frequently dried during the thickest fogs. In July 1817, latitude 74°, when the temperature of the air was 45°, Leslie's hygrometer indicated 6° of dryness, during a most intense fog; and on another foggy day, in the same month, when a temperature of 40° prevailed, from 5 to 6 degrees of dryness was indicated, in a situation on which the sun had not shone during the day. Frequently I have observed the fog to be wetting at the height of 40 or 50 feet above the surface of the sea, when, on the level of the ship's deck, about 14 feet high, there was no appearance of dampness.

Fogs are more frequent and more dense at the borders of the ice, than near the coast of Spitzbergen. They occur principally when the mercury in the thermometer is near the freezing point; but they are by no means uncommon with a temperature of 40 or 45 degrees. They are most general with south-westerly, southerly, and south-easterly winds. With northerly or north-westerly winds, they generally disperse; though, after a considerable continuance of southerly winds, they sometimes prevail for a good many hours after the wind changes to the northward. Fogs seldom occur with high winds; yet in one or two instances, I have observed them very thick even in storms. Rain generally disperses the fog; but after

[page] 442

the rain ceases, when the air is warm and damp, the fog often returns with increased density, so that it passes the eyes like smoke, and contracts the circle of vision to a radius of fifty or sixty yards. Fogs, by increasing the apparent distance of objects, appear, sometimes, to magnify men into giants, hummocks of ice into mountains, and common pieces of drift-ice into heavy floes or bergs. When fogs prevail with a freezing temperature, they usually varnish the rigging, yards, masts, and other apparatus of ships, with transparent ice. Sometimes the ice increases to the thickness of near an inch, and is apt, when dislodged by any motion produced in the rigging, to fall in showers, and cut the hands or faces of those on deck. Columns of several yards in length often descend at once.

To navigators in general, fogs are productive of inconvenience and danger. To the whale-fisher, they prove a special annoyance, by usually putting a stop to his most important occupations, and by preventing him from discovering the nature and situation of the ice, and other dangers with which he is surrounded. They also perplex the navigator, by preventing him from obtaining observations for the correction of his latitude and longitude; so that he often sails in complete uncertainty. In icy situations, indeed, where the sea is commonly smooth, and where the sun occasionally shines through the fog, an artificial horizon may be used

3

[page] 443

with tolerable accuracy, even upon a ship's deck; and upon a sheet of ice, with excellent effect. Where, however, there is the least motion, this instrument cannot be made use of, though a very simple contrivance, which I adopted some years ago, may often be substituted with considerable advantage. The data for the latitude, it is well known, are the sun's declination; the angle subtended between the sun and the horizon; and the height of the eye of the observer. Obtaining the correct altitude of the sun, therefore, is the principal object. But, in fogs, the apparent horizon is brought much nearer the observer than in clear weather; and the angle found between it and the sun, must be too large, and the result therefore erroneous. The distance of the proper horizon, however, increasing with the elevation of the observer, and decreasing as he descends, he has it in his power, by taking a boat, and placing his eye near the surface of the water, to bring the horizon within less than half of the distance at which it appears from a ship's deck. At the height of 15 feet, the horizon is seen at the distance of 4¾ miles; but, at the height of 3 feet, it is reduced to about two miles. So that, from the latter situation, if the eye can penetrate near two miles, a correct observation can be obtained. But, if not, the error of observation will be much diminished. For, should the fog or land constitute an apparent horizon, at the distance of a mile, the er-

[page] 444

ror of observation, at an elevation of 3 feet, would not be a quarter of a mile; whereas, at the height of 15 feet, the usual situation of the observer in merchant ships, the error of observation would amount to 5′. And if the visible horizon were only half a mile distant, the error of observation, at the height of 3 feet, would be still only 2′; but, at 15 feet, 13′. Again, if, by estimating the distance of the visible horizon, we attempt to make allowance for the increased dip, according to tables calculated for the purpose, we shall find that a small mistake in the estimated distance of the horizon, will be productive of a considerable error in the latitude, as deduced from an observation from the deck; but that the error at the elevation of 3 feet will be trifling. Suppose the estimated distance of the horizon to be one-fifth of a mile, but its true distance one-tenth, which is an error that might easily be committed; the dip of the sea corresponding to these two distances, at the height of 3 feet, is respectively, about 8′.4, and 16′.8, the difference 8′.4 being the error which would be produced in the latitude; but, at 15 feet elevation, the dip of the sea, at the two distances of one-fifth and one-tenth of a mile, is 42½ and 85, the difference 42½ miles being the error of the latitude; and, at 20 feet height of the eye, the error would be 56 miles. Hence, when the sea is so smooth that a boat can be lowered to the water's-edge, and the eye placed within 3 feet of

[page] 445

the surface, there is scarcely a chance of a greater error than 8 miles; whereas, in an observation taken upon deck, there is an equal chance of a mistake of near a degree.

This method of observing the sun's altitude, is equally useful when the horizon is intercepted by land, as when it is obscured by a fog.

Fogs are more common near the ice, than in the vicinity of land; more frequent in open seasons than in close seasons; and more intense and more common in the southern fishing stations, than in the most northern.

[page] 446

CHAPTER VI.

A SKETCH OF THE ZOOLOGY OF THE ARCTIC REGIONS.

THE view here given of the arctic zoology, is not intended as a systematic Fauna Arctica, but merely as the skeleton of such a work; consisting almost solely of original observations on, and descriptions of, the more remarkable animals inhabiting or frequenting Spitzbergen, and the adjacent seas. Of such animals as have already been well described, or of such as are familiar to almost every one, a simple list only is given, excepting an occasional remark, illustrative of their habits or characters. Some animals, however, of the cetaceous kind, which we occasionally meet with in the Greenland Sea, are not even named in this sketch, because, I frankly confess, that, although I have seen them more than once, I could not ascertain to what genus even they belonged. Indeed, the distinguishing characters of many of the Cetacea are so imperfectly known and described, that when any species, not very familiar, comes under the eye of the

[page] 447

naturalist, he is often at a loss to find its place in any system of Cetology. Besides, the drawings hitherto given of many of the whale tribe are so unlike, and so preposterous, that they tend rather to mislead than to assist the practical zoologist. The mysticetus, or common whale, for instance, is figured by our most respectable naturalists with the most extravagant inconsistency. The diameter, in many of the engravings that I have seen of it, measures fully one-third of the length, making the circumference, (the body being circular), and the length of the animal, nearly equal; whereas, the actual circumference very little exceeds one-half of the length. Hence, also, as another step towards an improved system of Cetology, I have confined my engravings, as well as my descriptions, to those animals which have come immediately under my own examination, or have been sketched by persons on whose accuracy and faithfulness I could fully depend; while drawings and descriptions that I have met with, when the least doubtful, have been altogether rejected.

The arrangement I have adopted, is principally that of Linné; but, with regard to the Cetacea, I have combined Linné with La Cepède. The latter author, who has published the most voluminous and pleasing account of cetaceous animals* that has ever

* "Histoire Naturelle des Cetacées." A Paris, l'an xii. de la Republique.

[page] 448

appeared from the press, has, I conceive, made some judicious changes in the Linnean arrangement, though the advantage of all his alterations is not very apparent. The separation of the whales having the dorsal fin, from those without it, is certainly judicious, the difference being marked and characteristic. All whales, for instance, with horny laminsæ in place of teeth, having no dorsal fin, are, agreeably to the arrangement of Linné, included under the generic name Balæna; but those possessing the dorsal fin, are, by La Cepède, called Balænopteræ, signifying whales with a fin.

In a somewhat similar way, animals of the genus. Delphinus of Linné, having no dorsal fin, are separated from those which possess this characteristic, and are distinguished by the name of Delphinapteri, or Dolphins without the fin. In these two particulars I have followed La Cepède*.

* Though La Cepède's work is evidently the result of much research, and the production of an enlarged mind, yet it is by no means accurate. In several of his departures from the Linnean arrangement, the author has fallen into great mistakes. The Balæna Mysticetus and the Balæna Nordcaper, for instance, are considered by Linné as varieties only of the same animal. La Capéde makes them two species. Now, La Cepède's figure of the Baleine franche (Mysticetus), has not its counterpart in nature; but his Baleine Nordcaper is a fair representation of the Mysticetus. A similar error occurs with regard to the Narwal. The Narwal Vulgaire, as represented and described by La Cepède, does not, I am persuaded, exist; while the figure and description of the Narwal Microcéphale, though not a little erroneous, may easily be understood as representing the common narwal. The engravings, indeed, in general, are unlike the originals.
The style of La Cepède is animated and poetical; and his Histoire Naturelle des Cétacées is a most interesting work; but the interest, in many cases, is augmented at the expence oftruth. After this assertion, an example or two may be necessary.—One can hardly doubt, says he (p. 3.), but that the Mysticetus may have been seen, at certain times, and in certain seas, 100 metres, that is 328 feet, long. In the present day, he adds, they are from 20 to 30 metres (65½ to 98½ feet) in length, (p. 5.): They spout the water to more than the height of 13 metres or 43 feet, (p. 8.): They swim with the velocity of 11 metres per second, or 21½ nautical miles an hour, (p. 56.) And, speaking of the narwal, (Narwal Vulgaire,) he says, it is 14 to 20 metres (47 to 66 feet) in length (p. 151), and is armed with a very hard, sharp weapon, measuring 5 metres or 16½ feet, (p. 151).
Now, so far from these particulars being correct, I am persuaded that the Mysticetus, which is now seldom found of a length greater than 60 feet, is as large as at any former period; that the steam of its breath (not water) is ejected to the height of some few yards, perhaps 4 or 5; that it swims with a velocity, at the greatest, of 8 or 9 miles an hour; that the average size of the narwal is only 15 feet; and that its tusk seldom exceeds 8 or 9 feet in length.

2

[page] 449

SECT. I.

A Description of Animals, of the Cetaceous Kind, frequenting the Greenland Sea.

BALæNA MYSTICETUS:—The Common Whale, or Greenland Whale.

THIS valuable and interesting animal, generally called The Whale by way of eminence, is the object of our most important commerce to the Polar Seas,

VOL. I. F f

[page] 450

—is productive of more oil than any other of the Cetacea, and, being less active, slower in its motion, and more timid than any other of the kind, of similar or nearly similar magnitude, is more easily captured.

Large as the size of the whale certainly is, it has been much over-rated;—for such is the avidity with which the human mind receives communications of the marvellous, and such the interest attached to those researches which describe any remote and extraordinary production of nature, that the judgment of the traveller receives a bias, which, in cases of doubt, induces him to fix upon that extreme point in his opinion which is calculated to afford the greatest surprise and interest. Hence, if he perceives an animal remarkable for its minuteness, he is inclined to compare it with something still more minute;—if remarkable for its bigness, with something fully larger. When the animal inhabits an element where he cannot examine

[page] 451

it, or is seen under any circumstances which prevent the possibility of his determining its dimensions, his decision will certainly be in that extreme which excites the most interest. Thus a mistake in the size of the whale would be easily made. And there is every probability of such an error having been committed two or three centuries back, from which period some of our present dimensions have been derived, when we know that whales were usually viewed with superstitious dread, and their magnitude and powers, in consequence, highly exaggerated. Besides, errors of this kind having a tendency to increase rather than to correct one another, from the circumstance of each writer on the subject being influenced by a similar bias, the most gross and extravagant results are at length obtained.

Thus authors, we find, of the first respectability in the present day, give a length of 80 to 100 feet, or upwards, to the Mysticetus, and remark, with unqualified assertion, that when the captures were less frequent, and the animals had sufficient time to attain their full growth, specimens were found of 150 to 200 feet in length, or even longer; and some ancient naturalists, indeed, have gone so far as to assert, that whales had been seen of above 900 feet in length.

But whales, in the present day, are by no means so bulky. Of 322 individuals, in the capture of which I have been personally concerned, no one, I

F f 2

[page] 452

believe, exceeded 60 feet in length; and the largest I ever measured, was 58 feet from one extremity to the other, being one of the longest, to appearance, which I ever saw. An uncommon whale that was caught near Spitzbergen, about 20 years ago, the whalebone of which measured almost 15 feet, was not, I understand, so much as 70 feet in length; and the longest actual measurement that I have met with, or heard of, is given by Sir Charles Giesecké, who informs us, that, in the spring of 1813, a whale was killed at Godhavn, of the length of 67 feet. These, however, are very uncommon instances. I therefore conceive, that 60 feet may be considered as the size of the larger animals of this species, and 65 feet in length as a magnitude which very rarely occurs.

Yet I believe that whales now occur of as large dimensions, as at any former period since the commencement of the whale-fishery. This point I endeavoured to prove, from various historical records, in a paper read before the Wernerian Society, on the 19th of December 1818, and since inserted in the "Edinburgh Philosophical Journal," No. I. p. 83.

In this paper, I brought forward the authorities of Zorgdrager, the writer of an account of the whale-fishery, and one of the early superintendants of the Dutch northern fisheries, together with opinions or remarks of Captains Anderson, Gray, Heley, and

[page] 453

others, who were among the earliest of the English whalers, which satisfactorily prove, that the average and largest produce of a whale in oil, was not greater, near two hundred years ago, than it is at the present time; and to these are added, the testimonies of Captains Jenkinson and Edge, as to the length of the whale, which likewise corresponds, pretty nearly, with the measurements I have myself made.

Jenkinson, in his voyage to Russia, performed in 1557, saw a number of whales, some of which, by estimation, were 60 feet long, and are described as being "very monstrous." Edge, who was one of the Russia Company's chief and earliest whalefishers, having been ten years to Spitzbergen, prior to the year 1625, calls the whale "a sea beaste of huge bigness, about 65 foot long and 35 foot thick," having whalebone 10 or 11 feet long, (a common size at present,) and yielding about 100 hogsheads of oil; and, in a descriptive plate accompanying Captain Edge's paper on the fishery, published by PURCHAS in 1625, is a sketch of a whale, with this remark subjoined,—" A whale is ordinarily about 60 foot long."

Hence I conceive we may satisfactorily conclude, that whales of as large size are found now, as at any former period since the Spitzbergen fishery was discovered; and I may also remark, that where any respectable authority affords actual measurements exceeding 70 feet, it will always be found that the spe-

[page] 454

cimen referred to, was not one of the Mysticetus kind, but of the B. Physalis, or the B. Musculus, animals which considerably exceed in length any of the common whales that I have either heard of, or met with.

When fully grown, therefore, the length of the whale may be stated as varying from 50 to 65, and rarely, if ever, reaching 70 feet; and its greatest circumference from 30 to 40 feet. It is thickest a little behind the fins, or in the middle, between the anterior and posterior extremes of the animal; from whence it gradually tapers, in a conical form, towards the tail, and slightly towards the head. Its form is cylindrical from the neck, to within ten feet of the tail, beyond which it becomes somewhat quadrangular, the greatest ridge being upward, or on the back, and running backward nearly across the middle of the tail. The head has somewhat of a triangular shape. The under-part, the arched outline of which is given by the jaw-bones, is flat, and measures 16 to 20 feet in length, and 10 to 12 in breadth. The lips, extending 15 or 20 feet in length, and 5 or 6 in height, and forming the cavity of the mouth, are attached to the under-jaw, and rise from the jaw-bones, at an angle of about 80 degrees, having the appearance, when viewed in front, of the letter U. The upper-jaw, including the "crown-bone," or skull, is bent down at the extremity, so as to shut the front and upper parts of the cavity of

[page] 455

the mouth, and is overlapped by the lips in a squamous manner at the sides.

When the mouth is open, it presents a cavity as large as a room, and capable of containing a merchant-ship's jolly-boat, full of men, being 6 or 8 feet wide, 10 or 12 feet high (in front), and 15 or 16 feet long.

The fins, two in number, are placed between one-third and two-fifths of the length of the animal, from the snout, and about two feet behind the angle of the mouth. They are 7 to 9 feet in length, and 4 or 5 in breadth. The part by which they are attached to the body, is somewhat elliptical, and about 2 feet in diameter; the side which strikes the water is nearly flat. The articulation being perfectly spherical, the fins are capable of motion in any direction; but, from the tension of the flesh and skin below, they cannot be raised above the horizontal position. Hence the account given by some naturalists, that the whale supports its young by its fins, on its back, must be erroneous. The fins, after death, are always hard and stiff; but, in the living animal, it is presumed, from the nature of the internal structure, that they are capable of considerable flexion. The whale has no dorsal fin.

The tail, comprising, in a single surface, 80 or 100 square feet, is a formidable instrument of motion and defence. Its length is only 5 or 6 feet; but its width is 18 to 24 or 26 feet. Its position is hori-

[page] 456

zontal. In its form it is flat and semi-lunar; indented in the middle; the two lobes somewhat pointed, and turned a little backward. Its motions are rapid and universal; its strength immense.

The eyes are situated in the sides of the head, about a foot obliquely above and behind the angle of the mouth. They are remarkably small in proportion to the bulk of the animal's body, being little larger than those of an ox. The whale has no external ear; nor can any orifice for the admission of sound be discovered until the skin is removed.

On the most elevated part of the head, about 16 feet from the anterior extremity of the jaw, are situated the blow-holes, or spiracles; consisting of two longitudinal apertures 6 or 8 inches in length. These are the proper nostrils of the whale. A moist vapour, mixed with mucous, is discharged from them, when the animal breathes; but no water accompanies it, unless an expiration of the breath be made under the surface.

The mouth, in place of teeth, contains two extensive rows of "fins," or whalebone, which are suspended from the sides of the crown-bone. These series of fins are generally curved longitudinally, although they are sometimes straight, and give an arched form to the roof of the mouth. They are covered immediately by the lips attached to the lower jaw, and enclose the tongue between their lower extremities. Each series, or "side of bone,"

[page] 457

as the whalefishers term it, consists of upwards of 300 laminæ*; the longest are near the middle, from whence they gradually diminish away to nothing at each extremity. Fifteen feet is the greatest length of the whalebone; but 10 or 11 feet is the average size, and 13 feet is a magnitude seldom met with. The greatest breadth, which is at the gum, is 10 or 12 inches. The laminæ, composing the two series of bone, are ranged side by side, two-thirds of an inch apart, (thickness of the blade included,) and resemble a frame of saws in a saw-mill. The interior edges are covered with a fringe of hair, and the exterior edge of every blade, excepting a few at each extremity of the series, is curved and flattened down, so as to present a smooth surface to the lips. In some whales, a curious hollow on one side, and ridge on the other, occurs in many of the central blades of whalebone, at regular intervals of 6 or 7 inches. May not this irregularity, like the rings in the horns of the ox, which they resemble, afford an intimation of the age of the whale? If so, twice the number of running feet in the longest lamina of whalebone in the head of a whale not full grown, would represent its age in years. In the youngest whales, called Suckers, the whalebone is only a few inches long; when the length reaches 6 feet or upwards, the whale is said to be size. The colour of the whalebone is brownish-black, or bluish-black.

* In a very small whale, the number was 316 or 320.

[page] 458

In some animals, it is striped longitudinally with white. When newly cleaned, the surface exhibits a fine play of colour. A large whale sometimes affords a ton and a half of whalebone. If the "sample blade," that is, the largest lamina in the series, weigh 7 pounds, the whole produce may be estimated at a ton; and so on in proportion. The whale-bone is inserted into the crown-bone, in a sort of rabbit. All the blades in the same series are connected together by the gum, in which the thick ends are inserted. This substance, (the gum,) is white, fibrous, tender and tasteless. It cuts like cheese. It has the appearance of the interior or kernel of the cocoa-nut.

The tongue occupies a large proportion of the cavity of the mouth, and the arch formed by the whalebone. It is incapable of protrusion, being fixed from root to tip, to the fat extending between the jaw-bones.

A slight beard, consisting of a few short scattered white hairs, surmounts the anterior extremity of both jaws.

The throat is remarkably strait.

The male organ is a large flexible member, and is concealed in a longitudinal groove, the external opening of which is 2 or 3 feet in length. This member, in the dead animal, is 8 or 10 feet in length, and about 6 inches in diameter at the root. It tapers to a point, and is perforated throughout its length by the urethra.

[page] 459

Two paps in the female, afford the means of rearing its young. They are situated on the abdomen, one on each side of the pudendum, and are 2 feet apart. They appear not to be capable of protrusion, beyond the length of a few inches. In the dead animal, they are always found retracted.

The milk of the whale resembles that of quadrupeds in its appearance. It is said to be rich and well-flavoured.

The vent is about 6 inches behind the pudendum of the female; but, in the male, it is more distant from the organ of generation.

The colour of the Mysticetus is velvet-black, grey, (composed of dots of blackish-brown, on a white ground,) and white, with a tinge of yellow. The back, most of the upper-jaw, and part of the lower jaw, together with the fins and tail, are black. The tongue, the fore part of the under-jaw and lips, sometimes a little of the upper-jaw, at the extremity, and a portion of the belly, are white. And the eye-lids, the junction of the tail with the body, a portion in the axillæ of the fins, &c. are grey. I have seen whales that were all over piebald. The older animals contain the most grey and white; under-size whales are altogether of a bluish-black, and suckers of a pale bluish, or bluish-grey colour.

The skin of the body is slightly furrowed, like the water-lines in coarse laid paper. On the tail, fins, &c. it is smooth. The cuticle, or that part of

[page] 460

the skin which can be pulled off in sheets after it has been a little dried in the air, or particularly in frost, is not thicker than parchment. The rete mucosum in adults, is about three-fourths of an inch in thickness, over most parts of the body; in suckers, nearly two inches; but on the under side of the fins, on the inside of the lips, and on the surface of the tongue, it is much thinner. This part of the integuments, is generally of the same colour throughout its thickness. The fibres of which it is composed, are perpendicular to the surface of the body. Under this lies the true skin, which is white and tough. As it imperceptibly becomes impregnated with oil, and passes gradually into the form of blubber, its real thickness cannot easily be stated. The most compact part, perhaps, may be a quarter of an inch thick.

Immediately beneath the skin lies the blubber or fat, encompassing the whole body of the animal, together with the fins and tail. Its colour is yellowish-white, yellow or red. In the very young animal it is always yellowish-white. In some old animals, it resembles in colour the substance of the salmon. It swims in water. Its thickness all round the body, is 8 or 10 to 20 inches, varying in different parts as well as in different individuals. The lips are composed almost entirely of blubber, and yield from one to two tons of pure oil each. The tongue is chiefly composed of a soft kind of fat, that

[page] 461

affords less oil than any other blubber: in the centre of the tongue, and towards the root, this fat is intermixed with fibres of a muscular substance. The under jaw, excepting the two jaw-bones, consists almost wholly of fat; and the crown-bone possesses a considerable coating of it. The fins are principally blubber, tendons, and bones, and the tail possesses a thin stratum of blubber. The oil appears to be retained in the blubber in minute cells, connected together by a strong reticulated combination of tendinous fibres. These fibres being condensed at the surface, appear to form the substance of the skin. The oil is expelled when heated; and, in a great measure, discharges itself out of the fenks, whenever putrefaction in the fibrous parts of the blubber takes place. The blubber and the whalebone are the parts of the whale to which the attention of the fisher is directed. The flesh and bones, excepting the jaw-bones occasionally, are rejected. The blubber in its fresh state, is without any unpleasant smell; and it is not until after the termination of the voyage, when the cargo is unstowed, that a Greenland ship becomes disagreeable.

Four tons of blubber by measure, generally afford three tons of oil*; but the blubber of a sucker con-

* The ton or tun of oil, is 252 gallons wine measure. It weighs, at temperature 60°, 1933 lb. 12 oz. 14 dr. avoirdupois.

[page] 462

tains. a very small proportion. Whales have been caught that afforded nearly thirty tons of pure oil; and whales yielding twenty tons of oil, are by no means uncommon. The quantity of oil yielded by a whale, generally bears a certain proportion to the length of its longest blade of whalebone. The average quantity is expressed in the following table*.

Length of whalebone in feet, 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Oil yielded in tons 4 5 11 13½ 17 21

Though this statement on the average be exceedingly near the truth, yet exceptions sometimes occur. A whale of 2½ feet bone, for instance, has been known to produce near ten tons of oil; and another of 12 feet bone, only nine tons. Such instances, however, are very uncommon.

A stout whale of sixty feet in length, is of the enormous weight of seventy tons; the blubber weighs about thirty tons, the bones of the head, whalebone, fins and tail, eight or ten; carcass thirty or thirty-two.

* This table is somewhat different from that given in Wernerian Memoirs, (vol. i. p. 582); an increased number of observations having enabled me to improve it.

3

[page] 463

The flesh of the young whale is of a red colour; and when cleared of fat, broiled, and seasoned with pepper and salt, does not eat unlike coarse beef; that of the old whale approaches to black, and is exceedingly coarse. An immense bed of muscles surrounding the body, is appropriated chiefly to the movements of the tail. The tail consists principally of two reticulated beds of sinewy fibres, compactly interwoven, and containing very little oil. In the central bed the fibres run in all directions; in the other, which encompasses the central one in a thinner stratum, they are arranged in regular order. These substances are extensively used, particularly in Holland, in the manufacture of glue.

Most of the bones of the whale are very porous, and contain large quantities of fine oil. The jaw-bones, which measure twenty to twenty-five feet in length, are often taken care of, principally on account of the oil that drains out of them, when they come into a warm climate. When exhausted of oil, they readily swim in water. The external surface of the most porous bones, is compact and hard. The ribs are pretty nearly solid; but the crown-bone is almost as much honeycombed as the jaw-bones. The number of ribs, according to Sir Charles Giesecké, is thirteen on each side. The bones of the fins are analogous, both in proportion and number, to those of the fingers of the human hand. From this peculiarity of structure, the fins have been denominated by Dr Flem-

[page] 464

ing "swimming paws." The posterior extremity of the whale however, is a real tail; the termination of the spine or os coccygis, running through the middle of it almost to the edge.

Few opportunities of examining the internal structure of the mysticetus occur; hence, what is known respecting its anatomy, is deduced principally from its analogy to other cetaceous animals.

Table of the Comparative Dimensions of Six Mysticete, from my own Measurements.

Ft. In. Ft. In. Ft. In. Ft. In. Ft. In. Ft. In.
Longest blade of whalebone, 1.0 6.0 10.10 11.2 11.6 13.7
Extreme length, 17.0 28.0 51.0 50.0 58.0 52.0
Length of the head, 5.0 8.6 16.0 15.6 19.0 20.0
Breadth of under-jaw, 9.6 12.0
Length from tip of lip to fin, 5.6 10.0 18.0
——to greatest circumf. 7.0 24.0
Circumference at the neck, 10.0 18.6 31.6 34.0
Greatest circumference, 12.0 20.0 34.0 35.0
Circumfer. by the genitalia, 9.0 15.6 19.0
———near the tail, 2.11 4.0 6.6 6.8
Fin,—Length, 2.3 7.0 6.4 8.6 9.0
Breadth, 1.3 4.0 4.0 5.0
Tail,—Length, 5.6 5.6 6.0 6.0
Breadth, 20.0 17.6 24.0 20.10
Lip,—Length, 4.9 8.2 15.6 15.0 18.6 19.6
Breadth, 6.2
Produce in oil, (tons) 1 4 16 16 19 24
Sex, F. M. F. M.

The whale seems dull of hearing. A noise in the air, such as that produced by a person shouting,

2

[page] 465

is not noticed by it, though at the distance only of a ship's length; but a very slight splashing in the water, in calm weather, excites its attention, and alarms it.

Its sense of seeing is acute. Whales are observed to discover one another, in clear water, when under the surface, at an amazing distance. When at the surface, however, they do not see far.

They have no voice; but, in breathing or blowing, they make a very loud noise. The vapour they discharge, is ejected to the height of some yards, and appears at a distance, like a puff of smoke. When the animals are wounded, it is often stained with blood; and, on the approach of death, jets of blood are sometimes discharged alone. They blow strongest, densest, and loudest, when "running," when in a state of alarm, or when they first appear at the surface, after being a long time down. They respire or blow about four or five times a-minute.

The whale, being somewhat lighter than the medium in which it swims, can remain at the surface of the sea, with its "crown," in which the blowholes are situated, and a considerable extent of the back, above water, without any effort or motion. To descend, however, requires an exertion. The proportion of the whale that appears above water, when alive, or when recently killed, is probably not a twentieth part of the animal; but, within a day after death, when the process of putrefaction com-

VOL. I. G g

[page] 466

mences, the whale swells to an enormous size, until at least a third of the carcase appears above water, and sometimes the body is burst by the force of the air generated within.

By means of the tail, principally, the whale advances through the water. The greatest velocity is produced by powerful strokes against the water, impressed alternately upward and downward; but a slower motion, it is believed, is elegantly produced, by cutting the water laterally and obliquely downward, in a similar manner as a boat is forced along, with a single oar, by the operation of skulling. The fins are generally stretched out in an horizontal position: their chief application seems to be, the balancing of the animal, as the moment life is extinct, it always falls over on its side, or turns upon its back. They appear also to be used, in bearing off their young, in turning, and giving a direction to the velocity produced by the tail.

Bulky as the whale is, and inactive, or indeed clumsy as it appears to be, one might imagine that all its motions would be sluggish, and its greatest exertions productive of no great celerity. The fact, however, is the reverse. A whale extended motionless at the surface of the sea, can sink in the space of five or six seconds, or less, beyond the reach of its human enemies. Its velocity along the surface, or perpendicularly or obliquely downward, is the same. I have observed a whale descending,

[page] 467

after I had harpooned it, to the depth of 400 fathoms, with the average velocity of seven or eight miles per hour. The usual rate at which whales swim, however, even when they are on their passage from one situation to another, seldom exceeds four miles an hour; and though, when urged by the sight of any enemy, or alarmed by the stroke of a harpoon, their extreme velocity may be at the rate of eight or nine miles an hour; yet we find this speed never continues longer than for a few minutes, before it relaxes almost to one-half. Hence, for the space of a few minutes, they are capable of darting through the water, with the velocity almost of the fastest ship under sail, and of ascending with such rapidity as to leap entirely out of the water. This feat they sometimes perform as an amusement apparently, to the high admiration of the distant spectator; but to the no small terror of the unexperienced fishers, who, even under such circumstances, are often ordered, by the foolhardy harpooner, to "pull away" to the attack. Sometimes the whales throw themselves into a perpendicular posture, with their heads downward, and, rearing their tails on high in the air, beat the water with awful violence. In both these cases, the sea is thrown into foam, and the air filled with vapours; the noise, in calm weather, is heard to a great distance; and the concentric waves produced by the concussions on the water, are communicated abroad to

G g 2

[page] 468

a considerable extent. Sometimes the whale shakes its tremendous tail in the air, which, cracking like a whip, resounds to the distance of two or three miles.

When it retires from the surface, it first lifts its head, then plunging it under water, elevates its back like the segment of a sphere, deliberately rounds it away towards the extremity, throws its tail out of the water, and then disappears.

In their usual conduct, whales remain at the surface to breathe, about two minutes, seldom longer; during which time, they "blow" eight or nine times, and then descend for an interval usually of five or ten minutes; but sometimes, when feeding, fifteen or twenty. The depth to which they commonly descend, is not known, though, from the "eddy" occasionally observed on the water, it is evidently, at times, only trifling. But, when struck, the quantity of line they sometimes take out of the boats, in a perpendicular descent, affords a good measure of the depth. By this rule, they have been known to descend to the depth of an English mile; and with such velocity, that instances have occurred, in which whales have been drawn up by the line attached, from a depth of 700 or 800 fathoms, and have been found to have broken their jaw-bones, and sometimes crown-bone, by the blow struck against the bottom. Some persons are of opinion, that whales can remain under a field of ice, or at the bottom of the sea, in shallow water, when undisturbed, for

[page] 469

many hours at a time. Whales are seldom found sleeping; yet, in calm weather, among ice, instances occasionally occur.

The food of the whale consists of various species of actiniæ, cliones, sepiæ, medusæ, cancri, and helices; or, at least, some of these genera are always to be seen wherever any tribe of whales is found stationary and feeding. In the dead animals, however, in the very few instances in which I have been enabled to open their stomachs, squillæ or shrimps were the only substances discovered. In the mouth of a whale just killed, I once found a quantity of the same kind of insect.

When the whale feeds, it swims with considerable velocity below the surface of the sea, with its jaws widely extended. A stream of water consequently enters its capacious mouth, and along with it, large quantities of water insects; the water escapes again at the sides; but the food is entangled and sifted, as it were, by the whalebone, which, from its compact arrangement, and the thick internal covering of hair, does not allow a particle the size of the smallest grain to escape.

There does not seem to be a sufficient dissimilarity in the form and appearance of the mysticete found in the polar seas, to entitle them to a division into other species; yet such is the difference observed in the proportions of these animals, that they may be well considered as sub-species or varieties.

[page] 470

In some of the mysticete, the head measures fourtenths of the whole length of the animal; in others scarcely three-tenths; in some the circumference is upwards of seven-tenths of the length; in others less than six-tenths, or little more than one-half.

The sexual intercourse of whales is often observed about the latter end of summer; and females, with cubs or suckers along with them, being most commonly met with in the spring of the year, the time of their bringing forth, it is presumed, is in February or March; and their period of gestation about nine or ten months. In the latter end of April 1811, a sucker was taken by a Hull whaler, to which the funis umbilicalis was still attached. The whale has one young at a birth. Instances of two being seen with a female are very rare. The young one, at the time of parturition, is said to be at least ten, if not fourteen feet in length. It goes under the protection of its mother, for probably a year, or more; or until, by the evolution of the whalebone, it is enabled to procure its own nourishment. Supposing the criterion before mentioned, of the notches in the whalebone being indicative of the number of years growth, to be correct, then it would appear that the whale reaches the magnitude called size; that is, with a six feet length of whalebone, in twelve years, and attains its full growth at the age of twenty or twenty-five. Whales, doubtless, live to a great age. The marks of age are an increase

[page] 471

in the quantity of grey colour in the skin, and a change to a yellowish tinge of the white parts about the head; a decrease in the quantity of oil yielded by a certain weight of blubber; an increase of hardness in the blubber, and in the thickness and strength of the ligamentous fibres of which it is partly composed.

The maternal affection of the whale, which, in other respects, is apparently a stupid animal, is striking and interesting. The cub, being insensible to danger, is easily harpooned; when the tender attachment of the mother is so manifested as not un-frequently to bring it within the reach of the whalers. Hence, though a cub is of little value, seldom producing above a ton of oil, and often less, yet it is sometimes struck as a snare for its mother. In this case, she joins it at the surface of the water, whenever it has occasion to rise for respiration; encourages it to swim off; assists its flight, by taking it under her fin; and seldom deserts it while life remains. She is then dangerous to approach; but affords frequent opportunities for attack. She loses all regard for her own safety, in anxiety for the preservation of her young;—dashes through the midst of her enemies;—despises the danger that threatens her;—and even voluntarily remains with her offspring, after various attacks on herself from the harpoons of the fishers. In June 1811, one of my harpooners struck a sucker, with the hope of its

[page] 472

leading to the capture of the mother. Presently she arose close by the "fast-boat;" and seizing the young one, dragged about a hundred fathoms of line out of the boat with remarkable force and velocity. Again she arose to the surface; darted furiously to and fro; frequently stopped short, or suddenly changed her direction, and gave every possible intimation of extreme agony. For a length of time, she continued thus to act, though closely pursued by the boats; and, inspired with courage and resolution by her concern for her offspring, seemed regardless of the danger which surrounded her. At length, one of the boats approached so near, that a harpoon was hove at her. It hit, but did not attach itself. A second harpoon was struck; this also failed to penetrate: but a third was more effectual, and held. Still she did not attempt to escape; but allowed other boats to approach; so that, in a few minutes, three more harpoons were fastened; and, in the course of an hour afterwards, she was killed.

There is something extremely painful in the destruction of a whale, when thus evincing a degree of affectionate regard for its offspring, that would do honour to the superior intelligence of human beings; yet the object of the adventure, the value of the prize, the joy of the capture, cannot be sacrificed to feelings of compassion.

Whales, though often found in great numbers together, can scarcely be said to be gregarious; for

[page] 473

they are found most generally solitary, or in pairs, excepting when drawn to the same spot, by the attraction of an abundance of palatable food, or of a choice situation of the ice.

The superiority of the sexes, in point of numbers, seems to be in favour of the male. Of 124 whales which have been taken near Spitzbergen in eight years, in ships commanded by myself, 70 were males, and 54 were females, being in the proportion of five to four nearly.

The mysticetus occurs most abundantly in the frozen seas of Greenland and Davis' Strait,—in the bays of Baffin and Hudson,—in the sea to the northward of Behring's Strait, and along some parts of the northern shores of Asia, and probably America. It is never met with in the German Ocean, and rarely within 200 leagues of the British coasts: but along the coasts of Africa and South America, it is met with, periodically, in considerable numbers. In these regions, it is attacked and captured by the southern British and American whalers, as well as by some of the people inhabiting the coasts to the neighbourhood of which it resorts. Whether this whale is precisely of the same kind as that of Spitzbergen and Greenland, is uncertain, though it is evidently a mysticetus. One striking difference, possibly the effect of situation and climate, is, that the mysticetus found in southern regions, is often covered with

[page] 474

barnacles, (Lepas Diadema, &c.) while those of the arctic seas are free from these shell-fish.

It would be remarkable, if an animal like the whale, which is so timid that a bird alighting upon its back sometimes sets it off in great agitation and terror, should be wholly devoid of enemies. Besides man, who is doubtless its most formidable adversary, it is subject to annoyance from sharks, and it is also said from the narwal, sword-fish and thrasher. With regard to the narwal, I am persuaded, that this opinion is incorrect, for so far from its being an enemy, it is found to associate with the whale with the greatest apparent harmony, and its appearance indeed in the Greenland sea is hailed by the fishers, the narwal being considered as the harbinger of the whale. But the sword-fish and thrasher (if such an animal there be) may possibly be among the enemies of the whale, notwithstanding I have never witnessed their combats; and the shark is known certainly to be an enemy, though, perhaps, not a very formidable one. Whales, indeed, flee the seas where it abounds, and evince, by marks occasionally found on their tails, a strong evidence of their having been bit by the shark. A living whale may be annoyed, though it can scarcely be supposed to be ever overcome by the shark; but a dead whale is an easy prey, and affords a fine banquet to this insatiable creature.

3

[page] 475

The whale, from its vast bulk and variety of products, is of great importance in commerce, as well as in the domestic economy of savage nations; and its oil and whalebone are of extensive application in the arts and manufactures. A description of its most valuable products, and of the uses to which they are applied, being included in the account of the whale-fishery, in the second volume of this work, it will only be necessary, in this place, to mention the purposes to which parts and products, not now objects of commerce, are or might be applied.

Though to the refined palate of a modern European, the flesh of a whale, as an article of food, would be received with abhorrence, yet we find that it is considered, by some of the inhabitants of the northern shores of Europe, Asia, and America, as well as those on the coasts of Hudson's Bay and Davis' Strait, as a choice and staple article of subsistence. The Esquimaux eat the flesh and fat of the whale, and drink the oil with greediness. Indeed, some tribes who are not familiarised with spirituous liquors, carry along with them in their canoes, in their fishing excursions, bladders filled with oil, which they use in the same way, and with a similar relish, that a British sailor does a dram*. They also eat the skin of the whale raw, both adults and children; for it is not uncommon, when the females visit the whale-ships, for them to help themselves

* Ellis's Voyage to Hudson's Bay, p. 233.

[page] 476

to pieces of skin, preferring those with which a little blubber is connected, and to give it as food to their infants suspended on their backs, who suck it with apparent delight. Blubber, when pickled and boiled, is said to be very palatable; the tail, when par-boiled and then fried, is said to be not unsavory, but even agreeable eating; and the flesh of young whales, I know from experiment, is by no means indifferent food.

Not only is it certain that the flesh of the whale is now eaten by savage nations, but it is also well authenticated that, in the 12th, 13th, 14th and 15th centuries, it was used as food by the Icelanders, the Netherlanders, the French, the Spaniards, and probably by the English. M. S. B. NOEL, in a tract on the whale-fishery*, informs us, that about the 13th century, the flesh, particularly the tongue, of whales, was sold in the markets of Bayonne, Cibourre, and Beariz, where it was esteemed as a great delicacy, being used at the best tables; and even so late as the 15th century, he conceives, from the authority of Charles Etienne, that the principal nourishment of the poor in Lent, in some districts of France, consisted of the flesh and fat of the whale.

Besides forming a choice eatable, the inferior products of the whale are applied to other purposes by

* "Memoire sur l'Antiquité de la Pêche de la Baleine par les Nations Européennes."

[page] 477

the Indians and Esquimaux of arctic countries, and with some nations are essential to their comfort. Some membranes of the abdomen are used for an upper article of clothing, and the peritoneum in particular, being thin and transparent, is used instead of glass in the windows of their huts; the bones are converted into harpoons and spears, for striking the seal, or darting at the sea-birds, and are also employed in the erection of their tents, and with some tribes in the formation of their boats; the sinews are divided into filaments, and used as thread, with which they join the seams of their boats and tent-cloths, and sew with great taste and nicety the different articles of dress they manufacture; and the whalebone and other superior products, so valuable in European markets, have also their uses among them.

I shall conclude this account of the mysticetus, with a sketch of some of the characters which belong generally to cetaceous animals.

Whales are viviparous; they have but one young at a time, and suckle it with teats. They are furnished with lungs, and are under the necessity of approaching the surface of the water at intervals to respire in the air. The heart has two ventricles and two auricles. The blood is warmer than in the human species; in a narwal that had been an hour and a half dead, the temperature of the blood was 97°; and in a mysticetus recently killed, 102°. All of

[page] 478

them inhabit the sea. Some of them procure their food by means of a kind of sieve, composed of two fringes of whalebone; these have no teeth. Others have no whalebone, but are furnished with teeth. They all have two lateral or pectoral fins, with concealed bones like those of a hand; and a large flexible horizontal tail, which is the principal member of motion. Some have a kind of dorsal fin, which is an adipose, or cartilaginous substance, without motion. This fin varying in form, size and position, in different species, and being in a conspicuous situation, is well adapted for a specific distinction. The appearance and dimensions of the whalebone and teeth, especially the former, are other specific characteristics. All whales have spiracles or blowholes, some with one, others with two openings, through which they breathe; some have a smooth skin all over the body; others have rugæ or sulci about the region of the thorax and on the lower jaw. And all afford, beneath the integuments, a quantity of fat or blubber, from whence a useful and valuable oil, the train-oil of commerce, is extracted.

BALæNOPTERA Gibbar (La Cepède:)—B. Physalis of Linné, or Razor-back of the whalers.

This is the longest animal of the whale tribe; and, probably, the most powerful and bulky of created beings.

[page] 479

It differs from the mysticetus in its form being less cylindrical, and its body longer and more slender; in its whalebone being shorter; in its produce in blubber and oil being less; in its colour being of a bluer tinge; in its fins being more in number; in its breathing or blowing being more violent; in its speed being greater; in its actions being quicker and more restless, and in its conduct being bolder.

The length of the physalis is about 100 feet; its greatest circumference 30 or 35. The body is not cylindrical, but is considerably compressed on the sides, and angular at the back. A transverse section near the fins is an oblong; and at the rump a rhombus. The longest lamina of whalebone measures about 4 feet. It affords 10 or 12 tons of blubber. Its colour is a pale bluish-black, or dark bluish-grey, in which it resembles the sucking mysticetus. Besides the two pectoral fins, it has a small horny protuberance, or rayless and immoveable fin, on the extremity of the back. Its blowing is very violent, and may be heard in calm weather, at the distance of about a mile. It swims with a velocity, at the greatest, of about twelve miles an hour. It is by no means a timid animal; yet it does not appear to be revengeful or mischievous. When closely pursued by boats, it manifests little fear, and does not attempt to outstrip them in the race; but merely endeavours to avoid them, by diving or changing its direction. If harpooned or otherwise wounded, it

[page] 480

then exerts all its energies, and escapes with its utmost velocity; but shows little disposition to retaliate on its enemies, or to repel their attacks by engaging in a combat. Though at a distance, the physalis is sometimes mistaken by the whalers for the mysticetus; yet its appearance and actions are so different, that it may be generally distinguished. It seldom lies quietly on the surface of the water when blowing, but usually has a velocity of four or five miles an hour; and when it descends, it very rarely throws its tail in the air, which is a very general practice with the mysticetus.

The great speed and activity of the physalis, render it a difficult and dangerous object of attack; while the small quantity of inferior oil it affords, makes it unworthy the general attention of the fishers. When struck, it frequently drags the fast-boat with such speed through the water, that it is liable to be carried immediately beyond the reach of assistance, and soon out of sight of both boats and ship. Hence, the striker is under the necessity of cutting the line, and sacrificing his employer's property, for securing the safety of himself and companions. I have made different attempts to capture one of these formidable creatures. In the year 1818, I ordered a general chase of them, providing against the danger of having my crew separated from the ship, by appointing a rendezvous on the shore not far distant, and preparing against the loss of much line, by dividing

2

[page] 481

it at 200 fathoms from the harpoon, and affixing a buoy to the end of it. Thus arranged, one of these whales was shot and another struck. The former dived with such impetuosity, that the line was broken by the resistance of the buoy as soon as it was thrown into the water, and the latter was liberated within a minute by the division of the line, occasioned, it was supposed, by its friction against the dorsal fin. Both of them escaped. Another physalis was struck by one of my inexperienced harpooners, who mistook it for a mysticetus. It dived obliquely with such velocity, that 480 fathoms of line were withdrawn from the boat in about a minute of time. This whale was also lost by the breaking of the line.

The following observations on this animal have been derived from conversations with different persons who have had opportunities of examining it when dead.

Length of a Physalis found dead in Davis' Strait, 105 feet; greatest circumference about 38. Head small compared with that of the common whale; fins long and narrow; tail about 12 feet broad, finely formed; whalebone 4 feet in length, thick, bristly and narrow; blubber 6 or 8 inches thick, of indifferent quality; colour bluish-black on the back, and bluish-grey on the belly; skin smooth, excepting about the sides of the thorax, where longitudinal rugæ or sulci occur.

VOL. I. H h

[page] 482

The physalis occurs in great numbers in the Arctic Seas, especially along the edge of the ice, between Cherie Island and Nova Zembla, and also near Jan Mayen. Persons trading to Archangel have often mistaken it for the common whale. It is seldom seen among much ice, and seems to be avoided by the mysticetus; as such, the whale-fishers view its appearance with painful concern. It inhabits most generally in the Spitzbergen quarter, the parallels of 70 to 76 degrees; but in the months of June, July and August, when the sea is usually open, it advances along the land to the northward as high as the 80th degree of latitude. In open seasons it is seen near the Headland, at an earlier period. A whale, probably of this kind, 101 feet in length, was stranded on the banks of the Humber about the middle of September 1750.

BALæNOPTERA Rorqual (La Cepède:)—Balæna Musculus of Linné, or Broad-nosed Whale.

This species of whale frequents the coasts of Scotland, Ireland, Norway, &c., and is said to feed principally upon herrings. Several characters of the musculus very much resemble those of the physalis, though, I believe, there is an essential difference between the two animals; the musculus being shorter, having a larger head and mouth, and a rounder

[page] 483

under-jaw than the physalis. Several individuals, apparently of this kind, have been stranded or killed on different parts of the coast of the united kingdom. One, 52 feet in length, was stranded near Eyemouth, June 19. 1752. Another, nearly 70 feet in length, ran ashore on the coast of Cornwall, on the 18th of June 1797. Three were killed on the north-west coast of Ireland in the year 1762, and two in 1763; one or two have been killed in the Thames; and one was embayed and killed in Balta Sound, Shetland, in the winter of 1817–18, some remains of which I saw. This latter whale was 82 feet in length; the jaw-bones were 21 feet long; the longest lamina of whalebone about 3 feet long. Instead of hair at the inner edge, and at the point of each blade of whalebone, it had a fringe of bristly fibres; and it was stiffer, harder, and more horny in its texture than common whalebone. This whale produced only about five tons of oil, all of it of an inferior quality, some of it viscid and bad. It was valued altogether, expences of removing the produce and extracting the oil deducted, at no more than 60 l. Sterling. It had the usual sulci about the thorax, and a dorsal fin.

In its blowing, swimming, and general actions, as well as in its appearance in the water, the musculus very much resembles the physalis, from which, indeed, while living, it can scarcely be distinguished.

H h 2

[page] 484

BALÆNOPTERA Jubartes, (La Cepède.)—Balæna Boops of Linné, or Finner of the Whale-fishers.

Length about 46 feet; greatest circumference of the body about 20 feet; dorsal protuberance or fin about two feet and a half high; pectoral fins 4 or 5 feet long, externally, and scarcely a foot broad; tail about 3 feet deep, and 10 broad; whalebone, about 300 laminæ on each side, the longest about 18 inches in length; the under-jaw about 15 feet long, or one-third of the whole length of the animal; sulci about two dozen in number; two external blow-holes; blubber on the body 2 or 3 inches thick, under the sulci none.

In the Memoirs of the Wernerian Society, a description of a whale, corresponding, in its dimensions at least, with the Balæna Boops, has been given to the publie, by my friend Mr P. Neill, Edinburgh*. This whale was stranded on the banks of the Forth, near Alloa, and had been considerably mutilated before Mr Neill had an opportunity of examining it. It is considered by him a Balæna Rostrata. From his valuable paper part of the above description is taken, which differs so much from a Rostrata noticed below, particularly in its larger dimensions, and in the greater proportion which the head bears

* Vol. i. p. 201.

[page] 485

to the body, that it would appear to belong either to the Balæna Boops, or to an undescribed species. From the inaccuracy of the sketches of almost all the whales hitherto figured, the naturalist is rather plagued than assisted by them. As such, the figures given by La Cepède and others, can scarcely be of any service in determining the species of this whale.

BALÆNOPTERA Acuto-rostrata, (La Cepède).—Balæna rostrata of Linné, or Beaked Whale.

This is the last and the smallest of the whalebone whales with which I am acquainted. In Plate 13, fig. 2. is an accurate representation of this animal, taken from an original drawing, accompanied by actual measurements, by the late James Watson, Esq. of Orkney, for the use of which I am indebted to the kindness of my friend Dr Traill of Liverpool. The animal from which this drawing was taken, was killed in Scalpa Bay, Nov. 14. 1808. Its length was 17½ feet; circumference 20. Length from the snout to the dorsal fin 12½ feet; from the snout to the pectoral fins 5 feet; from the snout to the eye 3½ feet; and from the snout to the blow-holes 3 feet. Pectoral fins 2 feet long and 7 inches broad; dorsal fin 15 inches long by 9 inches high; tail 15 inches long by 4½ feet broad. Largest whalebone about 6 inches. Colour of the back black;

[page] 486

of the belly glossy-white; and of the grooves of the plicæ according to Mrs Traill, who saw it on the beach in Scalpa Bay, a sort of flesh-colour.

The Rostrata is said to inhabit, principally, the Norwegian Seas, and to grow to the length of 25 feet*. One of the species was killed near Spitzbergen, in the year 1813, some of the whalebone of which I now have in my possession. It is thin, fibrous, of a yellowish white colour, and semi-transparent, almost like lantern-horns. It is curved like a scymeter; and fringed with white hair on the convex edge and point. Its length is 9 inches; greatest breadth 2¼.

MONODON Monoceros (Linné:)—Narwal, or Unicorn of the Whalers.

La Cepède notices three species of narwals; I have seen but one; and, perhaps, the other species are only imaginary, for the animal varies in appearance.

This animal, when full grown, is from 13 to 16 feet in length, exclusive of the tusk, and in circumference (two feet behind the fins, where it is thickest,) 8 to 9 feet.

The form of the head, with the part of the body before the fins, is paraboloidal, of the middle of the body nearly cylindrical, of the hinder part, to with-

* La Cepède states the length at 8 or 9 metres, which is 26 to 29 feet.

[page] 487

in two or three feet of tail somewhat conical, and from thence a ridge commencing, both at the back and belly, the section becomes first an ellipse, and then a rhombus at the junction of the tail. At the distance of 12 or 14 inches from the tail, the perpendicular diameter is about 12 inches, the transverse diameter about 7. The back and belly ridges run half way across the tail, or more; and the edges of the tail in the same way run 6 or 8 inches along the body, and form ridges on the sides of the rump. After a very slight elevation at the blowhole, the outline of the back forms a regular curve; the belly rises or seems drawn in near the vent, and expands to a perceptible bump, about two feet before the genitalia. From the neck, three or four feet backward, the back is rather depressed, and appears flat.

The head is about one-seventh of the whole length of the animal; it is small, blunt, round, and of a paraboloidal form. The mouth is small, and not capable of much extension. The under lip is wedge-shaped. The eyes are small, the largest diameter being only an inch, and are placed in a line with the opening of the mouth, about 13 inches from the snout. The blowhole, which is directly over the eyes, is a single opening, of a semicircular form, about 3½ inches in diameter or breadth, and 1½ radius or length. The fins, which are 12 or 14 inches long and 6 or 8 broad, are placed at one-fifth of the

[page] 488

length of the animal from the snout. The tail is from 15 to 20 inches long, and 3 to 4 feet broad. It has no dorsal fin; but in place of it is an irregular sharpish fatty ridge, two inches in height, extending two and a half feet along the back, nearly mid-way between the snout and the tail. The edge of this ridge is generally rough, and the cuticle and rete mucosum being partly wanting upon it, appear to be worn off by rubbing against ice.

The prevailing colour of the young narwal is blackish-grey on the back, variegated with numerous darker spots running into one another, and forming a dusky-black surface, paler and more open spots of grey on a white ground at the sides, disappearing altogether about the middle of the belly. In the elder animals, the ground is wholly white or yellowish-white, with dark-grey or blackish spots of different degrees of intensity. These spots are of a roundish or oblong form: on the back, where they seldom exceed two inches in diameter, they are the darkest and the most crowded together, yet with intervals of pure white among them. On the sides, the spots are fainter, smaller, and more open. On the belly, they become extremely faint and few, and in considerable surfaces are not to be seen. On the upper part of the neck, just behind the blow-hole, is often a close patch of brownish-black without any white. The external part of the fins is also generally black at the edges, but greyish about the

[page] 489

middle. The upper side of the tail is also blackish round the edges: but in the middle, grey, with black curvilinear streaks on a white ground, forming semicircular figures on each lobe. The under parts of the fins and tail are similar to the upper, only much paler-coloured; the middle of the fins being white, and of the tail a pale-grey. The colour of the sucklings is almost wholly a bluish-grey, or slate-colour.

The integuments are similar to those of the mysticetus, only thinner. The cuticle is about the thickness of paper: the rete mucosum three-eighths to three-tenths of an inch thick; the cutis thin, but strong and compact on the outer side.

A long prominent tusk, with which some narwals are furnished, is considered as a horn by the whale-fishers; and as such, has given occasion for the name of Unicorn being applied to this animal. This tusk occurs on the left side of the head, and is sometimes found of the length of 9 or 10 feet; according to Egede, 14 or 15*. It springs from the lower part of the upper-jaw, points forward and a little downward; being parallel in its direction to the roof of the mouth. It is spirally striated from right to left; is nearly straight, and tapers to a round blunt point; is of a yellowish-white colour, and consists of a compact kind of ivory. It is usually hollow from the base to within a few inches of

* "Description of Greenland," p. 77.

[page] 490

the point. A five feet tusk, (about the average length), is about 2¼ inches diameter at the base, 1¾ in the middle, and about 3/8ths within an inch of the end. In such a tusk, there are five or six turns of the spiral, extending from the base to within 6 or 7 inches of the point. Beyond this, the end is without striæ, being smooth, clean and white; the striated part is usually grey and dirty.

Besides this external tusk, which is peculiar to the male, there is another on the right side of the head, about 9 inches long, imbedded in the skull. In females, as well as in young males, in which the tooth does not appear externally, the rudiments of two tusks will almost always be found in the upper-jaw. These are solid throughout, and are placed back in the substance of the skull, about 6 inches from its most prominent part. They are 8 or 9 inches in length, both in the male and female; in the former they are smooth, tapering, and terminate at the root with an oblique truncation; in the latter they have an extremely rough surface, and finish at the base with a large irregular knob placed towards one side, which gives the tusks the form almost of pocket pistols. Two or three instances have occurred, of male narwals having been taken, which had two large external tusks. But this is a rare circumstance. I have never seen an external tusk on the right side of the head; though I think it not improbable, but that some which I have been shown having no per-

[page] 491

foration up the centre, might be tusks of the right side. Sir Everard Home, in his examination of the tusks of the narwal, found, on sawing one, that appeared solid, in a longitudinal direction, "a hollow tube in the middle through the greater part of its length, the point, and the portion at the root, only being solid*.

All the male narwals that I have at different times seen killed, excepting one, had a tusk of 3 to 6 feet in length, projecting from the left side of the head, of which about 8 inches in length of each, was imbedded in the skull. The perforation, in all, extended from the base to within 10 or 12 inches of the small end of the tooth.

The use of the tusk in narwals is ambiguous. It cannot be essential for procuring their food, or none of them would be without it; nor is it, perhaps, necessary for their defence, else the females and young would be subjected to the power of enemies without the means of resistance, while the male would be in possession of an admirable weapon for its protection. Dr Barclay, with whom I have communicated on this subject, is of opinion, that the tusk is principally, if not solely, a sexual distinction, similar to what occurs among some other animals. Though it cannot be essential to the existence of the animal, it may, however, be occasionally employed. From the extremity being smooth

* Phil. Trans. for 1813.

[page] 492

and clean, while all the rest is rough and dirty; and especially from the circumstance of a broken tusk being found, with the angles of the fractured part rubbed down and rounded, it is not improbable but it may be used in piercing thin ice for the convenience of respiring, without being under the necessity of retreating into open water. It cannot, I conceive, be used as many authors have stated, in raking their food from the bottom of the sea; because these animals are most commonly met with in deep seas, where they would be incapable of surviving under the immense pressure of the column of water resting on the bottom.

A quantity of blubber, from 2 to 3½ inches in thickness, and amounting sometimes to above half a ton, encompasses the whole body. This affords a large proportion of very fine oil. The skull of the narwal, like those of the Delphinus deductor, porpus, beluga, grampus, dolphin, &c., is concave above, and sends forth a large flat wedge-shaped process in front, which affords sockets for the tusks. Upon this process is a bed of fat extending to the thickness of 10 or 12 inches horizontally, (as the animal swims,) and 8 or 9 perpendicularly. This fat gives the round form to the head; and by its greater or lesser deposition, occasions a considerable difference in the shape and prominence of the forehead. In consequence of this, what has been called the facial

[page] 493

angle, is in some narwals less than 60 degrees, in others upwards of 90.

The blowhole communicates with a large double cavity or air-vessel immediately under the skin; and this is connected with the nares of the skull, where the opening is divided by a bony septum.

In a fine fatty substance about the internal ears of the narwal, are found multitudes of worms. They are about an inch in length, some shorter, very slender, and taper both ways, but are sharper at one end than at the other. They are transparent. Within, is the appearanceof a canal; without, is a brownish ridge, running longitudinally along the body.

The vertebral column of the narwal is about 12 feet in length. The cervical vertebræ are seven in number; the dorsal twelve; the lumbar and caudal thirty-five. The whole are fifty-four, of which twelve enter the tail, and extend to within an inch of its extremity. The spinal marrow appears to run through the processes of all the vertebræ, from the head to the 40th, but does not penetrate the 41st. The spinous process diminishes in length after the 15th lumbar vertebra, until it is scarcely perceptible at the 19th. Large anterior or belly processes, on the opposite side of the column to the spinous processes, attached to two adjoining vertebræ, commence between the 30th and 31st, and terminate between the 42d and 43d vertebræ. The ribs, which are twelve on each side, six true and six

[page] 494

false, are slender for the size of the animal. The sternum is of the shape of a heart, with the broadest part forward. Two of the false ribs on each side, joined by cartilages to the 6th true rib; the rest are detached.

The principle food of the narwal seems to be molluseous animals. In the stomachs of several that I have examined, were numerous remains of sepiæ.

Narwals are quick, active, inoffensive animals. They swim with considerable velocity. When respiring at the surface, they frequently lay motionless for several minutes, with their backs and heads just appearing above the water. They are of a somewhat gregarious disposition, often appearing in numerous little herds of half a dozen, or more, together. Each herd is most frequently composed of animals of the same sex.

When harpooned, the narwal dives in the same way, and with almost the same velocity as the mysticetus, but not to the same extent. It generally descends about 200 fathoms, then returns to the surface, and is dispatched with a lance in a few minutes.

The only good description of the common narwal hitherto published, is contained in the Memoirs of the Wernerian Society, vol. i. p. 131. It was written by Dr Fleming, who had an opportunity of inspecting a small animal of this species, that was stranded on one of the Shetland islands in the year

3

[page] 495

1808; and as far as one specimen could be relied on for general appearances, is uncommonly accurate and characteristic.

The following dimensions and particulars, of a male narwal, killed near Spitzbergen in the year 1817, are from my own observations.

Feet In.
Length, exclusive of the tusk, 15 0
Length from the snout to the eyes, 1
——————fins, 3 1
——————back-ridge, 6 0
——————vent, 9 9
Circumference, 4½ inches from the snout, 3 5
————at the eyes and blowhole, 5
————just before the fins, 7 5
————at the forepart of back-ridge, 8 5
————at the vent, 5 8
Tusk, length externally, 5
diameter at the base, 0
Blowhole, length 1½ in., breadth, 0 3 ½
Tail, ———14 in., ——, 3
Fins, ———13 in., ——, 0
The heart weighed 11 Ib.; the blood, an hour and a-half after death, was at the temperature of 97°.

[page] 496

DELPHINUS Deductor, (Traill).— Ca'ing or Leading Whale.

Two original descriptions of this animal are before the public, the one by Mr P. Neill*, the other by Dr Traill †. The paper of Dr Traill is accompanied by a drawing, taken by Mr James Watson on the spot, where 92 of the species had just been driven on shore. This drawing, judging from the known accuracy of Mr Watson, in connection with the opinion of different persons acquainted with the animal, is doubtless, in the general appearance, a faithful representation. In the engraving, Plate 13. fig. 1, this drawing is minutely copied, excepting a small reduction in the diameter, which, with the permission of Dr Traill, I was induced to make, in consequence of the comparative diameter of the figure not exactly corresponding with the actual admeasurement of the animal.

The following are the specific characters, as given by Dr Traill. Body thick, black; one short dorsal fin; pectoral fins long, narrow; head obtuse; upper jaw bent forward; teeth subconoid, sharp, and a little bent.

* "Tour through some of the Islands of Orkney and Shetland." Edin. 1806, p. 221.

† Nicholson's Journal, vol. xxii. p. 81.

[page] 497

This animal grows to the length of about 24 feet; the average length of the adults may be about 20, and their greatest circumference 10 or 11 feet. The measurements of one examined by Mr Watson, were as follow. Length 19½ feet; greatest circumference 10; pectoral fin (the external portion) 3½ feet long, by 18 inches broad; dorsal fin 15 inches high, by 2 feet 3 inches broad; breadth of the tail 5 feet. Another individual was 21½ feet in length; and a third 20 feet in length, and 11½ in circumference.

The skin is smooth, resembling oiled silk; the colour is a deep bluish-black on the back, and generally whitish on the belly; the blubber is 3 or 4 inches thick. The head is short and round; the upper-jaw projects a little over the lower. Externally it has a single spiracle. The full grown have generally 22 to 24 teeth, ¾ths to 1¼th inches in length, in each jaw. Mr Watson observed one with 28 teeth in the upper-jaw, and 24 in the lower. In the aged animals some of the teeth are deficient; and in the sucklings none are visible. When the mouth is shut, the teeth lock between one another, like the teeth of a trap. The tail is about 5 feet broad; the dorsal fin about 15 inches high, cartilaginous and immoveable*.

This kind of dolphin sometimes appears in large herds off the Orkney, Shetland, and Feroe Islands.

* Dr TRAILL, MS. paper.

VOL. I. I i

[page] 498

"Being of a gregarious disposition, the main body of the drove follows the leading whales, as a flock of sheep follows the wedders. This disposition is well known by the natives of Shetland and Orkney, and improved to their advantage; for, whenever they are enabled to guide the leaders into a bay, they seldom fail likewise to capture a considerable number of the followers*." From the property of following a leader, this animal is called, in Shetland, the Ca'ing Whale; and, for the same reason, Dr Traill suggests the name of Deductor.

There is a considerable similarity between this animal and the grampus; but there are also such marked and essential differences between the deductor and the grampus, or indeed any other animal mentioned in systems of zoology, that it is considered both by Mr Neill and Dr Traill as belonging to no species yet described.

Of these cetacea, many herds have, at different periods, been driven on shore in Orkney, Shetland, Feroe, Iceland, &c. In a small volume, containing an account of the Feroe Islands†, which was put into my hands by Dr Traill, is a description of the method of capturing the deductor, as practised by the natives of Feroe in the 17th century. From

* NEILL'S Tour, &c.

† "Færoæ, et Færoa Reserata; that is, a description of the islands and inhabitants of Feroe."—"Written in Danish by Lucas Jacobson Debes," London, 1676, 12mo.

[page] 499

this work it appears, that numerous animals of this kind, called in Feroe grind-whales, were frequently driven ashore by boats, and killed; and that in this way there were taken in two places, in the year 1664, about a thousand. Many other historical notices of the capture of shoals of these whales are to be met with. In the year 1748, 40 individuals were seen in Torbay, and one, 17 feet in length, was killed; in 1799, about 200 of the deductor species, 8 to 20 feet in length, ran themselves a-ground at Taesta Sound, Fetlar, one of the Shetland Islands; February 25. 1805, 190 of the same kind, 6 to 20 feet long, were driven on shore at the Uyea Sound, Unst, Shetland; and, on the 19th of March, in the same year, 120 more at the same spot. In December 1806, 92 of this species were stranded in Scalpa Bay, Orkney, measuring from 5 to 21 feet in length. It was observed of the last three shoals, that numbers of the females were suckling their young when they were driven on shore, and so long as they continued alive, the milk was seen to issue from their nipples*. In the winter of 1809 and 1810, 1100 of these whales approached the shore in Hvalfiord, Iceland, and were captured; and in the winter of 1814, 150 of the same were driven into Balta Sound, Shetland, and there killed. These are only a very small proportion of the instances in which, in modern times, an

* NEILL'S Tour and DR TRAILL'S MS. Notes.

I i 2

[page] 500

extensive slaughter of the Delphinus Deductor has taken place on the shores of the British and other northern islands.

DELPHINAPTERUS Beluga (La Cepède:)—Delphinus leucas of Linné; Beluga of Pennant, or White Whale of the fishers.

The Beluga is not unlike the narwal in its general form; but is thicker about the middle of its body in proportion to its length. The anterior extremity being paraboloidal, and the head small, blunt and round, give it a strong resemblance to the narwal. Its length is equal to that of the narwal; according to La Cepède six or seven metres. Both jaws are furnished with teeth. It has no dorsal fin. The skin is smooth, the colour white. Some individuals that I have seen, were of a yellow colour, approaching to orange.

A male animal of this kind was taken in the Frith of Forth, in the month of June 1815. Its length was 13 feet 4 inches, and its greatest circumference nearly 9 feet. A paper relating to its capture and external appearance, by Mr P. Neill, was read before the Wernerian Society, on the 7th December 1816; and an account of its internal structure by Dr Barclay, was read before the same Society at its next meeting. A beautiful drawing of

[page] 501

the same animal was also made by Mr Syme, painter to the Wernerian Society, and author of "Illustrations of Werner's Nomenclature of Colours." I have been favoured, through Professor Jameson, with a copy of this drawing, as an illustration of this article*.

The beluga is generally met with in families or herds of five or ten together. They are plentiful in Hudson's Bay, Davis' Strait, and on some parts of the northern coasts of Europe and Asia, where they frequent some of the larger rivers. They are taken for the sake of the oil they produce, by harpoons or strong nets; in the latter case, the nets are extended across the stream, so as to prevent their escape out of the river; and when thus interrupted in their course to seaward, they are attacked with lances, and great numbers are sometimes killed. I have several times seen them on the coast of Spitzbergen; but never in numbers of more than three or four at a time.

* See Plate XIV.

[page] 502

SECT. II.

Some Account of the Quadrupeds inhabiting Spitzbergen, and the Icy Seas adjacent.

TRICHECUS Rosmarus:—Walrus, Morse, or Sea-Horse of the Whale-fishers.

THIS singular animal forms the connecting link between the mammalia of the land and the water, corresponding, in several of its characters, both with the bullock and the whale. It grows to the bulk of an ox. Its canine teeth, two in number, are of the length, externally, of 10 to 20 inches, (some naturalists say 3 feet,) and extend downward from the upper jaw, and include the point of the lower jaw between them. They are incurvated inward. Their full length, when cut out of the skull, is commonly 15 to 20 inches, sometimes almost 30; and their weight 5 to 10 pounds each, or upward. The walrus, being a slow, clumsy animal on land, its tusks seem necessary for its defence against the bear, and also for enabling it to raise its unweildy body upon the ice, when its access to the shore is prevented.

The walrus is found on the shores of Spitzbergen, 12 to 15 feet in length, and 8 to 10 feet in circumference. The head is short, small, and flat-

[page] 503

tened in front. The flattened part of the face is set with strong bristles. The nostrils are on the upper part of the snout, through which it blows or breathes like a whale. The fore paws, which are a kind of webbed hand, are two-sevenths of the full length of the animal from the snout. They are from 2 to 2½ feet in length; and being expansive, may be stretched to the breadth of 15 to 18 inches. The hind feet, which form a sort of tail fin, extend straight backward. They are not united, as many zoologists affirm, but are detached from each other. The length of each is about 2 to 2½ feet; the breadth, when fully extended, 2½ or 3 feet; the termination of each toe is marked by a small nail.

The skin of the walrus is about an inch thick, and is covered with a short, yellowish-brown coloured hair. The inside of the paws, in old animals, is defended by a rough horny kind of casing, a quarter of an inch thick, probably produced by the hardening of the skin, in consequence of coarse usage in climbing over ice and rocks.

Beneath the skin, is a thin layer of fat. At some seasons, the produce is said to be considerable; but I have never met with any that afforded above 20 or 30 gallons of oil. Excepting the head, the general form of the walrus is similar to that of the Seal. In the stomachs of walruses, I have met with shrimps, a kind of craw-fish, and the remains of young seals.

[page] 504

When seen at a distance, the front part of the head of the young walrus, without tusks, is not unlike the human face. As this animal is in the habit of rearing its head above water, to look at ships, and other passing objects, it is not at all improbable but that it may have afforded foundation for some of the stories of Mermaids. I have myself seen a sea-horse in such a position, and under such circumstances, that it required little stretch of imagination to mistake it for a human being; so like indeed was it, that the surgeon of the ship actually reported to me his having seen a man with his head just appearing above the surface of the water. Seals exhibit themselves in a similar way; the heads of some, at a distance, are not unlike the human head; the resemblance, however, is not so striking as that presented by the walrus.

The walrus is a fearless animal. It pays no regard to a boat, excepting as an object of curiosity. It is sometimes taken by a harpoon, when in the water. If one attack fails, it often affords an opportunity for repeating it. The capture of a walrus in the water, cannot always be accomplished without danger; for, as they go in herds, an attack made upon one individual, draws all its companions to its defence. In such cases, they frequently rally round the boat from whence the blow was struck; pierce its planks with their tusks; and, though resisted in the most determined manner, sometimes

[page] 505

raise themselves upon the gunwale, and threaten to overset it. The best defence against these enraged animals, is, in this crisis, sea sand; which, being thrown into their eyes, occasions a partial blindness, and obliges them to disperse. When on shore, they are best killed with long sharp-pointed knives.

The tusks of the walrus, which are hard, white, and compact ivory, are employed by dentists in the fabrication of false teeth. The skin is used in place of mats, for defending the yards and rigging of ships from being chafed by friction against each other. When cut into shreds, and plaited into cordage, it answers admirably for wheel ropes, being stronger, and wearing much longer than hemp. In ancient times, most of the ropes in ships, in northern countries, at least, would appear to have been made of this substance. When tanned, it is converted into a soft porous leather, above an inch in thickness; but it is by no means so useful, or so durable as in its green or raw state.

So early as the ninth century, we have accounts of the walrus being extensively fished for, on the western coast of Norway*. It now occurs in perhaps greater abundance, sometimes in troops of several hundreds together, on the shores of Spitzbergen, and neighbouring islands. It also frequents

* Anglo-Saxon version of OROSIUS, by ALFRED the Great.—See BARRINGTON'S Translation, in his "Miscellanies," p. 462.

[page] 506

the ice; but seldom permits itself to be carried far from land.

Prior to the institution of the Spitzbergen whale-fishery, the capture of this animal was an object of some commercial importance. It was at first attacked by the English, on Cherie Island; but being driven from thence, if not extirpated in that quarter, by the great slaughter that was carried on, it was then pursued to Spitzbergen.

Stephen Bennet, who, on the part of the English, discovered Cherie Island in 1603, commenced the attack on the sea-horses, in this region, the year following. His first attempt, however, to capture this formidable animal, was not very successful. Of above a thousand that were seen on the beach, and attacked, only fifteen were killed: and the slaughter out of at least a thousand more which were met with on another part of the island, only increased the capture to about 50. The teeth of these animals only were taken, which, with a hogshead of loose teeth found scattered about the island, formed the principal part of the first cargo. In their attacks on the Walrus, they found muskets with ball of little service*; but, charged with pease-shot,

* My Father once killed a Walrus with a lance, after having fired at it in vain with a rifle; and, on examining the head which one of the balls had struck, he found it had only penetrated as far as the skull, where it was flattened and spread out like a plate of sheet lead upon the surface of the bone.

[page] 507

and fired into their eyes, they were more effectual, as the sailors attacked them without danger, when blinded, and dispatched them with axes, and other sharp instruments.

In the year following, another voyage was performed to Cherie Island by Mr Welden, owner of the ship which Bennet commanded. They now hit upon a better mode of attack, and killed many Sea-horses. In this instance they not only took their teeth, but also preserved their blubber, and reduced it to oil on the spot.

In 1606, Bennet was again dispatched on the same errand, having, besides the ship he commanded, a pinnace of 20 tons burden under his direction. After the ice cleared away from the island, the morses began to land; and, on their first attack, they manifested their improvement in the art of slaughtering, by capturing 700 or 800 of these animals in less than six hours. On this adventure, 22 tons of Sea-horse oil, and 3 hogsheads of teeth were obtained.

The next voyage, when Mr Welden again embarked in his own vessel, 900 or 1000 sea-horses were killed in less than seven hours. This trade was afterwards conducted in Spitzbergen and Hope Island, with equally good effect, until it was abandoned for the more important fishery of the whale.

In the present age, the Sea-horses range the coasts of Spitzbergen almost without molestation from the

[page] 508

British. The Russians are their principal enemies, who, by means of the hunting parties sent out to winter on the coast, capture a considerable number. The whale-fishers rarely take half a dozen in a voyage; though my Father, in the last season, procured about 130 in Magdalane Bay.

PHOCæ.—Seals.

Several species of seals occur in the Greenland Sea, and resort to the ice in the neighbourhood of Spitzbergen and Jan Mayen in immense herds. The young animals, which are most frequently killed, are found in greatest abundance on the ice near Jan Mayen, in the spring of the year, where they become the object of a distinct fishery. Few British ships are fitted out for this sole purpose, though many vessels equipped only as sealers, proceed annually into the Greenland Sea, from different ports of the Elbe and Weser.

As the seal frequents the British coast, and is a well described and well known animal, I shall not particularise the different species that are met with in the Arctic Seas. A few general observations only, will be necessary.

Seals are generally fat in the spring of the year, and afford several gallons of blubber: even small seals will then yield about four or five gallons of oil.

[page] 509

The voice of the young seal when in pain or distress, is a whining cry, resembling that of a child. Seals appear to hear well when under water; music, or particularly a person whistling, draws them to the surface, and induces them to stretch their necks to the utmost extent, so as to prove a snare, by bringing them within reach of the shooter. The most effectual way of shooting them is by the use of small shot fired into their eyes; when killed with a bullet, they generally sink and are lost. Seals are often seen on their passage from one situation to another, in very large shoals. In such cases, for the sake of respiration, they all appear every now and then at the surface together, springing up so as to raise their heads and necks, and often their whole bodies out of the water. Their progress is pretty rapid; their actions appear frisky; and their general conduct is productive of amusement to the spectator. The sailors, when they observe such a shoal, call it a "Seal's Wedding."

The feet of seals are better adapted for their advancement in the water than on land. They cannot be said to walk, as they do not raise their bodies off the ground; yet they shuffle along, especially over ice, with a surprising speed.

Seals feed on birds, crabs, and small fishes. As, in some respects, they eat up the food required by the whale, whales are seldom to be found where they are numerous. They are very tenacious of life; so

[page] 510

much so, that their animation is not often destroyed until after they are flayed. I have, indeed, seen them successfully attempt to swim, when in a state too shockingly mangled to be fit for description.

The uses of the seal are various; and, to some nations, highly important. It yields train oil, which, when extracted before putrefaction has commenced, is beautifully transparent in its appearance, free from smell, and not unpleasant in taste. The skin, when tanned, is extensively employed in the making of shoes; and when dressed with the hair on, serves for the covering of trunks, &c. To the Esquimaux, the seal is of as much importance as bread is to a European. Its flesh forms their most usual food; the fat is partly dressed for eating, and partly consumed in their lamps; the liver when fried, is, even among sailors, esteemed as an agreeable dish. The skin, which the Esquimaux dress by processes peculiar to themselves, is made water proof. With the hair off, it is used as coverings, instead of planks, for their boats, and as outer garments for themselves; shielded with which, they can invert themselves and canoes in the water, without getting their bodies wet. A single effort with their paddle restores them to their proper position. It serves also for coverings for their tents, and for various other purposes. The jackets and trowsers made of skin by the Esquimaux are in great request among the whale-fishers for preserving them from oil and wet.

2

[page] 511

The Phoca Vitulina is more abundant in the Greenland Sea, than any other species, especially near Jan Mayen. The Hooded Seal is common near Spitzbergen. The usual length of the former is 4 or 5 feet; of the latter 6 to 8; and it is said to grow to the length of 10 or 12 feet. The former almost always retreats before its enemies: the latter often returns their attacks; and, being defended by his hood from the stunning effect of a blow on the nose, sometimes inflicts severe wounds on the person by whom he is attacked.

In fine weather, seals prefer the ice to the water; and, when they find themselves dry and comfortable, have an aversion to take the water, and are sometimes easily caught. They are extremely watchful. Where a number are collected on the same piece of ice, one, if not more, is always looking round. And even a solitary seal is scarcely ever observed to allow a minute to pass without lifting its head. When seals rest on an extensive sheet of ice, they always secure their retreat, either by lying near the edge, or by keeping a hole in the ice always open before them. These precautions are necessary to preserve themselves from becoming a prey to the bear. The old animals are in general shy; so that, when thousands are seen within the compass of a square furlong, the whole, on the approach of a boat, will perhaps make their escape. The young ones are less guarded; and, when met with at a proper season,

[page] 512

may sometimes be killed by a dozen at a time, on a small flake of ice.

The best situation for the seal fishery in the Arctic Sea, is in the vicinity of Jan Mayen; and the best season, the months of March and April. Ships being able to penetrate the skirts of the ice, have then a probability of meeting with them, and may occasionally make a rapid and successful fishery. The capturing of a seal is but the work of a moment. A blow with a "seal-club," (Plate XIX, fig. 6.) on the nose, immediately stuns it, and affords opportunity, by the active use of the club upon others, of arresting the flight, and making prize of many at a time. When seals are found on detached pieces of drift-ice, they are captured by the use of boats, every boat making a descent upon a different herd. When the seals are observed to be making their escape into the water, before the boat reaches the ice, the sailors give a loud continued shout, on which their victims are deluded by the amazement a sound so uncommon produces, and frequently delay their retreat until arrested by the blows of their enemies. In cases where the seals are abundant, the boat immediately pushes off, after the slaughter is finished, and proceeds to another piece of ice, for the increase of their harvest, leaving one man with their former capture, who employs himself in flaying off the skin and fat, until his companions return. But, in situations where the boats cannot navigate, the seal-fishers

2

[page] 513

have to pursue them over the ice, leaping from piece to piece, until they make a capture; every man then flenses his own, and drags the skin and blubber to his boat or ship.

Ships fitted out principally for the whale-fishery, have accidentally obtained, in the month of April, from 2000 to 3000 seals, and sometimes more; and vessels sent out for the seal-fishery only, have occasionally procured a cargo of 4000 or 5000, yielding near 100 tons of oil. Not above one or two vessels, at a time, have been fitted out of Britain, entirely for the seal-fishery, for many years; but from the ports of the Elbe and the Weser, a number of sealers are annually despatched.

From the exposed nature of the situation where seals are killed, and from the liability to heavy and sudden storms at the season when they are usually taken, the seal-fishery, conducted on the borders of the Spitzbergen ice, becomes a very hazardous employment.

This observation may be illustrated, by the mention of a disaster that occurred in the year 1774, as related to me by Richard Mood, a respectable old Lerwick pilot, who was himself eye-witness of the fact.

Fifty-four ships, chiefly Hamburghers, were that year fitted out for the seal-fishery alone, from foreign ports. Most of these, with several English ships, had, in the spring of the year, met together

VOL. I. K k

[page] 514

on the borders of the ice, about sixty miles to the eastward of the island of Jan Mayen. On the 29th of March, when the weather was moderate, the whole fleet penetrated within some streams of ice, and sent out their boats in search for seals. While thus engaged, a dreadful storm suddenly arose. So sudden and furious, indeed, was the commencement, and so tremendous and lasting the continuance, that almost all the people who were at a distance from their ships perished. The Duke of York, Captain Petere, had two boats at that time down. The crews of these having, by their utmost exertions, rowed up to the ship, got hold of the rudder rings, but were unable to make their way along side; they held fast for some time, until the force of the sea became too great for their benumbed grasp, when they lost their hold and fell astern. Though the ship was laid too, yet such was the increase of the sea, and such their debility from excessive cold and previous exertion, that they were unable to recover their position. The chief mate of the ship, a resolute and noble tar, seeing that his shipmates, if not immediately succoured, would perish, determined to rescue them at the peril of his own life. Having manned a boat with six stout seamen besides himself, he proceeded to their assistance. On reaching them, he exchanged four of his vigorous crew for two of his fainting comrades in each boat. Thus reinforced, the three boats, by the powerful exertions

[page] 515

of their crews, were brought to the stern of the ship. Beyond this point, the increase of the sea and the rapid drift of the ship, prevented them advancing; while their comrades on board were unable to assist them, from the attention requisite for their own preservation, the ship being almost laid "on her beam ends." In this critical situation they had not remained many minutes, before a sea struck the boats, filled, and overwhelmed them, on which the whole of their crews, nineteen men in number, perished.

But this catastrophe, melancholy as it was, formed a small proportion of the disasters of the storm.

While the different ships were endeavouring to make their way clear of the ice, the Pennant was struck by such a dreadful surge that she foundered, and all hands were lost. The same sea struck the Perseverance and the Rockingham, by which one of the quarter boats of the latter was thrown upon deck, and her bulwark, fore and aft, was washed away; and five boats and five men were washed from the sides and deck of the former, while, at the same time, such damage was occasioned in the hull of the vessel, that she was under the necessity of returning home to refit.

A Dutch snow, on board of which six boats' crews of English sailors, who were unable to reach their own vessel, had taken refuge, fell to leeward against a point of ice, was wrecked, and all hands on board perished. The Rockingham, the ship in which Rich-

K k 2

[page] 516

ard Mood, my informant, served, in passing a stream of ice that interrupted her escape into the open sea, received some severe blows, that carried away her cut-water, and did considerable damage to both the stem and bow. It was fortunate for this fleet, that, when the gale commenced, the ships, agreeably to the usage of the old seal-fishers, were generally under close reefed topsails, otherwise the whole might have been dismasted.

The result of these disasters, when summed up, is dreadful. About 400 foreign seamen, and near 200 British, are said to have been drowned; four or five ships were lost, and scarcely any escaped without damage.

This storm continued in all its fury about twenty-four hours; and, with some small diminution of violence, prevailed about six days more before it abated. The effect on the ice, as well as on the shipping, was striking. Having blown the whole time from the eastward, the ice, which before the gale was 60 miles to the eastward of Jan Mayen, was found on its termination, above 100 miles to the westward. The ship Weymouth, commanded by a person well known by the name of French Will, was seen at the close of the gale with a signal of distress in the rigging. She was found to be severely stove, and had a piece of ice several tons weight upon deck, which had been thrown in by the sea. This vessel returned to Liverpool to refit, and

[page] 517

made such despatch out again, that she procured 2400 seals the same season.

CANIS Lagopus.Arctic Fox.

This animal is seldom seen by the whale-fishers. Persons wintering in Spitzbergen sometimes find them plentiful, and make use of them as food. They are rarely found on the ice, though I have often seen the impressions of their feet on the snow; being of a whitish colour, they are not easily distinguished.

URSUS maritimus.Polar or Greenland Bear.

This formidable animal is, among quadrupeds, the sovereign of the arctic countries. He is powerful and courageous; savage and sagacious; apparently clumsy, yet not inactive. His senses are extremely acute, especially his sight and smell. As he traverses extensive fields of ice, he mounts the hummocks and looks around for prey; on rearing his head and snuffing the breeze, he perceives the scent of the carrion of the whale at an immense distance. A piece of kreng thrown into a fire, draws him to a ship from the distance of miles. The kreng of the whale, however offensive to a human nose, is to him a banquet. Seals seem to be his most usual food; yet, from the extreme watchfulness of these creatures, he is often, it is believed, kept fasting for weeks together. He seems to be equally at home

[page] 518

on the ice as on land. He is found on field-ice, above 200 miles from the shore. He can swim with the velocity of three miles an hour, and can accomplish some leagues without much inconvenience. He dives to a considerable distance, though not very frequently.

Bears occur in Spitzbergen, Nova Zembla, Greenland, and other arctic countries, throughout the year. In some places they are met with in great numbers. By means of the ice, they often effect a landing on Iceland; but as soon as they appear, they are generally attacked by the inhabitants and destroyed. Near the east coast of Greenland, they have been seen on the ice in such quantities, that they were compared to flocks of sheep on a common.

The size of this animal is generally 4 or 5 feet in height, 7 or 8 feet in length, and nearly as much in circumference. Sometimes, however, it occurs much larger. Barentz, in the year 1596, killed two bears in Cherie Island, the skin of one of which measured 12 feet, and of the other 13. Its weight is generally from 600 lb. to above half a-ton. It is covered with long yellowish-white hair, and is particularly shaggy about the inside of the legs. His paws are 7 inches or more in breadth; his claws 2 inches in length. His canine teeth, exclusive of the portion imbedded in the jaw, are about an inch and a half in length. Having an amazing strength of jaw, he has been known to bite a lance in two, though made of iron half an inch in diameter.

[page] 519

He may be captured in the water without much danger; but, on the ice, he has such power of resistance at command, that the experiment is hazardous. When pursued and attacked, he always turns upon his enemies. If struck with a lance, he is apt to seize it in his mouth, and either bite it in two or wrest it out of the hand. If shot with a ball, unless he is struck in the head, in the heart, or in the shoulder, he is enraged rather than depressed, and falls with increased power upon his pursuers. When shot at a distance and able to escape, he has been observed to retire to the shelter of a hummock, and, as if conscious of the styptical effect of cold, apply snow with his paws to the wound.

Though possessed of courage and great means of defence, he always, unless urged by hunger, retreats before men. His general walk is slow and deliberate; but when impelled by danger or hunger, he proceeds by a galloping step; and, upon ice, can easily outrun any man.

It feeds on the kreng or carcasses of whales, in the state in which they are relinquished by the fishers; on seals, birds, foxes and deer, when it can surprise them; on eggs, and, indeed, on any animal substance that comes within its power.

The skin of the bear, when dressed with the hair on, forms beautiful mats for a hall, or the bottom of a carriage. Prepared without being ripped up, and the hairy side turned inward, it forms a warm sack-

[page] 520

like bed, and is used as such, in some parts of Greenland. The flesh, when cleared of the fat, is well flavoured and savoury, especially the muscular part of the ham. I once treated my surgeon with a dinner of bear's-ham, who knew not, for above a month afterwards, but that it was beef-steak. The liver, I may observe as a curious fact, is hurtful and even deleterious; while the flesh and liver of the seal, on which it chiefly feeds, are nourishing and palatable. Sailors, who have inadvertently eaten the liver of bears, have almost always been sick after it: some have actually died; and the effect on others, has been to cause the skin to peel off their bodies. This is, perhaps, almost the only instance known of any part of the flesh of a quadruped proving unwholesome.

Bears, though they have been known to eat one another, are remarkably affectionate to their young. The female, which has generally two at a birth, defends its young with such zeal, and watches over them with such anxiety, that she sometimes falls a sacrifice to her maternal attachment. A pleasing and very extraordinary instance of sagacity in a mother bear was related to me by a credible and well informed person, who accompanied me in several voyages to the whale-fishery, in the capacity of surgeon. This bear, with two cubs under its protection, was pursued across a field of ice, by a party of armed sailors. At first she seemed to urge the

[page] 521

young ones to an increase of speed, by running before them, turning round, and manifesting, by a peculiar action and voice, her anxiety for their progress; but finding her pursuers gaining upon them, she carried, or pushed, or pitched them alternately forward, until she effected their escape. In throwing them before her, the little creatures are said to have placed themselves across her path, to receive the impulse; and, when projected some yards in advance, they ran onwards until she overtook them, when they alternately adjusted themselves for a second throw.

Several instances of peculiar sagacity in these animals have been observed.

A seal, lying on the middle of a large piece of ice, with a hole just before it, was marked out by a bear for its prey, and secured by the artifice of diving under the ice, and making its way to the hole by which the seal was prepared to retreat. The seal, however, observed its approach, and plunged into the water; but the bear instantly sprung upon it, and appeared, in about a minute afterwards, with the seal in its mouth.

The captain of one of the whalers being anxious to procure a bear, without wounding the skin, made trial of the stratagem of laying the noose of a rope in the snow, and placing a piece of kreng within it. A bear, ranging the neighbouring ice, was soon enticed to the spot, by the smell of burning meat.

3

[page] 522

He perceived the bait, approached, and seized it in his mouth; but his foot, at the same moment, by a jerk of the rope, being entangled in the noose, he pushed it off with the adjoining paw, and deliberately retired. After having eaten the piece he carried away with him, he returned. The noose, with another piece of kreng, being then replaced, he pushed the rope aside, and again walked triumphantly off with the kreng. A third time the noose was laid; but, excited to caution by the evident observation of the bear, the sailors buried the rope beneath the snow, and laid the bait in a deep hole dug in the centre. The bear once more approached, and the sailors were assured of their success. But bruin, more sagacious than they expected, after snuffing about the place for a few moments, scraped the snow away with his paw, threw the rope aside, and again escaped unhurt with his prize.

In the month of June 1812, a female bear, with two cubs, approached the ship I commanded, and was shot. The cubs, not attempting to escape, were taken alive. These animals, though at first evidently very unhappy, became at length, in some measure, reconciled to their situation; and, being tolerably tame, were allowed occasionally to go at large about the deck. While the ship was moored to a floe, a few days after they were taken, one of them, having a rope fastened round its neck, was thrown overboard. It immediately swam to the

[page] 523

ice, got upon it, and attempted to escape. Finding itself, however, detained by the rope, it endeavoured to disengage itself in the following ingenious way. Near the edge of the floe was a crack in the ice, of a considerable length, but only 18 inches, or 2 feet wide, and 8 or 4 feet deep. To this spot the bear returned; and when, on crossing the chasm, the bight of the rope fell into it, he placed himself across the opening; then suspending himself by his hind feet, with a leg on each side, he dropped his head, and most of his body, into the chasm; and, with a foot applied to each side of the neck, attempted, for some minutes, to push the rope over his head. Finding this scheme ineffectual, he removed to the main ice, and running with great impetuosity from the ship, gave a remarkable pull on the rope; then going backward a few steps he repeated the jerk. At length, after repeated attempts to escape this way, every failure of which he announced by a significant growl, he yielded himself to his hard necessity, and lay down on the ice in angry and sullen silence.

Accidents with bears occasionally occur, though not so many, by any means, as the ferocity of these animals, and the temerity of the sailors, who embrace every opportunity of attacking them, might lead one to expect.

Some of the early voyagers to the polar seas, had hard conflicts with bears. Barentz' crew especially,

3

[page] 524

were often in danger from them, but always succeeded either in conquering or repelling them. Another party was less fortunate. Two of the crew of a vessel which had anchored near Nova Zembla, landed on an island at the mouth of the Weigats, and, impelled by curiosity, wandered some distance from the beach; but, while unconscious of danger, one of them was suddenly seized on the back by a bear, and brought to the earth. His companion ran off and gave the alarm, and a party of his shipmates came to their assistance. The bear stood over its prey during their approach, without the least appearance of fear; and, on their attack, sprung upon one of their number, and made him also a victim to its ferocity and power. The rest now fled in confusion, and could not be induced to renew the conflict. Three sailors only among the crew had sufficient courage to combat with this formidable animal; they attacked it, and after a dangerous struggle, killed it, and rescued the mangled bodies of their two unfortunate shipmates.

Captain Cook, of the Archangel of Lynn, being near the coast of Spitzbergen in the year 1788, landed, accompanied by his surgeon and mate. While traversing the shore, the captain was unexpectedly attacked by a bear, which seized him in an instant between its paws. At this awful juncture, when a moment's pause must have been fatal to him, he called to his surgeon to fire; who, with admirable resolution and steadiness, discharged his

[page] 525

piece as directed, and providentially shot the bear through the head. The captain, by this prompt assistance was preserved from being torn in pieces.

On a more recent occasion, a commander of a whale ship was in a similar danger. Captain Hawkins of the Everthorpe of Hull, when in Davis' Strait, in July 1818, seeing a very large bear, took a boat, and pushed off in pursuit of it. On reaching it, the captain struck it twice with a lance in the breast; and, while in the act of recovering his weapon for another blow, the enraged animal sprung up, and seized him by the thigh, and threw him over its head into the water. Fortunately it did not repeat its attack, but exerted itself to escape. This exertion, when the attention of every one was directed towards their captain, was not made in vain, for it was allowed to swim away without further molestation*.

Various other accidents and adventures with bears are familiar to the whale-fishers; but the above may be sufficient as illustrations of the character of the animal. I shall only remark, with regard to curious adventures, that, on one occasion, a bear which was attacked by a boat's crew, in the Spitzbergen Sea, made such a formidable resistance that it was enabled to climb the side of the boat,

* This account I received in a letter from Captain Bennet, of the Venerable of Hull.

[page] 526

and take possession of it, while the intimidated crew fled for safety to the water, supporting themselves by the gunwale and rings of the boat, until, by the assistance of another party from their ship, it was shot as it sat inoffensively in the stern. And, with regard to narrow escapes, I shall only add, that a sailor, who was pursued on a field of ice by a bear, when at a considerable distance from assistance, preserved his life, by throwing down an article of clothing, whenever the bear gained upon him, on which it always suspended the pursuit, until it had examined it, and thus gave him time to obtain some advance. In this way, by means of a hat, a jacket, and a neck handkerchief, successively cast down, the progress of the bear was retarded, and the sailor escaped from the danger that threatened him, in the refuge afforded him by his vessel.

CERVUS Tarandus.Rein-Deer.

I have never seen this animal myself, though it is known to inhabit almost every part of Spitzbergen. It is always lean in the spring of the year; but, after the wasting of the snow, and the advance of vegetation, it feeds rapidly, and its flesh, towards the end of July, is found to be excellent venison.

[page] 527

SECT. III.

Remarks on the Birds frequenting the Sea and Coast of Spitzbergen.

ANAS.—Goose, Duck, &c.

1. ANAS Bernicla. Brent-goose.—Occurs in considerable numbers near the coast of Greenland, but is not seen in any quantity at Spitzbergen.

2. ANAS mollissima. Eider-Duck.—These birds are very abundant during the summer, in all the islands situated in the Greenland Sea. They are also met with solitary, or in pairs, near the ice, at the greatest distances from land. They fly in large flocks, near the coast, and generally arrange themselves in a regular form. Their appearance in great numbers is an intimation of the proximity of land. The variety found at Spitzbergen is not so large as generally described, exceeding very little in size the domesticated duck.

ALCA.—Auk or Penguin.

1. ALCA arctica. The Puffin, or Greenland Parrot.—This bird is very common near the coast of Spitzbergen, but is rarely seen out of sight of

[page] 528

land. It feeds principally on shrimps, and a small species of helix*.

2. ALCA Alle. The Little Auk, or Roach.— This is an extremely numerous species in some situations in the Polar Seas. They occur in the water in thousands together; and sometimes in like abundance on pieces of ice. They are active in the water; but rather slow in flight. When on the ice, they generally sit in an erect posture. They dive quickly on being alarmed, and pass through the water, by the use of their wings, with great velocity. Feeding on shrimps, they are found in greatest numbers in the turbid dark-green coloured sea. On the approach of thick weather, they are particularly noisy.

PROCELLARIA glacialis.—Petrel, Fulmar, or Mallemuk.

The fulmar is the constant companion of the whale-fisher. It joins his ship immediately on passing the Shetland Islands, and accompanies it through the trackless ocean to the highest accessible latitudes. It keeps an eager watch for any thing thrown overboard; the smallest particle of fatty substance can scarcely escape it. As such, a hook baited with a piece of fat meat or blubber, and towed by a long twine over the ship's stern, is a means employed by

* My friend, Mr William Swainson, of Liverpool, on comparing a drawing of this bird with the British puffin, considered it as a different species. It, however, corresponds very nearly with the Alca arctica of Latham.

[page] 529

the sailor boys for taking them. In the spring of the year, before they have glutted themselves too frequently with the fat of the whale, they may be eaten; and, when carefully cleared of the skin, and of every particle of yellow fatty substance lying beneath it, and well soaked in water, they are pretty good, particularly in "sea-pies." They are remarkably easy and swift on the wing. They can fly to windward in the highest storms, and rest on the water, with great composure, in the most tremendous seas. But it is observed, that, in heavy gales, they fly extremely low, generally skimming along by the surface of the water. The fulmar walks awkwardly, and with the legs so bent, that the feet almost touch the belly. When on ice, it rests with its body on the surface, and presents its breast to the wind. Like the duck, it sometimes turns its head backward, and conceals its bill beneath its wing.

Fulmars are extremely greedy of the fat of the whale. Though few should be seen when a whale is about being captured, yet, as soon as the flensing process commences, they rush in from all quarters, and frequently accumulate to many thousands in number. They then occupy the greasy track of the ship; and, being audaciously greedy, fearlessly advance within a few yards of the men employed in cutting up the whale. If, indeed, the fragments of fat do not float sufficiently away, they approach so

VOL. I. L l

[page] 530

near the scene of operations, that they are knocked down with boat-hooks, in great numbers, and sometimes taken up by the hand. The sea immediately about the ship's stern, is sometimes so completely covered with them, that a stone can scarcely be thrown overboard, without striking one of them. When any thing is thus cast among them, those nearest the spot where it falls, take the alarm, and these exciting some fear in others more remote, sometimes put a thousand of them in motion; but as, in rising into the air, they assist their wings, for the first few yards, by striking the water with their feet, there is produced by such a number of them, a loud and most singular splashing. It is highly amusing to observe the voracity with which they seize the pieces of fat that fall in their way; the size and quantity of the pieces they take at a meal; the curious chuckling noise which, in their anxiety for dispatch, they always make; and the jealousy with which they view, and the boldness with which they attack, any of their species that are engaged in devouring the finest morsels. They frequently glut themselves so completely, that they are unable to fly; in which case, when they are not relieved by a quantity being disgorged, they endeavour to get on the nearest piece of ice, where they rest until the advancement of digestion restores their wonted powers. Then, if opportunity admit, they return with the same gust to the banquet as before: and,

[page] 531

though numbers of the species may be killed, and allowed to float about among them, they appear unconscious of danger to themselves.

The fulmar never dives, but when incited to it by the appearance of a morsal of fat under water. When in close view of any men, it keeps a continual watch on both the men and its prey; having its feet continually in motion, and yet perhaps not moving at all through the water. Its boldness increases with the numbers of its species that surround it. It is a very hardy bird. Its feathers being thick, it is not easily killed with a blow. Its bite, from the crookedness, strength, and sharpness of its bill, is very severe.

Fulmars differ in colour; some are a dark dirty grey; others are much paler, and totally white on the breast and belly. In size, this bird is a little smaller than a duck. Beneath its feathers is a thick bed of fine grey down.

When carrion is scarce, the fulmars follow the living whale; and sometimes, by their peculiar motions, when hovering at the surface of the water, point out to the fisher the position of the animal of which he is in pursuit. They cannot make much impression on the dead whale, until some more powerful animal tears away the skin: the epidermis and rete mucosum they entirely remove, but the true skin is too tough for them to make way through it.

L l 2

[page] 532

COLYMBUS. Guillemot.

1. COLYMBUS grylle.—Tysté or Doveca. This is a beautifully formed bird. It occurs in considerable numbers in icy situations, at various distances from land. I have never seen it on the ice or on land; but commonly swimming on the water. It is so remarkably watchful, and quick in diving, that if fired at without any precaution being taken to conceal the flash of the powder, it generally escapes the shot. In diving, it uses its wings under water, as in flying. It frequently dips its bill in the water, as if to keep it wet. It feeds on shrimps and small fishes. Its flesh, which is very dark-coloured, tastes a little like the liver of some animals, and is not unpleasant eating. The common colour of this species is black, with a white patch on the coverts of each wing. Some are all over grey, consisting of small alternating patches of black and white. The feet of all are red. In flying, the tail being short, the feet are used as a rudder.

2. COLYMBUS Troile.—Foolish guillemot or Loom. Occurs almost equally common in the Polar Seas with the doveca. It is a clumsy bird, weighing two pounds or upward, and measuring only 16 or 17 inches in length, and 28 inches across the wings, when full spread, in breadth. The colour on the back and wings is principally brownish-black; of the belly and breast, white. On ice or rocks, it sits

3

[page] 533

upright, like the penguin. It cannot rise on the wing in any direction excepting to windward. If it attempts to fly to leeward, it runs for a considerable distance along the surface of the water, and at length falls into it. It swims and dives well. It also evades the shot when fired at; but not so certainly as the doveca. Its feet compensate for the shortness of its tail in flying, and are used as a helm.

3. COLYMBUS glacialis.—Great northern Diver. Seen by Captain Phipps on the Coast of Spitzbergen.

STERNA hirundo.—Great Tern, or Sea Swallow.—This elegant bird is common on the shores of Spitzbergen, but is not met with at a distance from land. The length of its body is 7 or 8 inches, but including the tail, 14. Spread of the wings 29 or 30 inches. It flies with great ease and swiftness, and ascends to a considerable height in the air. It defends its eggs and young with great boldness from the depredations of the arctic gull; and even descends within a yard of the head of any person who ventures to molest them, and startles him with its loud screams. It lays its eggs among the shingle of the beach, above high water-mark, where the full power of the sun falls.

[page] 534

LARUS:—Gull.

1. LARUS rissa. Kittywake.—Occurs in considerable numbers in the Spitzbergen Sea, and follows ships on their passage. It is seen in every part of the Northern Atlantic from Britain to the highest latitudes ever visited. It feeds eagerly on the blubber of the whale, but generally seizes its morsel on the wing.

2. LARUS parasiticus. Arctic gull.—This predatory bird is rarely seen at a distance from the land, except about the parallel of Jan Mayen, where it is observed in constant pursuit of the kittywake. The kittywake being a better fisher than the former, is constantly chaced until it gives up any food it may have procured, which the arctic gull generally catches before it falls into the water. The arctic gull occurs about the shores of Spitzbergen, where it not only feasts itself at the expence of other birds, on food obtained by them, but also preys upon their eggs and young. It is rarely seen in the water; being generally on the wing. It is easily distinguished by two tapering tail-feathers, which extend 5 or 6 inches beyond the rest of the tail.

3. LARUS crepidatus.—Black-toed gull or boat-swain. The habits of this are similar to those of the former species, and it occurs in similar situations.

[page] 535

The two intermediate tail-feathers are much shorter than those of the parasiticus, and not so pointed.

4. LARUS eburneus. (Captain Phipps.)—Snow-bird. This bird is not so elegantly formed as the kittywake, but is more remarkable for its immaculate whiteness. Its length is 19 or 20 inches, breadth across the wings about 3 feet. The feet and legs are black, the bill blackish-green and yellow, orbits red. The young birds have sometimes black spots on the wings.

The snow-bird, though so delicate in its appearance, is almost as ravenous as the fulmar, and as little nice in its food. It is, however, more cautious. It is a constant attendant on the flensing operations of the fishers, where it generally seizes its portion on the wing. It rarely alights in the water, but often sits on the ice, preferring the most elevated situations. Its voice is a loud and disagreeable scream.

5. LARUS glaucus. Burgomaster.—Larus imperiosus might perhaps be a more characteristic name for this lordly bird, and would correspond pretty nearly with the name Burgomaster or Burgermeister, as generally given to it by the Dutch. It may with propriety be called the chief magistrate of the feathered tribe in the Spitzbergen regions, as none of its class dares dispute its authority, when, with unhesitating superiority, it descends on its prey, though in the pos-

[page] 536

session of another. The burgomaster is not a numerous species, and yet it is a general attendant on the whale-fishers whenever any spoils are to be obtained. It then hovers over the scene of action, and, having marked out its morsel, descends upon it and carries it off on the wing. On its descent, the most dainty pieces must be relinquished, though in the grasp of the fulmar, snow-bird, or kittywake. It seldom alights in the water. When it rests on the ice, it selects a hummock, and fixes itself on the highest pinnacle. Sometimes it condescends to take a more humble situation, when it affords any advantage in procuring food. It is a rapacious animal, and when without other food, falls upon the smaller species of birds and eats them. I have found the bones of a small bird in its stomach, and have observed it in pursuit of the rotch.

The burgomaster is a large powerful bird. Its length is about 28 inches, breadth across the wings about 5 feet. Its colour, on the back and wing coverts, is bluish-grey, the rest of the body beautifully white. The bill is of a yellowish colour, with a little red on the lower mandible, and measures 2½ inches in length; the irides are yellow; legs and feet yellowish flesh-red. Its eggs I have found on the beach of Spitzbergen, deposited in the same way as those of the tern.

The kittywake, snow-bird and burgomaster, are sometimes shot for the sake of their feathers, which are

[page] 537

thickly set, fine and valuable. The two latter species being very shy, will not always approach within gunshot. From a sort of house, however, built of snow on any large sheet of ice, they may be shot with more certainty and in greater numbers than by any other contrivance that has been adopted. A piece or two of blubber or kreng being laid as a bait near the hut, which has the appearance of a hummock, they approach within gunshot without fear, and are fired at through small loop-holes made in the hut for the purpose.

TRINGA hypoleucos. Sandpiper.—Seen in considerable flocks on the beach of Spitzbergen.

EMBERIZA nivalis. Snow-bunting. — Occurs not only on the land, but also, less frequently however, on the ice adjacent. To some places on the shore it resorts in large flocks.

FRINGILLA linaria. Lesser Redpole.—On our approach to Spitzbergen, several of this species alighted on different parts of the ship, and were so wearied apparently with being on the wing, though our distance from the land was not above ten miles, that they allowed themselves to be taken alive. How this little creature subsists, and why a bird of such apparent delicacy should resort to such a barren and gelid country, are questions of

[page] 538

some curiosity and difficulty. It must be migratory; and yet how such a small animal, incapable of taking the water, can perform the journey from Spitzbergen to a milder climate, without perishing by the way, is difficult to conceive. Supposing it to take advantage of a favourable gale of wind, it must still be at least 10 hours on the wing before it could reach the nearest part of Norway, an exertion of which one would imagine it to be totally incapable.

SECT. IV.

A brief account of Amphibia, Fishes, Animalcules, &c. inhabiting the Spitzbergen Sea.

Class AMPHIBIA.

SQUALUS borealis. Greenland shark.—This animal has not, I believe, been described. The ventral fins are separate. It is without the anal fin; but has the temporal opening; it belongs, therefore, to the third division of the genus. The spiracles on the neck, are five in number on each side. The colour is cinereous grey. The eyes are the most extraordinary part of this animal. The pupil is emerald green; the rest of the eye blue. To the posterior edge of the pupil, is attached a white vermiform

[page] 539

substance, one or two inches in length. Each extremity of it consists of two filaments; but the central part is single. The sailors imagine this shark is blind, because it pays not the least attention to the presence of a man; and is, indeed, so apparently stupid, that it never draws back when a blow is aimed at it with a knife or lance. Figures 3. and 4. of Plate XV., represent this animal; and Fig. 5. shows the appearance of the eye, with its singular appendage.

The squalus borealis is 12 or 14 feet in length, sometimes more, and 6 or 8 feet in circumference. Its liver, which is remarkably oily, will fill a barrel. In its general form, it very much resembles the dog-fish. The opening of the mouth, which extends nearly across the lower part of the head, is 21 to 24 inches in width. The teeth are serrated in one jaw, and lancet-shaped and denticulated in the other. On each side, there are at least 4 or 5 rows; on one side sometimes 7 or 8.

This shark is one of the foes of the whale. It bites it and annoys it while living, and feeds on it when dead. It scoops hemispherical pieces out of its body, nearly as big as a person's head; and continues scooping and gorging lump after lump, until the whole cavity of its belly is filled. It is so insensible of pain, that though it has been run through the body with a knife and escaped; yet, after a while, I have seen it return to banquet again

[page] 540

on the whale, at the very spot where it received its wounds. The heart is very small. It performs 6 or 8 pulsations in a minute; and continues its beating for some hours after taken out of the body. The body, also, though separated into any number of parts, gives evidence of life for a similar length of time. It is, therefore, extremely difficult to kill. It is actually unsafe to trust the hand in its mouth, though the head be separated from the body. Though the whale-fishers frequently slip into the water where sharks abound, there has been no instance that I have heard of, of their ever having been attacked by the shark. Besides dead whales, the sharks feed on small fishes and crabs. A fish, in size and form resembling a whiting, was found in the stomach of one that I killed; but the process of digestion had gone so far, that its species could not be satisfactorily discovered. In swimming, the tail only is used; the rest of its fins being spread out to balance it, are never observed in motion but when some change of direction is required.

CYCLOPTERUS liparis. The unctuous sucker.—Two of these animals were taken by Captain Phipps to the northward of Spitzbergen.

Class PISCES.

GADUS carbonarius. The Coal-fish.—This fish was also procured by Captain Phipps; which, with

[page] 541

the species last mentioned, formed the whole of the produce of his trawling and fishing, in animals of this kind, during his stay in the vicinity of Spitzbergen. A small species of Gadus, nearly allied to the G. carbonarius, was found by myself among the arctic ice, in the parallel of 78° N*.

MULLUS barbatus?—Taken by a seaman out of the mouth of a seal near Spitzbergen. The body was wholly red; the length about 12 inches. It was boiled for our officers, and proved an excellent dish.

Class ARTICULATA.

GAMMARUS arcticus (Leach).—The characters of this animal (Pl. XVI. Fig. 14), I have been favoured with from Dr Leach. They are as follow: "G. oculis sublunatis; pedum pari tertio, secundo "majori." The actions of this species suggest as a familiar name, the mountebank shrimp. It frequent-

* The only specimen I got of this fish, was put into the hands of Mr William Swainson, who considered it as a variety of the coal-fish; though, from the contraction and change of colour produced, by the spirit in which it was preserved, the lateral line, so essential in the determination of the species, could not be traced. The number of rays in each of the fins of this specimen, was as follows: First dorsal 13, second dorsal 18, third dorsal 20; first anal 22, second anal 20, &c. The third ray of the ventral fin was lengthened into a subulate point; and the hinder dorsal fin rounded, peculiarities not noticed by any author who has described G. Carbonarius.

[page] 542

ly turns over when in the water, with singular celerity, and swims with equal ease in every position. The four feet raised in the figure above the back, are made use of in that position, whenever its back comes in contact with any solid substance. This species occurs in all parts of the Spitzbergen Sea, and at the greatest distance from land; it inhabits the superficial water, and affords food for whales and birds.

GAMMARUS——?—Another small species of this family, was found in large quantities in the stomach and mouth of some mysticete. It is remarkable for the largeness of its eyes.

CANCER Pulex (Linné).—Taken by Captain Phipps in a trawl, near the coast of Spitzbergen.

CANCER Boreas (Phipps.)—This singular species of crab, was first described and figured by Captain Phipps*. It was found in the stomach of a seal. An animal that I have occasionally met with, resembles this species in several of its characters. It is figured (from an indifferent drawing, however,) in Pl. XVI. Fig. 13.

CANCER Ampulla (Phipps).—Found by Captain Phipps† in the stomach of a seal; by myself in the stomach of a shark.

CANCER Nugax (Phipps.)—Taken in the trawl by Captain Phipps, near Moffen island‡.

* See "Voyage towards the North Pole," p. 190.

† Idem, p. 191

‡ Idem, p. 192.

[page] 543

ONISCUS Ceti, (Lin.) LARUNDA Ceti (Leach.) Whale's louse.—This little animal, about half an inch in diameter, firmly fixes itself by its hooked claws, on the skin of the mysticetus. It is found principally under the fin, or in other situations where the skin is tender, and where it is not liable to be dislodged. A similar animal, but smaller, is sometimes found on the body of the narwal.

Class VERMES.

ASCARIS, ECHINORHYNCHUS, TæNIA, &c. Intestina.—Found in various animals inhabiting the northern seas.

ASCIDIA gelatinosa and A. rustica.—Taken by Captain Phipps, in a trawl on the north side of Spitzbergen.

LERNæA branchialis.—Found by Captain Phipps in the gills of the Cyclopterus liparis.

CLIO helicina. (Phipps, p. 195.) Sea-snail.—An animal covered with a delicately beautiful shell, similar in form to that of the nautilus. The diameter is from two-eighths to three-eighths of an inch. It is found in immense quantities near the coast of Spitzbergen, but does not, I believe, occur out of sight of land*.

* See Fig. 11, and 12. of Pl. XVI. In these figures, this animal is magnified to about twice the natural size.

2

[page] 544

CLIO borealis.—Occurs in vast numbers in some situations near Spitzbergen, but is not found generally throughout the Arctic Seas. In swimming, it brings the tips of its fins almost into contact, first on one side and then on the other. I kept several of them alive in a glass of sea-water for about a month, when they gradually wasted away and died*.

SEPIA———? Cuttle-fish.—Found by myself in large quantities in the stomachs of different narwals, and appearing to constitute their principal food. The species not known.

MEDUSA, or Sea-blubber; ANIMALCULA, &c.—A great number of species of these animals occur in the Arctic Seas, and appear immediately or remotely to be the chief subsistence of the greater part of the marine and feathered animals frequenting the Polar regions.

The Greenland Sea, frozen and extensive as it is, teems with life. The variety of the animal creation is not indeed very great; but the quantity of some of the species that occur, is truly immense. A calculation of the number of minute medusæ, in a small district, has already been attempted, (p. 179. of this volume); if to these we add the number of the animalcula that I have observed, the amount, throughout the Spitz-

* See Fig. 10. Pl. XVI., natural size.

[page] 545

bergen Sea, if not surpassing the power of numbers, would at least exceed all the powers of the mind to conceive. The minute medusæ (Pl. XVI. fig. 16.), and moniliformes (fig. 17.), have already been described; the animalcula may be just noticed. Though I could not speak positively to the vitality of both the former substances, yet the animalcula were so active in the water, as to prevent a moment's doubt on the subject. Three kinds of animalcula are figured in Plate XVI, Nos. 18, 19, and 20. No. 18, examined by a double microscope, appeared of the size of a coarse grain of sand. It seemed of a brownish colour, and moved nearly in a direct line. No. 19, about half the size of the former, appeared globular, had a dark-coloured sort of tail, and advanced by a curious zig-zag motion. No. 20. was still smaller: It moved with amazing rapidity, by sudden starts, pausing for an instant between each impulse, and then springing in a new direction.

Besides these five minute animals, figure 15, Plate XVI, represents a beautiful creature that was brought up by the marine-diver, in the Spitzbergen Sea. Its length, excluding the antennæ, which were as long as the body, was one-tenth of an inch in one specimen, and one-fourth of an inch in another. Its body was beautifully transparent, and had quite a crystalline appearance. The antennæ and tail were red. In swimming, it proceeded by starts, and appeared very active.

VOL. I. M m

[page] 546

The economy of these little creatures, as constituting the foundation of the subsistence of the largest animals in the creation, has already been noticed. The common whale feeds on medusæ, cancri, actiniæ, sepiæ, &c. and these feed probably on the minor medusæ and animalcules. The finwhales and dolphins feed principally on herrings, and other small fishes. These subsist on the smaller cancri, medusæ, and animalcules. The bear's most general food is probably the seal; the seal subsists on the cancri, and small fishes; and these on lesser animals of the tribe, or on the minor medusæ and animalcules. Thus the whole of the larger animals depend on these minute beings, which, until the year 1816, when I first entered on the examination of the sea-water, were not, I believe, known to exist in the polar seas. And thus we find a dependent chain of existence, one of the smaller links of which being destroyed, the whole must necessarily perish.

It is not a little interesting to trace the physiology of the preservation of these smaller animals. As the mean temperature of the atmosphere in the Spitzbergen Sea, has been shewn to be 10 or 12 degrees below the freezing point of salt-water, it is evident, that, were the water of the sea stationary, it must, in the course of ages, be frozen to the bottom, and along with it, as a matter of course, all the smaller animals, not having sufficient instinct or

[page] 547

power of motion to enable them to retire into a more southern region. Now, such an event is provided against, by the constant prevalence of a current setting towards the south-west, which carries away the ice into a parallel where it can be dissolved, and occasions a circulation of water into the frozen regions, from a warmer climate. And this circulation of the water is beautifully accomplished: for, while the superficial current is performing its office, in carrying away a portion of ice, an under-current setting to the northward, is acting an equally important part, in affording warmth to the seas of the higher latitudes, and preventing the too great accumulation of the ice. But how is it, it might be asked, when a current in the waters, inhabited by the minor medusæ, is constantly setting to the southward, that these animals are not carried away into a southern region altogether? This question, if we may be allowed to argue hypothetically, admits of an easy solution. Animals, we find, when possessing any power of moving, though they be of the most imperfect kind of organization, generally employ that power by a sort of instinctive faculty, as may best serve the purposes for which they were called into existence. Now, it would be no stretch of commonly received principles, to suppose, that whenever the minor medusæ, &c. are carried to a certain extent southward, they may sink in the water, as far as the stream of the under-current,

[page] 548

and by it be conveyed back again into their proper element. The fact of the olive-green coloured sea-water maintaining a great similarity of position, for many years together, while surface after surface of ice is carried away by the current and dissipated, is in support of this conjecture. Thus, by a most beautiful contrivance, a large portion of the surface of the globe is rendered habitable, which would otherwise be a solid mass of ice; and, by the warmth of the lower stratum of the polar sea, it is rendered congenial to many tribes of animals which must otherwise have incumbered other regions, now affording products useful for the subsistence of man.

MEDUSA——? (Plate XVI, Fig. 3. natural size.) An extremely sensitive animal. When touched, or indeed when the vessel in which it is contained is moved, it shrinks into an irregular globular mass. It is divided into eight segments by as many rows of finny fringes. These, though only perceptible by their iridescence when in motion, are capable of moving the animal through the water. Its colour is greyish-white, but reddish, (pale lake red), in the longitudinal cavity. Occurs in the Spitzbergen Sea.

MEDUSA——? (Pl. XVI. Fig. 5., natural size.) Eight segments. Sensitive. Iridescent fringes. Single cavity. Occurs in the Spitzbergen Sea. Colour similar to the former.

[page] 549

MEDUSA——? (Pl. XVI. Fig. 6. natural size.) Form ovoidal. Eight segments. A double cavity united by a small canal. Sensitive. Iridescent fringes. Found in latitude 75° 40′ N., longitude 5° or 6° west. Colour similar to the former.

MEDUSA pileus. (Pl. XVI. Fig. 4. natural size.) This is one of the most curious of the medusæ. It consists of eight lobes, with a beautifully iridescent finny fringe on the external edge of each. A canal, four-fifths the length of the animal, penetrates the centre of it; and two red cirrhi, which may be extended to the length of nearly a foot, proceed from a crooked cavity in opposite sides. The animal is semi-transparent. Its colour is white, with a blush of red; the finny fringes of deeper red. It is found of various sizes; one specimen taken up in latitude 75° 40′, longitude 5° or 6° W., in a green-coloured sea, was three inches in length.

MEDUSA ———? or Purse-shaped Medusa. (Pl. XVI. Fig. 7. nat. size). The substance of this is tougher than that of any other species which I have examined. It has one large open cavity, and is divided by the finny fringes into eight segments, each alternate pair of which are similar. The colour is a very pale crimson, with waved purple lines; finny fringes deeper crimson. This animal appeared to be almost without sensation. The only evidence it gave of feeling was in an increased vibration of the finny fringes. Though it was cut

3

[page] 550

into pieces, each portion, on which there was any of the fringe, continued, by its incessant play, to give evidence of life during two or three days; after which it became putrescent, and began to waste away. This animal was found in the Spitzbergen sea. I have seen but one specimen.

MEDUSA ———? or Bottle-shaped Medusa. (Pl. XVI. Fig. 8. natural size). Caught in a transparent green sea, in latitude 75° 48′, longitude 8° W. A sensitive animal. Large single cavity. Eight segments. Finny fringes white and iridescent. Form ovoidal, with compressed mouth.

MEDUSA? ———? or Orange-coloured Medusa. (Pl. XVI. Fig. 9. natural size.) This singular species I have seen but once. It was sent me by Captain Bennet of the Venerable, being found in latitude 75° 20′, longitude 11° 50′ E. On the under-side of the right hand extremity, (in the plate), there was a transverse slit or opening. This animal was convex above, and concave beneath. The length was three inches, its breadth nearly an inch; its thickness one-third of an inch. When slit open, it exhibited a number of transverse bands and three cavities. Its colour was a brilliant orange. It was not transparent. It was not tenacious of life; having died, to appearance, soon after it was taken.

ASTERIAS: Star-fish. Several species of this animal occur on the coast of Spitzbergen. Captain Phipps procured, by means of a trawl, specimens of

[page] 551

ASTERIAS papposa, A. rubens, A. ophiura, and A. pectinata.

CHITON ruber. Coat-of-mail-shell. Taken in a trawl by Captain Phipps on the north side of Spitzbergen.

MYA truncata and MYTILUS rugosus. Found on the beach in Smeerenberg Harbour*.

BUCCINUM carinatum. (Phipps, p. 197.) Found also on the beach at Smeerenberg.

TURBO helicinus. (Phipps, p. 198.) Taken up in a trawl on the north side of Spitzbergen.

SERPULA spirorbis and S. triquetra. Found in Smeerenberg Harbour, adhering to dead shells.

SABELLA frustulosa. (Phipps, p. 198.) Taken up in a trawl in on the north side of Spitzbergen.

MILLEPORA polymorpha, and CELLEPORA pumicosa. Found on the beach at Smeerenberg.

SYNOICUM turgens, (Phipps, p. 199.) Procured by means of a trawl on the north side of Spitzbergen.

FLUSTRA pilosa and F. membranacea. Found in Smeerenberg harbour, adhering to stones.

* These two shells, together with the succeeding specimens of shells and zoophytes were found by Captain Phipps.

[page break]

[page 1]

APPENDIX

TO

VOLUME FIRST.

VOL. I. APPENDIX. (a)

[page] 2

No. I.

METEOROLOGICAL TABLES.

1807 Latitude. Therm. Bar. WINDS. Meteros and Weather.
Direction. Force.
April 1 60° 9′ N 43 29.86 N N W to N E Fresh breezes Snow
2 Lerwick. 47 29.90 to N N W Ditto Ditto
3 50 30.04 N. erly Moderate breezes Cloudy
4 60.30 41 29.79 S S W Little wind Ditto
5 60.43 45 29.35 to W Strong breezes Snow
6 Balta Sound, 48 29.65 to N b W Strong gales Rain
7 55 29.99 S erly Moderate Cloudy
8 50 29.78 W Strong breezes Rain
9 38 30.05 Variable Fresh gales Showers of Rain.
10 42 29.70 Ditto Light airs Rain
11 62.34 36 29.21 E S E, E N E Fresh breezes Ditto
12 63.26 33 29.74 E N E Hard gales Ditto
13 63.52 29 29.77 N E Ditto Dry Weather
14 64.20 28 29.90 N E Strong gales Cloudy
15 66.10 25 29.65 to E S E Ditto Ditto
16 66.8 17 29.53 N Hard gales Snow
17 65.24 29 30.08 N Ditto Ditto
18 65.13 32 30.16 N Light airs Cloudy
19 67.21 39 30.00 S Strong breezes Ditto
20 69.47 35 29.97 S S W Fresh breezes Hazy
21 72.4 36 29.96 S S W Ditto Foggy
22 73.40 34 29.90 S W Ditto Ditto
23 75.9 29 29.76 to W b S Strong breezes Clear
24 74.59 24 29.76 N W to E b N Moderate breezes Cloudy
25 75.0 26 29.67 to N Fresh breezes Ditto
26 75.19 26 29.66 N Ditto Ditto
27 75.36 24 29.68 N Light airs Ditto
28 75.30 16 29.50 N E b E Fresh breezes Snow
29 75.20 20 29.48 N Strong gales Ditto
30 75.10 16 29.70 N Ditto Snow showers
May 1 75.20 18 30.05 N to N N W Fresh gales Much snow
2 75.7 28 30.07 S W. erly Light airs Cloudy
3 74.26 20 30.16 to N. erly Strong gales Ditto
4 75.55 14 30.18 N b W to E N E Strong breezes Ditto
5 75.57 18 30.31 to N N E Fresh gales Clear
6 75.47 27 30.20 N N E Moderate breeze Ditto
7 75.51 34 30.00 N Gentle breeze Cloudy
8 76.0 20 29.87 N Fresh breeze Ditto
9 75.31 19 29.80 N Brisk gale Snow
10 75.30 21 29.81 N Fresh gale Ditto
11 75.30 22 29.75 to E N E Fresh breezes Ditto
12 75.20 20 29.81 to N Ditto Ditto
13 75.30 17 29.48 N W. erly Strong breezes Ditto
14 75.22 15 29.46 W N W Fresh breeze Ditto
15 75.22 18 29.47 W N W Fresh breeze Cloudy
16 75.32 26 29.60 S S W Light airs Ditto
17 75.45 24 29.78 S. W. Gentle breeze Ditto

[page] 3

1807 Latitude. Therm. Bar. WINDS. Weather.
Direction. Force.
May 18 75° 50′ 27 29.78 W Gentle breeze Snow
19 75.35 22 29.76 N W to N E Light airs Cloudy
20 75.55 22 29.80 N W to N E Fresh breezes Ditto
21 75.55 22 29.76 N Light airs, calm Ditto
22 76.2 28 29.76 Calm Clear
23 75.58 31 29.66 N Moderate breeze Cloudy
24 75.56 26 29.80 N W Gentle breeze Ditto
25 75.55 29 30.00 N N E Light airs Clear
26 75.55 26 30.01 N E Ditto Ditto
27 75.57 25 29.88 N b E Fresh breeze Cloudy
28 75.56 26 29.91 to N N W Ditto Snow
29 75.56 23 29.84 to N W Ditto Ditto
30 75.55 18 29.78 N W Strong breeze Ditto
31 75.51 22 29.81 N N W Fresh breeze Cloudy
June 1 75.48 25 29.93 Calm Calm Ditto
2 75.46 28 29.99 S E, W S W Moderate breeze Hazy
3 75.49 32 29.88 S W Light airs Ditto
4 75.59 33 29.82 S b W Strong breeze Ditto
5 76.16 32 29.97 to W S W Brisk gales Rain
6 76.20 31 29.97 S E Light airs Rain, fog
7 76.36 30 29.83 N W Ditto Thick fog
8 76.35 28 29.60 S W Ditto Cloudy
9 76.48 32 29.78 W b N Fresh gales Ditto
10 76.48 32 29.79 W b N Light airs Foggy
11 76.50 32 29.88 W N W, S E Nearly calm Clear
12 76.49 32 29.93 E, E S E Fresh breezes Cloudy
13 76.52 29 30.00 E S E Brisk gales Ditto
14 77.0 31 29.97 E Fresh gales Snow
15 76.54 31 29.68 to E N E Ditto Ditto
16 76.50 30 29.65 E N E Fresh breeze Ditto
17 77.0 33 29.66 N E Ditto Ditto
18 77.34 32 29.72 N E Moderate breeze Foggy
19 76.26 34 29.81 N N E, W N W Fresh breezes Ditto
May 1808 1 76.17 24 29.23 N N E to E Strong gales Showers of snow
2 76.50 28 29.50 E to S S E Fresh gales Ditto
3 77.2 28 29.40 to E S E Ditto Snow
4 76.6 27 29.67 E S E Light breeze Cloudy
5 77.20 29 29.54 N. erly Fresh gales Snow
6 78.0 28 29.73 E S E to E N E Strong gales Ditto
7 78.0 26 30.20 to N N W Fresh breezes Cloudy
8 78.0 27 30.23 S E to E Moderate breeze Snow showers
9 78.0 28 30.10 to N N W Strong br. calm Ditto
10 77.50 18 30.54 N N W Light air Cloudy
11 77.50 26 30.45 Calm Calm Ditto
12 77.40 32 29.73 S Fresh gale Fog
13 77.45 25 29.53 Variable Fresh breezes Snow
14 77.50 22 29.47 W, S S W to Moderate br. Ditto

[page] 4

1808 Latitude. Therm. Bar. WINDS. Weather.
Direction. Force.
15 77° 50′ 20 29.50 Variable. to Calm Hazy
16 77.40 24 29.55 W N W to N Moderate breeze Ditto
17 77.30 27 29.60 N Fresh breeze Snow
18 77.50 25 29.60 N Ditto Ditto
19 77.55 24 29.81 to N W b N Strong breezes Cloudy
20 78.4 20 29.80 N. erly Light airs Ditto
21 78.8 26 29.85 W. erly Moderate breeze Snow
22 78.10 29 29.98 Calm. Calm Cloudy
23 78.13 29 29.86 S W Moderate breeze Fog
24 78.4 24 29.78 W N W to N N W Light breezes Clear
25 77.55 26 29.70 N. erly Ditto Cloudy
26 77.50 22 29.80 N W Strong breeze Snow
27 77.58 24 30.09 N W Ditto Ditto
28 78.30 25 30.00 E S E Light breeze Snow showers
29 78.37 24 29.90 Var. W N W to Fresh gales Much snow
30 78.36 32 29.93 N E Light airs Fog, cloudy
31 78.36 26 29.96 N E to Calm Snow showers
June 1 78.37 24 29.99 N E Fresh breeze Snow
2 78.43 36 29.97 N E Nearly calm Fog
3 78.43 28 29.97 Var. calm Ditto Fog
4 78.35 31 29.90 Calm Calm Clear
5 78.25 30 29.90 S S W Fresh breeze Hazy
6 78.20 32 29.83 S. erly Light breeze Fog or snow
7 78.20 29 29.87 S W Ditto Ditto
8 78.10 29 29.88 S. erly Nearly calm Fog, cloudy
9 77.50 27 29.78 Variable. Ditto Cloudy
10 77.18 27 29.79 W N W Light or Mod. br. Clear
11 77.6 30 29.80 S Strong breeze Fog
12 76.37 33 29.83 S. erly Fresh gales Ditto
13 76.35 33 29.90 S S W Fresh gale Haze or fog
14 76.30 34 29.99 S S W Strong breeze Fog
15 75.58 34 30.06 S S W Fresh breeze Fog
May 1809 1 74.15 12 29.68 N E Moderate breeze Frost rime
2 74.5 10 29.84 N E b N to Strong gale Ditto
3 73.54 20 29.87 to N E b E Strong gales Snow
4 74.10 36 29.94 to S E b S Fresh gales Ditto
5 74.10 36 30.00 to S b E to Light breezes Clear
6 73.49 32 29.38 E S E to S W Light breezes Rain
7 73.48 25 29.53 S W. N Fresh Gales Snow
8 73.38 27 29.72 to W. to Fresh breezes Cloudy
9 73.50 21 29.76 to N N E Fresh gales Snow showers
10 74.10 19 29.80 N E, calm to Calm Snow
11 74.45 13 30.20 N, N N E Fresh breezes Snow showers
12 75.0 16 30.15 N N E, calm Strong br. calm Cloudy
13 75.8 16 30.04 W N W, W S W Fresh breezes Ditto
14 75.48 19 30.00 Variable Moderate breeze Ditto
15 76.3 20 30.02 E. erly Nearly calm Ditto

[page] 5

1809 Latitude. Therm. Bar. WINDS. Weather.
Direction. Force.
16 76° 4′ 22 29.78 E to Calm Snow
17 76.8 30 29.35 E S E Strong gale Ditto
18 76.6 23 29.79 to N N E, W N W to Moderate br. Snow showers
19 76.16 32 29.65 to S S W Fresh breezes Clear
20 76.30 31 30.03 to N W Ditto Fog, snow
21 76.26 31 30.12 Var. E S E Moderate breezes Cloudy
22 76.32 31 29.73 to S E Ditto Fog
23 76.24 21 30.06 to W, N Strong gales Cloudy
24 77.8 17 29.98 N. erly to Moderate br. Ditto
25 77.20 20 29.87 N N W Light breeze A little snow
26 77.20 17 29.87 N W b N to Strong gale Snow
27 77.20 19 29.80 N N E Strong gale Ditto
28 77.20 19 30.04 N N E Fresh gale Cloudy
29 79.0 20 30.05 N E. erly Ditto Ditto
30 79.0 20 30.05 to N. to Strong gales Snow showers
31 79.0 23 30.06 N E. erly Fresh gale Ditto
June 1 78.56 23 30.02 N N E Ditto Cloudy
2 79.4 22 30.24 N N E Fresh breeze Ditto
3 79.4 28 30.20 E. erly Nearly calm Clear
4 79.4 26 30.10 E. erly to Moderate br. Cloudy
5 79.0 24 30.06 N E to light airs Ditto
6 79.0 30 29.95 N E Light breeze Haze, snow
7 79.4 31 29.88 S E. erly Ditto Cloudy, snow
8 79.8 29 29.88 S E to Calm Snow showers
9 79.2 27 29.86 to W Strong gales Ditto
10 79.0 25 29.93 S W Moderate breeze Ditto
11 79.2 30 30.06 S W. erly Ditto Snow
12 78.56 29 30.07 to S Ditto A little snow
13 78.52 31 29.97 to W Ditto Fog showers
14 78.56 31 29.82 W Nearly calm Fog
15 79.0 30 29.68 S E Fresh breeze Snow showers
16 79.0 32 29.50 to E N E to Light breezes Much snow, fog
17 79.0 32 29.62 to S, S S W to Fresh breezes Snow, fog
18 79.30 27 29.90 N N W, S S W Moderate breezes Clear
19 79.30 27 29.91 S W. erly Strong breeze Snow showers
20 79.50 42 29.67 to E N E Nearly calm Clear
21 79.50 30 29.81 to S S W, S S E to Fresh breezes Fog
22 79.45 32 29.81 Variable Light breeze Fog, snow
23 79.45 32 29.82 Ditto Ditto Ditto
24 79.57 32 29.59 N N W, var. Moderate breeze Snow showers
25 79.30 34 29.64 Variable to Fresh breeze Fog showers
26 79.0 32 29.84 W N W, S Strong breezes Snow, fog
27 78.50 32 29.94 Var. calm Nearly calm Ditto
28 78.48 32 29.82 Variable Ditto Cloudy, fog
29 78.36 32 29.82 to S. erly to Fresh breezes Cloudy
30 77.40 35 29.80 to W N W Moderate breezes Thick fog

[page] 6

THERMOMETER. BAROMETER.
1810 Latitude. Longitude. Max. Min. No. of. Obs. Med. Max. Min. Med.
April 9 74°.6 14.37 E 14 10 3 12.0 30.00 29.94 29.97
10 73.41 16.0 12 10 3 11.0 30.14 30.00 30.07
11 74.16 14.47 20 16 3 18.0 30.00 29.88 29.94
12 73.42* 14.0 24 14 3 20.0 29.88 29.80 29.84
13 73.59 16.0 8 6 3 7.0 30.14 29.80 29.97
14 74.50 11.30 17 12 3 14.7 30.14 30.02 30.08
15 75.4 9.38 14 10 2 12.0 30.02 30.26 30.14
16 75.46 9.14 15 10 3 12.6 30.26 30.08 30.17
17 76.6 9.30 10 4 3 7.7 30.08 29.90 29.99
18 76.18 8.50 5 0 3 4.6 29.92 29.90 29.91
19 76.16* 9.0 12 10 3 10.7 30.07 29.92 30.00
20 76.22 9.0 21 16 3 19.3 30.07 29.92 29.83
21 76.37 11.0 21 8 4 17.0 29.60 29.58 29.59
22 76.17 11.0 8 5 3 6.0 29.60 30.00 29.80
23 76.16 10.50 16 11 3 13.6 30.12 30.00 30.06
24 76.20 10.30 28 19 4 23.0 30.24 29.72 29.98
25 76.30 11.10 31 18 3 26.0 29.72 29.30 29.51
26 76.25 11.15 20 17 3 18.7 29.68 29.30 29.49
27 77.10 10.20 23 17 3 20.6 29.85 29.68 29.76
28 77.0 10.40 21 11 3 16.0 29.91 29.85 29.88
29 76.50 10.0 18 14 3 16.0 29.98 29.91 29.95
30 76.41 9.30 22 12 3 17.7 30.04 29.98 30.01
May 1 76.58 10.0 16 12 3 14.7 30.04 30.00 30.02
2 77.10 10.0 14 8 3 10.7 30.00 29.96 29.98
3 77.39* 10.10 16 13 3 14.0 30.02 29.98 30.00
4 77.30 9.50 15 12 3 13.6 30.05 30.01 30.03
5 77.14 10.0 16 16 3 16.0 30.01 29.81 29.91
6 77.20* 9.50 26 22 3 23.7 29.81 29.57 29.69
7 77.28* 10.0 25 21 3 23.0 29.75 29.50 29.62
8 77.10 9.50 21 18 3 19.7 30.09 29.75 29.92
9 77.30 8.0 19 17 3 18.3 30.22 30.09 30.16
10 77.50 5.40 20 17 3 18.6 30.30 30.22 30.26
11 78.15 5.35 22 19 2 20.5 30.34 30.32 30.33
12 78.15 5.30 28 19 3 23.0 30.34 30.33 30.33
13 78.25 5.50 20 15 3 18.0 30.40 30.33 30.37
14 78.48* 5.30 20 12 3 15.7 30.40 30.21 30.30
15 79.0 5.0 18 15 3 17.4 30.21 29.86 30.03
16 78.45 4.30 20 19 3 19.3 29.86 29.66 29.76
17 78.30 4.0 17 16 3 16.7 29.88 29.76 29.82
18 78.25 4.10 18 16 3 17.0 29.89 29.86 29.88
19 78.35 5.0 18 17 3 17.6 29.90 29.84 29.87

[page] 7

1810 WINDS. Weather and Meteors. Situation and Remarks.
Direction. Force.
April 9 N E. erly Hard gales Snow showers. At sea
10 to E S E Fresh, light br. Ditto Ditto
11 to E to Strong gales Showers cryst. snow Drift ice
12 E. erly Strong gales Ditto At sea, no ice
13 to N N E to Moderate br. Snow showers Ditto
14 to N Fresh gales Shower cryst. snow Bay ice
15 N to E S E to Light airs Snow Ditto
16 Calm to Calm Showers of Snow Bay and drift ice
17 Variable Fresh breezes Ditto Crowded ice
18 N W, S W Fresh gales Ditto Much ice
19 W. erly Light br. calm Cloudy Very crowded ice
20 E S E, var. Light br. fr. gales Some cryst. snow Ice more open.
21 E N E to N Strong gales Constant cryst. snow Much bay and drift ice
22 N N W, N W to Light breezes Frost rime Bay ice
23 N. erly, var. Light breezes Clear Beset in bay ice
24 E S E to Fresh gale Snow showers Bay and drift ice
25 Var. W N W Strong ga. calm Coarsely cryst. snow Floes of Bay ice
26 W N W to Moderate breeze A little snow Open drift ice
27 to N. erly to Fresh breeze Showers cryst. snow Ice streams
28 W N W to W to Light breezes Ditto Ditto
29 to S S W. var. Calm to fresh br. Much snow Much ice near
30 Variable Light or fresh br. Thick snow showers Ice streams
May 1 N W to E, S E Calm to str. galas Much cryst. snow A pack of ice near
2 to N E to Light breeze Snow showers Bay floes, & drift ice
3 to N N W, N N E to Strong gales Cryst. snow Ditto
4 to N b W to Moderate breeze Some snow showers Ditto
5 to N E Light br. brisk ga. Coarse cyst. snow Much bay & drift ice
6 to N b E, N b W Fresh or strong ga. Clear, cloudy Ditto
7 to N b E, N. erly Strong gales Snow showers Drift ice
8 N b E to N N W Fresh gales Showers cryst. snow Crowded drift ice
9 N. erly Ditto Ditto Sea open
10 N W, N to Moderate br. Ditto A little drift ice
11 N N W to W. erly Light airs, calm Clear Near much ice
12 to N E. erly to fresh breeze Cloudy Ditto
13 N N E to N N W to Strong gales Showers cryst. snow Ice streams
14 to N W b N Brisk gales Ditto Ditto
15 N. erly to Strong gales Snow showers Ditto
16 N W b N, N to Brisk gales A little snow Ditto
17 to N E to Strong gales Ditto Ditto
18 N E. erly Fresh breezes Showers cryst. snow Floes and drift ice
19 to Variable Ditto Some snow Ice streams

[page] 8

THERMOMETER. BAROMETER.
1810 Latitude. Longitude. Max. Min. No. of Obs. Med. Max. Min. Med.
May 20 79°. 5′* 4.0 24 15 3 19.7 29.97 29.90 29.93
21 79.15 3.0 26 16 3 21.0 29.93 29.76 29.85
22 79.20 3.30 22 20 3 21.0 29.76 29.61 29.68
23 79.15 3.50 24 22 2 23.0 29.74 29.58 29.66
24 79.0 4.0 18 14 3 16.3 29.96 29.74 29.85
25 78.45* 4.10 E 16 12 3 13.7 30.02 29.96 29.99
26 78.53 3.40 16 12 3 13.3 29.99 29.84 29.92
27 78.57 3.28 17 16 3 16.4 29.85 29.72 29.78
28 78.50 3.0 18 10 3 14.7 30.05 29.85 29.95
29 78.45 2.50 18 12 2 15.0 30.12 29.93 30.03
30 78.50 2.50 28 27 3 27.7 29.93 29.61 29.77
31 79.0 2.50 36 20 2 28.0 29.75 29.47 29.61
June 1 78.34* 3.0 24 20 3 22.0 30.04 29.75 29.89
2 78.24 4.0 28 26 2 27.0 29.95 29.86 29.90
3 78.20 3 30 26 16 2 21.0 29.91 29.88 29.89
4 78.15 3.0 21 17 2 19.0 29.94 29.91 29.93
5 78.12 3.20 27 15 3 21.0 29.92 29.84 29.88
6 78.8 3.20 26 22 2 24.0 29.84 29.75 29.80
7 78.4 3.10 30 21 2 25.5 29.75 29.73 29.74
8 78.0 3.10 25 24 2 24.5 29.74 29.69 29.71
9 77.55* 3.0 30 27 2 28.5 29.68 29.64 29.66
10 77.54 3.5 27 25 2 26.0 29.78 29.68 29.73
11 77.48* 3.0 35 27 3 31.3 29.85 29.78 29.82
12 77.47 3.10 34 30 2 32.0 29.87 29.85 29.86
13 77.47 3.10 34 30 3 32.0 29.97 29.86 29.91
14 77.50 3.0 34 30 3 32.3 30.12 29.97 30.05
15 77.55 3.10 35 28 2 31.5 30.20 30.12 30.16
16 77.59 3.40 30 28 2 29.0 30.25 30.20 30.23
17 78.4 3.30 31 30 2 30.5 30.20 29.97 30.08
18 78.7 3.20 32 30 3 30.4 29.97 29.68 29.82
19 78.0 3.45 33 27 3 29.3 29.68 29.60 29.64
20 77.58 3.33 39 27 3 33.0 29.62 29.60 29.61
21 78.0 3.44 32 25 3 29.3 29.72 29.62 29.67
22 77.50 4.10 28 27 2 27.5 29.93 29.72 29.82
23 76.55 7.30 31 30 2 30.5 30.06 29.93 30.00
24 76.40 6.30 35 32 3 33.7 30.04 29.94 29.99
25 76.10 7.0 32 31 3 31.7 30.14 29.88 30.01
26 75.40 6.10 33 32 2 32.5 29.74 29.62 29.68
27 75.0 8.30 32 32 2 32.0 29.86 29.74 29.80
28 74.20 12.30 39 35 2 37.0 29.86 29.78 29.82
29 73.0 12.28 35 33 3 34.0 29.84 29.78 29.81
30 70.50 10.20 36 35 2 35.5 30.24 92.84 30.04

[page] 9

1810 WINDS. Weather and Meteors. Situation and Remarks.
Direction Force.
May 20 N to Light breeze Some cryst. snow Fields and floes
21 to W. erly, S S W Light breezes Clear Ditto
22 to S W to Fresh gales Showers cryst. snow Ditto
23 to N E or E. erly to Calm Coarse cryst. snow Many floes
24 N E. erly Brisk gales Showers cryst. snow Heavy drift ice
25 to N W Ditto Showers of snow Floes and drift ice
26 W N W to Light breeze Some snow Field and drift ice
27 N. erly, var. Light airs Fine cryst. snow Fields and floes
28 E. erly, var. Nearly calm Cloudy Ditto
29 E. erly, S. erly Fresh or light br. Some snow Ship embayed among do.
30 S Fresh gale Snow showers Ditto
31 N. erly Calm, fresh gales Clear Ditto
June 1 N W b N, S. erly Ditto Ditto Field and floes
2 E to N N E to Light breeze Coarse cryst. snow Floes and drift ice
3 to N b W Light breeze Small snow Fields, floes, & drift ice
4 N. erly Moderate breeze Cloudy Floes and drift ice
5 to N N E, N N W Ditto Snow Crowded drift ice
6 N. erly Light breeze Snow showers Ship best by a field, &c.
7 N, N N W to Strong gales Some snow Ditto
8 N b W to N W to Fresh gales Snow showers Field and drift ice
9 W N W Fresh gales Ditto Ice open, field, &c.
10 to W. Calm, moderate br. Some snow Field and floes
11 N W, W b S Light breeze Fog Ditto
12 to S b E, var. to Moderate breeze Hazy Ditto
13 S W to S E Light airs Fine clear weather Ditto
14 to W, var. to Moderate breeze Fog showers Fields and drift ice
15 S S W, S E, var. to Calm Clear Ditto
16 S to W, var. to Moderate breeze A little snow Floes and drift ice
17 W N W, to S b W Fresh gales Some snow Field, floes, &c.
18 S to W N W to Moderate breeze Fog, snow Ditto
19 to N N W Strong or light breeze Some snow Ditto
20 N W, N E. erly to Calm Cloudy Ditto
21 N E b N to Moderate breeze Ditto Floes and drift ice
22 to N W b N to Fresh breeze Clear In an open pack
23 Variable to Moderate breeze Ditto Ice streams
24 S. erly Light airs, calm Showers of snow Sea open
25 Var. E S E to Fresh gales Ditto A pack of ice near
26 to S, N W to Fresh breeze Snow, fog No ice
27 to S, S W Strong ga. mod. br. A little snow Much ice
28 S, N W Fresh gales Rain At sea
29 S, N W Calm to str. ga. Some snow Ditto
30 to S W to Light breeze A little snow Ditto

VOL. I. APPENDIX. (b)

[page] 10

THERMOMETER. BAROMETER.
1811 Latitude. Longitude. Max. Min. No. of Obs. Med. Max. Min. Med.
April 1 69°.41′* 3.31 W 18 15 3 16.3 30.13 30.00 30.06
2 69.40 1.11 E 23 15 3 19.3 30.24 30.12 30.18
3 70.22* 3.23 30 27 3 28.7 29.95 29.70 29.83
4 70.33* 5.4 30 25 3 27.7 29.88 29.77 29.82
5 70.49 7.15 14 10 3 11.6 29.88 29.69 29.79
6 71.25 10.53 27 10 3 18.0 29.69 29.50 29.60
7 71.29 10.39 28 28 3 28.0 29.50 29.50 29.50
8 70.56 10.30 30 28 3 28.7 29.70 29.50 29.60
9 70.25* 8.15 24 15 3 19.0 30.00 29.70 29.85
10 70.32* 6.58 11 8 3 10.4 30.18 30.00 30.09
11 70.44 6.26 25 17 3 21.3 30.26 30.18 30.22
12 70.52* 6.0 27 25 3 26.0 30.25 30.19 30.22
13 70.18* 8.57 29 27 3 27.7 30.19 30.14 30.16
14 70.52* 8.59 34 25 3 28.3 30.23 30.19 30.21
15 72.36* 13.30 34 26 3 30.0 30.23 30.02 30.13
16 74.31 16.32 37 33 3 35.4 30.02 29.82 29.92
17 75.34 15.4 34 32 3 33.0 29.82 29.74 29.78
18 75.34 13.46 34 27 3 31.3 29.89 29.66 29.77
19 75.59 12.50 32 22 3 26.3 30.12 29.89 30.01
20 76.21* 12.0 12 10 3 10.6 30.16 30.12 30.14
21 76.32 11.0 14 12 3 13.0 30.24 30.16 30.20
22 76.28 10.50 15 10 3 13.0 30.39 30.24 30.32
23 76.34* 10.20 25 15 3 18.4 30.47 30.31 30.39
24 76.45 10.45 27 20 3 23.0 30.31 29.97 30.14
25 76.58 10.20 22 19 3 20.3 29.97 29.82 29.89
26 77.0* 10.20 14 5 3 9.0 30.04 29.92 29.98
27 76.58 10.0 12 12 2 12.0 30.12 30.04 30.08
28 77.4 8.50 26 16 3 20.7 30.17 30.10 30.14
29 77.0 8.50 23 16 3 20.3 30.10 30.05 30.07
30 77.8 8.48 18 16 3 17.0 30.12 30.06 30.09
May 1 77.15 8.20 21 13 3 16.7 30.17 30.12 30.15
2 77.17* 8.10 23 15 3 18.3 30.17 30.02 30.09
3 77.22 8.0 23 19 3 21.7 30.02 29.81 29.92
4 77.27 7.50 23 19 3 21.0 29.81 29.73 29.77
5 77.34* 7.50 25 11 3 19.0 29.74 29.71 29.72
6 77.32* 7.58 12 10 3 10.6 29.79 29.74 29.77
7 77.28 8.4 10 8 3 9.0 29.91 29.79 29.85
8 77.24 8.10 11 5 3 8.7 30.02 29.91 29.96
9 77.26 8.10 24 20 3 22.0 30.05 30.02 30.04
10 77.10* 8.10 22 14 3 18.7 30.12 30.05 30.08
11 77.6 8.3 10 9 3 9.3 30.15 30.07 30.11
12 77.1* 8.5 23 17 3 20.0 30.07 29.81 29.94
13 77.4 8.10 31 11 3 20.0 29.81 29.63 29.72
14 77.2 8.15 13 10 3 11.6 29.83 29.68 29.76
15 77.2 8.56 16 12 3 13.7 29.94 29.83 29.88
16 77.0 8.59 24 19 3 21.0 29.95 29.87 29.91

[page] 11

1811 WINDS. Meteors and Weather. Situation and Remarks.
Direction. Force.
April 1 W b N to N b W Fresh breezes Clear At sea
2 Variable to Calm Some snow Ice streams
3 S S W to W N W Fresh br. to st. ga. Much snow Drift ice
4 W to N N W to Moderate br. Cloudy Ice near
5 N N W Fresh gales Snow, frost rime Ditto
6 to W N W, E to Light br. hard ga. Snow showers No ice
7 to N E Very hard gales Some snow At sea
8 N E Very hard gale Some hail Ditto
9 to N to Fresh gales Snow showers Ditto
10 to N N E to Strong gales Ditto A little ice
11 to N E to Fresh gales Some snow showers Drift ice
12 N E, N E b N Fresh gales Ditto Ice streams
13 N N E to W N W to Calm Cloudy Ditto
14 Var. E. erly to Strong gales Snow showers Sea open
15 E S E to S S W Fresh gales Clear Bay ice
16 to W S W to Strong gales Hazy A little drift ice
17 to S S W to Fresh gales Rain A pack of ice near
18 to W Strong gales Some snow In a bight of ice
19 W N W to S S W to Calm Snow showers Among drift ice
20 W S W to N N E Fresh br. light br. Clear Much drift ice
21 E b N Nearly calm Ditto Much ice
22 E. erly, W N W to Moderate breeze A little snow Crowded ice
23 W N W to Calm Clear Ship beset
24 E S E, W N W to Fresh gale Much snow Bay and heavy ice
25 to N to E N E Light br. strong ga. Ditto Crowded ice
26 to N N W to Light breeze Some snow showers Ditto
27 N E. erly to Fresh gale Ditto Ditto
28 N E to N N W to Light breeze Clear Ice more open
29 to N N E, W N W to Calm Snow showers Ice crowded
30 S S W to S E Fresh breezes Continual snow Ship frozen up
May 1 N N E to S E Moderate breeze Snow showers Ditto
2 to E N E Ditto A little snow Ship beset
3 to E S E Fresh breezes Snow showers Ditto
4 to N E Fresh gales Much snow Ditto
5 Variable to Calm Snow showers Ditto
6 N W. erly Fresh breezes Ditto Ditto
7 N W b W Strong gales Ditto Ditto
8 N W to Strong breeze Cryst. snow Ditto
9 S S W to W N W Fresh gales Snow showers Ditto
10 to N N W to Fresh breeze Ditto Ditto
11 to N W Fresh gales A little snow Ditto
12 S b E to S E b S to Light airs Ditto Ditto
13 to S S W, W b S Hard gales Snow showers Ditto
14 to W N W Strong gales Ditto Ice more open
15 W N W, var. Fresh gales Much small snow Ice rather open
16 E. erly Calm, light breeze Snow showers Ditto

[page] 12

THERMOMETER. BAROMETER.
1811 Latitude. Longitude. Max. Min. No. of Obs. Med. Max. Min. Med.
May 17 77°.0′ 9.0 E 24 16 3 21.4 29.90 29.80 29.85
18 76.46 8.46 23 20 3 21.3 30.00 29.90 29.95
19 76.54 8.38 23 22 3 22.7 29.97 29.87 29.92
20 77.5 8.30 22 20 3 21.0 29.87 29.77 29.82
21 77.20 8.28 24 20 3 22.3 29.89 29.78 29.84
22 77.22 8.0 33 24 3 27.0 29.88 29.68 29.78
23 77.16 8.16 24 23 3 23.4 30.11 29.88 30.00
24 77.14 8.50 28 23 3 25.0 30.16 30.07 30.11
25 77.24 9.10 26 23 3 24.6 30.07 29.94 30.00
26 78.0 9.50 27 24 3 25.7 29.94 29.88 29.91
27 78.15 9.30 23 20 3 21.7 29.88 29.86 29.87
28 78.20 9.30 25 21 3 23.0 29.99 29.88 29.94
29 78.22* 9.27 24 21 3 22.3 30.08 29.99 30.03
30 78.28 5.40 23 21 3 21.6 30.09 30.03 30.06
31 78.34 5.35 29 24 3 26.7 30.03 29.98 30.01
June 1 78.34 5.38 26 24 3 25.0 30.04 30.01 30.03
2 78.36 6.10 23 22 3 22.3 30.04 30.00 30.02
3 78.34 6.10 34 28 3 31.3 30.00 29.96 29.98
4 78.38 5.58 34 24 3 28.0 29.96 29.90 29.93
5 78.29 5.54 34 23 3 29.7 29.90 29.82 29.86
6 78.40 6.10 29 28 2 28.5 29.82 29.71 29.76
7 79.20 8.0 32 30 3 30.7 29.71 29.63 29.67
8 79.10 7.50 30 29 3 29.4 29.78 29.63 29.71
9 78.58 7.0 31 30 3 30.3 29.94 29.78 29.86
10 78.58 6.58 38 31 3 33.6 29.95 29.94 29.94
11 78.58* 6.0 32 30 3 31.0 29.94 29.93 29.94
12 78.56 5.50 30 26 3 28.0 29.95 29.91 29.93
13 78.40 5.30 31 27 3 29.0 29.91 29.82 29.87
14 78.45 5.15 33 28 3 30.3 29.82 29.76 29.79
15 78.45 5.13 34 32 3 32.7 29.80 29.77 29.78
16 78.42 5.10 35 30 3 33.0 29.85 29.80 29.83
17 78.40 5.8 34 30 3 32.4 29.87 29.85 29.86
18 78.36 5.10 31 30 3 30.3 29.89 29.87 29.88
19 78.15* 5.4 33 29 3 30.7 29.91 29.89 29.90
20 78.10 5.0 37 31 3 33.6 29.92 29.77 29.84
21 78.15 5.0 32 31 3 32.0 29.77 29.62 29.70
22 78.11 5.15 37 33 3 35.3 29.64 29.62 29.63
23 78.17 5.25 34 32 3 32.7 29.67 29.64 29.65
24 78.20 5.26 35 33 3 34.0 29.68 29.59 29.64
25 78.21 5.26 35 30 3 33.0 29.59 29.50 29.54
26 78.35 5.54 33 32 3 32.4 29.64 29.58 29.61
27 78.15 5.50 36 34 2 35.0 29.73 29.53 29.63
28 78.4 5.0 34 30 3 32.3 30.02 29.73 29.88
29 78.0* 5.15 35 30 3 32.7 30.10 30.02 30.06
30 78.50 6.40 37 34 3 35.3 30.02 29.94 29.98

[page] 13

1811 WINDS. Meteors and Weather. Situation and Remarks.
Direction. Force.
May 17 N. erly Moderate breezes Much snow Ice rather open
18 N. erly, var. Light breezes Ditto Ditto
19 to S E. erly to Strong gales Some snow Ditto
20 S E. erly Hard gales Much small snow Ditto
21 to N E. erly to Calm Clear Ditto
22 to S E. erly Moderate breezes A little snow Ditto
23 N, var. Light breezes Clear Ditto
24 to N W Ditto Cloudy Ditto
25 N W. erly to Fresh breezes Some snow Ditto
26 to N N W to Strong gales Clear, cloudy Ship at liberty
27 N b W Hard gale Some snow showers A little ice
28 N b W Strong gale Cloudy Ditto
29 N b W Ditto Clear Ditto
30 to N N W, var. Fresh breezes Cloudy Near a pack of ice
31 to N W. erly to Light breezes Snow showers Loose ice
June 1 W b N to N N E Light to fresh br. Some snow showers Floes, loose ice
2 N. erly to Moderate breeze Cloudy, hazy Drift ice
3 Variable Light breezes, calm Thick snow showers Scattered drift ice
4 E. erly to N to Light breezes Snow showers Ditto
5 N W. erly, var. Fresh to light br. Hazy, some snow Ditto
6 N N E to E N E to Fresh gales Snow showers Ditto
7 to S E Strong gales Snow showers, hazy Ditto
8 to S b E Fresh gales Snow, hazy Sea open, ice near
9 to S S W to Moderate breezes A little snow Ditto
10 to E S E Light breezes Cloudy, snow Ditto
11 to N E. erly to Moderate breeze Clear Ditto
12 N E. erly Moderate breeze Clear, cloudy Ditto
13 N E. erly Light airs Small showers snow Ditto
14 Variable to Calm Rain, baze Drift ice
15 E. erly, S E to Light airs Cloudy Steams of drift ice
16 Variable to Calm Haze, fog Ditto
17 N N E to Fresh breeze Clear, hazy Sea open, ice in sight
18 N b E Fresh gale Clear, cloudy Ditto
19 N b E Fresh breeze Cloudy, clear Sea open
20 to W, S S W to Light breezes Fog showers Drift ice, floes
21 S W. erly to Calm Ditto Ditto
22 S E. erly, var. Light airs, calm Small rain Loose ice
23 E. erly, S S W to Moderate breeze Fog showers Ditto
24 to S, W. erly Light breeze to calm Fog, clear Much drift ice
25 Variable to Moderate breezes Snow showers Ditto
26 N W to S S E to Fresh breezes snow, fog Field, drift ice
27 to S S W, N W b W Fresh or Mod. br. Ditto Ditto
28 to S W, S S E Fresh ga. light br. Clear, fog Ditto
29 to E. erly to Fresh breeze Fog, snow Ditto
30 E. erly to Strong breeze Ditto Sea open

[page] 14

THERMOMETER. BAROMETER.
1811 Latitude. Longitude. Max. Min. Med. of 3-4 Obs. Max. Min. Med.
July 1 78°.40′ 7.18 E 38 31 3 35.0 30.09 29.99 30.04
2 78.20 6.30 36 33 3 34.3 30.13 30.08 30.11
3 78.0 6.0 37 35 2 36.0 30.08 29.96 30.02
4 77.58 5.40 42 35 3 39.7 29.96 29.88 29.92
5 77.56* 6.0 42 41 2 41.5 29.96 29.91 29.93
6 77.48 6.58 44 36 2 40.0 30.03 29.96 30.00
7 77.48 7.20 45 36 3 41.0 30.07 30.03 30.05
8 76.36 9.20 40 38 2 39.0 30.03 29.98 30.00
9 75.40 11.36 42 39 3 40.0 29.98 29.98 29.98
10 75.15 12.0 40 38 2 39.0 29.98 29.92 29.95
11 74.52* 11.0 41 40 3 40.3 29.99 29.95 29.97
12 74.10 11.0 42 40 3 41.3 29.95 29.85 29.99
13 73.10 9.40 42 39 3 40.4 29.89 29.85 29.87
14 72.17 8.27 46 36 3 41.0 29.99 29.89 29.94
15 72.10* 6.57 44 40 2 42.0 30.10 29.99 30.05
1812 May 1 74.30 15.13 28 20 3 25.0 30.28 30.20 30.24
2 75.23 14.25 30 19 3 23.7 30.37 29.60 29.98
3 75.35 10.43 14 13 3 13.3 29.70 29.40 29.55
4 74.36 10.0 13 12 3 12.7 29.89 29.70 29.80
5 73.41 10.40 13 12 3 12.6 29.81 29.60 29.70
6 73.10 10.18 21 10 3 17.0 29.76 29.60 29.68
7 72.38 10.19 23 21 3 22.0 29.91 29.76 29.84
8 73.33 10.21 26 22 3 24.0 30.00 29.91 29.95
9 73.57 10.21 26 24 3 25.0 30.10 30.00 30.05
10 74.28 9.37 30 25 3 27.0 30.10 29.96 30.03
11 75.36* 8.8 32 30 3 30.7 29.96 29.86 29.91
12 75.38 8.20 31 23 3 27.0 29.86 29.80 29.83
13 75.52* 9.20 24 22 4 22.7 29.83 29.77 29.80
14 76.12 10.20 26 20 4 23.3 29.88 29.79 29.84
15 76.15* 9.0 32 30 3 30.6 29.79 29.60 29.69
16 76.20 9.40 30 30 3 30.0 29.67 29.50 29.59
17 76.7* 9.30 22 20 3 21.0 29.85 29.67 29.76
18 76.37* 10.45 30 17 3 22.0 29.84 29.74 29.79
19 76.30 10.45 20 19 3 19.7 29.98 29.84 29.91
20 76.30 10.30 20 18 3 18.7 30.03 29.91 29.97
21 76.30 10.0 19 19 3 19.0 29.91 29.73 29.82
22 76.20 10.0 21 20 3 20.4 29.78 29.66 29.72
23 76.10* 10.0 25 24 3 24.3 29.95 29.78 29.87
24 76.5 10.0 30 25 3 27.0 30.03 29.95 29.99
25 75.58* 10.0 32 27 4 30.0 30.09 30.03 30.06
26 75.50* 9.40 34 32 3 32.6 30.15 30.09 30.12
27 75.57 9.0 27 25 3 26.0 30.22 30.15 30.18
28 75.50 9.20 30 28 3 29.0 30.28 30.22 30.25
29 76.0 9.20 31 26 3 29.0 30.30 30.28 30.29
30 76.20 10.0 30 27 3 28.7 30.32 30.30 30.31
31 76.30 10.50 29 27 3 28.0 30.34 30.32 30.33

[page] 15

1811 WINDS. Meteors and Weather. Situation and Remarks.
Direction. Force.
July 1 E. erly, N W, S W Light to mod. br. Snow, fog, cloudy Sea open, a pack near
2 S W, S S W Moderate breezes Fog, clear Drift ice
3 to S S E Ditto Cloudy, rain Ditto
4 to S E b E to Fresh breezes Clear Very loose drift ice
5 to S S W to Moderate breeze Clear, fog showers Sea open, drift ice
6 S. erly to Light breeze Fog Drift ice
7 S. erly var. Light airs, calm Fog, clear Croweded drift ice
8 W. erly to S S W Fresh gale Fog No ice
9 S W, var. Fresh breeze, calm Ditto Ditto
10 S W to S S E Fresh br. mod. br. Hazy Ditto
11 S W, var. Light breeze, calm Rain, fog Drift ice
12 E. rly Light breeze Clear, fog Ditto
13 to S E to Fresh breeze Fog At sea
14 S E, W Moderate br. calm Very foggy Ditto
15 to S S W to Moderate breeze Thick fog Ditto
1812 May 1 W N W to N N W Fresh gales Cloudy At sea
2 N N E to S E. erly Mod. br. fresh ga. Cloudy, snow A pack of ice near
3 to N E b E Very hard gales Snow, frost rime At sea, no ice
4 to N E b N Hard gales Ditto Ditto
5 to N N E Ditto Frost rime Ditto
6 N N E Hard gale Frost rime, snow Ditto
7 to N Fresh gales Snow showers Ditto
8 to N W to Fresh breezes Ditto Streams of ice
9 to N E. erly, var. to Light br. calm Much cryst. snow Ditto
10 to N W. erly, var. to Light breeze Snow showers Ditto
11 E b S, E N E to Fresh gales Ditto Crowded drift ice
12 to N Light br. strong br. Cloudy Ditto
13 to var. Strong breezes Ditto Much ice
14 W. erly to S S E to Moderate breeze Cloudy, snow Ditto
15 to E N E Fresh breezes Cloudy, some snow Ditto
16 to N Strong gales Much snow Beset among drift ice
17 to N W Hard gales Cloudy Ditto
18 Variable to Fresh gales Much snow Open drift ice
19 N W b N to Strong gales Ditto Large floes
20 N W b N to Fresh gales Ditto Beset among floes
21 N W b N Strong gale Snow Ditto
22 N W b N Hard gale Much snow In an opening of ice
23 to N W b W Strong gales Some snow Numerous floes
24 to W b N to Light breezes Clear Ditto
25 to Var. Light breezes Clear, cloudy Drift ice, floes
26 to N E. erly Ditto Clear Ditto
27 to S. erly, var. Nearly calm Ditto Ditto
28 to S W. erly Ditto Cloudy Ditto
29 to Variable Light breeze, calm Clear Ditto
30 S S E to E Nearly calm Ditto Ditto
31 to S W. erly Ditto Clear, cloudy Drift ice

[page] 16

THERMOMETER. BAROMETER.
1812 Latitude. Longitude. Max. Min. Med. of 2-4 Obs. Max. Min. Med.
June 1 77°.14′ 9.5 E 31 29 3 30.0 30.37 30.34 30.36
2 78.15 5.27 33 30 3 31.3 30.37 30.35 30.36
3 78.50 7.0 32 30 3 31.0 30.35 30.15 30.25
4 78.30 5.30 33 30 3 31.7 30.15 29.93 30.04
5 78.30 5.30 34 33 3 33.3 29.93 20.89 29.91
6 78.26 5.45 35 33 3 34.0 29.89 29.87 29.88
7 78.0 5.45 33 31 3 32.4 29.98 29.89 29.93
8 78.0 6.45 28 23 3 25.7 30.10 29.98 30.04
9 78.0 6.30 27 23 3 25.0 30.05 29.90 29.98
10 77.54 6.15 34 26 3 29.0 29.90 29.78 29.84
11 78.44* 6.30 26 24 4 25.0 29.83 29.77 29.80
12 78.58 6.30 26 23 4 24.3 29.88 29.78 29.83
13 78.56 6.30 28 24 3 26.0 29.78 29.68 29.73
14 78.50 6.30 28 26 3 27.0 29.78 29.72 29.75
15 78.40 6.15 30 29 3 29.3 29.80 29.78 29.79
16 79.26 6.45 28 27 3 27.4 29.81 29.77 29.79
17 78.30 6.0 29 28 4 28.3 29.86 29.80 29.83
18 78.20 6.0 34 29 3 32.0 29.83 29.79 29.81
19 78.10 6.0 31 26 3 29.0 29.88 29.78 29.83
20 78.17 6.0 27 26 3 26.3 29.88 29.74 29.81
21 78.25 6.30 30 27 3 28.6 29.74 29.70 29.72
22 78.32 6.30 29 28 3 28.4 29.76 29.72 29.74
23 78.30 6.15 32 28 3 30.0 29.80 29.68 29.74
24 78.5 6.35 33 31 3 32.3 29.75 29.50 29.62
25 78.9* 6.45 33 31 3 32.0 29.97 29.75 29.86
26 78.10 6.40 35 30 3 33.0 30.00 29.92 29.96
27 77.59* 6.7 36 33 2 34.5 29.92 29.76 29.84
28 78.0 6.0 37 35 3 36.0 29.76 29.60 29.68
29 77.48 6.50 35 34 3 34.3 29.60 29.52 29.56
30 77.30 6.45 33 32 3 32.7 29.58 29.50 29.54
July 1 77.54 6.15 38 32 3 35.0 29.71 29.57 29.64
2 78.9* 6.30 37 34 3 35.3 29.77 29.50 29.64
3 78.20 6.30 33 32 3 32.3 29.50 29.40 29.45
4 78.18 6.40 34 31 3 32.4 29.58 29.41 29.49
5 78.10 6.45 33 31 3 32.3 29.82 29.58 29.70
6 78.5 6.30 32 31 3 31.3 29.96 29.82 29.89
7 78.58 6.45 34 31 3 32.7 30.00 29.96 29.98
8 77.40 6.10 33 31 3 32.0 29.96 29.86 29.91
9 77.30 6.0 34 31 3 32.7 29.86 29.82 29.84
10 77.30 6.0 33 31 3 32.0 29.86 29.80 29.83
11 78.0 5.30 32 32 4 32.0 29.90 29.86 29.88
12 77.56 5.30 35 31 4 33.4 29.95 29.87 29.91
13 77.46* 5.27 40 34 3 36.6 30.03 29.95 29.99
14 78.20 6.25 34 32 3 33.0 29.97 29.83 29.90
15 77.40 5.20 34 32 3 32.7 29.83 29.67 29.75

[page] 17

1812 WINDS. Meteors and Weather. Situation and Remarks.
Direction. Force.
June 1 S W. erly Mod. breeze, calm Cloudy Sea open
2 S S W Mod. or fresh br. Much snow, fog Drift ice and floes
3 to S E Fresh gales Snow showers, fog Ditto
4 S E Ditto Fog showers Ditto
5 S. erly Fresh breezes Fog, rain Ditto
6 S. erly, var. Light breezes Constant fog, rain Drift ice
7 N. erly Calm to fresh br. Fog, showers Ditto
8 N N W to W N W to Strong gales Clear Drift ice and floes
9 to W b S to Light breezes Ditto Ditto
10 to N N E Fresh breezes Snow showers Ditto
11 N E. erly to Strong gales Snow, clear Ditto
12 N N E to N Fresh breezes Clear Ditto
13 to N W, N N E Fresh or strong ga. Frost rime, clear Ditto
14 N E to N Strong gales Clear Ditto
15 N Fresh or strong ga. Some snow Ditto
16 N b E, N Strong gales Cloudy, snow Sea open
17 to W b N to Light breeze Cloudy Floes and drift ice
18 to S S W, to E to Calm Much snow Ditto
19 E N E to N to Fresh breeze Cloudy Ditto
20 N Fresh breeze Fog, snow Ditto
21 N Strong gale Snow, clear Ditto
22 N to Moderate breeze Snow showers Ditto
23 to W S W Light to strong br. Some snow Ditto
24 to S E to N E Strong ga. to lig. br. Fog, much snow Streams of ice
25 to N Fresh gales Snow, clear Sea open
26 to N W b W Light breezes Clear Floes
27 N to N W Fresh breezes Showers snow Floes and field
28 to N Moderate breezes Fog, snow Floes and drift ice
29 N N W to W N W to Fresh breeze Thick fog, rain Drift ice
30 N W to S, var. Moderate breezes Much snow Very open ice
June 1 E to N E Ditto Snow, fog Sea stream
2 to E S E, var. to Fresh breeze Thick fog Ditto
3 N E to N N W to Hard gales Much snow Floes, drift ice
4 to W to S Mod. or fresh br. Showers of snow Drift ice
5 S S W to Strong breeze Some snow Sea open
6 to W Moderate breezes Snow, fog Drift ice
7 W. erly Calm, light breeze Ditto Sea open
8 S S W, S W to Fresh breeze Cloudy, fog No ice
9 to W to N Fresh breeze Hazy, cloudy Ice streams
10 N W to N N W Fresh gales Fog, clear Ditto
11 N to N W Strong gales Snow showers Floes and drift ice
12 to N N E Ditto Ditto Ditto
13 to N N W Fresh breezes Fog showers Ditto
14 to N b E to Strong gales Ditto Sea open
15